Secure June

INSIGHTSIAS
IA SIMPLIFYING IAS EXAM PREPARATION
INSTA SECURE SYNOPSIS

MAINS MISSION - 2023
GS- I
JUNE 2022
www.insightsactivelearn.com | www.insightsonindia.com
NOTE: Please remember that following ‘answers’ are NOT ‘model answers’. They
are NOT synopsis too if we go by definition of the term. What we are providing is
content that both meets demand of the question and at the same time gives you
extra points in the form of background information.
Telegram: https://t.me/insightsIAStips Page 2

Youtube: https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCpoccbCX9GEIwaiIe4HLjwA
Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/insightsonindia
Table of Contents
Indian culture will cover the salient aspects of Art Forms, Literature and Architecture from ancient to
modern times. ................................................................................................................................... 7

The quest improve tourism through better connectivity and improved infrastructure should not
affect the integrity and safety of heritage monuments. Examine the role of heritage impact
assessment in overcoming the above dichotomy. (250 words) ....................................................... 7
Mughal architecture represents the pluralistic architectural traditions employed by them by
adopting elements from various Indian and foreign entities. Discuss. (250 words) ......................... 9
The Chola period witnessed remarkable development in sculptures and bronze works with a
special emphasis on Hindu iconography. They portray a classic grace, grandeur and taste. Discuss.
(250 words) ................................................................................................................................. 10
What is the importance of studying pre-history? What information do we have on the cultural
aspects of stone age in India? (250 words) ................................................................................... 12
Compare and contrast the key features of the Harappan period with that of Vedic period. Throw
light on the elements of continuity to the present day from both the periods. (250 words) ....... 15
The period between 600-300 BCE witnessed widespread changes in religious life. It marked the
rise of two of the most important heterodox religious movements – Jainism and Buddhism.
Compare and contrast both the religions. (250 words) ................................................................ 17
Evaluate the impact of Iranian and Macedonian invasions on various aspects of Indian polity and
culture. (250 words) .................................................................................................................... 19
What were the factors behind rise of feudalism in ancient India? Evaluate its impact on the Indian
socio-political set up. (250 words) ............................................................................................... 21
Throw light on the features and nature of Chola local self-governing villages. Were they really
autonomous? Discuss their significance. (250 words).................................................................. 23
Examine the short-term and long-term outcomes of the tri-partite struggle. Do you think tri-
partite struggle paved way for invasions in the early medieval India? (250 words) ....................... 25
Discuss the role of Yoga in bringing body, mind, and spirit into balance. How can it help in
furthering humanity in the post-Covid world? (250 words) .......................................................... 26
Explain the Mansabdari system of the Mughal empire. Evaluate its merits and demerits. What are
key learnings from Mansabdari to present day administrative practices? (250 words) ................. 29
Examine the causes and consequences of Vijayanagara-Bahamani conflict. (250 words).............. 31
Compare and contrast the Sufi and the Bhakti movement in India. What were the factors that led
to emergence of Bhakti movement? (250 words) ........................................................................ 34
Discuss the major characteristics of art in the period between 200 B.C.E- 300 C.E with a special
emphasis on Stupa architecture. (250 words) .............................................................................. 36
The Nagara, Dravida and Vesara styles indicate a tendency to highlight typological features of
temples and their geographical distribution. Elaborate. (250 words) ........................................... 40
Prehistoric art of India is very important because it gives us insight into the development of the
human mind and ways. Elaborate (250 words) ............................................................................ 43
Pala art is in a naturalistic style with a great attention to the ornamental detail and certain elegant
virtuosity. Discuss. (250 words).................................................................................................... 45
Nurtured for centuries, classical dances in India have evolved in different parts of the country, in
their own distinct style taking on the culture of that particular region, each acquiring its own
flavour. Elaborate. (250 words).................................................................................................... 48

The present Indian music has grown and evolved from ancient times and was more or less uniform
before the 13th century. Later it bifurcated into the two musical systems – Hindustani and
Carnatic. Compare and contrast both systems. (250 words) ......................................................... 51
As a source of identity, cultural heritage is a valuable factor for empowering local communities
and enabling vulnerable groups to participate fully in social and cultural life. Elaborate. (250
words) ......................................................................................................................................... 53
An artistic movement of great importance flourished under the aegis of the Pallava rulers of
Kanchi and they are credited with having building some of the outstanding temples and
sculptures. Discuss. (250 words) .................................................................................................. 55
Modern Indian history from about the middle of the eighteenth century until the present- significant
events, personalities, issues. ........................................................................................................... 57
Compare and contrast the Permanent Settlement and Mahalwari Settlement, introduced by the
British. What were the impact of the new forms of revenue settlements introduced by the British?
(250 words) ................................................................................................................................. 57
Throw light on the administration of the Maratha’s under Shivaji with a special emphasis on his
agricultural policy. What lessons can the present-day policy makers learn from it? (250 words) . 59
The simmering discontent of the tribal people broke out into popular uprisings in different parts
of India at different points of time due to the shared experience of colonial oppression. Elaborate.
(250 words) ................................................................................................................................. 62
The Freedom Struggle – its various stages and important contributors /contributions from different
parts of the country. ........................................................................................................................ 64
What were the causes behind the Surat Split? Examine its short- and long-term impact on the
national movement. (250 words) ................................................................................................. 64
History of the world will include events from 18th century such as industrial revolution, world wars,
redrawal of national boundaries, colonization, decolonization. ....................................................... 66
Though the winds of change in 1960’s brought independence to a lot of African states, but the
political turmoil that followed resulted in severe economic exploitation and backwardness.
Analyse. (250 words) ................................................................................................................... 66
Salient features of Indian Society, Diversity of India. ........................................................................ 70
What are seismic waves? Explain the internal structure of the earth in reference to seismology.
(250 words) ................................................................................................................................. 70
Role of women and women’s organization; population and associated issues, poverty and
developmental issues, ..................................................................................................................... 72
What are the factors behind the continuance of child labour in India? Can universal social
protection help end the menace of child labour? Examine. (250 words) ...................................... 72
Sustained growth of the India’s older population presents many socio-economic challenges. We
must quickly recognize the scope of the new demographic reality and adjust current policies
accordingly. Discuss. (250 words) ................................................................................................ 75
What is the need for population control in the country? Do you think there is a need for a
population country law? Critically examine. (250 words) ............................................................. 77

While the West is curtailing abortion rights, the Medical Termination of Pregnancy (Amendment)
Act, Surrogacy Regulation Act and Prohibition of Child Marriage (Amendment) Bill, 2021,
collectively give new meaning to women empowerment in India. Critically analyse. (250 words) 80
Urbanization, their problems and their remedies............................................................................. 84
Urban areas are increasingly shaping water security as they grapple with the sustainable
availability of water and navigate the barriers and options involved in protecting people and
ecosystems against water-borne stresses and water-related hazards. Analyse. (250 words) ........ 84
Effects of globalization on Indian society ......................................................................................... 87
How can India move towards the essential and good aspects of modernity and yet avoid the cons
of Westernisation? Discuss the role that India becoming a Vishwa Guru can play in this regard.
(250 words) ................................................................................................................................. 87
Social empowerment, communalism, regionalism & secularism. ..................................................... 89
How does hate speech pose a danger for the cohesion of a democratic society? What steps are
required to prevent hate speech and associated violence with it. (250 words) ............................. 89
Do you think that a Uniform Civil Code (UCC) could be a possible solution to end communalism in
the Indian society? Critically comment. (250 words) .................................................................... 91
What is your understanding of India’s civilisational heritage? How can it play a part in uniting
Indians and giving a sense of fraternity to all citizens? (250 words) .............................................. 94
Salient features of world’s physical geography. ............................................................................... 96
Examine the various factors influencing spatial variation of rainfall. How does air pollution impact
rainfall patterns in India? (250 words) (250 words) ...................................................................... 96
What are the various factors that affect the formation of Savanna type of climate? Examine the
various threats to Savanna biomes. (250 words) .......................................................................... 98
Explain in detail various landforms of glaciation and their significance. Analyse the threats posed
by black carbon to glaciers? (250 words) ................................................................................... 100
Important Geophysical phenomena such as earthquakes, Tsunami, Volcanic activity, cyclone etc. 105
The highly diversified hydrogeologic settings and variations in the availability of ground water
resources from one part of the country to other call for a holistic approach in evolving suitable
management strategies. Analyse. (250 words) .......................................................................... 105
Geographical features and their location-changes in critical geographical features (including water-
bodies and ice-caps) and in flora and fauna and the effects of such changes. ................................ 108
Depleting and decreasing status of water resources may be one of the most critical resource
issues of the 21st century. Critically analyse the issues and challenges in interlinking of rivers in
India as a measure to overcome water crisis. (250 words) ......................................................... 108

Indian culture will cover the salient aspects of Art Forms, Literature and
Architecture from ancient to modern times.
The quest improve tourism through better connectivity and improved infrastructure
should not affect the integrity and safety of heritage monuments. Examine the role of
heritage impact assessment in overcoming the above dichotomy. (250 words)
Difficulty: Tough
Reference: Indian Express
Why the question:
On Thursday, the Supreme Court reserved its orders on petitions against excavation and construction
work by the Odisha government along the Puri Jagannath temple as part of the Puri Heritage
Corridor Project.
Key Demand of the question:
To write about the dichotomy about promoting tourism and monument preservation and the role of
heritage impact assessment in the above.
Directive:
Examine – When asked to ‘Examine’, we must investigate the topic (content words) in detail, inspect
it, investigate it and establish the key facts and issues related to the topic in question. While doing so
we should explain why these facts and issues are important and their implications.
Structure of the answer:
Introduction:
In brief, write about the dichotomy between about promoting tourism and monument preservation.
Body:
In first part, write about how both are importance from heritage and economy and livelihood point of
view.
In the next part, write about how heritage impact assessment can play a role in overcoming the
above dichotomy.
Conclusion:
Conclude with a way forward.
Introduction

India’s cultural heritage and, in particular, its archaeological and built heritage is unparalleled in the
world. India has one of the largest geo-political expanses and one of the greatest volume and
diversity in heritage. This vast heritage repository of India is recognized globally as significant part of
its unique cultural identity
The Supreme Court on Friday dismissed a batch of petitions against excavation and construction
work by the Odisha government along the Puri Jagannath temple as part of the Puri Heritage
Corridor Project, calling the pleas “frivolous”. The petitioners alleged that the construction work
would damage the heritage site.
Body
Heritage monument and their importance: Threats faced
 An initial survey indicates the total quantum of India’s built heritage and archaeological
remains may roughly amount to a total of 400000 plus heritage structures across the
country including the centrally protected monuments, state protected monuments, heritage
buildings under various religious trusts, historic cities and archaeological sites.
 Urban growth and modernisation are inevitable phenomena in the developing and
developed countries, in which, cultural heritage properties as sensitive urban components
may encounter irreparable losses.
 In the context of UNESCO World Heritage, the uprising conflict between urban
development policies and heritage conservation in recent years has drawn more attention
to Heritage Impact Assessment (HIA).
 Moreover, any construction work without scientific handling around heritage sites may
lead to permanent damage to cultural sites. This may even be irreversible and hence may
lead to loss of heritage sites.
 India has a vast history and the sites are a testimony to the history and the richness of our
past. Hence protection of monuments is of utmost importance.
Role of heritage impact assessment
 HIA is an assessment tool to identify and analyse human-induced impacts on cultural

heritage properties by the aim of maintaining a balance between cultural heritage
protection and urban development needs towards sustainability.
 Heritage Impact Assessment is a procedure to identify and analyse the potential impacts of
human-induced threats on cultural heritage, and therefore, it supports better protection
and management of heritage assets.
 Effects on cultural heritage attributes from development or other changes may be adverse
or beneficial. It is necessary to identify all changes on all attributes.
 Changes arising from developments must also be assessed for their impact on integrity and
authenticity. The property should have baseline statements regarding integrity and
authenticity at the time of inscription.
 Direct impacts are those that arise as a primary consequence of the proposed development
or change of use. Direct impacts can result in the physical loss of part or all of an attribute,

and/or changes to its setting – the surroundings in which a place is experienced, its local
context, embracing present and past relationships to the adjacent landscape.
 Indirect impacts occur as a secondary consequence of construction or operation of the

development, and can result in physical loss or changes to the setting of an asset beyond
the development footprint. For example, construction of related infrastructure such as
roads or powerlines that are required to support the development.
 Impact assessment is an iterative process. Results of data collection and evaluation should
be fed back into the design process for the development, or proposals for change or for
archaeological investigation.
 Conservation is about managing sustainable change. Every reasonable effort should be made
to avoid, eliminate or minimise adverse impacts on attributes
Conclusion
Any construction that may affect heritage sites must be preceded by thorough heritage
assessment. The Ancient Monuments and Archaeological Sites and Remains Act (or AMASR Act) is
an act of the Parliament of India that provides for the preservation of ancient and historical
monuments. This needs to be suitably modified to ensure that heritage impact assessment is
conducted in the right manner and heritage sites are conserved scientifically for generations to
come.
Mughal architecture represents the pluralistic architectural traditions employed by

them by adopting elements from various Indian and foreign entities. Discuss. (250
words)
Difficulty level: Moderate
Why the question:
After a thunderstorm recently damaged the finial of the 17th century Jama Masjid dome in Delhi, the
Delhi Wakf Board, which manages the mosque, wrote to the Archaeological Survey of India (ASI)
requesting removal of the dangling part of the crown and repair of the ornamental structure that has
topped the grand mosque since its construction.
To write about the pluralistic traditions of Mughal architecture in India and various elements of it
borrowed by them.
Directive word:
Discuss – This is an all-encompassing directive – you must debate on paper by going through the
details of the issues concerned by examining each one of them. You must give reasons for both for
and against arguments.
Introduction:
Begin the answer by writing about the grandeur of Mughal architecture.
Body:
First, write about the plurality that is present in Mughal architecture and how it has taken shape
under various Mughal rulers.
Next, write about the elements that were borrowed by the Mughal architecture from various
indigenous styles of art as well as foreign entities. Substantiate with examples.
Conclusion:
Conclude by summarising.
Introduction
India is often referred to as the land of cultural plurality and diversity where two contrasting
worldviews – that of the traditional and continuous and the formal and official (inherited from the
British) thrive. Mughal architecture is a construction style that thrived in northern and central India
from the mid-16th to late-17th centuries under the patronage of Mughal rulers. Famous buildings
such as Agra Fort, Taj Mahal, etc were built under them..
Body
Features of Mughal architecture
 It’s the blend of Indian, Islamic and Persian elements that makes Mughal architecture so
unique.
 Typical features include huge, onion-shaped domes crowning commemorative monuments,

with smaller domed buildings and minarets standing symmetrically on either side.
 There are impressive entrances and gateways, within tall turreted walls, and water features
and quadrilateral gardens.
 White marble, red sandstone and, less commonly, limestone, are typical construction
materials as well as semi-precious stones and coloured marble which are inlaid as
decorations.
 Understated lattice work appears throughout as well as verses from the Qur’an inscribed on
interior and exterior walls in Persian and Arabic.
 Royal palaces are often surrounded by symmetrical gardens featuring walkways and water
channels.
 These stand in contrast to the stark courtyards within the mosques, which can hold
enormous congregations.
 Indo-Muslim architecture got striking improvement with the arrival of Mughals, as had been
declined significantly during the Lodi’s period.
 Unlike Delhi Sultanate Sultans, Mughals mixed and mingled with the local population &
Rajput provinces.
Conclusion
Mughal architecture is a unique Indo-Islamic architectural style that flourished in northern and
central India from the 16th to the 18th centuries under the patronage of Mughal monarchs. It’s a
stunningly symmetrical and ornate blend of Persian, Turkish, and Indian architecture.
The Chola period witnessed remarkable development in sculptures and bronze works
with a special emphasis on Hindu iconography. They portray a classic grace, grandeur
and taste. Discuss. (250 words)
Difficulty level: Easy
Reference: Indian Express , Insights on India
Why the question:
Ten antiquities (sculptures) retrieved from Australia and the United States were handed over to the
Government of Tamil Nadu in Delhi last week.
To write about the developments in sculpture during the Chola period.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by giving context about the grandeur of the Chola art and architecture.
Body:
First, write about the Chola sculptures – salient and important features, marked changes which were
started during this period and emphasis on Hindu iconography. Substantiate with examples.
Next, write about the overall nature of the sculptures which portray a classic grace, grandeur and
taste.
Conclusion:
Introduction
The Cholas belonged to one of the three mighty dynasties that ruled the Tamil country in the early
historical period. Described as the Muvendhar in the Sangam literature, they were known for the
valour and for their patronage of the Tamil language.
Bronze sculptures and statuettes of Buddhist, Hindu and Jain icons have been discovered from many
regions of India dating from the second century until the sixteenth century. Most of these were used
for ritual worship and are characterised by exquisite beauty and aesthetic appeal. the ‘Dancing Girl’
from Mohenjo-Daro is the earliest bronze sculpture datable to 2500 BCE.
Body
Sculptures:
 The Chola period is also remarkable for its sculptures and bronzes.
 The sculptures and bronzes show classic grace, grandeur and taste. The best example of this
can be seen in the form of Nataraja, the Divine Dancer.
 After Nataraja, the next most popular image is Somaskanda where Shiva is depicted sitting
with his consort Uma and his son Skanda dancing between them on a platform.
 Kalyanasundara Murti is a 9th century art where marriage is represented by 2 separate

statuettes; Shiva and Parvati’s marriage or panigrahana.
 Ardhanarishwar with half Shiva and half Shakti is another popular image
Chola bronze sculptures:
 The cire-perdu or ‘lost-wax’ process for casting was learnt as long ago as the Indus Valley
Culture.
 Along with it was discovered the process of making alloy of metals by mixing copper, zinc
and tin which is called bronze.
 The bronze casting technique and making of bronze images of traditional icons reached a
high stage of development in South India during the medieval period.

 Although bronze images were modelled and cast during the Pallava Period in the eighth and
ninth centuries, some of the most beautiful and exquisite statues were produced during the
Chola Period in Tamil Nadu from the tenth to the twelfth century.
 Exquisite pieces of art developed during this period. This technique is still practised in south
India, particularly in Kumbakonam.
 The distinguished patron during the tenth century was the widowed Chola queen,
Sembiyan Maha Devi.
 Chola bronzes are the most sought-after collectors’ items by art lovers all over the world.
 The well-known dancing figure of Shiva as Nataraja was evolved and fully developed during
the Chola Period and since then many variations of this complex bronze image have been
modelled.
 A wide range of Shiva iconography was evolved in the Thanjavur (Tanjore) region of Tamil
Nadu. The ninth century kalyanasundara murti is highly remarkable for the manner in which
Panigrahana (ceremony of marriage) is represented by two separate statuettes.
 Shiva with his extended right hand accepts Parvati’s (the bride’s) right hand, who is depicted
with a bashful expression and taking a step forward.
 The union of Shiva and Parvati is very ingeniously represented in the ardhanarisvara murti in
a single image.
 Beautiful independent figurines of Parvati have also been modelled, standing in

graceful tribhanga posture.
Conclusion
Given these unique features, great demand of Chola bronze sculptures not only among the devotees
but also among the art collectors across the world. Thus, Chola bronze sculptures give us a glimpse
of the finesse in metallurgy during the early medieval India. Hence appreciated by the art lovers
across the world.
What is the importance of studying pre-history? What information do we have on the

cultural aspects of stone age in India? (250 words)
Reference: Insights on India
Why the question:
The question is part of the static syllabus of General studies paper – 1 and mentioned as part of
Mission-2023 Secure timetable.
To write about importance of studying pre-history and its cultural aspects.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Start by giving a brief time period of pre-historic times in India and its various sub classifications.
Body:
First, write about the importance of studying pre-history – understanding evolution, beginning of
agricultural societies, racial studies etc. Cite examples.

Next, write about the cultural aspects of stone age – the Palaeolithic, Mesolithic and Neolithic
cultural aspects.
Conclusion:
Introduction
Prehistory, also called the prehistoric period, refers to the period extending back when there was no
writing and no engagement with written documentation. The beginning of prehistory is indicated
with the origin of the earliest representatives of genus Homo (comprising the modern humans and
the group of their close extinct ancestors – detailed in Unit 2 of this course). This evidence is
currently dated between 5-2 million years before present (BP) in Africa, approximately one million
years ago in Europe and Asia, an estimated 40,000 years BP in Australia, and even less in America.
Body
About the pre-historic age and importance of studying it
 A study of prehistory and its sources is important to comprehend the nature of the past
where there was no written documentation. This will also help us to identify and compare
the transition from prehistory to the historical period.
 The recovery of knowledge of the past is the central concern of historical research.
o The history of human settlements in India goes back to prehistoric times.
o No written records are available for the prehistoric period. However, plenty of
archaeological remains are found in different parts of India to reconstruct the
history of this period.
o They include the stone tools, pottery, artifacts and metal implements used by pre-
historic people.
 The development of archaeology helps much to understand the life and culture of the
people who lived in this period.
 In the absence of written records from this period, artefacts or material remains form the
primary source of understanding prehistory. The material remains are available mostly in the
form of stone tools, the remains of animals, human fossils, biofacts and cultural landscapes.
 It also gives a foray into the evolution of modern civilisation and also human beings as a
species. The development of society from barbarism to civilisation without written records
needs to be understood to comprehend present conditions.
Aspects of stone age in India
In India, the prehistoric period is divided into the Paleolithic (Old Stone Age), Mesolithic (Middle
Stone Age), Neolithic (New Stone Age) and the Metal Age.
 Palaeolithic or Old Stone Age: In the Old Stone Age, food was obtained by hunting animals
and gathering edible plants and tubers.
o Therefore, these people are called as hunter-gatherers.
o They used stone tools, hand-sized and flaked-off large pebbles for hunting animals.

o Their way of life became modified with the passage of time since they
made attempts to domesticate animals, make crude pots and grow some plants.
o A few Old Stone Age paintings have also been found on rocks at Bhimbetka and
other places.
 Mesolithic or Middle Stone Age: The next stage of human life is called Mesolithic or Middle
Stone Age which falls roughly from 10000 B.C. to 6000 B.C. It was the transitional phase
between the Paleolithic Age and Neolithic Age.
o Mesolithic remains are found in Langhanj in Gujarat, Adamgarh in Madhya Pradesh

and also in some places of Rajasthan, Utter Pradesh and Bihar.
o The paintings and engravings found at the rock shelters give an idea about the social
life and economic activities of Mesolithic people.
o In the sites of Mesolithic Age, a different type of stone tools is found. These are tiny
stone artifacts, often not more than five centimetres in size, and therefore called
microliths.
 Neolithic Age: A remarkable progress is noticed in human civilization in the Neolithic Age. It
is approximately dated from 6000 B.C to 4000 B.C. Neolithic remains are found in various
parts of India. These include the Kashmir valley, Chirand in Bihar, Belan valley in Uttar
Pradesh and in several places of the Deccan.
o The chief characteristic features of the Neolithic culture are the practice of
agriculture, domestication of animals, polishing of stone tools and the manufacture
of pottery.
o In fact, the cultivation of plants and domestication of animals led to the emergence
of village communities based on sedentary life.
o There was a great improvement in technology of making tools and other equipment
used by man.
o Stone tools were now polished.
o The polished axes were found to be more effective tools for hunting and cutting
trees.
o Mud brick houses were built instead of grass huts. Wheels were used to make
pottery.
o Pottery was used for cooking as well as storage of food grains. Large urns were used
as coffins for the burial of the dead
 Metal Age: The Neolithic period is followed by Chalcolithic (copper-stone) period when
copper and bronze came to be used.
o The new technology of smelting metal ore and crafting metal artifacts is an
important development in human civilization.
 Iron Age: Iron is frequently referred to in the Vedas. The Iron Age of the southern peninsula
is often related to Megalithic Burials. Megalith means Large Stone. The burial pits were
covered with these stones. Such graves are extensively found in South India. Some of the
important megalithic sites are Hallur and Maski in Karnataka, Nagarjunakonda in Andhra
Pradesh and Adichchanallur in Tamil Nadu.
Conclusion
As no written records are available for the prehistoric period, it is difficult to authenticate the
information at hand. However, plenty of archaeological remains are found in different parts of India
to reconstruct the history of this period. They include the stone tools, pottery, artifacts and metal
implements used by pre-historic people. The development of archaeology helps much to understand
the life and culture of the people who lived in this period
Compare and contrast the key features of the Harappan period with that of Vedic
period. Throw light on the elements of continuity to the present day from both the
periods. (250 words)
Reference: Insights on India , Insights on India
Why the question:
To write about the differences and similarities between the Harappan and Vedic age and elements of
continuity from them in the present day.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Start by giving a brief about the first two civilisations of ancient India.
Body:
First, write about the major differences between Harappan and Vedic age – nature of polity,
economy, society, religion, culture etc.
Next, write about the important common aspects between both the ages.
Next, write about the continuity to present day from Harappan civilisation.
Next, write about the continuity to present day from Vedic age.
Conclusion:
Introduction
The cities of the Harappan Culture had declined by 1500 B.C. Consequently, their economic and
administrative system had slowly declined. Around this period, the speakers of Indo-Aryan language,
Sanskrit, entered the north-west India from the Indo-Iranian region. Initially they would have come
in small numbers through the passes in the northwestern mountains. Their initial settlements were
in the valleys of the north-west and the plains of the Punjab. Later, they moved into Indo-Gangetic
plains.
Body
Comparison between Harappan and Vedic period
 The sources of information of the Harappan civilization are mainly archaeological, while
the Vedic culture is mostly known from the literary

 Harappans are said to have been the original inhabitants of India while the Aryans are
believed to have come to India from central Asia.
 The Harappan civilization was urban in nature, Vedic culture was rural and pastoral. At best
the Rig Vedic Aryans lived in fortified places protected by mud walls; and these cannot be
regarded as towns in the Harappan sense.
 In the Indus civilization trade, internal and external, crafts as well as industries were the
main sources of economy, Vedic Economy was initially pastoral and later became based
upon agriculture and cattle rearing.
o The agricultural operations, including the ploughing of fields, were better known to
the later-Vedic people.
 Indus people did not know the use of iron. It was purely a copper-bronze culture, while the
Vedic culture in its later phase is replete with references to iron.
 The horse, which played a decisive role in the Aryan system of warfare, was not known to
the Indus people. A few bones of horse and terracotta figure of a horse-like animal have
been unearthed from surkotada.
 Indus people were basically peace loving. Their arms (swords, daggers, arrow-heads,
spears) were primitive in nature. Aryans were warlike people and were conversant with all
kinds of traditional arms and armour and had devised a full-fledged science of war.
 Aryans worshiped Varuna, Indra, Aditi and a large number of other deities which stood for
the principal phenomena of nature. They performed sacrifices and offered milk, ghee, etc. to
their Gods.
o The Harappans worshipped Pashupati, mother goddess, animals, snake and

nature. The fire-altars were discovered from only one Harappan site at Kalibangan.
 The Harappans practiced earth burials whereas the Aryans practiced cremation.
 Harappan pottery called black or red pottery was wheel made and very distinctive in
nature. The distinctive Aryan pottery is known as PGW (painted grey ware).
 Cotton was the basic fabric of the Harappans while the Aryans put on woollen garments
 Vedic Sanskrit is the mother of all non-Dravidian languages; Indus script still remains
undeciphered.
Elements of continuity
 Animal worship still exists in many tribes in Nagaland and north-eastern states.
 Elaborate rituals are practiced in Indian society especially in marriages, birth, and death just
as in Vedic times.
 Agriculture and trade are still major elements in the economy.
 Urban planning as in Harappan culture is relevant even today while certain nomadic tribes
are still isolated from society like in Early-Vedic period.

o The Harappan culture was distinguished by its system of townplanning on the lines
of the grid system – that is streets and lanes cutting across one another almost at
right angles thus dividing the city into several rectangular blocks.
o . Another remarkable feature was the underground drainage system connecting all
houses to the street drains which were covered by stone slabs or bricks.
 There was a great progress in all spheres of economic activity such as agriculture, industry
and crafts and trade. Wheat and barley were the main crops grown besides sesame,
mustard and cotton. Surplus grain is stored in granaries.
 Complete burial and post-cremation burial were popular at Mohenjodaro. At Lothal the
burial pit was lined with burnt bricks indicating the use of coffins.
 The four divisions of society (Brahmins, Kshatriyas, Vaisyas and Sudras) or the Varna system
was thoroughly established during Later Vedic period exists in some form even today.
Conclusion
Thus, there were some similarities between Harappan culture and Vedic culture. Both this period
still has an impact on our society and the practices that existed back then are being followed even
today. However, as a society we must take the good elements and progress towards better
development with evolution of civilised life and more awareness.
The period between 600-300 BCE witnessed widespread changes in religious life. It
marked the rise of two of the most important heterodox religious movements –
Jainism and Buddhism. Compare and contrast both the religions. (250 words)
Why the question:
To write about the differences and similarities between Buddhism and Jainism.
Directive word:
Compare and contrast – provide for a detailed comparison of the two types, their features that are
similar as well as different. One must provide for detailed assessment of the two.
Introduction:
Start by giving context behind the rise of heterodox sects.
Body:
First, write about the major factors that led to widespread changes in religious life in 600-300 BCE,
which resulted in emergence of Buddhism and Jainism.
Next, Bring out the differences between them like concept of soul, non-violence, sacrifice etc
Next, Discuss the similarities in the two faiths such as values like peace and righteous conduct.
Conclusion:
Introduction
The sixth century B.C. is considered a wonderful century in history. Great thinkers like Buddha,
Mahavira, Heraclitus, Zoroaster, Confucius and Lao Tse lived and preached their ideas in this century.

Among them the most successful were Jainism and Buddhism whose impact on the Indian society
was remarkable.
Body
Similarities between Buddhism and Jainism
 Reason for rise of the religion: The primary cause for the rise of Jainism and Buddhism was
the religious unrest in India in the 6 th century B.C. The complex rituals and sacrifices
advocated in the Later Vedic period were not acceptable to the common people.
 Core philosophy: Jainism preaches the triratnas, which are right faith, knowledge and
conduct. Buddhism also has eightfold pathwhich includes not only these three, in addition
right speech, resolve, occupation etc.
 Ahimsa: Both religions espouse non-violence as the foundation of living.
 Sangha: Mahavira organised the Sangha to spread his teachings. Buddha had two kinds of
disciples – monks (bhikshus) and lay worshippers (upasikas). The monks were organized into
the Sangha for the purpose of spreading his teachings.
 Equality: Both men and women were accepted in the sanghas.
Differences between Buddhism and Jainism
 In Jainism, the doctrine of asceticism and renunciationwas also carried to extreme lengths
by the practice of starvation, nudity and other forms of self-torture. This was not the case in
Buddhism.
 Even the practice of agriculture was considered sinful in Jainism as it causes injury to the
earth, worms and animals. Most of them were traders. No such distinction is there in
Buddhism.
 Buddhism made adirect attack on the caste system. Though Jainism did not make a direct
attack on the caste system, Mahavira was against any social distinctions and threw open his
order to all.
 Prakritwas major language through which Jainism was preached. The language of Pali and
other local languages developed through the teachings of Buddhism.
 Buddhism was more a social than religious revolution. It taught the code of practical ethics
and laid down the principle of social equality.
 Through his missionary effort Asoka spread Buddhism into West Asia and Ceylon. Thus, a
local religious sect was transformed into a world religion. Jainism was restricted to mainly
Indian subcontinent.
Conclusion
Buddhism and Jainism provided people an alternative from the regressive religion and rituals of the
time. They became a beacon of hope for the downtrodden and the marginalized. In this way, one
can see many similarities between the two religions with minute differences.

Evaluate the impact of Iranian and Macedonian invasions on various aspects of Indian
polity and culture. (250 words)
Why the question:
To write about the impact of Iranian and Macedonian invasions.
Directive word:
Evaluate – When you are asked to evaluate, you have to pass a sound judgement about the truth of
the given statement in the question or the topic based on evidence. You must appraise the worth of
the statement in question. There is scope for forming an opinion here.
Introduction:
Start by giving context Iranian and Macedonian invasions in ancient India.
Body:
First, write impact of Iranian invasions – Indo-Iranian contact, impetus to Indo-Iranian trade and
commerce, influx of foreign groups, religious impact, art and architecture, language and script etc.
Next, write impact of Macedonian invasions in ancient India- civilisational contacts, history, coinage,
art and architecture etc.
Conclusion:
Introduction
India had close relations with Persia (Iran) from very ancient times. Iranian contacts with India lasted
for about two centuries (516 to 326 B.C). Greek Invasion is traced back to 327 BC when Alexander
invaded North-West India.
Body
Persian invasion
 The Achaemenian rulers of Iran, who expanded their empire at the same time as the
Magadhan princes, took advantage of the political disunity on the northwest frontier.
 The Iranians invaded India in the 6th century B.C, when king Darius I ruled over Iran.
 He invaded India and occupied the territories in the North-Western Frontier Province, Sind
and Punjab in 516 B.C.
 These parts remained with the Iranian Empire till Alexander’s invasion of India..
Cultural impact of Iranian invasion
Short term
 India’s Political Weakness exposed: The Persian invasion and India’s defeat to
defend her frontiers exposed India’s political This weakness
encouraged the foreigners to invade the frontiers of India. The Iranians were followed
by the Greeks, the Sakas, the Kushans and the Huns.
 Encouragement to Trade: The mutual contacts helped in the growth of trade between the
two countries. The India Traders and merchants now reached distant places in the Vast
Persian Empire to dispose of their goods. Similarly, the Persian goods began to flow
smoothly into India.
 An Idea of Unified Empire: India learnt the necessity of a strong and united empire to repel
the foreign invasions. It was for the first time that the small, scattered and mutually
quarrelling states of India realized how essential it was to join hands together to meet the
common enemy.
Long term
 Settlement of Foreigners on Indian Soil: A large number of foreigners, the Greek the
Persians, Turks etc settled down in the North –Western parts of India. With the passage of
time they completely absorbed among the Indians.
 Impact on Art and Architecture: The Iranian art also influenced the Indian art. Ashoka,
followed the Iranian custom of preaching ideals by inscribing them on the stone pillars. The
Indians also learnt the art of polishing.
 Kharosthi Script: The Indians adopted the Kharosthi Script of Iran. It was written from right
to left.
 Interchange of Indo Persian culture: Indian Scholars and philosophers went to Persia and
exchanged their views freely with the intellectuals of that country. This contact brought
about a great change in the outlook of the people and bought the people closer.
Macedonian Invasion
 In the fourth century BC, under the leadership of Alexander of Macedonia, the Greeks
eventually destroyed the Iranian empire. From Iran he marched to India.
 The political condition of north-west India suited his plans. The area was parcelled out into
many independent monarchies and tribal republics, which were strongly wedded to the soil
and had a fierce dedication to the principality in which they lived.
 Among the rulers of these territories, two were well known: Ambhi, the prince of Taxila, and
Porus whose kingdom lay between the Jhelum and the Chenab.
 Following the conquest of Iran, Alexander moved on to Kabul, from where he marched to
India through the Khyber pass in 326 BC. When he reached the Jhelum, Alexander
encountered the first and the strongest resistance from Porus. Alexander defeated Porus.
Cultural impact of Macedonian invasion
Short term
 The immediate effect of Alexander’s invasion was that it encouraged political unification of
north India under the Mauryas.
 The system of small independent states came to an end.
 Alexander’s invasion had also paved the way for direct contact between India and Greece.
 The routes opened by him and his naval explorations increased the existing facilities for
trade between India and West Asia.

 His authority in the Indus valley was a short-lived one because of the expansion of Mauryan
Empire under Chandragupta Maurya.
Long term
 Founding of the Mauryan Dynasty: Alexander’s invasion had reduced the strength of the
various states as well as the warlike tribes of the Punjab, so
that it became quite easy for Chandragupta to subdue Otherwise, Chandragupta
Maurya had to face strong resistance from his Indian counter-parts.
 Promoting India’s Unity: One significant result of these petty state and warlike tribes being
crushed by Alexander was the task of establishing a strong empire became too easy.
 Relations with Western Countries: Alexander’s invasion opened four new routes between
India and Europe so that India could now have direct relations with the European countries.
The discovery of these routes also encouraged trade. Several Indian traders, artisans and
religious scholars went to other countries and some people came to India from other
countries. In this way, Indian contacts with Europe developed rapidly.
 Gave an account of Indian history: Megasthenes and other Greek writers have written a lot
about the contemporary Indian Their descriptions have proved valuable in this respect.
 Foundation of the Greek States: After Alexander’s departure, the Greek generals who
were left in India established their independent states on the North Western Frontier of
India. In this way, the Indians came in contact with the Greeks and both of them benefited
from each other.
 Greek Art: The Indians learnt from the Greeks the art of making beautiful idols and coins.
The Gandhara School of Art is a direct consequence
of the Greek The Indians also learnt a lot from the Greek astronomers. On the other
hand, the Indians greatly influenced the philosophy and several Greeks embraced the Hindu
faith.
Conclusion
Thus, both Iranian and Macedonian invasions had a long term impacts on Indian culture.
What were the factors behind rise of feudalism in ancient India? Evaluate its impact
on the Indian socio-political set up. (250 words)
Reference: wikipedia.org , Times of India
Why the question:
To write about factors for rise of feudalism in India and its impact.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by defining feudalism.
Body:
First, write about the major factors for rise of feudalism in India – declining central authority, land
grants, powerful feudatories, grant of police powers etc.
Next, write about how feudalism impact the India polity and the society.
Conclusion:
Introduction
Indian Feudalism referred to an era where disintegration and balkanization of states gave rise to an
impeccable fall of the central authority and rise of the small authoritarian states in power dynamics,
most importantly during the post-Mauryan period and post-Gupta times. Feudalism rose to change
the landscape of administrative transition and hence paved a way for the recognition of a feudal
policy all over the subcontinent in Medieval and Late periods of Ancient India.
Body
Factors for rise of feudalism in India
 Ancient feudal policies: Early Pali texts give us a glimpse of such feudal policies as the
“Brahmadeya” in Pre Mauryan-Periods.
o Early Indian Feudalism dealt with land grants, taxation power transfers and also
coercion powers and the ability to make coercive measures.
 Land grants: Ancient Epigraphic Records suggests that the Satvahana dynasty gave land
grants in rituals to the elite classes, thus the genesis of Indian Feudalism had a beginning
from here. However, such land grants records did not have any specific pieces of evidence of
revenue or administration power transfer as well.
 Maurya and later: It was the Mauryan administration that paved a way for an evolution of
feudalism in the subcontinent on broader levels. They ensured that post-Mauryan periods
had a complete transfer of land revenue rights, administrative powers and most
importantly the complete transfer of political functioning at grassroots levels as well to the
classes who were the feudal lords under the said supervision of the central authority.
 Gupta era policies: With the coming up of the Gupta Dynasty, the concept of “total non-
interference” came into absolute practicality, where the idea of absolute non-interference
evolved as feudal lords became supremely independent, and central authority had
absolute non-interference in the affairs and functioning of the feudal regimes. The feudal
lords were absolute monarchs in that period.
 Hereditary rights: With the further escalation in the feudal policies, in the 2nd century AD,
hereditary rights and civil jurisdiction powers were also transferred to the feudal lords and
hence this gave rise to a rise in feudatories’ setup with absolute power.
Impact on Indian socio-political set-up
 Hierarchy of feudal lords: Different titles signified the position and powers within the rank
of feudal lords.
 Hereditary administrative positions: Weak enforcement of power led to the resumption of

independence and some high administrative positions became hereditary.

 Decentralisation of Power: Samantas were granted lands instead of salary and proceeded to
seize ownership of the area while continuing to refer to themselves as vassals of their rulers.
 Oppressive tax system: Imposition of proper and improper taxes, fixed and unfixed taxes
along with rent exploited the labour class.
 Prosperity was not shared equally: It was believed that some people were meant for
cultivation of land and some for enjoying the fruits of production and hence, prosperity was
not shared equally.
 Fragmentation of social formation: Castes were split up into thousands of other castes and
subcastes.
 Manorial system: Under the manorial system, the landlord granted lands to persons who
would render different services including labour on the lands of the lords in exchange for
land.
Conclusion
There were few differences between Feudalism in India and the one in Europe. Indian feudalism was
divided on a caste-basis such as Brahmanas, Kshatriya, Vaishaya and Shudras, while European
feudalism was divided on the basis of class as in nobility, clergy and commoners. This marked the
evolution of Indian Feudalism on a whole and gave rise to a minor balkanization phenomenon in the
subcontinent.
Throw light on the features and nature of Chola local self-governing villages. Were
they really autonomous? Discuss their significance. (250 words)
Why the question:
To write about the Chola local self-governing villages.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Start by giving context of Uttaramerur inscription.
Body:
First, write in detail, the features of Chola local self-governing villages – various qualifications,
disqualifications, committees and their natures of responsibilities.
Next, write about the level of autonomy enjoyed by these Chola local self-governing villages.
Next, write about the significance of Chola local self-governing villages.
Conclusion:
Introduction

There were two types of villages at the local in the Chola empire. One type of village consisted of
people from different caste and the assembly which ran this type of village was called ‘ur’. The
second type of village was ‘agrahara’ types of village which were settled by Brahmins in which most
of the land was rent-free.
The assembly of this agrahara type of village was a gathering of the adult men in brahmana villages
called ‘Sabha’ or ‘mahasabha’. These villages enjoyed a large measure of autonomy. The affairs of
the village were managed by an executive committees to which educated person owning property
were elected by drawing lots or by rotation.
Uttarameruru inscription issued by Prantaka Chola gives details of election to these committees.
Body
The system of village autonomy with sabhas and their committees developed through the ages and
reached its culmination during the Chola rule. Two inscriptions belonging to the period of Parantaka
I found at Uttiramerur provide details of the formation and functions of village councils.
That village was divided into thirty wards and each was to nominate its members to the village
council. The qualifications to become a ward member were:
 Ownership of at least one fourth veli of land.
 Own residence.
 Above thirty years and below seventy years of age.
 Knowledge of Vedas.
However, certain norms of disqualification were also mentioned in the inscriptions. They were:
 Those who had been members of the committees for the past three years.
 Those who had failed to submit accounts as committee members.
 Those who had committed sins.
 Those who had stolen the property of others.
From the persons duly nominated, one was to be chosen for each ward by kudavolai system for a
year. The names of eligible persons were written on palm-leaves and put into a pot. A young boy or
girl would take out thirty names each for one ward. They were divided into six variyams such as
samvatsaravariyam, erivariyam, thotta variyam, pancha variyam, pon variyam and puravuvari
variyam to take up six different functions of the village administration. The committee members
were called variyapperumakkal. They usually met in the temple or under a tree and passed
resolutions. The number of committees and ward members varied from village to village.
Conclusion
Hence Chola administration gave a lot of autonomy to village councils and committees. This local
decentralization shows the acumen for good governance back in the ancient and medieval period
which was indigenously developed.

Examine the short-term and long-term outcomes of the tri-partite struggle. Do you
think tri-partite struggle paved way for invasions in the early medieval India? (250
words)
Why the question:
To write about the short-term and long-term outcomes of the tri-partite struggle and its role in
facilitating invasions in early medieval India.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by giving context and mentioning the participants in the tri-partite struggle.
Body:
First, write about the short-term impact of the tri-partite struggle – long drawn out, war of attrition,
indecisive for long etc.
Next, write about the long-term impact of the tri-partite struggle – lack of central authority, pan
India empire, mutual animosity.
Next, write to what extent did tri-partite struggle play a part in invasions of India.
Conclusion:
Conclude by writing a balanced judgement forward.
Introduction
The Tripartite Struggle was a three-way struggle between the Pratiharas, the Palas and the
Rashtrakutas. It was also called Kannauj Triangle Wars and took place in the 8th and 9th
centuries. The Tripartite struggle was for the control of Northern India and ultimately the Pratiharas
emerged victorious.
Body
short-term outcomes
 During the rule of Rashtrakuta ruler Krishna III, there was successful campaign against the
Cholas.
 The Rashtrakutas also formed a matrimonial relationship with other feudal kings.
 For the continuous war they had to maintain big armyand so that the tax was very high.
 Some rebellions against the rulers can thus be easily traced.
 Some scholars like R.S. Sharma identified the Kaibartya rebellions during the Pala period as
a peasant revolt.
Long-term outcomes
 All the three powers became weak and then declined.
 All the contemporary powers became dependable on the samantas that was their weakness.
 After sometime the samanta kings became powerful and caused the downfall of the big
powers.
 On the other hand the unnecessary war weakened the dynasties so that in North India we
do not see any powerful empire in the later period.
 At the time of Muslim invasion North Indian powers became unable to protect themselves.
 The struggle resulted into the political disintegration of the country and benefited the
Islamic invaders from Middle-East.
 So in conclusion we can say that tripartite struggle was a war without gain for the powers.
Conclusion
The three kingdoms were fighting amongst each other to have a control over the resource rich
region around Kannauj in Gangetic valley. Each wanted to take the benefit of lack of strong ruler at
Kannauj at that time. However, the struggle was mutually destructive for all of them. Nobody could
emerge as a strong power. There was no stability and central rule in entire country. It led to political
vacuum in north India and no attention to North West Frontier. Thus India became vulnerable to
foreign invasion. Advantage of the situation was taken by Mahamud Ghazini and Mohammad Ghori.
Discuss the role of Yoga in bringing body, mind, and spirit into balance. How can it
help in furthering humanity in the post-Covid world? (250 words)
Why the question:
International Yoga Day is observed every year on June 21st to raise awareness about the importance
and benefits of yoga.
To write about the advantages of Yoga and its role in furthering humanity.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Start by giving context.
Body:
First, in brief, write about the origins of Yoga in ancient India.
Next, write about the advantages offered by performing Yoga by bringing body, mind, and spirit into
balance.
Next, write about the role of yoga in furthering humanity in the post covid world.
Conclusion:
Introduction
Yoga is an ancient physical, mental and spiritual practice that originated in India. The word ‘yoga’
derives from Sanskrit and means to join or to unite, symbolizing the union of body and
consciousness. Today it is practiced in various forms around the world and continues to grow in
popularity. Recognizing its universal appeal, on 11 December 2014, the United Nations
proclaimed 21 June as International Yoga Day. June 21, which is the Summer Solstice, is the longest
day of the year in the Northern Hemisphere and has special significance in many parts of the world.
International Yoga Day aims to raise awareness worldwide of the many benefits of practicing yoga.
The theme for 2022 is “Yoga for Humanity”.
Body
The dire situation after COVID-19
 The post-Covid world faces several dilemmas.
 The rising tide of parochialism threatens to engulf humanity while depression, anxiety and
innumerable physical and mental diseases have affected the well-being of people around
the world.
 The World Health Organisation estimates that nearly 280 million people are suffering from
depression.
Role of Yoga in furthering humanity in the post-Covid world
Physically:
 Yoga is also commonly understood as a therapy or exercise system for health and fitness.
While physical and mental health are natural consequences of yoga, the goal of yoga is more
far-reaching.
 Yoga is about harmonizing oneself with the universe. It is the technology of aligning
individual geometry with the cosmic, to achieve the highest level of perception and
harmony.
 Yoga does not adhere to any particular religion, belief system or community; it has always
been approached as a technology for inner wellbeing.
 Anyone who practices yoga with involvement can reap its benefits, irrespective of one’s
faith, ethnicity or culture.
Psychologically:
 Yoga asana’s and spirituality transcends religious, regional and virtually all forms of barriers.
 It helps to seek humanity in diversity – responsible consumerism (SDG 12) with social well-
being.
 The concept of “Vasudhaiva Kutumbakam” is inherently linked with sustainable life style
which is a major component of Yoga.
 Yoga can not only help us improve our mental health but also help us perform our duty
while maintaining equanimity under all circumstances.
 Yoga can also spark creativity, which can, in turn, enhance one’s self-esteem and improve
focus.
Emotionally:
 Yoga can yield emotional health benefits because it’s an exercise that works both the body
and the mind.
 Yoga practice comprises not just movement, but dynamic movements tied to breath.
 Focusing on body postures can shift attention away from negative thinking.
 Yoga’s deep breathing and meditation practices help foster an inner shift from to-do lists,
kids and spouse’s needs, financial concerns, and relationship struggles to something a little
bit bigger than the issues you face.
 Yoga helps relieve stress and declutters the mind, helping you to become more focused.
 Research shows yoga can benefit people with depression and schizophrenia, according to a
review published in the journal Frontiers in Psychiatry.
 A study titled “Coping with coronavirus anxiety” by Harvard Medical School highlighted how
yoga and meditation can help one stay calm in an increasingly tense environment.
 Yoga helps in elevating the levels of a chemical called gamma-aminobutyric acid (GABA)
which is associated with better mood and decreased anxiety.

 Researchers around the world agree that yoga therapies play a key role in improving the
quality of life by significantly reducing symptoms linked to depression, boosting immunity,
improving cardiovascular functioning, and enhancing sleep patterns.
Conclusion
Yoga, an ancient practice and meditation, has become increasingly popular in today’s busy society.
For many people, yoga provides a retreat from their chaotic and busy lives. Yoga is more than a
physical activity. In the words of one of its most famous practitioners, the late B. K. S. Iyengar, “Yoga
cultivates the ways of maintaining a balanced attitude in day-to-day life and endows skill in the
performance of one’s actions.”
Extra information: History of Yoga:
 Though Yoga was being practiced in the pre-Vedic period, the great Sage Maharshi Patanjali
systematized and codified the then existing practices of Yoga, its meaning and its related
knowledge through his Yoga Sutras.
 Sage Patanjali’s treatise on raja yoga, the Yoga Sutras, says Yoga comprises of yama,
niyama, asana, pranayam, pratyahara, dharana, dhyana and samadhi.
 The phallic symbols and seals of idols of mother Goddess of Indus Valley Civilization are
suggestive of Tantra Yoga.
 Presence of Yoga is available in folk traditions, Indus valley civilization, Vedic and
Upanishadic heritage, Buddhist and Jain traditions, Darshanas, epics of Mahabharat and
Ramayana, theistic traditions of Shaivas, Vaishnavas, and Tantric traditions.
 Sun was given highest importance during the Vedic period. The practice of ‘Surya namaskara’
may have been invented later due to this influence.
Explain the Mansabdari system of the Mughal empire. Evaluate its merits and
demerits. What are key learnings from Mansabdari to present day administrative
practices? (250 words)
Why the question:
To write about the features of Mansabdari, its merits and demerits and learnings from it for present
day administration.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by giving context of Mansabdari system as an important corner stone of Mughal
administration.
Body:

First, write about the various features of Mansabdari system – appointments, ranks, payments,
purpose etc.
Next, write about various merits and demerits associated with the Mansabdari system in detail.
Next, write about the key learning from Mansabdari system to present day administrative practises
which can be implemented to make the administration better.
Conclusion:
Introduction
The Mansabdar was a military unit within the administrative system of the Mughal
Empire introduced by Akbar. The word mansab is of Arabic origin meaning rank or position. The
system determined the rank and status of a government official and military generals. Those
mansabdars whose rank was one thousand or below were called Amir.
Body
The mansab of a Mughal noble denoted the following:
 Salary of the officer
 Status of the officer
 Number of soldiers, horses and elephants etc., maintained by an officer.
Every mansabdar had to maintain as many soldiers as were indicated by his rank of ‘Zat’ while the
rank of ‘sawar’ indicated the number of horsemen among them. Irvin expressed the view that Zat
indicated the actual number of cavalry under a mansabdar besides other soldiers while sawar was an
additional honour.
During the reign of Akbar, the mansabdars were asked to keep as many horsemen as were indicated
by numbers of their ranks of sawar. But, the practice was not being maintained by other Mughal
emperors.
Main Characteristics of the Mansabdari System:
 The king himself appointed the Mansabdars. He could enhance the Mansab, lower down it
or remove it.
 A Mansabdar could be asked to perform any civil or military service.
 There were many categories of the Mansabdars. Based on the rank salary was given. Only
the princes of the royal family and most important Rajput rulers were given a Mansab of
10,000.
 A Mansabdar was paid his salary in cash.
 Sometimes Jagir was given to Mansabdars to realise revenue and salary.
 Mansabdari system was not hereditary.
 Mansabdar had to maintain out of his” salary a stipulated quota of horses, elephants, camels
and mules and carts.
 The horses were classified into six categories and the elephants into five.

 For every ten cavalry men, the Mansabdar had to maintain twenty horses for horses had to
be provided rest while on march and replacements were necessarily in times of war.
 A record of the description (‘huliy’) of each horseman under a Mansabdar and of branding
(‘dag’) horses to prevent corruption was kept.
Changes introduced by Jahangir and Shah Jahan:
 Difference in the highest Mansab
 Reduction in the number of soldiers
 Difference in the categories of Mansabdars
 Relaxation in control
Merits of the Mansabdari System:
 Removal of the chief defects of the Jagirdari system
 Increased military efficiency
 Extra revenue to the state
 Merit as the basis of selection
Demerits of the Mansabdari System
 The mansabdars got their salaries from the emperor and paid themselves the salaries to
their troops. This made the troops more loyal to the mansabdars than to the king.
 The system proved very expensive.
 Dishonest mansabdars and officials used to ally together during inspection, borrowed horses
from one another and showed their full quota.
 Caste system prevailed in the mansabdari system.
 Since the property of a mansabdar was confiscated after his death, he used to spend it
lavishly during his life time.
Conclusion
The Mughal rulers maintained a large and efficient army till the reign of Aurangzeb. This was
necessary to do so for they conquered several parts of the country and were accordingly required to
maintain law and order and check revolts and Mansabdari system was the most efficient system.
Examine the causes and consequences of Vijayanagara-Bahamani conflict. (250

words)
Reference: Insights on India , Insights on India
Why the question:
To write about causes and consequences of Vijaynagara-Bahamani conflict.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by giving context of the contemporary rise of Vijayanagara empire and Bahamani kingdom.
Body:
First, write about the various causes behind the Vijayanagara-Bahamani conflict – imperial
ambitions, economic considerations, control over trade, mutual animosity etc.
Next, write about consequences of the conflict – long drawn out, wars of attrition, drain on economic
resources etc.
Conclusion:
Introduction
The Vijayanagar Kingdom (later, Vijayanagar Empire) was established in the year 1346 A.D, around
the same time as Bahman Shah founded the Sultanate. The Vijayanagar Empire had considerable
hold in South India in areas including the Tamil country and that of the Cheras (Kerala). However, it
continued to face a constant threat in areas north of the Tungabhadra River in the shape of the
Bahmani Sultanate. Unfortunately, this period in history is remembered more for the wars that
marked the nature of the relations between the Vijayanagar Empire and the Bahmani Sultanate
rather than for the developments they brought about for the region in which they were present.
Body
Various causes behind the Vijayanagara-Bahamani conflict
 Economic reasons
o Possession of Tungabhadra Doab: The territory between the rivers Tungabhadra

and Krishna known as Tungabhadra Doab was very fertile. Each kingdom wanted to
possess it.
o Control of Krishna-Godavri Delta: This delta had two-fold significance. One, it was
very fertile. Two, it had several important ports through which profitable trade was
carried with several foreign countries like Ceylon, Indonesia, Malaya and Burma, etc.
Both the powers wanted to have their supremacy over this territory.
o Capture of Konkan or Western Coastal strip: This was also a very fertile area and
had important ports like Goa which were important outlets for foreign trade. Goa
was especially important for the import of horses from Iran and Iraq. On account of
these reasons, both the powers had their eyes on this area.
 Political reasons: Both the powers desired to extend their kingdom. Each considered the
other as a danger to its existence.
 Religious: Ever since the conquest of Deccan by Malik Kafur, the vanquished Hindu rulers
had nursed a feeling of deep resentment against the Muslim oppressors. This had resulted in
the emergence of a great Hindu empire of Vijayanagara in the Deccan. On the contrary, the
Bahmani rulers were Muslims. So, there was a religious rivalry between the two kingdoms.
 Failure of diplomacy on the part of Rama Raya: Sadasiva Raya (1542-70), the ruler of
Vijayanagara was a very weak ruler and he played into the hands of his powerful minister

Rama Raya. For a while, Rama Raya was able to make use of the rivalry of the five Muslim
powers in the Deccan and weakened their power. But ultimately this policy failed and these
states unified in the name of Islam.
Consequences of the conflict
 Firstly, the frequent wars with the Bahmani Sultanate made Vijayanagar require a standing
army at all times.
 For the purpose of maintaining an army, which was remunerated in cash, there was a rise
in the rate of taxation.
 Also, the Vijayanagar kings believed that their losses to the Bahmani Sultans occurred due to
inferior nature of their horses and in order to improve their army, the Vijayanagar Empire
started procuring imported horses from the Arabs and later from the Portuguese.
o This created a heavy burden on the state exchequer and was also responsible for a
high taxation rate.
 The high rate of taxation is known to have caused widespread discontent among
the peasantry and owing to this a number of villages revolted against the empire itself
however, these conflicts were localized and never made a major threat to suzerainty of the
Vijayanagar Empire.
 Within the fragmented nature of the Vijayanagar Empire every magnate looked to increase
his power with respect to the neighbouring overlords.
 These conflicts within the Vijayanagar Empire did play an important role in the
empire’s defeat at the hands of the Bahmani Sultans as the forces of the empire needed to
be divided in order to keep a check on the growing power of the nayakas.
 The revolts in the provinces were frequent and needed to be kept in control in order to
maintain supremacy of the central rule.
 The Bahmani’s faced problems of their own in the form of a divided nobility within the
Sultanate.
o The nobles comprised of people from two different ethnic groups who were
involved in a power struggle. One group of nobles comprised of the Turks, Afghans,
and Persians who were generally Shias while the other group of Muslims from the
Deccan region was traditionally Sunnis.
o The rival factions had within them racial and
religious differences that weakened the Sultanate and led to its downfall.
 The conflict also led to the execution of Mahmud Gawan who was a brilliant statesman and
held the tarafs present in the Bahmani Sultanate together.This set off the events that
ultimately led to the division of the Sultanate
Conclusion
The conflict between the two kingdoms, which, at the surface, looks like a struggle for the protection
of the Hindu identity turns out to be a complex battle for establishing political supremacy over the
region. The two kingdoms established at almost the same time led to the consolidation of the

region, making it free of multiple kingdoms fighting amongst each other and thereby stabilizing the
region.
Compare and contrast the Sufi and the Bhakti movement in India. What were the
factors that led to emergence of Bhakti movement? (250 words)
Why the question:
To write about differences and similarities between Sufi and Bhakti and factors behind rise of bhakti.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by giving defining Bhakti and the Sufi movements.
Body:
First, write about the various differences between Sufi and Bhakti movement.
Next, write about certain similarities between the Sufi and Bhakti movement.
Next, write about the factors that played a part in the emergence of Bhakti – role of alvars and
Nayanars, the acharyas, priestly hegemony, use of vernacular literature etc.
Conclusion:
Conclude by mentioning significance of Sufi and Bhakti to Indian society.
Introduction
The Bhakti and Sufi movements had brought the whole of the Indian Subcontinent under their
sway. The Bhakti and Sufi saints lived and worked in the midst of the common people. They needed
to reach out to common people in order to spread their socio-religious and philosophical messages.
They did everything to establish brotherhood, love and friendship between the Hindus and Muslims.
Body
Bhakti and Sufi movements – similarities:
 Bhakti movement was a socio-religious movement that opposed religious bigotry and social
rigidities.
 Both emphasised good character and pure thinking.
 The importance of the Bhakti and Sufi saints lies in the new atmosphere created by them,
which continued to affect the social, religious and political life of India even in later
centuries.
 The Bhakti and Sufi saints made valuable contributions to medieval Indian society in terms of
laying a liberal foundation and promoting a tremendous growth of regional literature and
local languages.
 Bhakti and Sufi traditions gave respectability to many low castes, posing a challenge to the
upper caste hegemony; this tradition had an inclusive approach towards Muslims as well.

 The Bhakti and Sufi traditions opposed the rituals, hegemony of the elite of society. They
adopted the languages more popular with the masses. Also, they talked of one God.
 They treated Hindus and Muslims alike. Amir Khusrau said “Though the Hindu is not like me
in religion, he believes in the same things that I do”.
 Sufis bridged the communal divide as is evidenced by the reverence the Subcontinent’s non-
Muslim population exhibited for Sufi saints. Bhakti tradition preached the principle of co-
existence.
 The importance of the Bhakti and Sufi saints lies in the new atmosphere created by them,
which continued to affect the social, religious and political life of India even in later
centuries. Akbar’s liberal ideas were a product of this atmosphere in which he was born and
brought up.
 Both rebelled against all forms of religious formalism, orthodoxy, falsehood and hypocrisy
and endeavoured to create a new world order in which spiritual bliss was the only and the
ultimate goal.
Differences between Bhakti and Sufi Movements
 While the origin of Bhakti Movement was in India in 9th Century AD, the Sufi movement
traces its origin to Arabian Peninsula in 7th
 Bhakti movement used songs, bhajans to encourage religious devotion while Sufis used
Qawwalis.
 The Bhakti Movement had a direct emotional and intellectual relationship with the divine.
Wheras, Sufism emphasized simplicity and austerity, and it gained many followers as a result
of the worldliness of medieval empires and kingdoms.
 From its origins in South India, the Bhakti movement spread throughout East and North India
beginning in the 15th century. Sufism reached across many continents and cultures.
Factors that led to the Bhakti movement:
Political:
 It has been pointed out that as the popular bhakti movement could not take root in
Northern India before the Turkish conquest because the socio-religious milieu was
dominated by the Rajput-Brahman alliance which was hostile to any heterodox movement.
 The Turkish conquests brought the supremacy of this alliance to an end.
 The advent of Islam with the Turkish conquest also caused a setback to the power and
prestige commanded by the Brahmans.
 Thus, the way was paved for the growth of non-conformist movements, with anti-caste and
anti-Brahminical ideology.
 The loss of power and influence by the Brahmans and the new political situation ultimately
created conditions for the rise of the popular monotheistic movements and other bhakti
movements in Northern India.
Socio-economic:

 It has been argued that the bhakti movements of medieval India represented sentiments of
the common people against feudal oppression.
 The Vaishnava bhakti saints broke away from orthodox Brahminical order only to the extent
that they believed in bhakti and religious equality.
 Normally, they continued to subscribe to many basic principles of orthodox Brahmanism.
Religious:
 Evils in the Hindu Society: Hindu society was full of many social anomalies like rigidity of
caste system, irrelevant rituals and religious practices, blind faiths and social dogmas.
Common men in general had developed an adverse attitude towards these social evils and
were in need of a liberal form of religion where they could identify themselves with simple
religious practices.
 Complexity of religion: The high philosophy of the Vedas and Upanishads were very
complicated for the common people. They wanted a simple way of worship, simple religious
practices and simple social customs. Alternative was Bhakti marga—a simple way of
devotion to get salvation from worldly life.
 Role of Religious Reformers: The chief exponents of the movement were Shankara,
Ramanuja, Kabir, Nanak, Shri Chaitanya, Mirabai, Ramananda, Namdev, Nimbarka,
Madhava, Eknath, Surdas, Tulsidas, Tukaram, Vallabhacharya and Chandidas. They were the
propounders of Bhakti movement and gave a call to the people to worship in the simplest
possible way of devotion and love.
 Challenge from Rival Religion: the impact of the Muslim rule and Islam put dread in the
heart of Hindu masses. The Hindus had suffered a lot under some of the fanatic rulers. They
wanted some solace to heal their despairing hearts.
 Influence of Sufism: The Sufi saints of the Muslim community also inspired the movement.
Some similar chords in the two evoked resonance.
Conclusion
The essence of the Sufi and Bhakti tradition are reminders that the spiritual-moral part of religion
has been undermined in current times. The inclusive, humane-nature of these traditions needs to
be upheld and the divisive-exclusionary versions of religions have to be ignored for humanity to
progress.
Discuss the major characteristics of art in the period between 200 B.C.E- 300 C.E with
a special emphasis on Stupa architecture. (250 words)
Why the question:
To write about artistic characteristic between 200 BCE and 300 CE and about Stupa architecture.
Directive word:

Introduction:
Begin by giving context of development of art between 200 BCE and 300 CE.
Body:
First, write about the major features of art between 200 BCE and 300 CE – mostly related to religions,
Buddha images, construction of Stupas, Chaityas and Viharas, non-Indian art in the artistic creations
etc.
Next, write in detail about the features of Stupa architecture and its evolution during this period.
Conclusion:
Introduction
The stupa (“stupa” is Sanskrit for heap) is an important form of Buddhist architecture, though it
predates Buddhism. It is generally considered to be a sepulchral monument—a place of burial or a
receptacle for religious objects. At its simplest, a stupa is a relic-filled mound-like or hemispheric
structure used for meditation. From the Vedic time onwards, stupas were used as burial mounds in
India.
Body
Main characteristics of a Stupa
 The main structure of the Great Stupa consisted of a flattened hemispherical dome, called
an anda, placed atop a cylindrical base. Anda, represents the infinite dome of heaven and
signifies the cycle of birth, death and rebirth.

 The harmika, located at the summit of the anda, symbolized the zenith beyond life and
death (nirvana). Its resemblance to a sacrificial altar was of particular significance for the
attainment of nirvana required the sacrifice of the self and the world (what was below
needed to be sacrificed to reach the top).
 The parasol was always a distinguishing feature that implied royalty and dignity; it
symbolized the sacred Tree of Life or enlightenment.
 The three elements of the chattra at Sanchi represented the Three Jewels of Buddhism: the
Buddha, the Dharma (the Law), and the Sangha (the community of monks).
 Vedikas were repeated around the stupa and on the terrace on which the anda rested
(medhi level). They served to demarcate the boundary of the sacred precinct with the
secular world.
 The stupa is capped by a wooden railing that encircled a pradakshina patha

(circumambulatory walkway).
 Sanchi, Sarnath, Amaravati and Bharhut stupas are the oldest examples of Early Buddhist
stupa art. The Birth, Enlightenment, First Sermon and Great Departure are depicted using
various motifs in these stupas.
 The Jataka stories were depicted on the torans of Stupas. The Jataka stories are a method of
teaching Buddhists the lessons of karma, samsara and dharma. The overall structure of the
Jataka Tales is about the cycle of samsara that the Buddha had to experience before
reaching enlightenment.
Evolution of Stupa architecture in India:
Early Stupas & the Buddha:
 The earliest known mention of the word ‘Stupa’ occurs in several ancient scripts.
 Rigveda refers to a Stupa raised by the King Varuna above the forest in a place having no
foundation.
 The word ‘estuka’ is also used in the same sense in Rigveda, probably by then anything
raised on the ground like a heap/pile might have been known as Stupa.
 However, the Pali word ‘thupa’ is quite similar to the term Stupa.
 Thupa means a conical heap, a pile or a mound or a conical or bell-shaped shrine containing
a relic.
 The earliest stupas were tumuli erected over the remains of mystics, ascetics, teachers, or
others who had displayed profound spiritual insight.
 These early structures were heaps of earth and stone which either covered the cremated
remains of the individual or their corpse, which was buried in a seated, meditative, position.
 The mound was constructed to cover the body with a wide base tapering up toward the
head.

 This shape was used even in cases where the person had been cremated in order to
symbolize the meditative posture assumed by enlightened sages.
 The Buddha left instructions for his followers that his remains were to be honoured in this
same way.
 These stupas followed the earlier shape but were more elaborate and more carefully
constructed to represent the seated Buddha in the lotus position.
 The sites of these stupas were chosen to correlate to the most important events in the
Buddha’s life, including Lumbini (his birthplace), Bodh Gaya (where he attained
enlightenment), the Deer Park at Sarnath (where he preached his first sermon), Kushingara
(where he died).
 Buddhist adherents would make pilgrimages to the individual sites or, depending on their
ability or level of devotion, to all of them along a sacred route whereby they would
symbolically relive the Buddha’s earthly existence.
Buddhism & Ashoka the Great:
 Buddhism was not a major religion in India even a hundred years after his death.
 It was a minor philosophical school which had developed, along with others, from the
religious tradition of Hinduism.
 Buddhism gained more ground earlier than Jainism, and both more than Charvaka, but it still
remained a minor philosophical school until the reign of Ashoka the Great.
 The first true stupas were constructed after the reign of Ashoka.
 Emperor Ashoka, 236 BCE Maurya Empire, redistributed the relics housed in the original
stupas into 84,000 stupas throughout the world.
 While this is an exaggeration and the stupas were built by Ashoka some 250 years after the
Buddha’s death, Ashoka is also credited with the construction of numerous stupas that
remain to this day, including those at Sanchi and Sarnath.
 While Indian stupas consist of a solid hemisphere surrounded by a railing, other stupas such
as the great stupa at Borobudur (built a thousand years after the one at Sanchi) are
considerably more complex.
 Unlike the Sanchi stupa, the one at Borobodur consists of a polygonal base, with steps
leading up to the summit and punctuated by as many as 72 smaller stupas along the way.
 Another distinct type of stupa architecture prevalent in India during Ashoka’s reign was
associated with rock-cut caves.
 The term ‘chaitya’ is derived from the Sanskrit word ‘Chita’ (The mound of ashes formed by
the cremation of a dead body).
 The earliest ‘rock-cut’ sanctuaries date back to c. 200 B.C.
 Eventually, it came to mean the earth mound heaped over the ashes or relics of a saint, and
chaitya became thus ‘worshipful’.
 These chambers were carved as retreats for ascetics and monks.

 The architecture resembled the wooden structures of the time, with barrel-vaulted interiors
and vertical grooves on the walls to imitate wooden beams and members.
 Even the thatched vedikas and toranas of the ‘built-up’ stupas were made to resemble
parallel developments in wood-work.
Present Day Stupas:
 The core ideology of the stupa is retained in terms of architectural design across millennia,
and even to this day. However, the difference lies in the material used in the modern-day
stupa.
 For instance, the Sambodhi Chaithya is a stupa built with reinforced concrete on a platform
supported by two interlocking arches.
 Apart from this, stupa is also having access via Elevators.
 Patliputra karuna Stupa is having glass facade, along with void stupa concept so people can
see the holy relics along with ramp design for entrance instead of stairs which makes it
barrier free for everyone.
Conclusion
It is thus apparent that the stupa, which was conceived as a simple monument for the Buddha’s
corporeal relics, has over time transformed in its form and nomenclature and resulted in various
types of structures all over the world. In some regions, even supplementary structures like
monasteries have come up alongside stupas, fuelling the inception of new Buddhist orders and
sects. However, the core ideology of the stupa remains constant throughout each new development,
as does its symbolism and several crucial architectural features. These characteristics must,
therefore, be given due consideration and importance while designing any stupa project.
The Nagara, Dravida and Vesara styles indicate a tendency to highlight typological
features of temples and their geographical distribution. Elaborate. (250 words)
Difficulty level: Difficult
Why the question:
To write about the comparative features of Nagara, Dravida and Vesara styles.
Directive word:
Elaborate – Give a detailed account as to how and why it occurred, or what is the context. You must
be defining key terms wherever appropriate and substantiate with relevant associated facts.
Introduction:
Start by giving context about the three major style of temple architecture.
Body:
First, write in detail, the features of Nagara style and its various sub styles. Cite examples to
substantiate.
Next, write in detail, the features of Dravida style and its various sub styles. Cite examples to
substantiate.

Next, write in detail, the features of Vesara style and its various sub styles. Cite examples to
substantiate.
Conclusion:
Introduction
Temple architecture of high standard developed in almost all regions during ancient India. Ancient
Indian temples are classified in three broad types. This classification is based on different
architectural styles, employed in the construction of the temples. Three main style of temple
architecture are the Nagara or the Northern style, the Dravida or the Southern style and the
Vesara or Mixed style. But at the same time, there are also some regional styles of Bengal, Kerala
and the Himalayan areas.
Body
Unique features of Dravida Style of Architecture
 The Dravida temple is enclosed within a compound wall.
 The front wall has an entrance gateway in its centre, which is known as a Gopuram.
 The shape of the main temple tower known as vimana in Tamil Nadu is like a stepped
pyramidthat rises up geometrically rather than the curving shikhara of North India.
 In the South Indian temple, the word ‘shikhara’is used only for the crowning element at the
top of the temple which is usually shaped like a small stupika or an octagonal cupola— this
is equivalent to the amalak and kalasha of North Indian temples.
 Fierce Dvarapalas or the door-keepersguarding the temple adorn the entrance to

garbhagriha
 It is common to find a large water reservoir, or a temple tank, enclosed within the complex.

 At some of the most sacred temples in South India, the main temple in which the
garbhagriha is situated has, in fact, one of the smallest towers. This is because it is usually
the oldest part of the temple
 It is common to find a large water reservoir, or a temple tank, enclosed within the complex.
 Subsidiary shrines are either incorporated within the main temple tower, or located as
distinct, separate small shrines beside the main temple
 Kailashnath temple at Ellora is a famous example of a temple built in complete Dravidian

style
Unique features of Nagara style of architecture
 The cruciform ground plan and curvilinear mountain-peak like tower are the two most
fundamental features of Nagara style.
 The temples of Nagara style generally have a square plan with a number of graduated
projections in the middle of each face which give the structure a cruciform shape in the
exterior.
 In Nagara style, the Shikhara remains the most prominent element of the temple and
the gateway is usually modest or even absent.
 In this style, temples have elaborated boundary, less emphasised.
 The entire temple is built on high stone platform called Jagati
 Generally, they do not have large enclosures and entrances.
 The temple has only one peak or shikhara above the Garbagriha.
 There was a Kalasha placed on the Shikara of a temple.
 Sikhara(the tower) slowly bending inwards and capped by a spheroid plate with ribs around
the edge (Amalaka) give the height.
 Temples of Nagara styles are categorized on the basis of the shape of the Shikhara. They are
– Rekha Prasad, Phamsana, and Valabhi.
Unique features of Vesara style of architecture:
 Ornamentation:In case of ornamentation of temple walls and pillars, Chalukyan temple

shows indigenous quality.
 Transformation of Dravida tower:The Chalukyan builders modified the Dravida towers by

minimizing the height of each storey and arranging them in descending order of height from
base to top with much ornamentation in each storey.
 Transformation of Nagara tower:Instead of inclined storey here modification is seen in the

vertical shape of the tower.
 Two special features of Chalukya temples – Mantapa and Pillars:
o Mantapa: The mantapa has two types of roof – domical ceilings (the dome like
ceilings standing on four pillars are very attractive) or Square ceilings (these are
vigorously ornamented with mythological pictures).
 Pillars: the miniature decorative pillars of Chalukya temples stands with its own artistic
value.
Conclusion
The temple architecture was mainly influenced by geographical, ethnic, racial, historical and
linguistic diversities of Indian sub-continent. Every region and period produced its own distinct style
of images with its regional variations in iconography. The temple is covered with elaborate sculpture
and ornament that form a fundamental part of its conception.
Prehistoric art of India is very important because it gives us insight into the
development of the human mind and ways. Elaborate (250 words)
Why the question:
To write about the importance of pre-historic rock art.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by writing about the pre-historic period as a phase of human history.
Body:
First, mention the major sites where re historic rock art is found in India making the most easily
available cultural data. Draw a map of sites for better presentation.
Next, write about significance of pre historic rock art and insights it gives us in to pre-history.
Substantiate with examples.
Conclusion:
Conclude by stressing on the need to preserve ancient rock art.
Introduction
The distant past when there was no paper or language or the written word, and hence no
books or written documents, is called prehistory, or, as we often say, prehistoric times. Paintings
and drawings were the oldest art forms practiced by human beings to express themselves using the
cave wall as their canvas. The prehistoric art help us to understand about early human beings, their
lifestyle, their food habits, their daily activities and, above all, they help us understand their mind—
the way they thought.
Body
Prehistoric rock-cut architecture: Vital sources of Ancient History
 The Barabar caves located in the Jehanabad district in the state of Bihar, are the oldest surviving
caves in India showcasing rock-cut architecture. Many pre-historic paintings show that they were
mostly hunter gatherers.
 It throws light on the kind of tools used by prehistoric people and evolution from
Palaeolithic to Chalcolithic era.

 Lomas Rishi caves They were constructed during Mauryan empire for Ajivika monks for their
dwelling during rainy season. They consist of chaityas and viharas that mainly followed Hinayana
style of architecture.
 Ajanta caves were constructed as a shelter for Hinayana monks.
 They are famous for their mural paintings that has developed into a separate painting
school.
 They illustrate Jataka tales and put light on way of life during the period.
 Chaityas and Viharas: Other early cave temples were used by Buddhist and Jain monks as places
of worship and residence found in western India.
 Eg: Karla Caves.
 Jainism and cave architecture: These can be dated between 6th century AD to 12th century AD
 Caves are found at different places like Ellora, Elephanta, Badami etc. There are
variations in the architectural elements according to the religions.
 Sittanavasal caves are also examples of Jain caves.
Significance of prehistoric paintings in India
 The way people lived in those times is difficult to surmise. It was only until scholars began to
discover the places where prehistoric people lived.
 Excavation at these places brought to light old tools, pottery, habitats, bones of ancient human
beings and animals, and drawings on cave walls.
 By piecing together the information deduced from these objects and the cave drawings, scholars
have constructed fairly accurate knowledge about what happened and how people lived in
prehistoric times.
 These prehistoric paintings help us to understand about early human beings, their lifestyle, their
food habits, their daily activities and, above all, they help us understand their mind—the way
they thought.
 Prehistoric period remains are a great witness to the evolution of human civilization, through the
numerous rock weapons, tools, ceramics and bones.
 More than anything else, the rock paintings are the greatest wealth the primitive human beings
of this period left behind.
Importance of Megaliths
 Megaliths are a vital element of landscape and for historical reasons they are a sui generis
monument, commemorating prehistorical cultures.
 Burial practices: Megaliths were constructed either as burial sites or commemorative (non-
sepulchral) memorials. This helps identify various communities and contact between them by
comparing burial practices.
 Socio-religious beliefs: Goods of daily use have been found in megaliths used as graves. This
reflects the belief of megalith people in life after death and belief in existence of soul.
 Economic life: Goods related to hunting are found more as compared to agriculture. This
signifies the fact that megalith people were hunter gatherers and did not practice advanced
agriculture. Evidences of seeds of rice, wheat, millet, Barley, Pea etc. have been found in
Megaliths.
 Polity: Fact that megalith construction required efforts of a group of people points towards an
organized polity. Also these were not built for commoners. They signify the emergence of a
ruling class.
 Technology: The range of iron artifacts recovered indicate that the megalithic people practiced
a wide range of occupations and included carpenters, cobblers, bamboo craftsmen, lapidaries
engaged in gemstone work, blacksmiths, coppersmiths and goldsmiths, proof of complex social
organization.
 Megaliths find mention in Sangam literature and Buddhist work Manimeklai.
 At the same time, along with the remaining elements of the natural and cultural environment,
they create a unique image of place identity, attracting large numbers of tourists.
Conclusion
Prehistoric art is a lens through which Archeologists have been able to predict the evolution of
human kind with more accuracy. Various tools, objects and paintings tell us the type of social
background of the people. It helps in verifying the social Darwinism as well as the growth trajectory
of our ancestors. It is very important to preserve these sites, that have immense information stored
through means of various art forms.
Pala art is in a naturalistic style with a great attention to the ornamental detail and
certain elegant virtuosity. Discuss. (250 words)
Difficulty level: Tough
Reference: Insights on India , ccrtindia.gov.in
Why the question:
To write about the various features of Pala school of art.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by giving a brief about the origins of Pala school of art.
Body:
First, write about the detailed features of Pala school of art – Pala style was transmitted chiefly by
means of bronze sculptures and palm-leaf paintings, celebrating the Buddha and other divinities.
Next, write about development of naturalistic style among Pala style and attention to detail.
Elaborate with examples.
Conclusion:
Introduction

The Pala dynasty ruled from 8th century to 12th century CE in the regions comprising Bihar and
Bengal. The development of art which had been in a full-fledged manner during the Mauryas and
Guptas was further carried out by Palas. Distinctive achievements of Palas are seen in the arts of
architecture, sculpture, terracotta, painting and wall painting.
Body
Characteristics of Pala art:
 Architecture:
 Various mahaviharas,Stupas ,chaityas,temples and forts were constructed. Most of the

architecture was religious with the first two hundred years dominated by Buddhist art and
the last two hundred years by Hindu art.
 Among the various mahaviharas, Nalanda, vikramashila, somapura, Traikutaka, Devikota,

Pandita, Jagaddala vihara are notable. Planned residential buildings for monks were made.
 Somapura Mahavihara, a World Heritage Site, was built by Dharmapala
 A large number of manuscripts on palm-leaf relating to the Buddhist themes were written
and illustrated with the images of Buddhist deities at these centres which also had
workshops for the casting of bronze images.
 Somapura mahavihara at Paharpur ,a creation of Dharmapala is one of the largest Buddhist

vihara in Indian sub continent ,its architectural plan had influenced the architecture of
countries like Myanmar and Indonesia.
 Temples:
 The temples are known to express the local vanga style.
 The ninth century siddheshvara mahadeva temple in Baraker shows a tall curving shikara
crowned by a large amalaka and is an example of the early pala style.
 The rock cave temple at Kahalgaon (9th century)shows the gabled vault roof characteristic of
the South Indian architecture.
 Terracotta:
 Artistic and beautiful forms of terracotta were developed during the pala period. This art
was developed for the purpose of decoration. Under this form of art such statues are made
on walls which depict scenes from the religious and general life styles.
 The terracotta plaques recovered from paharpur amply demonstrate the excellence of the
art in the pala period.
 Painting:
 The earliest examples of miniature painting in India exist in the form of illustrations to the
religious texts on Buddhism executed under the Palas of the eastern India .
 There are two forms of painting manuscripts and wall painting
 Manuscripts were written on palm leaves .In these paintings scenes of life of Buddha and
several god and goddess of Mahayana sects are depicted.

 The impact of tantricism on these paintings are easily visible.
 Red,blue,black and white colours are used a primary colours
 Pala painting is characterized by sinuous line, delicate and nervous lines ,sensuous
elegance, linear and decorative accent and subdued tones of colour.
 It is naturalistic style which resembles the ideal forms of contemporary bronze and stone
sculpture and reflects some feeling of classical art of Ajanta with sensuous bias of art of
Eastern India.
 Wall painting has been found in Saradh and Sarai sthal in Nalanda district. At the bottom of
the platform made of granite stone flowers of geometric shapes, images of animals and
humans are found.
 Pala sculpture:
 The Gupta tradition of sculptural art attained a new height under the patronage of Pala
rulers.
 The art incorporated lot of local characteristics in Bengal under the Palas and it continued
right up to the end of 12th century.
 The sculptures of stones and bronze were constructed in large numbers mostly in monastic
sites of nalanda,Bodh Gaya etc
 Most of the sculptures drew their inspiration from Buddhism. Apart from Buddha
sculptures of gods and goddess of Hindu Dharma like surya, Vishnu, Ganesh etc were
constructed.
 The finest sculptures include a female bust ,two standing Avalokiteshwara images from
Nalanda
 Buddhist sculptures is characterized by a prominent and elaborately carved black slab and
lotus seat frequently supported by lions.
 Generally only frontal parts of the body have been shown in the sculptures. The front as
highly detailed and decorated.
 Due to influence of tantrism the sculptures of god were given different touches like that of
female ,animal etc.
 Bronze casting was an important feature of pala sculptures.
 Also present examples of artistic beauty carved out of stone sculptures. These are made of
black basalt stones .
 The pala style is marked by slim and graceful figures, elaborate jewellery and conventional
decoration
 The main features of pala sculptures is their free flowing movement. Almost all figures are
of similar sizes and were carved out of grayish or white spotted sandstone.
Conclusion

The Pala art came to a sudden end after the destruction of the Buddhist monasteries at the hands of
Muslim invaders in the first half of the 13th century. Some of the monks and artists escaped and fled
to Nepal, which helped in reinforcing the existing art traditions there. Ramapala was the last strong
Pala ruler. After his death, a rebellion broke out in Kamarupa during his son Kumarapala’s reign. So
due to rebellions art was not focussed much.
Nurtured for centuries, classical dances in India have evolved in different parts of the
country, in their own distinct style taking on the culture of that particular region, each
acquiring its own flavour. Elaborate. (250 words)
Why the question:
To write about the various features and evolution of various classical dances in India.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Explain that dance has always been considered ad a complete art and has had a close association
with god and worship. The earliest examples of dance in India can be traced back to the dancing
pictures in Bhimbetka caves and the bronze statue of a dancing girl in Mohenjodaro.
Body:
First, enumerate the list of 8 classical dances on India and the major region they are practised.
Next, mention the evolution of classical dances over the years and how each classical dance show
cultural aspects of that regions and are distinct from one another. Substantiate with examples.
Conclusion:
Introduction
The earliest examples of dance in India can be traced back to the dancing pictures in Bhimbetka
caves and the bronze statue of a dancing girl in Mohenjodaro. Most of the classical dance forms
originated in temples. Worshipping was the main aim. Although every dance form evolved from
different regions, their roots are the same. The roots can be traced from the Sanskrit text – ‘Natya
Shastra’. The first compilation of Natya Shastra is dated between 200BCE and 200CE.
As time passed, artists improvised many classical dances which resulted in the present day forms.
Body
Classical dances of India: Evolution


The Natya Shastra is the foundational treatise for classical dances of India, and this text is
attributed to the ancient scholar Bharata Muni.

Its first complete compilation is dated to between 200 BCE and 200 CE, but
estimates vary between 500 BCE and 500 CE.

The most studied version of the Natya Shastra text consists of about 6000 verses structured
into 36 chapters. The text, states Natalia Lidova, describes the theory of Tāṇḍava dance

(Shiva), the theory of rasa, of bhāva, expression, gestures, acting techniques, basic steps,
standing postures – all of which are part of Indian classical dances.

Dance and performance arts, states this ancient text, are a form of expression of spiritual
ideas, virtues and the essence of scriptures.
 While the Natya Shastra is the revered ancient text in the Hindu tradition, there are
numerous other ancient and medieval Sanskrit dance-drama related texts that further
discuss and expand on the classical repertoire of performance arts, such as the Abhinaya
Darpana, Abhinava Bharati, Natya Darpana, Bhava Prakasa and many others. The term
"classical"( "Shastriya") denotes the ancient Indian Shastra-based performing arts.
The Sangeet Natak academy recognizes below dances as classical dances.
 Bharatanatyam, from Tamil Nadu: Bharatnatyam dance is known to be ekaharya, where

one dancer takes on many roles in a single performance.
 The dance involves transitional movements of leg, hip and arm. Expressive eye
movements and hand gestures are used to convey emotions.
 Kathak, from Uttar Pradesh: The word Kathak has been derived from the word Katha which
means a story.
 It was primarily a temple or village performance wherein the dancers narrated

stories from ancient scriptures.
 Kathak began evolving into a distinct mode of dance in the fifteenth and sixteenth
centuries with the spread of the bhakti movement.
 The legends of Radha-Krishna were enacted in folk plays called rasa lila, which
combined folk dance with the basic gestures of the kathak story-tellers.
 Kathakali, from Kerala: Chakiarkoothu, Koodiyattam, Krishnattam and Ramanattam are

few of the ritual performing arts of Kerala which have had a direct influence on Kathakali in
its form and technique.
 Kathakali is a blend of dance, music and acting and dramatizes stories, which are
mostly adapted from the Indian epics.
 Heavy make-up and stunning costumes (elaborate masks, huge skirts and big head-
dresses) are used.
 Kuchipudi, from Andhra Pradesh: Kuchipudi is the name of a village in the Krishna district of
Andhra Pradesh which has a very long tradition of dance-drama. It was known under the
generic name of Yakshagaana.
 In 17th century Kuchipudi style of Yakshagaana was conceived by Siddhendra Yogi.
He was steeped in the literary Yakshagaana tradition being guided by his guru
Teerthanaaraayana Yogi who composed the Krishna-Leelatarangini, a kaavya in
Sanskrit.
 Odissi, from Odisha: The major subjects of performance are lores of incarnations of Lord
Vishnu and verses of Jayadeva’s Gita Govinda.

 A soft dance backed by soothing lyrics and is similar to Bharatanatyam in terms of

the mudras and expressions.
 Sattriya, from Assam: The Sattriya dance form was introduced in the 15th century A.D by
the Vaishnava saint and reformer of Assam, Sankaradeva as a medium for propagation of
the Vaishnava faith.
 The dance form evolved and expanded as a distinctive style of dance later on.
 Because of its religious character and association with the Sattras (Vaishnava maths
or monasteries), this dance style has been named Sattriya.
 Manipuri, from Manipur: The dance in Manipur is associated with rituals and traditional
festivals, there are legendary references to the dances of Shiva and Parvati and other gods
and goddesses who created the universe.
 Mohiniyattam, from Kerala: Mohiniyattam or dance of Mohini (an incarnation of Lord

Vishnu) is the classical solo dance form of Kerala.
 References of Mohiniyattam can be found in the texts Vyavaharamala written in
1709 by Mazhamagalam Narayanan Namputiri and in Ghoshayatra, written later by
poet Kunjan Nambiar.
 It was structured into the present-day classical format by the Travancore Kings,
Maharaja Kartika Tirunal and his successor Maharaja Swati Tirunal (18th-19th
century)
Conclusion
The style of Indian classical dancing is very vibrant and motivational. It is a style of dance that is like a
communication with the gods. Indian classical dancing usually happens at festivals and cultural
events. The dancers who perform this kind of dance usually is a professional dancer that has had a
lot of practice in that specific style of Indian classical dancing. In Indian classical dancing the
professional dancers usually dance to beat of the song or sound that is playing.
Value addition
Government reviving classical dance
 The government of India puts continuous efforts in preserving, promoting the Indian classical
dances in India and abroad as well.
 The establishment of Sangeet Natak Akademi, Delhi and its allied centers and constituent
bodies boosted the development of these classical dances.
 The grand Classical dance festivals like Khajuraho, Konark, Dhauli Kalinga, Kalidas,
Mukteshwar, Soorya, Ellora, Nishagandhi etc., displays the beautiful representation of
Indian Classical Dances.
 The classical dances flourished and developed further with the establishment of Music and
Dance Universities like Indira Kala Sangeet Vishwavidyalaya, Khairagarh, Raja Mansingh
Tomar University, Gwalior etc. and the various Institutions like Akhil Bharatiya Gandharva

Mahavidyalaya Mandal, Prayag Sangeet Samiti. They not only added to the development of
it but also helped the classical dance forms to reach till common people.
The present Indian music has grown and evolved from ancient times and was more or
less uniform before the 13th century. Later it bifurcated into the two musical systems
– Hindustani and Carnatic. Compare and contrast both systems. (250 words)
Why the question:
To write about the evolution of music and compare Hindustani and Carnatic music.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Give a brief introduction about Indian music. One can state facts, historical genesis of Indian music.
Body:
First, Hindustani and Carnatic music are the two main sub-genres of Indian classical music. While
Hindustani music originated in the Vedic period, Carnatic music originated during the Bhakti
Movement. Give the detailed differences between the two.
Next, Highlight similarities between Hindustani classical and Carnatic music.
Conclusion:
Introduction
Music has always been an important part of Indian life. The range of musical phenomenon in India
extends from simple melodies to what is one of the most well- developed "systems" of classical
music in the world. There are references to various string and wind instruments, as well as several
kinds of drums and cymbals, in the Vedas. Some date the advent of the system of classical Indian
music to Amir Khusro. Muslim rulers and noblemen freely extended their patronage to music. In the
courts of the Mughal emperors, music is said to have flourished, and the Tansen was one of the
jewels of Akbar's court.
The great poet-saints who chose to communicate in the vernacular tongues brought forth a great
upheaval in north India and the Bhakti or devotional movements they led gained many adherents.
The lyrics of Surdas, Tulsidas, and most particularly Kabir and Mirabai continue to be immensely
popular. By the sixteenth century, the division between North Indian (Hindustani) and South Indian
(Carnatic) music was also being more sharply delineated.
Body
Evolution of Indian music from ancient times
 It is generally believed that Indian classical music has its origins in the religious observances
of the Aryan people who arrived in India some 3,000 years ago

 The Aryans brought with them their sacred texts known as the Vedas, meaning ‘knowledge’
forming the core of ancient Hindu scriptures with their worship rituals largely centring on
the highly structured and organised recitation of these verses.
 Thus, the roots of Indian classical music can be traced back to its origin in the recital of
Vedic hymns of the Hindu temples
 There are four main Vedas, of which the one known as Samaveda (from saman, roughly
translating to ‘melody’) is the most relevant – as the texts contained in it were clearly meant
to be sung whilst also acting as treatises about music, dance and theatre.
 The seven swaras of music – Sa, Re, Ga, Ma, Pa, Dha, Ni represent different scriptural deities:
SA – Agni, RE – Brahma, GA – Saraswati, MA – Shiva, PA – Vishnu, DHA – Ganesha, NI – Surya
 Ancient musical treatises show that by 300 BC, there was already a marked difference in
classification for what was known as marga Sangeet (music of the gods) and Desi Sangeet
(music of the people).
 The latter formed the basis for what evolved as folk music, varying region by region, but the
former remained the sole domain of those who were considered adequately trained by a
master
 The earliest treatise on music, drama and dance is Bharata’s Natyashastra
Hindustani music: Features
 The six primary ragas in Hindustani classic are- Bhairava, Kausika, Hindola, dipak, sriraga
and Megh
 Ragas in Hindustani classic music used to strictly observe the time theory. Ex: Bhairavi at
dawn, Megh in the morning
 Ragas in Hindustani music are also associated with feelings and moods. Ex: Bhairavi with
awe and fear, Kausika with joy
 It has a highly formalized grammar, dictated by textual as well as oral tradition.
 Hindustani music places more emphasis on improvisation and exploring all aspects of a
raga
 Slow and sometimes even leisurely introductory section (alap) followed by solfege and fast
section with fast melodic phrases and rhythmic play
 There is significant emphasis on space between the notes
 Hindustani classical music has been influenced considerably by Persian traditions
 Musical instruments used in Hindustani are Tabla, Sarangi, Sitar, Santoor, Flute and violin.
 Main styles in Hindustani music– Dhrupad, Khayal, Tappa, Chaturanga, Tarana, Sargam,
Thumri and Ragasagar, Hori and Dhamar.
Carnatic music: Features

 It is an indigenously developed style of classical music
 The Melakarta scheme is a highly comprehensive and systematic formula which includes
within its fold all the modes used in ancient as well as modern systems of music of the
different parts of the world.
 It is strongly Kriti-based
 Unity of raga, tala and shruti in every piece
 The system gives equal importance to melody and rhythm.
 Mixing the three degrees of speeds
 Fewer instruments are used in Karnataka than in northern Indian music, and there are no
exclusively instrumental forms.
 There is an even balance between re-creativity (soulful interpretation of the compositions of

great masters) and creativity (on the spot improvisations).
 Some of the important Carnatic music compositions are- Gitam, suladi, svarajati,
Jatisvaram, varnam, kritanam, kriti, pada, javali, pallavi etc
Comparison between Hindustani and Carnatic music
 Hindustani originated in North India. It was influenced by foreign traditions. Carnatic

originated in South India. No such foreign influence.
 In Carnatic there is Unity of raga, tala and Sruti in every piece. No strict adherence to these
factors in Hindustani.
 Raga development is phrase by phrase in Carnatic music while it is note by note in

Hindustani.
 There are many gharanas in Hindustani and no such prevalence in Carnatic.
 In Carnatic there is equal importance to vocal and instruments while in Hindustani

importance is to the vocal.
Conclusion
Care must be taken to ensure sufficient funding is provided to classical artists to pursue their art
Awareness training at the school-level could help in encouraging the students to take up classical
music training. Creating sufficient livelihood opportunities for traditional artists in the country
Institutions such as ‘Sangeet Natak academy’ has to be equipped with sufficient resources to
research and come up with solutions to ensure all aspects of the rich tradition of music continues to
survive and thrive in the society
As a source of identity, cultural heritage is a valuable factor for empowering local

communities and enabling vulnerable groups to participate fully in social and cultural
life. Elaborate. (250 words)

Why the question:
To write about the importance of cultural heritage.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by defining cultural heritage.
Body:
Write about the importance of heritage in empowering local communities – livelihood provision, skill
enhancement, social security etc. Substantiate with examples.
Next, write about the other ways cultural heritage is important.
Conclusion:
Introduction
Cultural Heritage is an expression of the ways of living developed by a community and passed on
from generation to generation, including customs, practices, places, objects, artistic expressions and
values. Cultural heritage includes tangible culture (such as buildings, monuments, landscapes,
books, works of art, and artifacts), intangible culture (such as folklore, traditions, language, and
knowledge), and natural heritage (including culturally significant landscapes, and biodiversity)
Body
Cultural heritage empowering local communities
 People belonging to diverse communities, speaking different languages, having different

food, performing different customs harmoniously co-exist in India. Thus, the soul of cultural
heritage of India lies in the fact that it’s an all-embracing confluence of religions, traditions,
customs and beliefs.
 Such cultural heritage can also bridge gaps between communities and reduce the events of
communalism and tensions between various religious groups. Eg: Taj Mahal is visited by
crores of Indians transcending communities.
 It also helps build fraternity in the country, as the citizens can be collectively proud about
the rich heritage owned by India.
 It has the potential to boost soft power abroad and harness the same to attract many
tourists in India.
 India’s diverse heritage can unite the Indian diaspora in different countries and show
solidarity especially in global arena. Eg: People contributing to save India’s heritage
monuments and keeping them clean.
 People who follow different ideologies and comprehensive doctrines can come together to
resolve issues that plague Indian community and society and agree towards common values.

 Traditional skill can be enhanced and marketed well globally and this can be done by
leveraging art and handicrafts of India from ancient times.
Importance of cultural heritage
 Over the years, numerous styles of art, architecture, painting, music, dance, festivals and
customs have developed in India and this wide variety has made the Indian culture
unparalled to which the entire world still looks up to.
 The cultural heritage of India still flourishes maintaining its original features together along
with changes,a key indicator of its strength.
 India’s cultural heritage is not only one of the most ancient but it is also one of the most
extensive and varied. From ancient times to the present many races and religions came
here and left their imprints on the culture.
 These people either came into contact with India temporarily or permanently settled within
her borders to evolve a distinctive Indian culture.
 This resulted in a synthesis of many cultures. With the result India, due to its rich
and precious Cultural and Natural heritages, came to be known as the land of great
wonders and diversities.
Conclusion
The Culture of India refers to the way of life of the people of India. India’s languages, religions,
dance, music, architecture, food, and customs differ from place to place within the country.
The Indian culture is often labelled as an amalgamation of several segments of cultures, including
traditions that are several millennia old. It spans across the entire Indian sub-continent. Many
elements of India’s diverse cultural segments have had a profound impact across the world.
An artistic movement of great importance flourished under the aegis of the Pallava
rulers of Kanchi and they are credited with having building some of the outstanding
temples and sculptures. Discuss. (250 words)
Why the question:
A demand has been raised to declared Kanchipuram as an UNESCO world heritage site.
To write about the transformation in Pallava architecture from rock cut to stone built temples.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by mentioning how Pallavas laid the foundation of south Indian architecture.
Body:
Discuss about the four stages of temple development and explain how they evolved from rock cut
structure to stone built temples. Mention the major features of early stages of Dravidian architecture
under Pallavas. Highlight along with examples.
Next, write about development of sculpture along with examples under Pallavas.
Conclusion:
Conclude by commenting on the pioneer nature of Pallavan contributions to Indian art and
architecture.
Introduction
The Pallava dynasty existed between the 3rd and 9th centuries CE, ruling a portion of what is today
Andhra Pradesh (early Pallavas) and Tamil Nadu (later Pallavas).The tradition of direct patronization
of the temples began with the Pallavas. Starting with rock-cut temples, Pallava sculptors later
graduated to free-standing structural shrines which inspired Chola temples of a later age.
Body
Perhaps no other empire has garnered appreciation for their contribution to rock-cut architecture as
Pallavas. Some of the monuments created by Pallavas during their rule through rock excavation have
garnered the worldwide admiration for its beauty and the skills displayed by the artists. Pallava
sculpture shows greater details of workmanship, lighter anatomy and more developed artistic
finishing.
They were the pioneers of South Indian art and architecture as they had introduced the stone
architecture in the Tamil country. Even as a building material, stone was not or rarely used here,
possibly because of its strong association with funerary customs. The fascination of carving whole
temples into the living rock which spread over India during the first millennium AD had not yet
seized the South by the end of the 6th century. Their contributions are still extant because granite
was used for building temples and carving sculptures.
Evolution of architecture of Pallavas
 Pallava architecture can be now sub-divided into two phases – the rock cut phase and the
structural phase.
 Rock cut phase:
 The rock cut phase lasted from the 610 to 668 AD and consisted of two groups of monuments
– the Mahendra group and the Mamalla group.
 The Mahendra group is the name given to monuments constructed during the reign
of Mahendravarman I
 The monuments of this group are invariably pillared halls hewn out of mountain faces.
 These pillared halls or mandapas follow the prototype of Jain temples of the period.
 The best examples of Mahendra group of monuments are the cave temples at
Mandagapattu, Pallavaram and Mamandur.
 The second group of rock cut monuments belong to the Mamalla group .
 During this period free-standing monolithic shrines called rathas were constructed
alongside pillared halls.
 Some of the best examples of this style are the Pancha Rathas and Arjuna’s Penance at
Mahabalipuram.
 Free standing temples:

 The second phase of Pallava architecture is the structural phase when free-standing shrines
were constructed with stone and mortar brought in for the purpose.
 The Rajasimha group encompasses the early structural temples of the Pallavas when a lot of
experimentation was carried out.
 The best examples of this period are the Shore Temple at Mahabalipuram and
the Kanchi Kailasanathar Templeat Kanchipuram both constructed by Narasimhavarman
II who was known as Rajasimha.
 The best example of the Nandivarman group of monuments is the Vaikunta Perumal Temple
at Kanchipuram.
Conclusion
During this period, Pallava architecture attained full maturity and provided the models upon which
the massive Brihadeeswarar Temple of the Cholas at Thanjavur and Gangaikonda Cholapuram and
various other architectural works of note were constructed.
The recent announcement of 11 ancient temples in Kancheepuram making it to the UNESCO’s

tentative list of world heritage sites opens an avenue for the region to be back on the tourism map.
This will ensure better care of the structures as the final honour brings with it international
recognition.
Modern Indian history from about the middle of the eighteenth century until the
present- significant events, personalities, issues.
Compare and contrast the Permanent Settlement and Mahalwari Settlement,
introduced by the British. What were the impact of the new forms of revenue
settlements introduced by the British? (250 words)
Difficulty: Easy
Reference: A Brief History of Modern India by Spectrum Publishers
Why the question:
The question is part of the static syllabus of General studies paper – 1.
To bring out the major differences between Permanent settlement and Mahalwari settlement and to
write about the overall impact of Permanent, Ryotwari and Mahawlari settlement on Indian
agriculture.
Directive:
Introduction:
Begin by briefly writing about the nature of the two settlements.
Body:
In detail, bring out the differences between both the settlement systems – context of introduction,
areas of introduction, fixation of Land revenue, collection of revenue and revision of land revenue etc.
Next, write about the overall impact these Land Revenue systems on Indian agriculture –
Commercialization of Agriculture, Fragmentation of Lands, Absentee Landlordism, indebtedness of
peasants and depressing effect upon the rural economy etc.
Conclusion:

Write about how these impacts led to mobilization of peasants and over a period of time, the
peasant issues became a part of mainstream national movement.
Introduction
Land revenue was one of the major sources of income for Britishers in India. There were broadly
three types of land revenue policies in existence during the British rule in India.
Before independence, there were three major types of land tenure systems prevailing in the
country:
 The Zamindari System
 The Mahalwari System
 The Ryotwari System
Body:
Zamindari System Mahalwari System
Under the Zamindari system, the land revenue was Under the Mahalwari system, the land revenue was
collected from the farmers by the intermediaries collected from the farmers by the village headmen
known as Zamindars. on behalf of the whole village.
In this system, the entire village is converted into

Zamindari system was started by the Imperialist East
one big unit called ‘Mahal’ and treated as one unit
India Company in 1793.
as far as payment of land revenue is concerned.
Lord Cornwallis entered into ‘Permanent

Settlement’ with the landlords with a view to Mahalwari system was popularised by Lord William
increase land revenue. Under this arrangement, the Bentinck in Agra and Awadh. It was later extended
landlords were declared as zamindars with full to Madhya Pradesh and Punjab.
proprietorship of the land.
The responsibility of collecting and depositing the
The Zamindars were made responsible for the rent lied with the village headmen.
collection of the rent.
The share of the government in the total rent

The Mahalwari system is found to be less
collected by the zamindars was kept at 10/11th, and
exploitative than the Zamindari system.
the balance going to zamindars.
The system was most prevalent in West Bengal,

The system was prevalent in Agra, Awadh, Punjab,
Bihar, Orrisa, UP, Andhra Pradesh and Madhya
Orrisa and Madhya Pradesh.
Pradesh.
Impact of British land revenue policies:

 Pauperisation of the rural economy:The rural economy as a whole was affected. All the
classes from zamindars to peasants were affected. Many lost their livelihoods due to loss of
land and right to cultivate.
 Shifting from food crops to cash crops:In order to meet the high revenue demand the
farmers had to shift from food to cash corps like indigo, cotton, which led them to buy food
grains at higher prices and sell the cash crops at low prices.
 Food scarcity and famines:The shifting to cash crops and decreasing productivity of land
badly affected the society in the form of famines. This led to many famines in India, causing
death of millions.
 Increase in money-lending: The land settlements introduced a market economy with cash
payments of revenue. This led to an increase in money-lending activities, which put Indian
peasants under debt, which were exploited by money lenders.
 Led to inequalities: The Land tenure system led to increase in social inequalities. While rich
defended their properties, the poor didn’t have any resources to do so. Further due to
illiteracy they were exploited by money lenders for interests.
 Handicrafts and industries affected:It impacted circular economy. The peasants and
zamindars earlier had purchasing power to buy handicrafts. Loss of income of peasants
affected the handicrafts industry too. Handicrafts men resorted to agriculture that further
put pressure on land. The industries were affected due to lack of raw materials.
 Impact on local administration: It deprived village panchayats of their two main functions:
land settlements and judicial and executive functions. Thus the old politico-economic-social
framework of village communities broke down.
Conclusion:
The overall impact of the all this was stagnation and deterioration of agriculture. It led to series of
famines in 19th century. The unsustainable system led to series of peasant revolts. The miseries of
the peasant were one of the important cause for the revolt.
Throw light on the administration of the Maratha’s under Shivaji with a special
emphasis on his agricultural policy. What lessons can the present-day policy makers
learn from it? (250 words)
Reference: firstpost.com
Why the question:
The way Shivaji handled all aspects of administration, especially the agriculture sector, can be the
guiding spirit for the modern-day administrators and policymakers of India.
To write about administration of Shivaji, his agricultural policy and lessons for present day
administrators.
Introduction:
Start by giving context of Shivaji as the first Maratha king and an able administrator.
Body:
First, write about the key aspects of the overall administration of Shivaji and his organisation of
administration.

Next, write about the Shivaji’s agricultural policy and its various features.
Next, write about the key lessons that can be drawn by the present-day policy makers form the
administration of Shivaji. Cite examples to substantiate.
Conclusion:
Introduction
Shivaji’s administration was greatly inspired from the Deccan style of administration. Most of the
administrative reforms were inspired from Malik Amber reforms in Ahmednagar. The King was the
supreme head of state who was assisted by a group of eight ministers known as the ‘Ashtapradhan’.
The peshwa, also known as the mukhya pradhan, originally headed the advisory council of the raja
Shivaji.
Body
Shivaji was a great administrator. He laid the foundations of a sound system of administration. The
king was the pivot of the government. He was assisted by a council of
ministers called Ashtapradhan. However, each minister was directly responsible to Shivaji.
System of administration and officials under Shivaji’s Maratha Kingdom

 Most of the administrative reforms of Shivaji were based on the practices of the Deccan
sultanates. For example, Peshwa was the Persian title. The revenue system of Shivaji was
based on that of Malik Amber of Ahmadnagar.
 Official setup
o Peshwa: Finance and general administration. Later he became the prime minister.
o Sar-i-Naubat or Senapati: Military commander, an honorary post.
o Amatya: Accountant General.
o Waqenavis: Intelligence, posts and household affairs.
o Sachiv:
o Sumanta: Master of ceremonies.
o Nyayadish:
o Panditarao: Charities and religious administration.
 The forts played an important role in the military operations of the Marathas. By the end of
his reign, Shivaji had about 240 forts. Each fort was put under the charge of three officers of
equal rank as a precaution against treachery.
 Shivaji was really a constructive genius and nation-builder.
 His rise from jagirdar to Chatrapathi was spectacular.
 He unified the Marathas and remained a great enemy of the Mughal empire. He was a
daring soldier and a brilliant administrator.
Agricultural policy of Shivaji

 Lands were measured by using the measuring rod called kathi. Lands were also classified
into three categories – paddy fields, garden lands and hilly tracks.
 He reduced the powers of the existing deshmuks and kulkarnis.
 He explicitly ordered a decree to support farmers and bring wasteland under cultivation and
increase the revenue.
 If a farmer could continue agriculture but unable to pay arrears of dues and is therefore in
dire straits, then the realisation of dues was suspended.
 He also ordered his officials to provide seeds and oxen to farmers who could not afford it or
did not already have the adequate resources. Such grants were also interest free in nature.
 A lot of support with respect to trade was also done to increase the price of produce, but
levying customs duties wherever required.
Lessons for modern India
 Those who are offering blanket freebies in present day India in terms of waivers of farm
loans can probably take a leaf out of Shivaji’s administrative book in terms of following
the principle of economic prudence while taking care of the interests of the farmers.
o The money advanced for oxen and grain should subsequently be realized, gradually,
and according to his ability without charging an interest.
 Ensuring benefits reach to farmers directly through the government, without any
middlemen in the fray.
o The direct benefit transfer is a good example of this.
o In the coming time, fertiliser subsidy must also be done away with and appropriate
cash transfers must happen to prevent any leakage.
 Market system: Bringing efficient trade policy, levying proportionate duties on imports,
ensuring free trade through ports and removing restrictions are good measures that can be
emulated.
 Aid and regulation: In times of drought and monsoon failures, handholding of farmers is
required to help their livelihood income.
 Infrastructure creation: This will benefit all farmers from farmgate to plate, and help realise
more income for their products. It includes cold storage, warehouses, water for crops, reefer
trucks, mandi’s etc.
Conclusion
Shivaji had an able administrative setup which brought in efficiency and productivity. He has the
acumen to encourage farmers to bring in more land under cultivation. For this he had dedicated lot
of resources and personnel to assist the farmers. The same vision for Indian farmers today can surely
help in achieving the aim of doubling their incomes.

The simmering discontent of the tribal people broke out into popular uprisings in
different parts of India at different points of time due to the shared experience of
colonial oppression. Elaborate. (250 words)
Why the question:
The question is part of the static syllabus of General studies paper –1.
To write about how various forms of oppression resulted in various tribal revolts and its significance.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Start by mentioning that eighteenth and the nineteenth centuries witnessed many tribal uprisings
against the oppression of ruling class.
Body:
Mention about the various issues faced by tribals such as imposition of a high land revenue demand
by the state, corrupt practices, the colonial policies further aggravating their hardships such as
destruction of Indian handloom and handicraft industries eviction of peasants from their lands,
encroachment on tribal lands etc, money lenders, eviction etc. Cite a few instances of peasant and
tribal revolts such as Bhil, Mappila, Santhal etc to substantiate your points.
Next, Write about its significance of these tribal revolts.
Conclusion:
Conclude by mentioning that in the long run up to the National freedom struggle, the Peasants and
tribals struggle evolved and became part of main stream national movement eventually.
Introduction
The Tribal population, being conservative, was interested in retaining the existing salient features of
their society. Tribal movements were inspired by revolutionary tendencies. They wanted to make
use of the situation to fight and eliminate evils and ill-tendencies that existed in the contemporary
tribal society. Before British influence, tribals had depended on the forest for food, fuel and fodder.
They practiced shifting cultivation (jhum, podu, etc.), taking recourse to fresh forest lands when their
existing lands showed signs of exhaustion. The colonial government changed all this.
Body
The causes for the tribal uprisings included
 Imposition of Land revenue Settlement. For instance, Famine, enhanced land revenue
demands and economic distress goaded the Chuar aboriginal tribesmen of the Jungle Mahal
of Midnapore district and also of the Bankura district (in Bengal) to take up arms.
 British policies and acts like the establishment of the Forest department in 1864,
Government Forest Act (1865) and Indian Forest Act (1878)which restricted the activities
of tribals in forest areas led to their ire against the British. g.: Koya revolt against British for
denial of tribal’s rights over forest areas.
 Extension of settled agriculture. E.g.: : The British expansion on their territory led to
an uprising by the martial Pahariyas of the Raj Mahal Hills in 1778.

 New excise regulations which imposed a ban on tribals to make their own liquor, an
important trait of their culture.
 Large scale transfer of forest land. g.: large-scale transfers of land from Kol headmen to
outsiders like Hindu, Sikh and Muslim farmers and money-lenders who were oppressive
and demanded heavy taxes.
 Restrictions on shifting cultivation in forest. For e.g.: Khasi and Garo rebellions against
occupation of hilly land and ban on shifting cultivation.
 Introduction of the notion of private property.
 Exploitation by low country traders and money lenders. E.g.: Santhal rebellion against
moneylenders and traders. The Ulgulan uprising against money lenders
 Work of Christian Missionaries and against the interference of other religions such as
Hinduism, Islam and Christianity. g: Tana Bhagat Movement
Significance
 The uprisings helped create an united notion against the oppressive nature of British rule.
 It laid bare the colonial rule of East India company.
 It played an important role in bringing the tribal people together and imparting to them the
consciousness of belonging to one country.
 The Tribal rebellions in India took place for social, cultural and political reasons, particularly
against the acquisition of their land and exerted their rights over forest resources.
Reasons for failure
 Though these early movements created a healthy culture promoting expression of local
dissent against authoritarianism, they also faced certain limitations.
 Though as single events, these revolts were powerful and pervasive in their region; from the
national perspective, they were localised and isolated events that didn’t capture the popular
imagination of the nation at large. This limited the effect that these uprisings could have
had.
 Additionally, most of these uprisings arose from dissatisfaction over local grievances, and
the rest of the nation could not identify with the agitating persons and express empathy for
their grievances.
 The uprisings were not revolutionary in ideas, thought or ideology, but were just external
manifestations of protests over particular grievances.
 They presented no alternate solution to the public, and failed to galvanise them into action.
 The leaders of most of these uprisings were semi-feudal in character and hence, had a
traditional, conservative outlook.
 They were easily satisfied if the British provided even minor concessions or agreed to their
specific demands.

 Hence, no large scale reform of society was perceived or even demanded for by the people
participating in these protests.
Conclusion
It is evident that the colonial rule even, during the days of the east India Company witnessed
numerous uprising and disturbances. These varied grievances reached their climax in the revolt of
1857, which in spite of targeting certain groups of Indians remains the prominent uprising against
the British before the beginning of the Indian Freedom movement.
The Freedom Struggle – its various stages and important contributors

/contributions from different parts of the country.
What were the causes behind the Surat Split? Examine its short- and long-term impact
on the national movement. (250 words)
Reference: Chapter 11 – India’s Struggle for Independence by Bipin Chandra.
Why the question:
To discuss and contrast the ideologies and methods of Moderates and Extremists which ultimately
resulted in the Surat Split.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by giving context.
Body:
Write about the factors that led to the split -Bring out the shortcomings of liberal moderates and
their disconnect with the masses and the rise of extremists to fill this gap. Contrast the ideas of
Extremists vis-à-vis the Moderates such as use of methods of appeals as against the radical moves,
belief in masses, use of press with a strong language against the British by Tilak, personalities such as
Aurobindo promoting superiority of our own civilisation etc.
Next, write about the short-term impact of the split.
Next, write about the long-term impact of the split.
Conclusion:
Mention that although the end was to attain Swaraj, the means to achieve it was different in the
eyes of the Moderates and Extremists and that mutual distrust lead to the Surat split.
Introduction
In the early twentieth century the nationalism was gaining fervour so Curzon decided to
divide Bengal, to break the unity of Indians and to check the growth of nationalism. This move was
inception point to Surat split of INC in 1907. The ideological difference
between moderates and extremists further widened with moderates opposing the resolutions on
Swaraj, Swadeshi, Boycott of foreign goods and National Education and also there as issue with the
leadership of congress sessions as well that ultimately led to Surat split.

Body
causes behind the Surat Split
 There was a great deal of public debate and disagreement among Moderates and Extremists
in the years 1905-1907, even when they were working together against the partitioning of
Bengal.
 The Extremists wanted to extend the Swadeshi and the Boycott Movement from Bengal to
the rest of the country.
 They also wanted to gradually extend the boycott from foreign goods to every form of
association or cooperation with the colonial Government.
 The Moderates wanted to confine the boycott part of the movement to Bengal and were
totally opposed to its extension to the Government.
 Matters nearly came to a head at the Calcutta Congress in 1906 over the question of its
Presidentship.
 A split was avoided by choosing Dadabhai Naoroji.
 Four compromise resolutions on the Swadeshi, Boycott, National Education, and Self-
Government demands were passed.
 Throughout 1907 the two sides fought over differing interpretations of the four resolutions.
 By the end of 1907 the Extremists were convinced that the battle for freedom had begun as
the people had been roused.
 Most of them felt that the time had come to part company with the Moderates
 Most of the Moderates, led by Pherozeshah Mehta, were no less determined on a split. They
were afraid that the Congress organization built carefully over the last twenty years, would
be shattered.
Impacts of Surat split
Short term
 Following the Surat Split in 1907, the Moderates demanded colonial self-government in
contrast to the Extremists’ demand for total independence.
 The moderates’ constitutional politics did not impress the British government, as evidenced
by the Morley-Minto Reforms of 1909.
 The Moderates had lost touch with the nationalism’s younger generation. The younger
generation desired results, which fuelled the rise of revolutionaries.
 Following the incarceration of leaders such as Bal Gangadhar Tilak, the moderate-dominated
Congress went dormant.
 Separate electorates were granted to Muslims in 1909. This was a setback for Congress
because the most critical and vocal elements were not included in the INC.
Long-term

 To suppress militant nationalists, the British used a divide and rule strategy.
 Extremism was mostly confined to Bengal, Maharashtra, and Punjab, where the rise in
terrorist activity allowed the government to unleash repression.
 The exit of the Extremist left the Congress paralysed for more than a decade as the
Moderates could achieve very little.
 It was only in 1916 after re-entry of the Extremists and exit of the Moderates (1918) that the
Congress was reactivated.
 But now it was a different story all together. Mohandas Karamchand Gandhi had entered
the political scene and associated himself with the programme of the Extremist.
 He represented a new synthesis of faith and reason, law and impulse and inaugurated a new
era in Modern India History.
Conclusion
British policy of Divide and Rule, saw a major victory in form of Surat Split and the British believed
that they were in control of the affairs of the INC after significant period of time. While the
leadership of the Congress remained in the hands of the Moderates for some time more, as the
Extremists worked separately till 1916. Later both groups reunited at Lucknow session of Congress in
1916 due to the efforts of the leaders of Home Rule movement.
History of the world will include events from 18th century such as industrial
revolution, world wars, redrawal of national boundaries, colonization,
decolonization.
Though the winds of change in 1960’s brought independence to a lot of African states,
but the political turmoil that followed resulted in severe economic exploitation and
backwardness. Analyse. (250 words)
Reference: History of modern world by Jain & Mathur
Why the question:
Problems faced by African nations after independence, and the role played by the United Nations in
helping resolving their problems.
Directive word:
Analyse – When asked to analyse, you must examine methodically the structure or nature of the
topic by separating it into component parts and present them in a summary.
Introduction:
Introduce the answer by writing about decolonisation of Africa and how it took place.
Body:
The problems faced by independent African nations were not very different. List the common
problems, and use examples. Also cite some unique problems that plagued individual African
countries (ex: apartheid in South Africa), Civil wars in western Africa, emergence of dictators etc.
Mention the impact of the above on African countries and link it with present day.
Conclusion:
Conclude by highlighting how African countries to this day are being affected by their colonial past.

Introduction
Between 1945 and 1960, three dozen new states in Asia and Africa achieved autonomy or outright
independence from their European colonial rulers. There was no one process of decolonization. In
some areas, it was peaceful, and orderly. In many others, independence was achieved only after
a protracted revolution. A few newly independent countries acquired stable governments almost
immediately; others were ruled by dictators or military juntas for decades, or endured long civil
wars.
Body
Background
 The process of decolonization coincided with the new Cold War between the Soviet Union
and the United States, and with the early development of the new United Nations.
 Decolonization was often affected by superpower competition, and had a definite impact on
the evolution of that competition.
 It also significantly changed the pattern of international relations in a more general sense.
 The creation of so many new countries, some of which occupied strategic locations, others
of which possessed significant natural resources, and most of which were desperately poor,
altered the composition of the United Nations and political complexity of every region of the
globe.
Problems faced by independent African nations
 Lack of manufacturing capacity: These new countries also lacked the manufacturing
infrastructure to add value to their raw materials.
o Rich as many African countries were in cash crops and minerals, they could not
process these goods
o g.: Kwame Nkrumah – the first prime minister and president of Ghana – knew,
political independence without economic independence was meaningless.
 Lack of infrastructure: One of the most pressing challenges African states faced at
Independence was their lack of infrastructure.
o European imperialists prided themselves on bringing civilization and developing

Africa, but they left their former colonies with little in the way of infrastructure.
 Lack of National Identity: The borders Africa’s new countries were left with were the ones
drawn in Europe during the Scramble for Africa with no regard to the ethnic or social
landscape on the ground.
 Straight line countries: There was, before the arrival of Europeans, no such territory as
‘Nigeria’ or ‘Mali’, ‘Namibia’ or ‘Gabon’; these were arbitrarily made-up places designed to
suit European priorities.
o These nations pushed together ethnic groups that had over centuries usually
had nothing to do with one another, spoke different languages, worshipped
different religions and had long histories of rivalry and suspicion.

 Series of military coups: Post-colonial West Africa has had more than its fair share of
military coups. The 1960s were called the decade of coups in the sub-region.
o E.g.: The coup syndrome began in Togo in January 1963, when the army deposed
and killed President Sylvanus Olympio.
o Nigerian army leader General Johnson Aguiyi-Ironsi seized power also in January
1966 and killed Prime Minister Tafawa Balewa.
 Cold war: Cold War politics also presented an opportunity for factions that sought to
challenge the new governments.
o E.g.: In Angola, the international support that the government and rebel factions
received in the Cold War led to a civil war that lasted nearly thirty years.
Impact of the above on African countries
 Little regard for the National Constitution: As soon as a civilian government is overthrown,
the military junta puts aside the Constitution, proscribes all political activities and rules by
decree.
o This is a very undemocratic behaviour on the part of the military rulers.
 Human rights abuses: Military rulers have little regard for the rights and freedoms of the
individual.
o The arbitrary arrest, detention and killings of politicians and others connected with
the ousted regime and massive destruction or looting of property are disturbing
features of military rule.
 The fallacy of rescuing the state: In the majority of the coups that have occurred, the
military has sometimes deemed it a national and patriotic obligation to rescue the country
from total collapse and restore lost national prestige.
o But this is not always the case. Most military regimes have turned out to be more
corrupt, oppressive and self-seeking than the civilian governments they toppled.
 Pervasive poverty: Africa today is one of the most under developed continents and hosts
the world poorest and starved population on earth.
 Genocides: The worst genocides in history took place in Rwanda, where millions were killed.
Conclusion
In spite of the abundant natural resources that most African countries possess, they are still
economically poor and under-developed. The living standards of the people are very low and basic
social services are deplorable. The roots of the major socio-economic problems facing African
countries today can be traced back to the colonial period and the influence of neo-colonialism.


Salient features of Indian Society, Diversity of India.

What are seismic waves? Explain the internal structure of the earth in reference to
seismology. (250 words)
Why the question:
To write about how we can understand the interior of earth by using Seismic waves.
Directive word:
Explain – Clarify the topic by giving a detailed account as to how and why it occurred, or what is the
context. You must be defining key terms wherever appropriate and substantiate with relevant
associated facts.
Introduction:
Begin by mentioning that the structure of Earth’s deep interior cannot be studied directly but
geologists use seismic (earthquake) waves to understand the interior structure of earth.
Body:
First, define what are seismic waves and their types.
Explain, how the difference in their properties helps us to understand the earth’s interior. Also, draw
a neat labelled diagram for better presentation of your answer.
Conclusion:
Mention the significance of understanding the interior of the earth.
Introduction
Seismic waves are caused by the sudden movement of materials within the Earth, such as slip along
a fault during an earthquake. Volcanic eruptions, explosions, landslides, avalanches, and even
rushing rivers can also cause seismic waves. Seismic waves travel through and around the Earth and
can be recorded with seismometers.
Body:
Understanding the structure of the earth’s interior (crust, mantle, core) and various forces (heat,
seismic waves) emanating from it is essential to understand the evolution of the earth’s surface, its
current shape and its future, the geophysical phenomenon like volcanism, earthquakes, earth’s
magnetic field, the internal structure of various solar system objects, the evolution and present
composition of the atmosphere for mineral exploration.
Earthquake waves and interior of the earth:

 They are the most important source available to understand the layered structure of the
earth.
 All natural earthquakes take place in the lithosphere. Earthquake waves are basically of two
types — body waves and surface waves.

 Body waves are generated due to the release of energy at the focus and move in all
directions travelling through the body of the earth. Hence, the name body waves.
 The body waves interact with the surface rocks and generate new set of waves called
surface waves. These waves move along the surface.
 The velocity of waves changes as they travel through materials with different densities. The
denser the material, the higher is the velocity. Their direction also changes as they reflect or
refract when coming across materials with different densities.
 There are two types of body waves. They are called P and S-waves. P-waves move faster and
are the first to arrive at the surface. These are also called ‘primary waves’.
 The P-waves are similar to sound waves. They travel through gaseous, liquid and solid
materials.
 S-waves arrive at the surface with some time lag. These are called secondary waves. An
important fact about S-waves is that they can travel only through solid materials. This
characteristic of the S-waves is quite important.
 It has helped scientists to understand the structure of the interior of the earth. Reflection
causes waves to rebound whereas refraction makes waves move in different directions.
 The variations in the direction of waves are inferred with the help of their record on
seismograph. The surface waves are the last to report on seismograph. These waves are
more destructive. They cause displacement of rocks, and hence, the collapse of structures
occurs.
 Earthquake waves get recorded in seismographs located at far off locations. However, there
exist some specific areas where the waves are not reported. Such a zone is called the
‘shadow zone’. The study of different events reveals that for each earthquake, there exists
an altogether different shadow zone.
Conclusion:
The velocity of seismic waves changes as they travel through materials with different elasticity and
density. The more elastic and denser the material is, the higher is the velocity. They also undergo
refection or refraction when they come across materials with different densities. Earth’s internal
structure can be understood by analyzing the patterns of reflection, refraction and change in velocity
of the seismic waves when they travel through it.
Role of women and women’s organization; population and associated issues,

poverty and developmental issues,
What are the factors behind the continuance of child labour in India? Can universal
social protection help end the menace of child labour? Examine. (250 words)
Reference: Money Control
Why the question:
World Day Against Child Labour 2022: This year, the day is being marked with the theme “universal
social protection to end child labour”.
To write about the causes behind child labour menace and role of universal social protection in
ending it.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by giving statistic relating to child labour in India.
Body:
First, write about the various measures to curb child labour and reasons for its continuance despite it
– Poverty, inequality, lack of educational opportunities, slow demographic transition, traditions and
cultural expectations etc.
Next, write about universal social protection – what it is, how it can help in curbing child labour. Cite
examples and facts. Also, mention its shortcomings and how that can be addressed.
Conclusion:
Conclude with a way forward and importance of ending child labour in achieving SDG’s.
Introduction
Child labour typically means the employment of children in any manual work with or without
payment. It is a deep rooted social ill in India. As per the 2011 Census, in the age group 5-14 years,
10.1 million of 259.6 million constituted working children. The true extent of the impact of the
COVID-19 pandemic on child labour is yet to be measured but all indications show that it would be
significant as children are unable to attend school and parents are unable to find work. However,
not all the factors that contribute to child labour were created by the pandemic; most of them were
pre-existing and have been exposed or amplified by it.
The United Nations observes June 12 each year as the ‘World Day Against Child Labour’ to bring
attention to the evil practices of child labour across the world. The International Labour
Organisation launched this day in 2002 to tackle this global issue against child labour.
Body
Factors behind continuance of child labour in India
 Poverty
o The main reason for child labour is poverty.
o Poverty forces families to push their children to work for a living.
 Lack of educational resources
o There are instances where children are deprived of their fundamental right to
education.
o There are areas with no proper facilities of education.
o Lack of affordable school for poor children leaves them illiterate and helpless which
push them into the trap of child labour.
 Social and economic backwardness
o Due to illiteracy, many times parents are not aware of various information and
schemes for child education.
o Lack of education, illiteracy and lack of awareness of their rights have encouraged
child labour.
o Also, uneducated parents do not know about the impact of child labour on their
children.
 Disease or Disability
o In many families, due to disease or disability, there is no earning, and the child’s
wages are the sole means of family’s sustenance.
 Poor compliance of laws
o In the absence of proper compliance of the laws, child labour is continuing.
o It can be prohibited only by strict adherence to the related laws.
 Lure of cheap labour
o Some shopkeepers, companies and factory owners employ children so that they
have to pay less to them.
o With the development of globalization, privatization, and consumerist culture, the

need for cheap labour and its linkage with economic needs of poor families have
encouraged child labour.
 Discrimination between boys and girls
o Even today some believe that girls are weaker and there is no equal comparison
between boys and girls.
o Considering girls weaker than boys deprives them of school and education.
o In labourer families, girls are found to be engaged in labour along with their parents.
Does universal social protection help end the menace of child labour
 By reducing family poverty risks and vulnerability, supporting livelihoods and school
enrolment amongst other things, government social protection systems are essential in the
fight to eradicate and prevent child labour.
 The good news is that in recent years many countries have significantly improved social
protection coverage, by strengthening their social protection systems, and establishing
effective social protection floors.
 However, global coverage is still too low: as of 2020, less than half of the global population
were effectively covered by at least one social protection benefit, leaving more than four
billion people wholly unprotected.
 Social protection coverage varies widely by region, broadly aligned with income levels.
 Measures to reduce the income insecurity of adults, including unemployment protection,
employment guarantee schemes, disability benefits, maternity benefits and social pensions,
also contribute to mitigating vulnerability for poor households, and can contribute to
preventing and reducing child labour.

 Within any broader social security system, building a national social protection floor is
particularly relevant to addressing vulnerabilities associated with child labour.
 Social protection floors provide a set of basic social security guarantees, including a basic
level of income security throughout the life cycle and access to essential health care.
 These basic guarantees, in turn, are essential in addressing the multifaceted economic and
social vulnerabilities which give rise to and perpetuate child labour.
 Where children and their families enjoy basic income security and access to essential health
care, and where the necessary education and other services are in place, child labour can be
effectively prevented.
Conclusion
Eliminating child labour is firmly placed within Goal 8 of the SDGs. A stronger nexus between the
discourse on SDGs and the discourse on eliminating child labour can take the advantage of
complementarities and synergies of a wide range of actors engaged in both areas of work. The fight
against child labour is not just the responsibility of one, it is the responsibility of all. Social
protection instruments can play an important role in reducing child labour by mitigating poverty and
economic vulnerabilities and enhancing poor families’ resilience.
Sustained growth of the India’s older population presents many socio-economic

challenges. We must quickly recognize the scope of the new demographic reality and
adjust current policies accordingly. Discuss. (250 words)
Reference: The Hindu , insights on India
Why the question:
A national survey carried out by the NGO HelpAge India has shown that as many as 47% of elderly
people are economically dependent on their families for income and 34% are relied on pensions and
cash transfers, while 40% of the surveyed people have expressed the desire to work “as long as
possible”, highlighting the need to pay greater attention to social security of senior citizens in the
country.
To write about the socio-economic issues faced by the elderly and the need to accommodate the
same in the policy making.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by citing statistic regarding the elderly population in India.
Body:
First, write about the various issues with population aging – affects economic growth, formal and
informal social support systems, and the ability of states and communities to provide resources for
older citizens.
Next, write about the various policies framed so far for welfare of senior citizens and their limitations.
Next, write about the changes that are needed in the above policies.
Conclusion:
Conclude by writing a way forward.
Introduction
In 2009, there were 88 million elderly people in India. By 2050, this figure is expected to soar over
320 million. Between 2000 and 2050 the overall population of the country is anticipated to grow by
60 per cent whereas population of people of age 60 years and above would shoot by 360 per cent.
The Maintenance and Welfare of Parents and Senior Citizens (Amendment) Bill, 2019 was cleared by
the Cabinet recently
Body:
Challenges posed by growing elderly population in India:
 Isolation and loneliness among the elderly is rising.
o Nearly half the elderly felt sad and neglected, 36 per cent felt they were a burden to
the family.
 Rise in age-related chronic illness:
o Heart disease, cancer, diabetes, and other chronic diseases will cause more death
and illness worldwide than infectious or parasitic diseases over the next few years.
o In developed nations, this shift has already happened. Dementia and Alzheimer’s
disease are expected to almost double every 20 years, as life expectancy increases.
 Special challenges for less developed nations:
o Poorer countries will carry the double burden of caring for older people with chronic
diseases, as well as dealing with continued high rates of infectious diseases.
 Increasing need for long-term care:
o The number of sick and frail elderly needing affordable nursing homes or assisted
living centers will likely increase.
 Rise in the Health care costs:
o As older people stop working and their health care needs increase, governments
could be overwhelmed by unprecedented costs.
o While there may be cause for optimism about population aging in some countries,
the Pew survey reveals that residents of countries such as Japan, Italy, and Russia
are the least confident about achieving an adequate standard of living in old age.
 Elderly women issues:
o They face life time of gender-based discrimination. The gendered nature of ageing is
such that universally, women tend to live longer than men.
o In the advanced age of 80 years and above, widowhood dominates the status of
women with 71 per cent of women and only 29 per cent of men having lost their
spouse.
o Social mores inhibit women from re-marrying, resulting in an increased likelihood of
women ending up alone.
o The life of a widow is riddled with stringent moral codes, with integral rights
relinquished and liberties circumvented.

o Social bias often results in unjust allocation of resources, neglect, abuse,

exploitation, gender-based violence, lack of access to basic services and prevention
of ownership of assets.
o Ageing women are more likely to get excluded from social security schemes due to
lower literacy and awareness levels.
 Ageing individual is expected to need health care for a longer period of time than previous
generations but elderly care for a shorter period of time
Roadmap for elderly care with passage of time
 As a signatory to Madrid International Plan of Action on Ageing (MIPAA), India has the
responsibility to formulate and implement public policy on population ageing.
 Issues of poverty, migration, urbanization, realization and feminization compound the

complexity of this emerging phenomenon. Public policy must respond to this bourgeoning
need and mainstream action into developmental planning.
 Gender and social concerns of elderly, particularly elderly women, must be integrated at the
policy level.
 The elderly, especially women, should be represented in decision making.
 With the WHO declaring 2020 to 2030 as “Decade of Healthy Ageing”, there is a need for
Institutes like AIIMS to be in the forefront in promoting healthy ageing.
 Increasing social/widow pension and its universalization is critical for expanding the extent
and reach of benefits.
 Renewed efforts should be made for raising widespread awareness and access to social
security schemes such as National Old Age Pension and Widow Pension Scheme. Provisions
in terms of special incentives for elderly women, disabled, widowed should also be
considered.
 Government must proactively work on life style modification, non-communicable disease

management, vision and hearing problem management and accessible health care through
Ayushman Bharat.
Conclusion
The elderly are the fastest growing, underutilized resource that humanity has to address many other
problems. Re-integration of the elderly into communities may save humanity from mindlessly
changing into a technology driven ‘Industry 4.0’ which futurists are projecting: an economy of robots
producing things for each other. Healthy elderly citizens can share their wealth of knowledge with
younger generations, help with child care, and volunteer or hold jobs in their communities.
What is the need for population control in the country? Do you think there is a need
for a population country law? Critically examine. (250 words)
Reference: The Hindu , Insights on India
Why the question:
A Mathura resident has asked the Supreme Court to direct the government to “ascertain the
feasibility” of enacting a “stringent population control law.”

To write about the need of population control and feasibility of a population control law.
Directive word:
Critically examine – When asked to ‘Examine’, we have to look into the topic (content words) in
detail, inspect it, investigate it and establish the key facts and issues related to the topic in question.
While doing so we should explain why these facts and issues are important and their implications.
When ‘critically’ is suffixed or prefixed to a directive, one needs to look at the good and bad of the
topic and give a fair judgment.
Introduction:
Begin by citing statistic regarding the population growth in India.
Body:
First, write about the need for population control – Social problems, Environment, Scarcity of
resources and services, Inflation and Standard of living etc.
Next, write about the feasibility of a population control law. Write its pros and cons in detail.
Conclusion:
Conclude by writing a way forward and a balanced opinion regarding the need of a population
control law
Introduction
India is projected to become the most populous country in the world by 2027 (currently at 1.37
billion). In 2050, India’s population is projected to be 1.69 billion, which will be higher than that of
China. Undoubtedly, India has a population problem, but any strategy to change fertility rates should
be carefully thought out. India’s population concern is largely restricted to Bihar, UP, Jharkhand,
Rajasthan and MP.
Body
Statistics on population
 The National Population Policy 2000 affirmed a commitment to achieve replacement levels
of fertility (total fertility rate of 2.1) by 2010.
 Ten states — Karnataka, Punjab, Gujarat, Assam, Telangana, Andhra Pradesh, West Bengal,
Maharashtra, Tamil Nadu and Kerala — and Jammu and Kashmir, have achieved this goal,
albeit much delayed.
 Kerala and Tamil Nadu had accomplished it decades earlier. This fertility decline over half of
India has cut across all sections of society — the privileged and the poor, those educated or
not, and the high and low caste.
 The National Family Health Survey-4 has shown how TFR has reduced even among illiterate
women from all religions in the southern states — even in Kerala and Telangana which have
a high proportion of Muslims.
 India has entered a demographic sweet spot that will continue for another two to three
decades. Half of India’s population is under 29 years of age, which means that in this
period, a greater proportion of young people will drive India’s economic growth and social
progress.
 So, they must not only be healthy, knowledgeable and skilled but must also be provided with
the rights and choices to develop to their fullest potential, including, and especially, sexual
and reproductive health and rights (SRHR).

Need for population control
 It is indeed a fact that population of India is growing and will continue to grow for the next
couple of decades.
 This is because, as compared to the past, there are a higher proportion of people in the
marriageable age group who will produce children, and people are now living longer.
 In India, the global demand for water in 2050 is projected to be more than 50 per cent of
what it was in 2000.
 The demand for food will double in the year 2050 and even if India manages to feed its
expanding population, its growth may not be ecologically sustainable.
 Though China’s one-child policy has been criticized as against human dignity and rights, it
has improved and controlled the nation’s population by a possible 400 million people as per
the report of East India Forum.
 If Population control won’t happen, there will be no resources left, and the growing
population’s demand will increase to the next level, resulting in increasing death rates
increasing in the country.
 Changing social norms is one of the biggest challenges for India to address the needs of the
next generation.
Thus, due to the burgeoning growth of Population it can lead to failure of realization of our
Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) namely the zero hunger, eradicating poverty etc. and
economic aspirations.
Need for population control law: Critical Analysis
 Counter-productive measure: Through an affidavit filed in court, the central government

argued that “international experience shows that any coercion to have a certain number of
children is counter-productive and leads to demographic distortions”.
 Against international obligations: India is committed to its obligations under international

law, including the contained in the International Conference on Population and
Development Programme of Action, 1994.
 Foremost in those principles was a pledge from nations that they would look beyond
demographic targets and focus instead on guaranteeing a right to reproductive freedom.
 Against right to reproductive freedom and privacy: In Suchita Srivastava & Anr vs
Chandigarh Administration (2009), the Court found that a woman’s freedom to make
reproductive decisions is an integral facet of the right to personal liberty guaranteed by
Article 21.
o However, In Javed & Ors vs State of Haryana & Ors (2003), the Court upheld a law
that disqualified persons with more than two children from contesting in local body
elections.
o In Devika Biswas vs Union of India (2016), the Court pointed to how these
population control camps invariably have a disparate impact on minorities and other
vulnerable groups.

 Negative consequences: An already skewed sex ratio may be compounded by families

aborting a daughter in the hope of having a son with a view to conforming to the two-child
norm.
Conclusion
Experiences from other States in India show us that there are more efficacious and alternative
measures available to control the growth of population, including processes aimed at improving
public health and access to education. Incentivise later marriages and child births; make
contraception easy for women and promote women’s labour force participation. This should be
substantiated with better education and awareness rather than an iron hand policy to control the
population. Government should improve the implementation of poverty alleviation measures which
can also help control population.
While the West is curtailing abortion rights, the Medical Termination of Pregnancy
(Amendment) Act, Surrogacy Regulation Act and Prohibition of Child Marriage
(Amendment) Bill, 2021, collectively give new meaning to women empowerment in
India. Critically analyse. (250 words)
Reference: The Hindu , Indian Express
Why the question:
The U.S. stands at that fraught juncture now, after its Supreme Court, in a 6-3 majority, overturned
the 1973 ruling in Roe vs Wade, and took away the constitutional right to abortion.
To write about various laws which have given choice and empowered Indian women and its
successes and limitations.
Directive word:
Critically analyze – When asked to analyse, you must examine methodically the structure or nature
of the topic by separating it into component parts and present them in a summary. When ‘critically’
is suffixed or prefixed to a directive, one needs to look at the good and bad of the topic and give a
balanced judgment on the topic.
Introduction:
Begin by giving context of overturning of Roe v Wade in U.S.A and its implications.
Body:
First, write about the Medical Termination of Pregnancy (Amendment) Act – it major features, its
Next, write about the Surrogacy Regulation Act – it major features, its successes and limitations.
Next, write about the Prohibition of Child Marriage (Amendment) Bill, 2021,– it major features, its
Conclusion:
Conclude with a way forward to overcome the limitations.
Introduction
The U.S. stands at that fraught juncture now, after its Supreme Court, in a 6-3 majority, overturned
the 1973 ruling in Roe vs Wade, and took away the constitutional right to abortion. In one blow, on
June 24, it withdrew from women anywhere in the country their right to reproductive and bodily
autonomy. With Roe, as well as the 1992 decision in Planned Parenthood vs Casey that upheld
Roe, gone, the court returned “the issue of abortion to the people’s elected
representatives”. States can now decide whether to ban abortion, and at what stage in a pregnancy
and under what circumstances.
Body
Background
 The fight over abortion has been the U.S.’s most passionately waged ideological battle.
 With a focus that denies any space for compassion or respect for liberty, conservatives have
prioritised the task of having Roe overturned for decades.
 With the court now having attained a conservative supermajority, the decision had been
imminent — some Republican-ruled States have started banning abortion, with trigger laws
in place in anticipation of such a judgment.
About Medical Termination of Pregnancy (Amendment) Act in India
Features
 The Act permits abortion to be allowed up to 20 weeks on the opinion of just one medical
practitioner.
 To terminate pregnancies between 20 and 24 weeks, the opinion of two doctors are
required. This extension of the gestation period up to 24 weeks is given for special
categories of women such as rape/incest victims, differently-abled women and minors.
 For abortions beyond 24 weeks, a state-level Medical Board will decide if it can be
permitted, in case of substantial foetal abnormalities.
 The Board will consist of a gynaecologist, a paediatrician, a radiologist or sonographer and

any other number of members as notified by the state government.
 Only doctors with specialisation in gynaecology/obstetrics can perform abortions.
 According to the Act, the “name and other particulars of a woman whose pregnancy has
been terminated shall not be revealed”, except to a person authorised by law.
 In cases where abortions are desired to terminate pregnancies arising out of rape, where the
gestation period exceeds 24 weeks, the only manner would be through a writ petition.
Success
 It will provide greater reproductive rights to women as abortion is considered an important

aspect of the reproductive health of women.
 Deaths and injuries from unsafe abortions are largely preventable provided services are
performed legally by trained practitioners.
 Raising the upper limit of legal abortions from 20 weeks to 24 weeks for “special categories
of women”, including rape and incest survivors, other vulnerable women, and children.
 It will completely be removing the upper gestation limit for abortion in the cases of
substantial foetal abnormalities will help many more seek safe and legal abortion services.
 Allowing all women, and not just married ones, to legally seek abortions, and striking out
the need for the opinion of a second registered practitioner for aborting pregnancies up to
20 weeks
Limitations
 Son meta-preference: The preference for a male child keeps sex determination centres in
business in spite of their illegal status. There are concerns that a more liberal abortion law
can aggravate this state-of-affairs.
 Foetal Viability: A key aspect of the legality governing abortions has always been the
‘viability’ of the foetus. Viability implies the period from which a foetus is capable of living
outside the womb.
o Currently, viability is usually placed at about seven months (28 weeks) but may
occur earlier, even at 24 weeks. Thus, late termination of pregnancy may get in
conflict with the viability of the foetus.
 Non-institutional deliveries: Only 22% of 15.6 million abortions happen in healthcare
facilities, there is no record of the others. We need far more providers at the lower levels of
healthcare delivery to ensure safe abortion services reach more women.
 Lack of Awareness of rights: A study of 1,007 women of ages 15-24 years in Assam and
Madhya Pradesh in November 2018 found only 20% young women know about modern
contraceptive methods, and 22% are aware that abortion is legal in India. None of the
women surveyed were aware of the correct legal gestation of 20 weeks
 Change of Choice: The current Act does not consider factors such as personal choice, a
sudden change in circumstances (due to separation from or death of a partner),
and domestic violence.
About Surrogacy Regulation Act
Features
 The Act sought to regulate the surrogacy part of a rather flourishing infertility industry in
the country.
 Defining ‘surrogacy’ as a practice where a woman undertakes to give birth to a child for
another couple and agrees to hand over the child to them after birth, it allows ‘altruistic
surrogacy’ — wherein only the medical expenses and insurance coverage is provided by the
couple to the surrogate mother during pregnancy
 India has emerged as a hub for infertility treatment, attracting people from the world over
with its state-of-the-art technology and competitive prices to treat infertility.
 Soon enough, due to prevailing socio-economic inequities, underprivileged women found

an option to ‘rent their wombs’ and thereby make money to take care of their expenses —
often to facilitate a marriage, enable children to get an education, or to provide for
hospitalisation or surgery for someone in the family.
 Once information of the availability of such wombs got out, the demand also picked up.
 Unscrupulous middle men inveigled themselves into the scene and exploitation of these
women began.
 Several instances began to emerge where women, in often desperate straits, started lodging
police complaints after they did not receive the promised sum.
Limitations

 As per the Surrogacy Act, a married couple can opt for surrogacy only on medical grounds.
 It also prescribes an age-criteria for both the man and woman.
 Though the law allows single women to resort to surrogacy, she has to either be a widow
or a divorcee.
o Single men are not eligible.
 The Bill raises questions over the reproductive rights of a woman. The right to life enshrines
the right of reproductive autonomy, inclusive of the right to procreation and parenthood,
which is not within the domain of the state, warranting interference of a fundamental right.
 Only a close relative of the couple can be a surrogate mother. She should have been
married, with a child of her own. She can only be a surrogate mother once.
 Even at the Bill stage, there was some apprehension about the too restrictive regulations.
For instance, it does not allow single (never been married) women, or men, or gay couples
to go in for surrogacy.
About Prohibition of Child Marriage (Amendment) Bill
By amending the Prohibition of Child Marriage Act (PCMA), 2006 and other personal law, the legal
age of marriage of women will be raised from 18 to 21 years.
Success
 Women and Child Welfare: The poverty of the mother plays the greatest role of all by far —
both in relation to her undernourishment and that of her child.
o An early age of marriage, and consequent early pregnancies, also have impacts on
nutritional levels of mothers and their children, and their overall health and mental
wellbeing.
 Women’s Empowerment and Gender Parity: The mother’s age at childbearing affects
educational level, living conditions, health conditions, decision-making power of women.
 Tackling Child Marriage: India is home to the largest number of underage marriages in the
world. The law will help to curb the menace of Child Marriage.
Limitation
 Difficulty in Fighting Child Marriage: The implementation of the child marriage law is
difficult.
o The evidence suggests that when the law is used, it is mostly to penalise young
adults for self-arranged marriages.
o The law to prevent child marriage does not work very well.
o While child marriage has declined, it has been marginal: from 27% in 2015-16 to 23%
in 2019-20, according to National Family Health Survey (NFHS) 5.

o 70% of early marriages take place in deprived communities such as Scheduled

Castes and Scheduled Tribes, and the law will simply push these marriages
underground instead of preventing them.
 Criminalisation of a Large Number of Marriages: The change will leave the vast majority of
Indian women who marry before they are 21 without the legal protections that the
institution of marriage otherwise provides, and make their families criminalizable.
 Lack of Education is a Bigger Problem: According to the State of the World Report 2020 by
UNFPA, in India, 51% of young women with no education and 47% of those with only a
primary education had married by age 18.
Conclusion
While the West is curtailing abortion rights, India is extending the ceiling of permissible
abortions. By outlawing triple talaq, the government has addressed the constant state of insecurity
faced by Muslim women. By proposing to revise the permissible marriageable age, the government
has held men and women to the same, unbiased standards. Even as the West retrogresses, India
shows the path to a progressive society.
Urbanization, their problems and their remedies.

Urban areas are increasingly shaping water security as they grapple with the
sustainable availability of water and navigate the barriers and options involved in
protecting people and ecosystems against water-borne stresses and water-related
hazards. Analyse. (250 words)
Reference: Down to Earth , Insights on India
Why the question:
Tokyo, Shanghai and Delhi: Global cities, fast-paced and exciting, symbolic of the rise of the new
Asian century. These cities are the three biggest in the world, engines of economic growth, producing
billions in economic activity for their residents and the world. But they have a problem: There is not
enough fresh water available per person for their daily needs.
To write water security in Urban areas, issues related to it and ways to ensure it.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by citing statistic related to water stress in Urban areas.
Body:
First, write the various issues associated with water scarcity in urban areas and its impact.
Substantiate with facts and examples.
Next, write about the possible solutions to ensure water security in urban areas to overcome the
above-mentioned issues.
Conclusion:
Introduction

The NITI Aayog report on Composite Water Management Index(CWMI) said that India is facing its
‘worst’ water crisis in history. Taps in Shimla went dry in summer of 2018, posing an unprecedented
water crisis in the hill town. According to a forecast by the Asian Development Bank, India will have a
water deficit of 50% by 2030.
The three biggest cities in the world - Tokyo, Shanghai and Delhi - engines of economic growth,
producing billions in economic activity for their residents and the world. However, they have a
problem: There is not enough fresh water available per person for their daily needs..
Body
Urban Water crisis
 Many large cities are prone to water issues. Population and economic growth have led to
environmental degradation.
 Existing water supplies simply can’t keep up with the growing needs.
 The issue is exacerbated by climate change where extreme weather events such as drought and
floods are becoming more common.
 Water security — having enough water to meet all living, irrigation and industry needs as well as
a healthy surplus to adapt to major disasters — is steeply in decline.
 For example, over-exploitation in Bangkok, Thailand, has severely reduced groundwater levels,
causing land to subside.
 Water sources around the city are also polluted due to the direct discharge of domestic sewage
into drains and canals.
 Similarly, Bangkok’s inadequate drainage capacity and its location in the Chao Phraya River
floodplains make it susceptible to flooding.
 Despite water being a prominent component of the Sustainable Development Goals, the United
Nations warns we are off-track on most targets relevant to water, food, and agriculture.
 Freshwater availability is half that of the global average in Asia.
 Water efficiency is also among the lowest in the world and a low water productivity means crop
yields are low despite the relatively large amount of water supplied in agriculture production.
 Climate experts have predicted that there will be fewer rainy days in the future but in those days
it would rain more.
Causative factors for water crisis:
 A combination of population explosion, unplanned growth of the city and its expansion to some
traditional catchment areas (a region from which rainfall flows into a river, lake, or reservoir)
have led to a reduction in the natural flow of water, and large-scale deforestation.
 Climate change, leading to much lower precipitation during the winter months. As a result, the
natural flow and recharge of water in the region has fallen sharply

 Failure of State governments to check unplanned development and exploitation of water

resources. There is no attempt at the central or state levels to manage water quantity and
quality
 The vegetation pattern has changed, tree cover is shrinking and unscientific dumping of debris in
water streams is rampant.
 The debris blocks the natural course of water bodies.
 Increasing number of tube wells resulting in depletion of groundwater.
 Changes in farming patterns lead to consumption of more water for irrigation and also change
the soil profile because of the use of fertilizers
 The states ranked lowest like Uttar Pradesh, Haryana and Jharkhand – are home to almost half
of India’s population along with the majority of its agricultural produce.
 There is also a lack of interest in maintaining India’s traditional water harvesting structures.
Measures needed:
 Structural measures:
 Putting in place an efficient piped supply system (without leakage of pipes) has to be top on
the agenda.
 Ancient India had well-managed wells and canal systems. Indigenous water harvesting
systems need to be revived and protected at the local level. Examples: Karez, Bawli, Vav etc
 Digging of rainwater harvesting pits must be made mandatory for all types of buildings,
both in urban and rural areas.
 Treating the Greywater and reusing it needs to be adopted by countries like Israel (upto
85%). It could be used to recharge depleted aquifers and use on crops.
 Initiatives such as community water storage and decentralized treatment facilities,

including elevated water towers or reservoirs and water ATMs, based on a realistic
understanding of the costs involved, can help support the city’s water distribution.
 Technologies capable of converting non-drinkable water into fresh, consumable water,

offering a potential solution to the impending water crisis are needed. Example:
Desalination technologies in Coastal areas, Water-sterilization in polluted water areas.
 Non-structural measures:
 The World Bank’s Water Scarce Cities Initiative seeks to promote an integrated approach,
aims at managing water resources and service delivery in water-scarce cities as the basis for
building climate change resilience.
 Groundwater extraction patterns need to be better understood through robust data

collection
 Decentralisation of irrigation commands, offering higher financial flows to well-performing

States through a National Irrigation Management Fund.

 Public awareness campaigns, tax incentives for water conservation and the use of
technology interfaces can also go a long way in addressing the water problem. Example,
measures such as water credits can be introduced with tax benefits as incentives for
efficient use and recycling of water.
 A collaborative approach like the adoption of a public-private partnership model for water
projects can help. Example, in Netherlands, water companies are incorporated as private
companies, with the local and national governments being majority shareholders.
 Sustained measures should be taken to prevent pollution of water bodies and

contamination of groundwater.
 Ensuring proper treatment of domestic and industrial waste water is also essential.
Conclusion
Primarily water is not valued in India. “People think it is free”. In order to meet the future urban
water challenges, there needs to be a shift in the way we manage urban water systems. An
Integrated Urban Water Management approach must be adopted which involves managing
freshwater, wastewater, and storm water, using an urban area as the unit of management.
Effects of globalization on Indian society

How can India move towards the essential and good aspects of modernity and yet
avoid the cons of Westernisation? Discuss the role that India becoming a Vishwa Guru
can play in this regard. (250 words)
Reference: Indian Express , Outlook India
Why the question:
For several years, talk of India becoming a Vishwa Guru – the teacher or knowledge-giver of the
world – has been in the air. Many take pleasure in rubbishing this idea. On the other hand, there are
others who are understandably very passionate about making this happen.
To write about India adopting good aspects of modernity while rejective cons of westernisation and
how being a Vishwa Guru can help in this regard.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Start by giving the need to adopt essential modernity and reject mindless westernisation.
Body:
First, write about modernity, its features and as to how India can adopt essential and good aspects of
it.
Next, write about westernisation, its cons associated with impact and ways to avoid it.
Next, write about India as Vishwa Guru and how being the Vishwa Guru can help India accept
essential elements of modernity while rejecting mindless westernisation.
Conclusion:
Introduction

For several years, talk of India becoming a Vishwa Guru – the teacher or knowledge-giver of the
world – has been in the air. Aurobindo dreamt of India becoming a leader that would lead the
humanity towards spiritualism. Modernity today in west has led to mindless consumerism that is
purely materialistic. India has embraced modernity while keeping its roots intact.
Body
Good aspects of modernity that India has embraced
 Gender equality: The empowerment of women and gender equality is an integral

component of a modern society and India has been making progress in this regard, even
though much remains to be done. Eg: uprooting patriarchy, equal wages, abolition of child
marriage and safety laws for women.
 Adoption of Science and Technology: From record agricultural production to advancements

in nuclear and space technology, from ensuring affordable healthcare to setting up world-
class educational institutions, from ayurveda to biotechnology, from giant steel plants to
becoming an IT power and having the third-biggest start-up ecosystem in the world.
 Transcending caste and class: Caste and creed are slowly going into shadows and there is
embracing of cosmopolitan culture in India.
 Economic development: Infrastructure growth in roads and railways, the rapid growth of
the telecom, technology and financial services sectors are some of the other defining
achievements of the Indian economy.
India as a Vishwa Guru
 India’s unique worldview emanating from our civilisational culture; secondly, our
remarkable achievements during the last 75 years; thirdly, our intrinsic strength to offer
something that the global community so very critically requires.
 Firstly, our civilisational culture has provided us with a strong philosophical foundation that
has several unique features. This needs to be shared world over. Eg : Yoga now is
internationally celebrated.
 These features make India what it is. Our spiritual democracy, where Ekam Sat, Vipra
Bahuda Vadanti (the truth is one, but the wise men describe the same differently) serves as
the cornerstone of our approach to diverse ways of worship, makes India a home for all
religions that live in harmony.
 This spiritual democracy has hugely contributed to the success of our political democracy.
Also unique is the essentially Indian concept of Antyodaya – that the most deprived are
considered the most deserving has helped us move beyond the binary of socialism and
capitalism.
 Besides, while the talk of sustainable development has been a part of global discourse only
for a few decades, our approach of respect and gratitude towards Mother Nature forms our
basis and thus we reject the notion of conquering Nature. After all, living in harmony with
Nature is the prerequisite of sustainability.
Conclusion

Sharing that worldview loud and clear with the requisite confidence and courage of conviction will
make the world understand that yes, India is a Vishwa Guru. Another important message of the Idea
of India is to consider the entire world as one family, or Vasudhaiva Kutumbakam. This is what
makes India aspire to be the knowledge-giver of the world. We were always a knowledge society
indulging in debates and exchanges of ideas. The basics of our philosophy have shaped our
worldview.
Social empowerment, communalism, regionalism & secularism.

How does hate speech pose a danger for the cohesion of a democratic society? What
steps are required to prevent hate speech and associated violence with it. (250 words)
Reference: Indian Express , The Hindu
Why the question:
The Government’s decision to take a stern view of hate speech targeting religious beliefs, to distance
itself from comments made by two spokespersons of the Bharatiya Janata Party (BJP), and to assert
India’s traditional values of tolerance and respect for all religions is both welcome and reassuring for
those within the country increasingly concerned about the increase in such speech.
To write about hate speech, its impact on the society and steps needed to curb it
Introduction:
Begin by defining hate speech.
Body:
First, in detail write about the impact of hate speech on society – affects human rights and the rule of
law. If left unaddressed, it can lead to acts of violence and conflict on a wider scale etc.
Next, write in detail about various legal and constitutional measures that have been provided for
curbing hate speech. Also, mention measures needed to curb hate speech.
Conclusion:
Introduction
The term hate speech is understood as any kind of communication in speech, writing or behaviour,
that attacks or uses pejorative or discriminatory language with reference to a person or a group
based on their religion, ethnicity, nationality, race, color, descent, gender or other identity factor.
The Law Commission, in its 267th report on hate speech, said such utterances have the potential to
provoke individuals and society to commit acts of terrorism, genocide, and ethnic cleansing.
There is no international legal definition of hate speech, and the characterization of what is ‘hateful’
is controversial and disputed.
Body
Impact of hate speech on the society
 Hate speech is a discursive process of pushing marginalised groups outside of social,

economic and political spheres of society by disseminating hate propaganda and
encouraging discrimination.
 At its most harmful, it is widely recognized as a precursor to ethnic cleansing.

 Internal Security: The Muzaffarnagar riots of 2013 was triggered by a fake video that incited
communal passions. In the West, hate speech combined with fake news on minorities has
induced an anti-immigration sentiment (e.g. : France, Italy, Greece)
 User homophily and Bubble phenomenon: Users with matching political views exchange
one-sided information and opinions that suit their own convictions, reinforcing them even
further, even if those were based on false information. E.g. : Twitter prompts users to follow
those who express similar views or posts.
 Igniting extremist sentiments: Fake news’ perpetuates, previously locally found, extremist
ideas and groups together dangerously like-minded people e.g. – Neo-Nazis in Germany,
Separatists in Kashmir.
 Mob lynching: Rumours of child lifting in Jharkhand led to mob lynching on innocent victims.
 Violence: An atmosphere of violence and chaos is created directly or indirectly. The

Christchurch Terror attack on a mosque by an extremist was a result of Islamophobia (a
direct result of hate speech).
 Misinformation and disinformation due to hate speech and fake news have led to riots as
seen in the Delhi Riots case 2020.
Measures needed
Measures:
 The world’s biggest social media companies, including Facebook, Google, Twitter and
ByteDance, are exploring an industry-wide alliance to curb fake news on their platforms in
India.
 The Election Commission of India must tie up with tech companies to identify the creator of
such news.
 Educating the end-users.
 The government should bring out a policy framework on the possible harm due to the
internet messaging platforms to engage at a deeper level.
 Imposing hefty fines, like in Germany the Social media companies face fines of up to €50m if
they persistently fail to remove illegal content from their sites.
Way forward
 Clarity and technological upgradationis needed to deal with this and a mechanism to get
down such material, which is prone to disturb social setup.
 Improving the level of training in equality and non-discrimination among police forces and
legal bodies,improving research and encouraging reporting of such content.
 Indian government has been pushing for internet platforms to locate their serversin the
country, which might help address dangerous speech in real time.
 Generating contra-narratives on social networks and raising public awarenessthrough

campaigns to tackle extremism.

 There can be an internationally accepted law that places the responsibility on social media
companieslike Facebook to tackle hate speech by deleting obviously illegal content within 24
hours if there is a request from the Government of a particular nation.
 Social media platforms need to take responsibility to ensuretransparency, accountability

and a system of rules and guidelines that users can recognize as standards, and which
when enforced in a regularized fashion can begin to act as precedents. Thus, users, police
and civil society actors will have a clear sense of what kind of material is likely to be taken
down.
 Public authorities must be held accountable for dereliction of the duty of care and also for
non-compliance with this court’s orders by not taking action to prevent vigilante groups
from inciting communal disharmony and spreading hate against citizens of the country and
taking the laws into their own hands.
 Therefore giving a proper definition to hate speech would be the first step to deal with the
menaceand other initiatives such as spreading awareness amongst the public is the need of
the hour.
Do you think that a Uniform Civil Code (UCC) could be a possible solution to end
communalism in the Indian society? Critically comment. (250 words)
Reference: The Hindu
Why the question:
Uttarakhand Chief Minister Pushkar Singh Dhami recently set up a committee to prepare a draft
Uniform Civil Code (UCC) for the State.
To critically write about the ability of UCC to address the issue of communalism in the society.
Directive word:
Critically comment – When asked to analyse, you must examine methodically the structure or nature
of the topic by separating it into component parts and present them in a summary. When ‘comment’
is prefixed, we must express our knowledge and understanding of the issue and form an overall
opinion thereupon.
Introduction:
Begin by defining Uniform Civil Code (UCC) and its objectives.
Body:
Bring out the shortcomings of the present personal laws and how these add to communalism in the
society.
Next, discuss in detail role a finely balanced UCC could play the development of the country –
uniformity of laws, achieving equality, simplification of law, progressive measure etc.
Next, discuss in detail the arguments against the UCC in India which might affect development
adversely – Lack of consensus, against cultural diversity, right of minorities, tribal customs etc.
Conclusion:
Conclude by giving a balanced opinion regarding the UCC.
Introduction
The Uniform Civil Code (UCC) in India proposes to replace the personal laws based on the scriptures
and customs of each major religious community in the country with a common set of laws governing
every citizen.

The constitution has a provision for Uniform Civil Code in Article 44, as a Directive Principle of State
Policy which states that “The State shall endeavour to secure for the citizens a uniform civil code
throughout the territory of India.”
Body
Issues with personal laws in India
 Communalism: Different personal laws promote communalism and it leads to discrimination

at two levels.
o First, between people of different religions.
o Second, between the two sexes

 Gender bias: Another reason why a uniform civil code is needed is gender justice. The rights
of women are usually limited under religious law, be it Hindu or Muslim.
o The practice of triple talaq was a classic example. Even today polygamous marriages
are allowed in certain religions which may deny rights to a woman.
 Against fundamental rights: Many practices governed by religious tradition are at odds with
the fundamental rights guaranteed in the Indian Constitution.
o Courts have also often said in their judgements that the government should move
towards a uniform civil code including the judgement in the Shah Bano case.
o The Supreme Court in Shayara Bano case (2017) had declared the practise of Triple
Talaq (talaq-e-bidat) as unconstitutional.
Role of UCC to bring a balance in development of the nation
A secular republic needs a common law for all citizens rather than differentiated rules based on
religious practices.
 Protection to Vulnerable Section of Society:
o The UCC aims to provide protection to vulnerable sections as envisaged by

Ambedkar including women and religious minorities, while also promoting
nationalistic fervour through unity.
 Simplification of Laws:
o The code will simplify the complex laws around marriage ceremonies, inheritance,
succession, adoptions making them one for all. The same civil law will then be
applicable to all citizens irrespective of their faith.
 Adhering to Ideal of Secularism:
o Secularism is the objective enshrined in the Preamble; a secular republic needs a

common law for all citizens rather than differentiated rules based on religious
practices.
 Gender Justice:
o If a UCC is enacted, all personal laws will cease to exist. It will do away with gender
biases in existing laws.
Arguments against UCC in India
The Law commission made certain sharp observation in this regard as follows.
 According to the 21st Law commission, a uniform civil code “is neither necessary nor
desirable at this stage”.
 Commission suggests certain measures in marriage and divorce that should be uniformly
accepted in the personal laws of all religions.
 Cultural diversity cannot be compromised to the extent that our urge for uniformity itself
becomes a reason for threat to the territorial integrity of the nation.
 A unified nation did not necessarily need to have “uniformity”. ”Efforts have to be made
to reconcile our diversity with universal and indisputable arguments on human rights.
 In fact, term “secularism” has meaning only if it assured the expression of any form of
difference. This diversity, both religious and regional, should not get subsumed under the
louder voice of the majority.
 At the same time, the Commission said, discriminatory practices within a

religion should not hide behind the cloak of that faith to gain legitimacy.
 It said the way forward may not be a uniform civil code, but the codification of all personal
laws so that prejudices and stereotypes in every one of them would come to light and
could be tested on the anvil of fundamental rights of the Constitution.
 By codification of different personal laws, one can arrive at certain universal principles that
prioritise equity rather than imposition of a uniform code, which would discourage many
from using the law altogether, given that matters of marriage and divorce can also be settled
extra-judicially.
 Significantly, the Commission suggested that nikahnama s should make it clear that
polygamy is a criminal offence and this should apply to “all communities”.
o This is not recommended owing to merely a moral position on bigamy, or to glorify

monogamy, but emanates from the fact that only a man is permitted multiple wives,
which is unfair
Way forward
 The social transformation from diverse civil code to uniformity shall be gradual and cannot
happen in a day. Therefore, the government must adopt a “Piecemeal” approach.
 Government could bring separate aspects such as marriage, adoption, succession and
maintenance into a uniform civil code in stages
 Government must emulate Goan practice of a common civil code, which has been the law
since 1867, when the state was under the Portuguese colonial rule.
 Moreover, when constitution espouses the cause of Uniform civil code in its article 44,
it shouldn’t be misconstrued to be a “common law”.
 The word uniform here means that all communities must be governed by uniform principles
of gender justice and human justice.

 It will mean modernization and humanization of each personal law.
 It would mean, not a common law, but different personal laws based on principles of
equality, liberty and justice.
 Government has to take steps towards increasing the awareness among the public,
especially minorities, about the importance of having a UCC.
Conclusion
If the framers of the Constitution had intended to have a Uniform Civil Code, they would have given
exclusive jurisdiction to Parliament in respect of personal laws, by including this subject in the Union
List. Even the law commission has suggested in against of the idea. The government needs to find a
moral backing a unanimous support across the sections of the society to undertake such an move.
What is your understanding of India’s civilisational heritage? How can it play a part in
uniting Indians and giving a sense of fraternity to all citizens? (250 words)
Why the question:
India’s civilisational heritage must be treated as a matter of pride — as one that unites every Indian.
To write about India’s civilisational heritage and its role in uniting Indians.
Introduction:
Begin by defining India’s civilisational heritage.
Body:
First, mention the major aspects of India’s civilisational heritage and how it has evolved throughput
the course of history.
Next, write about its role in promoting unity among masses – breaking stereotype, bridging gaps,
sense of solidarity etc.
Conclusion:
Introduction
Indian civilisation has always been dynamic, not static. Settlers and traders came to India from the
land and sea routes. India’s isolation was never complete, from the most ancient times. This resulted
in the development of a complex pattern of civilisation, demonstrated so clearly in the intangible
art and cultural traditions ranging from Ancient to Modern India, whether in the dancing Buddhas
of the Gandharva school of art which was strongly influenced by the Greeks, to the great tangible
heritage seen in the temples of North and South India.
Body
major aspects of India’s civilisational heritage and its evolution
 Nearly all the artistic remains of ancient India are of a religious nature, or were at least
made for religious purposes.
 Secular art certainly existed, although most of the existing sculpture and paintings
demonstrating this secular art have since vanished. In fact, very few paintings have survived
from ancient times.

 Literary references prove beyond question that painting was a very developed art in ancient
India.
o This is amply demonstrated in the existing murals of our cave temples. For want of
other evidence, an analysis and interpretation of the legacy of this period is based
on information from our ancient texts as well as surviving architectural and
sculptural remains.
 From a historical perspective, the Indus Valley Civilisation or the Harappan Culture as it is
more recently called, was the most extensive of our ancient civilisation.
o Political continuity between the Harappan culture and the later Aryan culture was
prevented by the timeframe between the decline of the former and rise of the latter
civilisation.
 The Aryan period saw the development of Vedic literature as well as the stories of the
Puranas. These are not entirely mythical events since it contents references to historical
events.
o The earliest literary source was the Rig Veda and the two epics, the Ramayana and
the Mahabharata.
 Their narration of events was challenged by Europeans positivism of the 19th century. The
Positivists argued that every narrative must be supported by historical evidence. The
relationship between myth, legend and fact in interpretation of our history has always
been difficult to explain to sceptical Western audiences.
o Perhaps it may never be possible to sift fact from fiction though certain historical
events such as the battle of Kurukshetra, can be supported by historical evidence.
 Culturally, however, the period of the later Vedic literature saw Indian philosophy and
thought evolving in the direction which it has followed ever since. It marked the beginning of
the great period of India’s culture where the pattern of her society, religion, literature and
art gradually assumed something of its present shape.
 India’s ancient culture did not perish with the coming of Muslim invaders, unlike the fate of
ancient Persian culture and civilisation Temple architecture from the 6th century show some
Greek influence while later the construction of the roof of the temple which had moved
from wood to stone showed some Muslim influence.
o This is apparent from a study of the temple architecture in the North which had the
Indo-Aryan style with a rounded top and curved outline and the Dravidian style
which was in the shape of a rectangular pyramid. However, some rigidity did come
in to protect the earlier culture.
 The invasion by the Turks, Persians and the Afghans brought in trade, a new style of
culture and a new language, apart from a new religion. With the end of Turkish rule and
rise of the Mughals who came from Samarkand, there evolved a distinct Indo-Islamic
style of art and culture, of which the Taj Mahal remains the most splendid example.
Role of India’s civilisational heritage

 India’s diverse heritage can unite the Indian diaspora in different countries and show
solidarity especially in global arena. Eg: When India was sanctioned due to nuclear testing,
many in US supported India. This goes true for Kargil war as well.
 People who follow different ideologies and comprehensive doctrines can come together to
resolve issues that plague Indian community and society and agree towards common values.
 Such civilisational heritage can also bridge gaps between communities and reduce the
events of communalism and tensions between various religious groups.
 It also helps build fraternity in the country, as the citizens can be collectively proud about
the rich heritage owned by India.
 It has the potential to boost soft power abroad and harness the same to attract many
tourists in India.
Conclusion
Having traced this legacy from ancient times, one can only marvel at how events shape history and
historical interpretations. The global contribution of our cultural and civilisational heritage is
increasingly recognised and respected internationally. We have a responsibility to understand,
nurture, strengthen and conserve this heritage for our future generations.
Salient features of world’s physical geography.

Examine the various factors influencing spatial variation of rainfall. How does air
pollution impact rainfall patterns in India? (250 words) (250 words)
Why the question:
To write about factors affecting rainfall and impact of air pollution.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by giving the factors that affect rainfall over an area.
Body:
In the first part write about the factors controlling the distribution of rainfall over the earth’s surface
are the belts of converging-ascending air flow (see doldrums; polar front), air temperature, moisture-
bearing winds, ocean currents, distance inland from the coast, and mountain ranges.
Next, Explain the change in pattern of rainfall – the erratic behaviour of monsoon rainfall, including
the phenomenon of concentrated heavy rainfall on a small number of days, could, at least in part, be
attributed to the rising air pollution. Explain that excess aerosols, suspended solid particles like dust,
smoke and industrial effluents, in the atmosphere is changing cloud patterns.
Conclusion:
Conclude by writing a way forward to mitigate the above.
Introduction

As temperatures increase, the amount of water vapour in the atmosphere increases and the
temporal and spatial distributions of precipitation change, resulting in large precipitation differences
in different regions of the world. Spatial variation of rainfall can be influenced by many factors like
for instance elevation, slope, aspect and prevailing wind directions. This depends on the
geographical and climatological characteristics of the area.
Body
Factors influencing spatial variation of rainfall
Factors controlling the distribution of rainfall over the earth’s surface are the belts of converging-
ascending air flow ( doldrums; polar front), air temperature, moisture-bearing winds, ocean currents,
distance inland from the coast, and mountain ranges.
 Ascending air is cooled by expansion, which results in the formation of clouds and the
production of rain.
 Conversely, in the broad belts of descending air ( horse latitudes) are found the great
desert regions of the earth, descending air being warmed by compression and consequently
absorbing instead of releasing moisture.
o If the temperature is low, the air has a small moisture capacity and is able to
produce little precipitation.
 When winds blow over the ocean, especially over areas of warm water (where evaporation
of moisture into the air is active) toward a given coastal area, that area receives more
rainfall than a similar area where the winds blow from the interior toward the oceans.
 Areas near the sea receive more rain than inland regions, since the winds constantly lose
moisture and may be quite dry by the time they reach the interior of a continent.
 The windward slopes of mountain ranges generally receive heavy rainfall; the leeward
slopes receive almost no rain.
o The southwest coast of Chile, the west coast of Canada, and the northwest coast of
the United States receive much rain because they are struck by the moisture-bearing
westerlies from the Pacific and are backed by mountains that force the winds to rise
and drop their moisture.
o The territories immediately east of the regions mentioned are notably dry.
 EL-NINO: EI-Nino is a complex weather system that appears once every three to seven years,
bringing drought, floods and other weather extremes to different parts of the world.
o The system involves oceanic and atmospheric phenomena with the appearance of
warm currents off the coast of Peru in the Eastern Pacific and affects weather in
many places including India.
Impact of air pollution on rainfall patterns in India

 A recent analysis by Climate Trends, a Delhi based communications initiative building a
narrative around climate ambition and low carbon development pathways, highlighted how
high pollution levels impacted monsoon patterns in a region.

 The analysis said with the levels of toxic pollution increasing, in the coming years,
monsoon rain may reduce by at least 10%.
 Rising levels of air pollution adversely impacts as the concentration of aerosols increases; it
leads to warming of the atmosphere but simultaneously cooling of the land surface.
 The air pollutants block the sun rays and interfere with the heating of the ground.
o Also, these particles decrease the heat received by the ground as they absorb a
fraction of the heat energy within themselves.
 For instance, the required surface temperature is 40°C, while the presence of air pollution
will result in restricting temperature up to 38°C or 39°C.
Conclusion
With climate change and changing rainfall patterns predicting weather and climate has become a
challenging task. Rainfall patterns need more research especially with the looming danger of climate
change. World over, people are dependent on rains for various activities including food security.
Hence more research and better prediction models are needed to under rainfall patterns today.
What are the various factors that affect the formation of Savanna type of climate?
Examine the various threats to Savanna biomes. (250 words)
Why the question:
Directive word:
Introduction:
Give a brief about Tropical savannas or grasslands that they are associated with the tropical wet and
dry climate type.
Body:
First, write about the factors conducive for Savanna type of climate – tropical regions 8° to 20° from
the Equator, warm to hot, The dry season is associated with the low sun period etc.
Next, mention that the Savanna climate provides for a diverse vegetation such as grasslands, hardy
weather proofed trees and diverse fauna and mention different Savanna regions such as East African,
Llanos, Pampas etc and how they differently impact their ecology.
Next, mention the various threats such as water logging, fire, drought, grazing etc.
Conclusion:
Conclude by stating that in the present context of Climate change it is imperative to address the
threats faced by the Savannas and ensure ecological balance.
Introduction
Savanna regions have two distinct seasons – a wet season and a dry season. There is very little rain
in the dry season. In the wet season vegetation grows, including lush green grasses and wooded
areas. As you move further away from the equator and its heavy rainfall, the grassland becomes
drier and drier – particularly in the dry season.

Body
Savanna biomes
Savannas – also known as tropical grasslands – are found to the north and south of tropical
rainforest biomes. The largest expanses of savanna are in Africa, where much of the central part of
the continent, for example Kenya and Tanzania, consists of tropical grassland. Savanna grasslands
can also be found in Brazil in South America.
Various factors that affect the formation of Savanna type of climate
 Savanna type of climate is located between 5°-20° latitudes on either side of the equator.
 Thus, savanna climate is located between equatorial type of climate (Af) and semi-arid and
subtropical humid climate.
 In other words, this climate is located between equatorial low pressure belt or rain
producing inter-tropical convergence and subtropical high pressure belt.
 The regions of Savanna climate are affected by low and high pressure systems in a year.
 Due to northward migration of the sun during summer solstice (21 June) the equatorial low
pressure belt and doldrum are shifted northward and thus Savanna climate comes under the
influence of Inter Tropical Convergence (ITC) which is associated with atmospheric
disturbances (cyclones) which yield rains.
 Due to southward migration of the sun during winter solstice (23 December) Savanna
climatic zone comes under the influence of subtropical high pressure belt and thus
anticyclonic conditions dominate the weather and bring dry conditions.
 The descending stable winds under anticyclonic conditions cause dry conditions.
 Besides, the coastal areas are affected by local winds and sea breezes.
 Eastern coasts are influenced by trade winds. Strong and high velocity tropical cyclones
dominate the weather conditions during warm season.
 It is apparent that the Savanna type of climate is induced due to the introduction of wet
summer and dry winter seasons because of northward and southward migration of the sun
respectively.
 Since the Savanna climate is located between equatorial wet and tropical dry climates and
hence there is gradual variation in weather conditions away from the equator as the aridity
increases poleward.
Various threats to Savanna biomes
 Anthropogenic activities
o Unsustainable water usage and irrigation methods could potentially dry up life-
giving rivers and water holes.
o In regions where indigenous people regularly include bushmeat – wild meat – in

their diet, ungulate populations have dropped at noticeable rates.

o Some savanna wildlife is also hunted as trophies; black rhinoceroses, in particular,

are hunted for their valuable horns.
o Even some plant species are over-harvested due to their commercial value.
o Carvings made from African Blackwood, a savanna tree, are often sold at tourists’
markets.
 Agriculture, drought and Heavy Grazing
o Agriculture is another environmental threat to the savanna. Large areas of land are
being cleared to grow crops and farm livestock. The livestock competes with local
animals for grazing and can decimate the natural ecosystem.
o Prolonged, severe drought has a dangerous effect on a savanna ecosystem, with

grazing patterns exacerbating this effect.
o The combination of severe drought and grazing can change a grassland of primarily
edible, perennial grasses to a savanna dominated by inedible grasses and plants.
 Desertification
o Tropical savannas often border on arid, desert regions, and the spread of desert-like
conditions into dry grassland areas is called desertification.
o This threat to a savanna ecosystem include effects caused by climate change,

farming practices, overgrazing, aggressive agricultural irrigation, which lowers the
level of the water table away from plant roots, deforestation and erosion.
o Each year, over 46,000 square kilometers of African savanna becomes desert.
 Carbon Emissions
o A 2012 survey attributed large increases in woody plant mass to the “CO2
fertilization effect.” The authors posited that the increase in the rate of woody plant
growth was caused by increasing atmospheric carbon dioxide.
o A dramatic increase in the amount of trees and shrubs could threaten the entire
savanna ecosystem, as these plants use more water than grasses.
Conclusion
While forests are undoubtedly great carbon sinks, grasslands are not all that far behind. Studies
reveal that restoring grasslands is an immensely effective and economical way to combat climate
change, as these landscapes store large amounts of carbon below ground. When a nuanced and
informed understanding of the importance of grasslands filters into conservation and climate change
policies, it will be win-win for pastoralists, grassland biodiversity, and the planet.
Explain in detail various landforms of glaciation and their significance. Analyse the
threats posed by black carbon to glaciers? (250 words)
Why the question: Why the question:
To write the various forms of glacial landforms and the impact of black carbon on glaciers.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by describing glaciers and its types.
Body:
In the first part, write about the erosional landforms created by the glaciers.
Next, write about the depositional landforms created by the glaciers.
Next, the significance of glacial landforms in geomorphic process, economy and ecology.
Finally, write about Black carbon – its heat trapping properties and its impact on glaciers – cite
recent examples to substantiate its impact.
Conclusion:
Mention a way forward to protect the glaciers from the effects of black carbon.
Introduction
A glacier is a large mass of ice that is persistently moving under its own weight over the land or as
linear flows down the slopes of mountains in broad trough-like valleys. Glaciers are formed in the
areas where the accumulation of snow exceeds its ablation (melting and sublimation) over many
years, often centuries. Glaciers move under the influence of the force of gravity.
Body
Key features of glacial landforms:
Erosional Landforms:
 Cirque:

o Cirques are horseshoe shaped, deep, long and wide troughs or basins with very
steep to vertically dropping high walls at its head as well as sides.
o Cirques are often found along the head of Glacial Valley
o The accumulated ice cuts these cirques while moving down the mountain tops.
o After the glacier melts, water fills these cirques, and they are known as cirque lake.
 Horns:
o Horns form through head-ward erosion of the cirque walls.
o If three or more radiating glaciers cut headward until their cirques meet, high, sharp
pointed and steep-sided peaks called horns form.
 Aretes:
o Arete is a narrow ridge of rock which separates two valleys.
o Aretes are typically formed when two glacial cirques erode head-wards towards one
another
o The divides between Cirque side walls or head walls get narrow because of
progressive erosion and turn into serrated or saw-toothed ridges referred to as
aretes with very sharp crest and a zig-zag outline.
 Glacial Valleys:
o Glaciated valleys are trough-like and U-shaped with wide, flat floors and relatively
smooth, and steep sides.
o When the glacier disappears, and water fills the deep narrow sections of the valley,
a ribbon lake is formed.
 Fjords/Fiords:
o A fjord or fiord is a long, narrow and steep-sided inlet created by a glacier
o They are formed where the lower end of a very deep glacial trough is filled with sea
water
o Fjords are common in Norway, Chile, and New Zealand etc.
 Hanging Valleys:
o A hanging valley is a tributary valley that is higher than the main valley. Hanging
valleys are common along glaciated fjords and U-shaped valleys.
o The main valley is eroded much more rapidly than the tributary valleys as it contains
a much larger glacier
o After the ice has melted tributary valley, therefore, hangs above the main valley
o The faces of divides or spurs of such hanging valleys opening into main glacial valleys
are quite often truncated to give them an appearance like triangular facets.
o Often, waterfalls form at or near the outlet of the upper valley

o Thus, the hanging valley may form a natural head of water for generating
hydroelectric power
Depositional Landforms:
 Outwash plains:
o An outwash plain is a plain at the foot of the glacial mountain
o They are made up of fluvioglacial sediments, washed out from the terminal
moraines by the streams and channels of the stagnant ice mass.
o As it flows, the glacier grinds the underlying rock surface and carries the debris
along.
 Moraines:
o The unassorted coarse and fine debris dropped by the melting glaciers is called
glacial till.
o The long ridges of deposits of these glacial till is called as Moraines
o Depending on its position, moraines are classified into be ground, lateral, medial
and terminal moraine.
 Eskers:
o An esker is a long, winding sinuous ridge of stratified sand and gravel

o Eskers are frequently several kilometres long and, because of their peculiar uniform
shape, are somewhat like railway embankments
o When glaciers melt in summer, the water flows on the surface of the ice or seeps
down along the margins or even moves through holes in the ice.
o These waters accumulate beneath the glacier and flow like streams in a channel
beneath the ice.
o Such streams flow over the ground with ice forming its banks.
 Drumlins:
o Drumlins are smooth oval shaped ridge-like features composed mainly of glacial till
with some masses of gravel and sand.
o The drumlins form due to the dumping of rock debris beneath heavily loaded ice
through fissures in the glacier.
o The long axes of drumlins are parallel to the direction of ice movement.
o They may measure up to 1000m in length and 30-35 m or so in height.
o One end of the drumlins facing the glacier called the stoss
Significance of Glaciers:
 Glaciers and Thermo (heat) Haline (salt) Circulation:

o The melting fresh water from glaciers alters the ocean, not only by directly
contributing to the global sea level rise, but also because it pushes down the heavier
salt water, thereby changing the currents in the ocean.
 Glaciers and winds:
o As the planet’s air conditioner, the polar ice caps impact weather and climate
dynamics, such as the jet stream.
 Glaciers and climate change:
o Glaciers are also early indicators of climate changes that will have a somewhat more
delayed impact on other parts of the Earth system. Glaciers are sentinels of climate
change.
 Glaciers provide drinking water:
o People living in arid climates near mountains often rely on glacial melt for their
water for part of the year. e.g.: Ganges, Yangtze
 Glaciers irrigate crops:
o In Switzerland’s Rhone Valley, farmers have irrigated their crops for hundreds of
years by channelling meltwater from glaciers to their fields.
 Glaciers help generate hydroelectric power:
o Scientists and engineers in Norway, central Europe, Canada, New Zealand, and South
America have worked together to tap into glacial resources, using electricity that has
been generated in part by damming glacial meltwater.
Threats posed by Black Carbon:
 Black carbon results from the incomplete combustion of fossil fuels and biomass. BC is
produced both naturally and by human activities as a result of the incomplete combustion of
fossil fuels, biofuels, and biomass. Primary sources include emissions from diesel engines,
cook stoves, wood burning and forest fires.
 The fine particles absorb light and about a million times more energy than carbon dioxide.
 It is said to be the second largest contributor to climate change after CO2. But unlike CO2,
which can stay in the atmosphere for years together, black carbon is short-lived and remains
in the atmosphere only for days to weeks before it descends as rain or snow.
 Black carbon absorbs solar energy and warms the atmosphere. When it falls to earth with
precipitation, it darkens the surface of snow and ice, reducing their albedo (the reflecting
power of a surface), warming the snow, and hastening melting.
 India is the second largest emitter of black carbon in the world, with emissions expected to
increase dramatically in the coming decades, says an April 2019 study in the journal
Atmospheric Research, with the Indo Gangetic plains said to be the largest contributor.
Conclusion

Glaciers are one of the most visible icons of the “cryosphere”, the cold parts of the world where
temperatures fall below the freezing point of water, a natural tipping point that profoundly changes
the environment. From the Andes to the Himalayas, the loss of mountain glaciers is a real concern.
value addition
Glaciation generally gives rise to erosional features in the highlands and depositional features on
the lowlands, though these processes are not mutually exclusive because a glacier plays a combined
role of erosion, transportation and deposition throughout its course. It erodes its valley by two
processes viz. plucking & abrasion.
 Plucking → Glacier freezes the joints & beds of underlying rocks, tears out individual blocks &
drags them away.
 Abrasion → Glacier scratches, scrapes, polishes & scours the valley floor with the debris
frozen into it.
Important Geophysical phenomena such as earthquakes, Tsunami, Volcanic

activity, cyclone etc.
The highly diversified hydrogeologic settings and variations in the availability of
ground water resources from one part of the country to other call for a holistic
approach in evolving suitable management strategies. Analyse. (250 words)
Why the question:
To write importance of ground water, the limitations in the present approach of its utilisation and
changes required to it.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin the answer by writing about the importance of groundwater.
Body:
First, write about the issues in the present approach towards utilisation of ground water –
Overexploitation of groundwater and intensive irrigation in major canal commands has posed serious
problems for groundwater managers in India. Depletion of water tables, saltwater encroachment,
drying of aquifers, groundwater pollution, water logging and salinity, etc. are major consequences of
overexploitation and intensive irrigation.
Next, write about the changes that are needed to be taken in the new approach in order to ensure
sustainable use of groundwater.
Conclusion:
Introduction
With an annual groundwater extraction of 248.69 billion cubic meters (2017), India is among the
largest users of groundwater in the world. Almost 89% of the groundwater extracted is used for
irrigation and the rest for domestic and industrial use (9% and 2%). India is on the threshold of a very
serious groundwater crisis, which needs mitigation both in the fields and at the policy corridors of
the country.
Body
Importance of Groundwater
 Groundwater helps reduce the risk of temporary water shortage and caters to the needs of
arid and semiarid regions.
 Due to its high storage capacity, groundwater is more resilient to the effects of climate
change than surface water.
 More than 90 percent of groundwater in India is used for irrigated agriculture.
 The remainder — 24 billion cubic meters — supplies 85 percent of the country’s drinking
water.

 Roughly 80 percent of India’s 1.35 billion residents depend on groundwater for both drinking
and irrigation.
 Current statistics also show that nearly 50% of urban water supply comes from groundwater.
Problems with groundwater depletion
 Lowering of the water table
 Reduction of water in streams and lakes
 Land subsidence: A lack of groundwater limits biodiversity and dangerous sinkholes result
from depleted aquifers.
 Increased costs for the user
 Deterioration of water quality
 Saltwater contamination can occur.
 Crop production decrease from lack of water availability (40% of global food production
relies on groundwater).
 Groundwater depletion interrupts the ‘natural’ water cycle putting disproportionately more
water into the sea.
 As large aquifers are depleted, food supply and people will suffer.
Measures needed
 The government should develop policies to determine which crops should be grown in which
region according to the water availability, which “has not been the focus.” For instance,
Punjab has a semi-arid climate but it grows rice, which depletes groundwater and is “highly
unsustainable.”
 The traditional flood irrigation in India accounts for huge water loss through
evapotranspiration. Drip irrigation and sprinkler irrigation must be used for efficient
utilisation of water.
 There should be restrictions to cut off the access to groundwater in areas identified as
“critical” and “dark zones”, where the water table is overused or very low.
 There is a need to treat water as common resource rather than private property to prevent
its overexploitation
 Problems and issues such as water logging, salinity, agricultural toxins, and industrial
effluents, all need to be properly looked into.
 Government has initiated schemes like DRIP programme, more drop per crop, Krishi Sinchai
Yojana to ensure economical water use practices in agriculture.
 Bottom-up approach by empowering the local community to become active participants in
managing groundwater.
 Creating regulatory options at the community level such as panchayat is also one among the
feasible solutions.

 Traditional methods of water conservation should be encouraged to minimize the depletion

of water resources.
 Artificial recharge of tube wells, water reuse, afforestation, scientific methods of agriculture
should also be done.
Conclusion
Sustainable management of groundwater in India is vital for tackling growing challenges related to
water availability. The effective answer to the groundwater crisis is to integrate conservation and
development activities, from water extraction to water management, at the local level; making
communities aware and involving them fully is therefore critical for success.
Geographical features and their location-changes in critical geographical features

(including water-bodies and ice-caps) and in flora and fauna and the effects of
such changes.
Depleting and decreasing status of water resources may be one of the most critical
resource issues of the 21st century. Critically analyse the issues and challenges in
interlinking of rivers in India as a measure to overcome water crisis. (250 words)
Why the question:
Environmental groups in Karnataka have criticised the project to link the Bedti and Varada rivers in
Karnataka, calling it ‘unscientific’ and a ‘waste of public money’. Thousands of people had protested
the project June 14, 2022.
To analyse if interlinking of river in India is a sustainable water management practice.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin the answer by giving context.
Body:
First, write about the growing water crisis in the country and its impact.
Next, write about the National River Linking Project (NRLP) formally known as the National
Perspective Plan, envisages the transfer of water from water ‘surplus’ basins where there is flooding,
to water ‘deficit’ basins where there is drought/scarcity, through inter-basin water transfer projects.
Briefly present the history behind River Interlinking in the country. Present the scope of the project
and then critically evaluate the concerns posed by it as well as its benefits.
Conclusion:
Conclude with a fair and balanced opinion.
Introduction
The river interlinking project aims to link India’s rivers by a network of reservoirs and canals that
will allow for their water capacities to be shared and redistributed. Some experts claim that this
is an engineered panacea that will reduce persistent floods in some parts and water shortages in

other parts besides facilitating the generation of hydroelectricity for an increasingly power hungry
country.
Environmental groups in Karnataka have criticised the project to link the Bedti and Varada rivers in
Karnataka, calling it ‘unscientific’ and a ‘waste of public money’. Thousands of people had protested
the project recently.
Body
Opportunities arising out of River linking projects
 India receives most of its rain during monsoon season from June to September, most of it
falls in northern and eastern part of India, the amount of rainfall in southern and western
part are comparatively low. It will be these places which will have shortage of water.
Interlinking of rivers will help these areas to have water throughout the year.
 This will cut farmers dependence on monsoon rains by bringing millions of hectares of
cultivatable land under irrigation.
 Crop productivity would increase and so would revenues for the State.
 Even one bad monsoon has a direct and debilitating economic impact.
 The river linking project will ease the water shortages in western and southern India while
mitigating the impacts of recurrent floods in eastern India.
 The Ganga Basin, Brahmaputra basin sees floods almost every year. In order to avoid this,
the water from these areas has to be diverted to other areas where there is scarcity of
water. This can be achieved by linking the rivers. There is a two way advantage with this –
floods will be controlled and scarcity of water will be reduced.
 Simultaneous floods and droughts continue to wreak havoc, destroying the lives and
livelihoods of millions.
 India needs clean energy to fuel its development processes, and river water can be
leveraged for this.
 Fulfilling water needs impact socio-economic life of people which will help end poverty.
 Need for interlinking of rivers to prevent inter-state water disputes.
 Potential benefits to transportation through navigation, as well as broadening income

sources in rural areas through fishing.
Challenges posed
 The idea that river linking would allow us to cope with flood in the north east and shortage
of water in the Deccan is the positive aspect as pointed earlier but misleading one too.
 This floods come at the time when most parts of the country run short of water, we need to
hold the water somewhere to use it in dry season but the amount of flowing in the short
period of time in Brahmaputra and Ganga is so huge to store and use it later.
 Variability in rainfall is high which is the main source in the country, flood and drought
simultaneously within the states of Bihar and Maharashtra.

 Irrigation potential from interlinking rivers will have limited impact. The net national
irrigated area from big dams has decreased and India’s irrigated area has gone up primarily
due to groundwater.
 Interlinking of rivers is a very expensive proposal. The amount required for these projects is
so huge that government will have to take loans from the foreign sources which would
increase the burden on the government and country will fall in a debt trap.
 The river interlinking project will adversely affect land, forests, biodiversity, rivers and the
livelihood of millions of people.
 The Ken-Betwa link threatens about 200 sq. km of the Panna tiger reserve.
 Interlinking of rivers will lead to destruction of forests, wetlands and local water bodies,
which are major groundwater recharge mechanisms.
 Less than positive experience that other countries have, like diversion of Amu Darya and the
Syr Darya or the Australia’s experiments in its Murray Darling basin.
 It causes massive displacement of people. Huge burden on the government to deal with the
issue of rehabilitation of displaced people.
 Due to interlinking of rivers, there will be decrease in the amount of fresh water entering
seas and this will cause a serious threat to the marine life.
 The Shah committee pointed out that the linking of rivers will affect natural supply of
nutrients for agricultural lands through curtailing flooding of downstream areas.
Way forward
 To look at water as a strategic resource for development.
 Environment is one issue where anyone of us should be concerned about.
 Best practices done by China and neighbouring countries needs to be looked upon.
 The biggest, cheapest, most benign, possibly fastest and most decentralized storage option
for India is the groundwater
 Invest in water conservation, more efficient irrigation and better farm practices.
 Recycling of water for internal usage as that of Israel.
 We need a mandatory enforceable river policy aimed at treating rivers as national treasure.
 Accumulation of silt in huge quantities, particularly the Ganga and its tributaries. These
rivers need to be desilted.
 River linking in the south and other parts which was undertaken in the past has been going
well so such model needs to be taken forward.
 Planting trees on the river banks is one way of bringing life back to the rivers.
 Forest catchments will need to be restored, wastewater from industries and towns will need
to be treated, sand mining need to be stopped.

 Need to build the responsibility, capability and accountability in our water management
institutions to revive our rivers.
 The judicious use of canal water, growing crops that are appropriate to a region,
encouraging drip irrigation and reviving traditional systems such as tanks.
Conclusion
The river linking project is a great challenge and an opportunity to address the water issues arising
out of climate change. The long-term solution to water scarcity lies in making the IRL project work by
building a network of dams and canals across the length and breadth of the country. However,
interlinking has to take place after a detailed study so that does not cause any problem to the
environment or aquatic life.


INSIGHTSIAS

GS- 1I
JUNE 2022
are NOT synopsis too if we go by definition of the term. What we are providing is
content that both meets demand of the question and at the same time gives you
Telegram: https://t.me/insightsIAStips
Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/insightsonindia Page 2
Table of Contents
Indian Constitution- historical underpinnings, evolution, features, amendments, significant
provisions and basic structure. .......................................................................................................... 8
Is it time to revisit the criteria for special category status (SCS) and include others into this
exclusive category by excluding those who do not need such assistance any longer? Critically
analyse. (250 words) ...................................................................................................................... 8
Compare and contrast the major features of constitutions of India and Britain. (250 words) ....... 10
Trace the evolution of LGBTQIA+ rights in India. Does the homophobic attitude of society go
against the constitutional tenet of fraternity? Examine. What measures are further needed ensure
equality in true sense for LGBTQIA+ community? (250 words) ..................................................... 12
Digitisation in India is making strides at a great pace. Hence, access to internet becomes pertinent
for the upliftment of the masses as a social measure. Do you think access to internet should be
declared as a fundamental right? Critically analyse. (250 words).................................................. 15
At times, judiciary assumes the role of the legislature and proposes new laws and regulations that
the legislative body should have enacted instead. However, judiciary may have transgressed its
jurisdiction, violating the doctrine of separation of powers. Critically analyse. (250 words) ......... 18
Salient features of the Representation of People’s Act. ................................................................... 21
Examine as to why the anti-defection law has been ineffective, even counterproductive in
preventing defections. How can this situation be rectified? (250 words) ...................................... 21
India’s emphasis on humanitarian crisis and silence on key strategic issues such as how to deal
with Taliban and the prospect of India’s recognition of new regime or lack of it, indicate that
India’s new Afghanistan policy is still in making. Analyse its implications. (250 words) ................. 24
Functions and responsibilities of the Union and the States, issues and challenges pertaining to the
federal structure, devolution of powers and finances up to local levels and challenges therein. ...... 26
Though the Constitution gives the Centre control over three subjects — land, public order, and
police However, the Government of National Capital Territory of Delhi Act reorganised the powers
and responsibilities of the Delhi Legislative Assembly and the Lieutenant-Governor (L-G), in favour
of the latter. Critically analyse. (250 words) ................................................................................. 26
Critically examine the performance of Jal Jeevan Mission in providing access to safe and adequate
drinking water. (250 words) ......................................................................................................... 28
The Indian constitution tries to accommodate diversity in India through asymmetrical federal
provisions of power sharing between states. Discuss. (250 words) .............................................. 31
Tensions over centralisation in certain spheres of governance has adversely affected centre-state
relations in the recent past. Do you agree the view that there has been a rise of unitary
tendencies? Critically analyse. (250 words) .................................................................................. 33
The pandemic has worsened the fiscal positions of State governments. Critically analyse the
performance of Fiscal Responsibility and Budget Management Act (FRBMA), 2003 in ensuring that
debt targets of states remain under sustainable levels. What changes do you suggest in this
regard? (250 words) .................................................................................................................... 36
Structure, organization and functioning of the Executive and the Judiciary—Ministries and
Departments of the Government; pressure groups and formal/informal associations and their role in
the Polity. ........................................................................................................................................ 40
Do you agree with the view that the President of India is just a titular head? Critically comment.
(250 words) ................................................................................................................................. 40
A powerful, independent judiciary is of paramount importance to protect rights of citizens and
country’s socio-economic development. Hence, there is a scope for reforms to make higher
judiciary efficient and effective. Analyse. (250 words).................................................................. 43
Appointment to various Constitutional posts, powers, functions and responsibilities of various
Constitutional Bodies. ..................................................................................................................... 46
A rejuvenated Inter-State Council can play a vital role in better implementation of governance
practices, involve the states more closely in the planning and delivery of services and lead to a
more prudent fiscal discipline. Discuss. (250 words) .................................................................... 46
Parliament and State Legislatures – structure, functioning, conduct of business, powers & privileges
and issues arising out of these. ........................................................................................................ 48
For India to transform into a deeply participatory democracy, India needs a strong Pre-Legislative
Consultative Policy which strengthens the legitimacy and credibility of the legislative action and
facilitates accountability. Examine. (250 words) ........................................................................... 48
The Speaker has to remain neutral and act independently of political morality and pressure. How
can we guarantee the Speaker’s impartiality? (250 words) .......................................................... 51
In view of the multiple political parties with different ideology and a charged political environment
in the recent past, a relook into the appointment, powers and functions of the Governor under
the Indian constitution is the need of the hour. Examine. (250 words) ......................................... 55
Role of civil services in a democracy. ............................................................................................... 59
The civil services ecosystem of the country must move towards a setup which rewards
performance, has enhanced accountability and with a check on abuse of powers by civil servants.
Elaborate. (250 words) ................................................................................................................ 59
The rising spate of ‘encounter’ culture for the disbursal instant justice, is a serious contravention
to the rule of law and calls for immediate police reforms to put an end to this practice. Analyse.
(250 words) ................................................................................................................................. 61
Government policies and interventions for development in various sectors and issues arising out of
their design and implementation. .................................................................................................... 64
Transition to green mobility is quickly picking up, which is an opportune time for India to take a
lead in manufacturing of Electric Vehicles (EV). Examine the various measures taken by India in
this regard. (250 words) .............................................................................................................. 64
While gig work has become a necessity for both the workers and the platforms hiring them,
regulation of the gig work remains vital to ensure that these classes of workers are given the same
opportunities and protections as other employees covered under various labour laws in India.
Comment. (250 words) ................................................................................................................ 67
Awarding of death penalty and its sentencing needs a relook in the light of recent supreme court
judgement. Elaborate. (250 words) .............................................................................................. 70
India’s regulation of surrogacy falls short of protecting bodily autonomy and guaranteeing
reproductive liberty. Critically analyse. (250 words) ..................................................................... 73
How does infrastructure play a role in transformation of economy leading to economic
development? Discuss the policies of the government aimed at providing major infrastructural
push in the recent years. (250 words) .......................................................................................... 75
Given our developmental targets and ambition, a massive scale-up in capacity-building is needed
at the bureaucratic level. In this context, discuss the role of Mission Karmayogi in efficiency in
action for producing maximum results. (250 words) .................................................................... 77
Welfare schemes for vulnerable sections of the population by the Centre and States and the
performance of these schemes; mechanisms, laws, institutions and Bodies constituted for the
protection and betterment of these vulnerable sections. ................................................................ 79
Evaluate the performance of Member of Parliament Local Area Development Scheme (MPLADS).
The issue underutilisation and misutilisation of MPLADS funds poses some serious question to the
viability of the scheme in the future. Analyse. (250 words) .......................................................... 79
Issues relating to development and management of Social Sector/Services relating to Health,

Education, Human Resources. ......................................................................................................... 83
The importance of public health has been known for decades with every expert committee
underscoring it. However, the process of reform to create a public health-centred primary
healthcare system has been lackadaisical. Can universal right to health be a panacea for this?
Critically examine. (250 words) .................................................................................................... 83
Issues relating to poverty and hunger. ............................................................................................. 86
Malnutrition occurs as a result of complex interplay among various factors. However, simple yet
practical and innovative solutions can contribute towards ending malnutrition and anaemia.
Elaborate. (250 words) ................................................................................................................ 86
What are the different ways in which poverty is measured in India? Though the statistics point to
a reduction in poverty in the last decade but India remains far from achieving Sustainable
Development Goal-1 (SDG-1). Examine. How can SDG-1 be achieved by 2030? (250 words) ....... 90
Important aspects of governance, transparency and accountability, e-governance- applications,
models, successes, limitations, and potential; citizens charters, transparency & accountability and
institutional and other measures. .................................................................................................... 93
Many companies think that corporate social responsibility (CSR) is a peripheral issue for their
business and customer satisfaction is more important for them. Analyse. (250 words) ................ 93
What do you understand by digital democracy? Examine its relations with various aspects of
governance. (250 words) ............................................................................................................. 95
What is Environmental, Social, and Governance (ESG)? Is India ready to adopt ESG model given its
diversity and developmental challenges? Analyse. (250 words) ................................................... 97
India and its neighborhood- relations. ............................................................................................. 99
Myanmar is the lynchpin of India’s Act East Policy. India should focus on building supportive
international environment, so that the Myanmar could be encouraged to follow the democratic
road map. However, other measures of reaching out to east must also be explored. Critically
examine. (250 words) .................................................................................................................. 99
The changing dynamics of the world order could provide BIMSTEC the opportunity to expand its
role. Can BIMSTEC be an alternative to SAARC? Examine. (250 words)....................................... 101
India and Iran share close historical ties from time immemorial. Given the various ups and downs
in bilateral relations between both the countries, time is therefore ripe for a reset in the relations
to achieve collective goals and prosperity. Analyse. (250 words)................................................ 104
Bilateral, regional and global groupings and agreements involving India and/or affecting India’s
interests. ....................................................................................................................................... 107
The formation of the Indo-Pacific Economic Framework for Prosperity (IPEF) holds good potential
for India with respect to economic growth and integration but India must be careful of the pitfalls
it may pose in the future. Analyse. (250 words) ......................................................................... 107
The BRICS are at a turbulent crossroads as renewed great power competition intersects with
countervailing tendencies in the emerging multipolar arena. Analyse. What course corrections are
required to ensure deeper collaboration among the BRICS nations? (250 words) ...................... 110
The Indo-Pacific construct has significantly enhanced the strategic salience of ASEAN. India’s Indo-
Pacific strategy works in tandem with its Act East Policy. Examine. (250 words) ........................ 112
Effect of policies and politics of developed and developing countries on India’s interests, Indian
Diaspora. ....................................................................................................................................... 115
Traditionally dominated by the trade, energy and Diaspora ties, the India-UAE relationship has
been growing substantially in the security arena. Analyse. (250 words) ..................................... 115
Indian Constitution- historical underpinnings, evolution, features, amendments,

significant provisions and basic structure.
Is it time to revisit the criteria for special category status (SCS) and include others into
this exclusive category by excluding those who do not need such assistance any
longer? Critically analyse. (250 words)
Why the question:
To write about performance of SCS and need to revisit the criteria of SCS.
Directive word:
Critically analyse – When asked to analyse, you must examine methodically the structure or nature
Introduction:
Begin by mentioning the aims and objectives behind the grant of SCS.
Body:
First, mention the various criteria on which SCS is granted to states that face geographical and socio-
economic disadvantages. Mention the various benefits associated with it.
Next, analyse the performance of states granted SCS over the years. With facts and examples write
as to what extent they befitted from the grant of SCS. Mention the drawbacks of grant of SCS.
Next, write about the changes needed in the SCS categorisation and steps required for the same.
Conclusion:
Conclude by giving a balanced opinion about SCS.
Introduction
Special Category Status (SCS) a classification given by the Centre to assist development
of states that face geographical and socio-economic disadvantages. This classification was done on
the recommendations of the Fifth Finance Commission in 1969. It was based on the Gadgil formula.
Body
Background: Objectives of SCS and reasons for implementation
 The concept of a special category status was first introduced in 1969 when the fifth Finance
Commission sought to provide certain disadvantaged states with preferential treatment in
the form of central assistance and tax breaks, establishing special development boards,
reservation in local government jobs, educational institutions, etc.
 This formula was named after the then Deputy Chairman of the Planning Commission, Dr
Gadgil Mukherjee and is related to the transfer of assistance to the states by centre under
various schemes.
 Initially, three states; Assam, Nagaland and Jammu & Kashmir were granted special status
but from 1974-1979, five more states were added under the special category. These
include Himachal Pradesh, Manipur, Meghalaya, Sikkim and Tripura.
 In 1990, with the addition of Arunachal Pradesh and Mizoram, the states increased to 10.
The state of Uttarakhand was given special category status in 2001.
 But after the dissolution of the planning commission and the formation of NITI Aayog, the
recommendations of the 14th Finance Commission were implemented which meant the
discontinuation of the Gadgil formula-based grants.
Various criteria on which SCS is granted
 The rationale for special status is that certain states, because of inherent features, have a
low resource base and cannot mobilize resources for development.
 The state which is facing the problem of resources crunch must get the benefit.
 Main key criteria are:
o Low per capita income
o Non-viable nature of state finances
o Economic and infrastructural backwardness
o Presence of sizeable tribal population
o Hilly and difficult terrain
o Strategic location along international borders
o Low population density
 Must be economically backward with poor infrastructure.
Performance of states granted SCS over the years
 States which are granted special category status enjoy several benefits.
 These include :
o Preferential treatment in getting central funds
o Concession on excise duty to attract industries to the state
o A significant 30% of the centre’s gross budget also goes special category states
o These states can avail the benefit of debt-swapping and debt relief schemes
 In the case of Centrally Sponsored Schemes and external aid, Special Category States get it in
the ratio of 90% as grant, and 10% as loans.
 Other states, however, get 30% of their funds as grants f) Special Category States also get
tax breaks to attract investment
 A Special Category Status catalyses the inflow of private investments and generates
employment and additional revenue for the state.
o Besides, the State can create more welfare-based schemes from the new savings
since the Center bears 90% of the expenditure on all Centrally Sponsored Schemes.
o Further, more grants from the Center helps in building state infrastructure and
social-sector projects.
 The Constitution of India does not include any provision for the categorization of any state
as a Special Category Status state.
o However, in the past, Central Planned Assistance were given to certain states on the
ground that they are historically disadvantaged in comparison to others.
Issues with SCS status
 14th Finance Commission recommendation: The Commission did away with the ‘special
category’ status for states, except for the North-eastern and three hill states.
 NDA government which came to power at the Centre in 2014 has been saying that the 14th
Finance Commission doesn’t provide for such treatment to Andhra Pradesh.
 The Constitution never mentioned it: The commission appears to have been guided by the
fact that the Constitution never categorized some states as special, treating all of them on
an equal footing.
 No power to allocate funds: the NITI Aayog, which has replaced the Planning Commission,
has no powers to allocate funds. Therefore, the discretion that the ruling party at the Centre
had to dole out special favors to states through the Plan panel, no longer exists.
Measures needed
 The Constitution of India does not include any provision for the categorization of any state in
India as a ‘special category state.
 However, a wide range of provisions are available to as many as 10 states that have been
listed under Articles 371, 371-A to 371-H, and 371-J.
 Some of these states are Maharashtra and Gujarat, Nagaland, Assam, Manipur, Andhra
Pradesh, Sikkim, Mizoram, Arunachal Pradesh and Telangana.
 Moreover, if states are in need of additional support, Centre may give a special package on
case-to-case basis.
Conclusion
The intention behind these provisions is to safeguard the interest and aspirations of certain
backward regions or to protect cultural and economic interests of the tribal people or to deal with
the disturbed law and order in some parts. However, such categorisation leads to States playing
victim card for ulterior motives as well. Hence, special packages to states based on merit can be a
good way forward. An independent committee with statutory backing and executive powers with
representation from states and centre may make a recommendation in this regard.
Compare and contrast the major features of constitutions of India and Britain. (250
words)

Why the question:
The question is part of the static syllabus of General studies paper – 2
To write about salient features of Indian constitution and the nature of federalism in India.
Introduction:
Begin by mentioning the legacy of British on the Indian constitution
Body:
In the first part, write about the major differences between Indian and British constitution. Written
constitution, Nature of federation, Citizenship, Sovereign power, Judicial review etc.
Next, write about similarities between Indian and British constitution – Rule of Law, Independence of
Judiciary, Parliamentary system etc,
Conclusion:
Conclude by summarising the major observations.
Introduction
Indian Constitution was adopted by the Constituent Assembly of India on 26 November 1949 and
became effective on 26 January 1950. The constitution replaced the Government of India Act
1935 as the country’s fundamental governing document, and the Dominion of India became the
Republic of India. Indian Constitution was made after referring many Constitutions of the world by
the drafting committee headed by Ambedkar.
Body
Contrasting features of Britain and Indian Constitution
 Unwritten vs Written: One of the most important features of the British constitution is its
unwritten character. The main reason for this is that it is based on conventions and political
traditions, which have not been laid down in any document, unlike a written constitution,
which is usually a product of a constituent assembly.
o Indian Constitution, in comparison, is the lengthiest written constitution in the

world.
 Amendability: Britain Constitution is flexible and can be amended by 50% of the

members present and voting. In India it is a hybrid of Rigid and flexible.
 Federalism: The British constitution has a unitary character as opposed to a federal one. All
powers of the government are vested in the British Parliament, which is a sovereign body.
o The Indian Constitution, on the other hand, is federal.
 Nature of state: Britain is a Constitutional monarchy as Queen is the head of the state while
India is a republic which means that India has an elected head of state.
 Sovereignty of Parliament: A very important feature of the British Constitution

is sovereignty of the British Parliament (a written constitution being absent). The British
Parliament is the only legislative body in the country with unfettered power of legislation.
o It can make, amend or repeal any law.
o Indian Parliament is not sovereign as Judiciary has the power to review the laws
made by legislators.
 DPSP and Duties: They are present in India while they are absent in Britain.
 Prime Minister:M. will always be a member of the Lower House in Britain where it he can be
in either houses in India.
Similarities between India and Britain
 Independence of Judiciary: The Rule of Law in Britain is safeguarded by the provision

that judges can only be removed from office for serious misbehavior and according to a
procedure requiring the consent of both the Houses of Parliament. Same is the case in India
 British Prime Minister and the Council of Ministers: Britain has a Cabinet form of
government.
o The power doesn’t lie in one person, but the entire Council of Ministers.
o The principle is, “all Ministers sink and swim together”. It is based on collective
responsibility towards the Lower House.
 Bureaucracy: Indian bureaucracy is modelled on the British bureaucracy.
Conclusion
There is a natural tendency to compare the Parliament of India with the British Parliament. But our
Parliament and Parliamentary Institutions and procedures are not a copy of the Westminster
system. There are fundamental differences between their system and ours. British Parliament has
grown through some three hundred years of history. In Britain, the Parliament can said to be the
only institution, which exercises sovereign powers and on which there are no limits because there is
no written constitution. India, on the other hand, has a written constitution. Powers and authorities
of every organ of the Government and every functionary are only as defined and delimited by the
constitutional document.
Trace the evolution of LGBTQIA+ rights in India. Does the homophobic attitude of
society go against the constitutional tenet of fraternity? Examine. What measures are
further needed ensure equality in true sense for LGBTQIA+ community? (250 words)
Why the question:
Pride Month comes and goes; but homophobia in India is here to stay like a spectre. As a good omen
for Pride Month of this year, the Kerala High Court set a trailblazing precedent recently by
sanctioning a lesbian couple, Adhila Nasarin and Fathima Noora, to live together after they were
coercively separated by their parents.
To write about the evolution of LGBTQIA+ rights, the impact of homophobia on fraternity and
measure need to address it.
Directive word:

Introduction:
Body:
First, write about the evolution of LGBTQIA+ right in India – Naz Foundation Govt. v. NCT of Delhi,
Suresh Kumar Koushal vs Naz Foundation, National Legal Services Authority v. Union of India, K.S.
Puttaswamy v Union of India (2017), Navtej Singh Johar V. Union of India, Transgender Persons
(Protection of Rights) Bill, 2019 etc.
Next, write about homophobia and how it is ultra vires to fraternity mentioned in the constitution.
Next, suggest steps to ensure that equality in true nature is achieved for the LGBTQIA+ community.
Conclusion:
Introduction
The LGBTQIA+ community faces a lot of problems. The main problem is acceptance from people
outside the community. For the Indian LGBT community, a truly inclusive society remains a distant
dream. In urban India, where social media and corporate initiatives have created increasing
awareness of LGBT rights, the scenario looks more upbeat for gay men than for transgender people
or lesbian women. While urban LGBT voices that are heard through several online and real-world
platforms form an important part of LGBT activism, these expose only a small part of the diverse
challenges faced by the community.
Body
Evolution of LGBTQIA+ rights in India
 The Delhi High Court’s verdict in Naz Foundation vs Government of NCT of Delhi (2009) was
a landmark in the law of sexuality and equality jurisprudence in India.
 The court held that Section 377 offended the guarantee of equality enshrined in Article 14
of the Constitution, because it creates an unreasonable classification and targets
homosexuals as a class.
 In a retrograde step, the Supreme Court, in Suresh Kumar Koushal vs Naz Foundation
(2013), reinstated Section 377 to the IPC.
 However, the Supreme Court in Navtej Singh Johar & Ors. vs Union of India (2018) declared
that the application of Section 377 IPC to consensual homosexual behaviour was
“unconstitutional”.
 This Supreme Court judgment has been a great victory to the Indian individual in his quest
for identity and dignity.
 The Kerala High Court in June 2022 set a trailblazing precedent recently by sanctioning a
lesbian couple, Adhila Nasarin and Fathima Noora, to live together after they were
coercively separated by their parents.
homophobic attitude of society goes against the constitutional tenet of fraternity
 Section 377 criminalised a section of society for being a sexual minority.
 The petitioners argued that the right to sexuality, sexual autonomy and freedom were
indispensable to human dignity.
 This Section was against the fundamental rights enshrined in the Constitution and that a
section of people was denied their fundamental rights based on this.
 Article 14 of the Constitution guarantees equality before lawand this applies to all classes
of citizens. However, Due to the homophobic attitude of society towards LGBTQIA+, it is
violated.
 The freedom of sexual orientationand gender identity as part of Human Rights is clearly
violated.
 Section 377 included some consensual acts between heterosexuals, which were considered
‘unnatural’ and punishable.
 The LGBTQIA+ as a section are looked at as a separate section which goes against fraternity
or brotherhood, a key constitutional tenet mentioned in preamble as well.
Way Forward
 The LGTBQ community needs an anti-discrimination law that empowers them to build
productive lives and relationships irrespective of gender identity or sexual orientation and
place the onus to change on state and society and not the individual.
 Police must not harass sexual minorities. There must be changes to the police conduct
rules to provide for punishing erring police personnel in this regard.
 Government bodies, especially related to Health, and Law and Order need to be sensitised
and made aware about the changed position of law to ensure that the LGBTQ community
is not denied public services or harassed for their sexual orientation.
 Enumerating sexual orientation and gender identity in non-discrimination and anti-bullying

policies is an important step toward acknowledging diversity, protecting vulnerable
students.
 Training school staff empowers them to respond when they encounter abuse. Younger
generations of Indians will grow up knowing of criminalisation as a thing of the past, and
that will be a boon to their basic rights.
 In 2014, the Supreme Court issued a sweeping judgment in NALSA v. India, which held that
transgender people should be legally recognised according to their gender identity, enjoy all
fundamental rights, and receive special benefits in education and employment. This must
be implemented and enforced.
Conclusion
The queer and gender non-conforming people have found an ally in the court, but they would need
greater effort on the part of the authorities at various levels, if their rights are to be protected. In
any case, any change in law in terms of recognising same-sex relations or understanding self-
identification of gender must be complemented by an attitudinal change in society at large.
Government must sensitise the general public and officials, to reduce and finally eliminate the
stigma associated with LGBTQ+ community through the mass media and the official channels. School
and university students too should be sensitised about the diversity of sexuality to deconstruct the
myth of heteronormativity. Heteronormativity is the root cause of hetero-sexism and homophobia.
Value addition
Issues faced by LGBTQIA+ community in India
 No legal recognition of marriage: Same-sex marriages are not legally recognized in India
even though many countries like USA, UK have legalised it.
 Issue of rights: The rights enjoyed by opposite-sex couples are not enjoyed by same-sex
couples. They are prohibited from those rights. For example-
o The lack of a legal structure around their relationship became increasingly stark
when they tried to bring each other on as nominees in insurance and financial
plans, just as a married couples did.
 Lack of family support: Lack of communication between LGBT children and the parents often
leads to conflict in the family.
o Many LGBT youths are placed in foster care or end up in juvenile detention or on the
streets.
o Most often than not, LGBTQ children from poor families are abandoned. They end
up begging as there is no avenue for education or employment.
o In some parts, secret honour killings are planned so that the only way for a young
gay man to survive is to run away in the cover of the night to some city, with no
money or social support.
 Sanctioned rape: In other parts, lesbian women are subjected to family-sanctioned
corrective rapes, which are often perpetrated by their own family members.
o Village medics and babas often prescribe rape to cure lesbians of

homosexuality. Refusal to marry brings more physical abuse
 Education and health: The LGBTQ children are abandoned and marginalised, who end up
being isolated by the rest of the society. They are denied the fundamental right of education
as well as health.
Digitisation in India is making strides at a great pace. Hence, access to internet

becomes pertinent for the upliftment of the masses as a social measure. Do you think
access to internet should be declared as a fundamental right? Critically analyse. (250
words)
Reference: Live Mint
Why the question:
The right to access the internet in India is making strides at a great pace which opens up the debate
of internet as a fundamental right.
To write about the role of internet in socio-economic development and feasibility of internet as a
fundamental right.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by giving context of digitisation in India and various measures related to it.
Body:
First, write about the benefits offered by internet for economy, development and society.
Substantiate with facts and examples.
Next, write about internet as a Fundamental right – reasons as to why it should be declared as a
fundamental right.
Next, write about the limitations in declaring internet as a Fundamental right.
Conclusion:
Introduction
Internet broadband and mobile Internet services are a lifeline to people in India from all walks of life.
While the Internet is certainly a main source of information and communication and access to social
media, it is so much more than that. In Sep 2019, the Kerala High Court, in Faheema Shirin v. the
State of Kerala case, declared the right to Internet access as a fundamental right forming a part of
the right to privacy and the right to education under Article 21 of the Constitution. Despite this,
according to the Software Freedom Law Centre data, there have been more than a 100 Internet
shutdowns in different parts of India in 2019 alone.
Body
Need for right for Internet:
Internet has become quite useful in our daily public life as well. It is quite hard to ignore the need,
importance and the value of internet in our daily life. Though there are countless uses of Internet in
society, we have listed out here a few benefits of Internet for society.
 Online Banking: In the world we live today, the role of Internet has tremendously grown. In
the field of online banking, the advantages of internet are of pivotal importance. Earlier,
there used to be manual banking work. It was quite difficult to handle banking and
transaction online. Now, with the help of Internet it has been made quite easier to send and
receive payments anywhere in the world. It has brought many positive economic impacts on
our society.
 Online Trade & E commerce: E-commerce is gaining popularity across the world. It is only
because of Internet that doing business has become quite easier. Online trade has changed
the fortunes of millions of people across the world. It has revolutionized the social life.
 Faster Connectivity: Due to Internet, the connectivity has become much faster. The
distances have disappeared. The world has become global. It is quite easy to connect with
each other. The virtual world has made it possible for us to get in touch easily with each
other. The world has become a global village where the knowledge, ideas, information and
everything flows quite easily from one place to another. It has the great benefits for society.
 Creation of More Jobs & More Income Opportunities: In Old times, the economy used to be
limited and isolated. But with the advent of Internet the industries and world economies
have come closer to each other. Thanks to Internet, millions of new jobs are being created.
The economic advantages of internet for society have been witnessed. Millions of People are
changing their lives with the help of Internet. This is one of the greatest benefit of Internet
for society.
 Spread of Education and Awareness: Internet has completely changed the system of
education. Earlier there used to be the traditional and limited education system. Education
has spread quickly via online learning. The online education system via internet has
dramatically reduced the cost of education. It has become easily accessible and affordable.
With the help of online videos platforms, teaching models and multiple audio, video and
visual study material, the education and awareness has been spreading very fast. It is again
one of the greatest social benefit of Internet for our lives.
 The Role of Artificial Intelligence: Artificial Intelligence and machine learning has completely
changed the scope and future of computer education. Artificial intelligence is proving quite
beneficial for society. It is useful in every walk of life including in education, health,
economy, trade, industry and in medial field. This great social benefit is again due to
internet.
 Role of Internet and Informational Technology in Medical and Health Field: Thanks to
modern technology of today we have the cures of these diseases easily available. The
medical field has greatly progressed because of Internet connectivity and information
technology.
 Internationally, the right to access to the Internet can be rooted in Article 19 of the
Universal Declaration of Human Rights which states that “everyone has the right to
freedom of opinion and expression; this right includes freedom to hold opinions without
interference and to seek, receive and impart information and ideas through any media and
regardless of frontiers.”
However, there are associated concerns too of making internet a fundamental right:
Digital divide scenario in India:

 The report, titled Internet in India 2017, was released by the Internet and Mobile Association
of India.
 In December 2017, internet penetration in urban India was at 64.84 percent as compared to
60.6 per cent in December 2016. In rural India, however, internet penetration was at 20.26
percent in December 2017, from 18 percent in 2016.
 According to a 2017 global survey by the Pew Research Centre, only one in four Indian adults
report using Internet or owning a smartphone.
 despite the booming economy, India’s progress in smartphone penetration has been slow.
 in India and Tanzania, less than one-quarter report owning smartphones, the lowest among
the countries surveyed.
 A Deloitte India report released in January 2018 revealed that with only 17 percent internet
penetration, rural India is lagging behind in connectivity owing to challenges in deployment
of fixed broadband networks.
Implications of Digital divide:
 Increasing penetration of digital technology by bridging the existing digital divides is

associated with greater social progress of a country.
 Social capital: Once an individual is connected, Internet connectivity and ICTs can enhance
his or her future social and cultural capital.
 Economic disparity is created between those who can afford the technology and those who
don’t.
 A direct correlation between a company’s access to technological advancements and its

overall success in bolstering the economy.
 Countries with less digital gap are benefitted more than the ones with more digital gap.
 Education:
o The digital divide also impacts children’s ability to learn and grow in low-income
school districts.
o Without Internet access, students are unable to cultivate necessary tech skills in
order to understand today’s dynamic economy
 Lack of information:
o Almost all India’s socio-economic problems had links to the “digital divide”, which
had come to stay during the era of digital revolution and then again during the era
of internet revolution in India.
o Rural India suffered from information poverty. Information is controlled by a few at

the top of the pyramid who restrict its percolation down to those at the bottom.
 Political empowerment and mobilization in the age of social media is difficult when there is
digital divide.
 Transparency and accountability are increased when digitalized for instance people filing
taxes online, single window mechanisms for delivery of services ensures good governance as
well.
Conclusion
The usefulness of the Internet cannot be overstated and the government should do everything
possible to bridge the digital divide among its constituents. But declaring access to the Internet as a
citizen’s right is not a defensible proposition.
At times, judiciary assumes the role of the legislature and proposes new laws and
regulations that the legislative body should have enacted instead. However, judiciary
may have transgressed its jurisdiction, violating the doctrine of separation of powers.
Critically analyse. (250 words)
Why the question:
Recently, the Allahabad High Court, while allowing two criminal revisions pertaining to a dowry case,
took cognisance of the misuse of Section 498A of the Indian Penal Code (IPC), proposed certain
safeguards and directed the State authorities of Uttar Pradesh to take the necessary steps for their
implementation in a given time period.
To write about the judicial activism and how it may turn in to judicial overreach.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by defining judicial activism
Body:
First, write about the need of judicial activism. Substantiate using various examples where judicial
activism has overcome the limitations of executive and legislature.
Next, write about how judicial activism can turn it judicial overreach and its impact.
Next, write about the ways to check judicial activism from becoming overreach.
Conclusion:
Introduction
The Constitution, under various provisions, has clearly drawn the line between Legislature and the
Judiciary to maintain their independence in their respective functioning. Article 121 and 211 forbid
the legislature from discussing the conduct of any judge in the discharge of his duties, while Articles
122 and 212, on the other hand, prevent the courts from sitting in judgment over the internal
proceedings of the legislature. In recent times, there have been criticism levelled against judicial
activism, calling it adventurism and overreach.
Body
Background
Recently, the Allahabad High Court, while allowing two criminal revisions pertaining to a dowry case,
took cognisance of the misuse of Section 498A of the Indian Penal Code (IPC), proposed certain
safeguards and directed the State authorities of Uttar Pradesh to take the necessary steps for their
implementation in a given time period.
Judicial activism needed in legislative vacuum
 Upholds Constitutional morality: An important case which employed this concept in an

innovative manner was the Naz Foundation Case which used the concept of constitutional
morality to strike down Section 377 of the Indian Penal Code and decriminalize
homosexuality.
o The Delhi High Court had said that “In our scheme of things, constitutional morality
must outweigh the argument of public morality, even if it be the majoritarian
view.”
 Executive lacks Political gumption: Justice Chandrachud’s view in

the Sabarimala judgement, he held that women should be allowed entry in the Sabarimala
temple against popularly held religious beliefs.
o Political parties and governments did not take a stand or repeal discriminatory laws
in fear of losing support base of masses.
 To protect fundamental rights: Triple Talaq in 2017 was banned as being ultra vires to
fundamental rights of Muslim women. This legislation would not have been accepted if it
had come from the executive or through the Parliament.
o Right to privacy also became Fundamental right under Article 21

 Most trusted institution: A People’s Survey of India report noted that Indians had 80% trust
in the Supreme court. Though not an elected body, the apex court is significant to uphold
rule of law.
o Eg: Whistle Blowers Act against corrupt officials and politicians was given under
Article 142, until Parliament made a law on the subject.
Demerits of Judicial activism
 Unelected body: Judiciary being the unelected body, does not enjoy the “General Will” of
the people. Judicial restraint is more apt for such an institution rather than dictation a
legislation. Eg: Ban on liquor sale on highways led to backlash as well as spurious means to
overcome the dictum
 Lack of expertise: Judiciary lacks both time and resources to enact legislation. Sometimes
practical difficulties of such enactments are not known to the courts.
o Eg: Ban on BS-IV vehicles from April 2020 which had to be extended many times.
 Against Constitution’s Mandate: Judicial Review is a basic structure of the Constitution;
however enacting legislation is not. Courts can look into the validity of the law, but not
necessarily make a law.
 Unaccountable: Politicians remain “accountable” to the people in at least some sense,

because they depend upon them in order to continue in office after five years.
o Judges who are insulated from any external control are accountable only to
themselves
 Judicial adventurism: Subhash Kashinath Mahajan v. State of Maharashtra (2018): the court
amended the Scheduled Castes and the Scheduled Tribes (Prevention of Atrocities) Act,
1989, by annulling Section 18 which said that no anticipatory bail will be granted to persons
accused under the Act.
o There was widespread protest and opposition to this from all quarters. Finally, the
law brought in to undo this was also upheld in the court.
Conclusion
Each organ of our democracy must function within its own sphere and must not take over what is
assigned to the others. Judicial activism must also function within the limits of the judicial process
because the courts are the only forum for those wronged by administrative excesses and executive
arbitrariness. Hence legislation enacted by Judiciary must be in the rare cases as mentioned above
Salient features of the Representation of People’s Act.

Examine as to why the anti-defection law has been ineffective, even
counterproductive in preventing defections. How can this situation be rectified? (250
words)
Why the question:
The political crisis in Maharashtra has brought focus back on the anti-defection law. By all accounts,
the law has failed to shore up the stability of elected governments. Not only have many governments
fallen due to defections in recent times, but the defectors have not suffered any cautionary
consequences.
To write about the shortcomings of the anti-defection law and measures needed to fix them.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Write about objectives of anti-defection.
Body:
First, write about various features of anti-defection pertaining to disqualification.
Next, write as to why the anti-defection has been ineffective in preventing defection and horse
trading. Substantiate with examples.
Next, suggest measures needed to rectify this.
Conclusion:
Introduction
Defection is “desertion by one member of the party of his loyalty towards his political party” or
basically it means “When an elected representative joins another party without resigning his present
party for benefits”. The institutional malaise is defection and party-hopping is state- neutral, party-
neutral, and politics-neutral.
In light of the events unfolding in Maharashtra, with the government facing internal dissent from a
block of 22 MLAs, the anti-defection law has again come into the spotlight. The events in Puducherry
highlight, yet again, the absurdity of the anti-defection law.
Body
Background
 For a very long time, the Indian political system was impacted by political defections by
members of the legislature. This situation brought about greater instability and chaos in the
political system.
 Thus, in 1985, to curb the evil of political defections, the 52nd constitution amendment act
on Anti-defection law was passed and the 10th Schedule was added in the Indian
Constitution.
 The main intent of the law was to combat “the evil of political defections” which may be due
to reward of office or other similar considerations.
 The law applies to both Parliament and state assemblies. However, there are several issues
in relation to the working of this law.
 91st Constitution Amendment Act-2003 was enacted and was aimed at limiting the size of
the Council of Ministers to debar defectors from holding public offices, and to strengthen
the anti-defection law.
Flaws of the current Anti-defection law
 Does not prevent Defection: The Anti-defection law has failed to curb “horse trading” and
defection, leading to toppling of governments through machinations of corrupt legislators.
o Eg: The 17-MLA’s of coalition government resigned in Karnataka, leading to change

in government. The 17 MLA’s later contested from the party that formed new
government.
 Wholesale defection: The law prevents individual defections, but not wholesale defections.
o Eg: Congress government in Madhya Pradesh lost majority due to resignations of

MLA’s.
 Against the true spirit of representative democracy: The anti-defection law seeks to provide
a stable government by ensuring the legislators do not switch sides.
o However, this law also enforces a restriction on legislators from voting in line with
their conscience, judgement and interests of his electorate.
 Impedes legislative control on government: The anti-defection law impedes the oversight
function of the legislature over the government, by ensuring that members vote based on
the decisions taken by the party leadership.
o In short, if legislators are not able to vote on laws independently, they would not act
as an effective check on the government.
o The Anti-Defection Law, in effect, dilutes the separation of powers between the
Executive and the Legislature – and centralises power in the hands of the executives.
 Role of presiding officer of the house: The law lays down that legislators may be disqualified
on grounds of defection by the Presiding Officer of a legislature based on a petition by any
other member of the House.
o However, there are many instances when presiding officers play a part with the
vested interests of a political party/government in power.
o Also, the law does not specify a time period for the Presiding Officer to decide on a
disqualification plea.
o The decision thus is sometimes based on the whims and fancies of the presiding
officer.
 Affects the debate and discussion: The Anti-Defection Law has created a democracy of
parties and numbers in India, rather than a democracy of debate and discussion.
o In this way, it does not make a differentiation between dissent and defection and
weaken the Parliamentary deliberations on any law.
Steps to be taken
 To be used for major decision making: Several experts have suggested that the law should
be valid only for those votes that determine the stability of the government. e.g. passage of
the annual budget or no-confidence motions as recommended by Dinesh Goswami
Committee.
 Non-partisan authority: Various commissions including National Commission to review the

working of the constitution (NCRWC) have recommended that rather than the Presiding
Officer, the decision to disqualify a member should be made by the President (in case of
MPs) or the Governor (in case of MLAs) on the advice of the Election Commission.
 Independent committee for disqualification: Justice Verma in Hollohan judgment said that
tenure of the Speaker is dependent on the continuous support of the majority in the House
and therefore, he does not satisfy the requirement of such independent adjudicatory
authority.
o Also, his choice as the sole arbiter in the matter violates an essential attribute of the
basic feature.
o Thus, the need for an independent authority to deal with the cases of defection.
 Intra-party democracy: 170th Law Commission report underscored the importance of intra-
party democracy by arguing that a political party cannot be a dictatorship internally and
democratic in its functioning outside.
o Thus, the parties should listen to the opinions of the members and have discussions
on the same. This would give the freedom of speech and expression to its members
and promote inner-party democracy.
 Limiting Speaker’s discretion: Recent Supreme Court Judgement ruled that Speaker must
decide on disqualification within three months of receiving application. It cannot be the
discretion of the Speaker to take no action.
Conclusion
There is a need to prevent unholy defections that lead to instability in the governance system of the
nation. The current law is clearly flawed and has not effectively curbed defection due to lure of
power and money. There is a need for a more rationalised version of anti-defection laws which will
help establish a truly representative democracy.
India’s emphasis on humanitarian crisis and silence on key strategic issues such as
how to deal with Taliban and the prospect of India’s recognition of new regime or lack
of it, indicate that India’s new Afghanistan policy is still in making. Analyse its
implications. (250 words)
Why the question:
While a growing number of the Taliban’s western and regional lobbyists are distancing themselves
from their pyrrhic victory, India pulled a rabbit out of its diplomatic hat by sending a senior
diplomatic delegation to the Taliban-occupied Kabul.
To write about India’s response to regime change in Afghanistan and implications of lack of a
coherent policy.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Body:
First, in detail, write about the progress of Indo-Afghan relations since Taliban takeover and India’s
various responses to it
Next, write about the lack of policy on new regime by India and its various implications. Write both
positives and negatives.
Conclusion:
Conclude with a way forward in which India can evolve a coherent policy.
Introduction
The Pakistan-led coalition’s success and luck in toppling a United States-supported constitutional
order in Afghanistan has brought to surface unexpected developments. While a growing number of
the Taliban’s western and regional lobbyists are distancing themselves from their pyrrhic victory,
India pulled a rabbit out of its diplomatic hat by sending a senior diplomatic delegation to the
Taliban-occupied Kabul. The visit was the culmination of Delhi’s months of quiet diplomacy and
signalling.
Body
Background
 The Taliban takeover of Afghanistan has significant ramifications for South Asia, beginning
with the rush of refugees Pakistan may soon see at its western borders.
 But few countries in the region have as much at stake in Afghanistan’s future as India, its
fifth-largest aid donor and one of the most effective.
 India now finds many of its critical investments in human and physical infrastructure
in Afghanistan in jeopardy as the Taliban take control.
 Worse still, the crisis following the U.S. withdrawal leaves India’s foreign-policy and security
interests at considerable risk on two fronts.
 A new Taliban government will likely foster safe havens for anti-Indian terrorist
organizations and other groups that could sow chaos in Indian-administered Kashmir.
 Meanwhile, China’s willingness to work with the Taliban could expand its footprint in the
region.
 In the last two decades, India had become one of Afghanistan’s most significant donors,
providing scholarships to Afghan students, offering food assistance, and helping restore the
country’s war-ravaged power grid.
 But based on its past experience with a Taliban government, India’s security establishment
now faces serious fears about its interests in the country.
 Despite the Taliban’s public assurances, Afghanistan could once again emerge as a regional
terrorist haven.
 When they previously held power, the Taliban gave free rein to a host of anti-Indian terrorist
organizations within Afghanistan, most notably Jaish-e-Mohammed (JeM) and Lashkar-e-
Taiba.
 Safe havens allowed these organizations to regroup, train, and then wreak havoc in Indian-
administered Kashmir, the site of a long-running insurgency.
Indo-Afghan relations since Taliban takeover

 Rapprochement after isolation: Just hours after the Taliban’s takeover, in 2021, India was
the first country to immediately ban all Afghans travelling to India, including students and
patients with a valid Indian visa.
 UN abstention: In a significant but not widely-covered decision, India chose to abstain from
the UN Security Council’s calling on the Taliban to open girl schools and continues to
remain silent about a worsening situation in Afghanistan.
 India First policy: India’s apparent reorientation can be described and understood as an
example of realpolitik, supremacy of national interest and a superficiality of “values” and
“sentiments” in the Hobbesian world of international politics.
Implications of lack of policy on Afghanistan
 An “India First” policy seems to drive Delhi’s Taliban rapprochement. If so, it will destroy a
central pillar of India’s foreign and security policy, the dismantling of the region’s “terrorist
infrastructure”.
 Many Afghans looked at India as an example of a fellow developing nation that overcame
the many challenges of building and sustaining a functioning democratic polity.
o More importantly, India was seen as a sincere friend of Afghanistan, unlike many
double-faced actors.
o India must not lose its soft power in Kabul.
 Even for an “interest”-based foreign policy, it is counterproductive to lose the trust and
goodwill of Afghans toward India by embracing a policy that is doomed to failure on
multiple grounds.
Conclusion
Afghanistan needs a strong UN mandate, including a UN-led political transition process supported by
a UN peace keeping/making force. India can lend its support to such endeavours which are worthy
of its character, ambition and Afghanistan’s needs. India needs a long-term strategic approach
towards Afghanistan that weaves political, economic, military and diplomatic dimensions into a
coherent whole within the framework of a grand strategy. India’s Afghan policy must be based on a
clear-cut understanding of India’s strategic goals in the region, and the regional and global strategic
environment
Functions and responsibilities of the Union and the States, issues and challenges
pertaining to the federal structure, devolution of powers and finances up to local
levels and challenges therein.
Though the Constitution gives the Centre control over three subjects — land, public
order, and police However, the Government of National Capital Territory of Delhi Act
reorganised the powers and responsibilities of the Delhi Legislative Assembly and the
Lieutenant-Governor (L-G), in favour of the latter. Critically analyse. (250 words)
Why the question:
The turf battle between the Lieutenant-Governor (L-G) appointed by the Centre and the elected
government of Delhi has a long and noisy history. The recently appointed L-G, Vinai Kumar Saxena,
has, through his disruptive enthusiasm to meddle in the day-to-day governance in Delhi, set the cat
among the pigeons.
To critically examine the changes introduced by the GNCTD Amendment Act, 2021.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by explaining the GNCTD Amendment Act, 2021 and the changes in introduced.
Body:
First, give a context of struggle between UT of Delhi and central government over the ears.
Next, examine the various changes – equates government with lieutenant governor, skews power
against the elected government, day to day affairs will be affected, against the SC judgement in
Union territory of Delhi vs Union of India case, 2018.
Suggest ways to ensure cooperation and coordination over conflict.
Conclusion:
Introduction
The Government of National Capital Territory of Delhi (Amendment) Bill, 2021 was introduced in Lok
Sabha on March 15, 2021. The Bill amends the Government of National Capital Territory of Delhi
Act, 1991.
The Act provides a framework for the functioning of the Legislative Assembly and the government of
the National Capital Territory (NCT) of Delhi. The Bill amends certain powers and responsibilities of
the Legislative Assembly and the Lieutenant Governor.
Body:
Background
The incumbent government in NCT Delhi has accused the L-G of undermining “constitutional
sanctity” by having called a meeting of Delhi Jal Board officials on May 30 and issuing directions
bypassing the Council of Ministers and the Chief Minister.
Provisions of the new Amendment:
 Restriction on laws passed by the Assembly: The Bill provides that the term “government”
referred to in any law made by the Legislative Assembly will imply Lieutenant Governor (LG).
 Rules of Procedure of the Assembly: The Act allows the Legislative Assembly to make Rules
to regulate the procedure and conduct of business in the Assembly. The Bill provides that
such Rules must be consistent with the Rules of Procedure and Conduct of Business in the
Lok Sabha.
 Inquiry by the Assembly into administrative decisions: The Bill prohibits the Legislative
Assembly from making any rule to enable itself or its Committees to: (i) consider the matters
of day-to-day administration of the NCT of Delhi and (ii) conduct any inquiry in relation to
administrative decisions. Further, the Bill provides that all such rules made before its
enactment will be void.
 Assent to Bills: The Act requires the LG to reserve certain Bills passed by the Legislative
Assembly for the consideration of the President. These Bills are those: (i) which may
diminish the powers of the High Court of Delhi, (ii) which the President may direct to be
reserved, (iii) dealing with the salaries and allowances of the Speaker, Deputy Speaker, and
members of the Assembly and the Ministers, or (iv) relating to official languages of the
Assembly or the NCT of Delhi.
 The Bill requires the LG to also reserve those Bills for the President which incidentally cover
any of the matters outside the purview of the powers of the Legislative Assembly.
 LG’s opinion for executive actions: The Act specifies that all executive action by the
government, whether taken on the advice of the Ministers or otherwise, must be taken in
the name of the LG. The Bill adds that on certain matters, as specified by the LG, his opinion
must be obtained before taking any executive action on the decisions of the Minister/
Council of Ministers.
Criticism of the Bill:
 Undermines the power of the Assembly: The amended sections of the GNCTD Act diminish
the constitutionally guaranteed powers and functions of the elected Assembly.
o Considering LG as the ‘government’ is making a nominated post equivalent to the

‘default administering authority’ of the NCT instead of the elected one.
o Diluting the executive power of elected government and transferring it to the LG and
the Secretaries in the government is against the representative form of government
envisaged under Article 239 AA of the Constitution.
o The LG, who will now be the government, is under no obligation to implement any
law passed by the assembly or carry out the directions of the house as he is not
responsible to the assembly.
 Against Co-operative Federalism: The provisions may lead to centralization of power,

unnecessary interference by the LG in day-to-day administration and delays in
implementation of policies. It would hamper the spirit of co-operative federalism and
separation of power.
 Violation of the Supreme Court judgment, 2018: The constitutional bench in the
Government of NCT of Delhi vs UoI & ors. 2018 case had held that the LG’s concurrence is
not required on all matters and that the control of the Centre is confined to three areas only
i.e., land, police and public order.
 Not appropriately discussed: The Act has been passed in haste without being referred to the
Select committee
 Violates basic structure: Executive accountability is the essence of the parliamentary system
of government, which is a part of the basic structure of the constitution.
 Could lead to Policy paralysis: The Bill also requires the government to obtain the LG’s
opinion on decisions before executive action is taken, which runs counter to the
constitutional bench’s specific interpretation on the need to inform but not to have to wait
for a return of the LG’s opinion, something which could take days, or never come.
Conclusion:
The Supreme Court had adopted the principles of democracy and balanced federalism as the basis
for its decision to give unfettered freedom to the elected government to carry out its decisions. The
above amendment Bill while nullifying the decision of the Supreme Court does not attempt to
change its basis. On the contrary, as the statement of objects and reasons indicates, the Bill tries to
define the responsibilities of the elected government and the LG in line with the constitutional
scheme of governance of the NCT of Delhi.
Critically examine the performance of Jal Jeevan Mission in providing access to safe
and adequate drinking water. (250 words)
Why the question:
Water contamination deaths are a major concern even as the Jal Jeevan Mission (JJM) is underway
across India from August 2019. Three people died in Raichur in North Karnataka of water
contamination over the past week and at least 70 took ill.
To critically examine the performance of Jal Jeevan Mission.

Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by writing about the aims and objectives of Jal Jeevan Mission.
Body:
First, write about the various achievements of Jal Jeevan Mission. Substantiate with facts and figures.
Next, write about the various shortcomings of Jal Jeevan Mission in ensuring availability of safe
drinking water.
Next, suggest ways to overcome the limitations.
Conclusion:
Introduction
NITI Aayog’s Composite Water Management Index (CWMI) report in 2018 stated that about two
lakh people die every year due to lack of access to safe water. It also estimated that about 40%
of the country’s projected population is likely to face water stress by 2030. Its assessment points to
the disturbing fact that almost 70% of the country’s underground and surface fresh water could be
contaminated.
India has 16% of the world population, but only 4% of freshwater resources. Depleting
groundwater level, overexploitation and deteriorating water quality, climate change, etc. are major
challenges to provide potable drinking water.
It is an urgent requirement of water conservation in the country because of the decreasing amount
of groundwater level. Therefore, the Jal Jeevan Mission will focus on integrated demand and
supply management of water at the local level.
Body
Background: Reason for unveiling Jal Jeevan Mission
 According to the Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB), urbanisation, increasing

population, and unchecked encroachment are forcing water bodies to dwindle.
 Water pollution is mainly caused by discharge of untreated or partially treated sewage,

industrial effluents, improper management of generated sewage, and maintenance of
existing infrastructure.
 The grim situation pertaining to clean drinking water prompted the Centre to kick-start the
JJM.
 The mission aims to provide adequate and long-term supply of quality drinking water
through taps to every rural household by 2024.
Objectives of the mission
 The chief objective of the Mission is to provide piped water supply (Har Ghar Jal) to all
rural and urban households by 2024.
 It also aims to create local infrastructure for rainwater harvesting, groundwater recharge
and management of household waste water for reuse in agriculture.
 The Jal Jeevan Mission is set to be based on various water conservation efforts like point
recharge, desilting of minor irrigation tanks, use of greywater for agriculture and source
sustainability.
 The Jal Jeevan Mission will converge with other Central and State Government Schemes to
achieve its objectives of sustainable water supply management across the country.
 The mission ensures:
o Functionality of existing water supply systems and water connections.
o Water quality monitoring and testing as well as sustainable agriculture.
o Conjunctive use of conserved water.
o Drinking water source augmentation.
o Drinking water supply system, grey water treatment and its reuse.
 Implementation: The Mission is based on a community approach to water and includes

extensive Information, Education and Communication as a key component of the mission.
o JJM looks to create a jan andolan for water, thereby making it everyone’s priority.
o The fund sharing pattern between the Centre and states is 90:10 for Himalayan and
North-Eastern States, 50:50 for other states, and 100% for Union Territories.
Jal Jeevan Mission
 When the mission was launched, only 17% (32.3 million) of the country’s rural households
had a tap water supply.
 Today, 7.80 Crore (41.14%) households have tap water supply. Goa, Telangana, Andaman &
Nicobar Islands and Puducherry have achieved 100% household connection in rural areas
and have become ‘Har Ghar Jal’.
 To complement the Jal Jeevan Mission (Rural), Jal Jeevan Mission (Urban) was announced in
the Budget 2021-22.
 Clean water in schools: With children being more vulnerable to water-borne diseases, the
JJM saw a special campaign launched in October 2020 to supply potable water to schools.
o Tap water supply is available in52 lakh (83%) schools and 8.76
lakh (78.4%) anganwadi centres across India.
Conclusion
The Drinking Water distribution and Sanitation Network will continue to expand its coverage in the
coming years; household-scale service delivery and the provision of 55 litres per capita per day (lpcd)
of water of acceptable quality on a regular and long-term basis are primary focuses. The goal is to
change the focus of development work from infrastructure building to service delivery rather than
simply focusing on it.
The Indian constitution tries to accommodate diversity in India through asymmetrical

federal provisions of power sharing between states. Discuss. (250 words)
Reference: Polity by M. Laxmikanth.
Why the question:
To write about asymmetric federalism and its need.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by defining asymmetric federalism in India.
Body:
Explain the asymmetric federalism prevalent and followed in the country; the main forms of
administrative units in India are the Centre and the States. But there are other forms, too, all set up
to address specific local, historical and geographical contexts. Besides the Centre and the States, the
country has Union Territories with a legislature and Union Territories without a legislature.
Substantiate with examples.
Conclusion:
Conclude with uniqueness and importance of India’s federalism.
Introduction
Federalism is a system of government in which power is divided between a central authority and
constituent political units. The Constitution of India establishes a federal structure to the Indian
government, declaring it to be a “Union of States”. Indian model of federalism is called quasi-federal
system as it contains major features of both a federation and union
Body
Uniqueness of principle of federalism in India:
Federal Features of the India Union:
 Two governments i.e. Union Government and State governments
 Division of powers between the union and its constituents (Seventh Schedule of the
Constitution contains three lists such as the Union List, State List, and Concurrent List)
 Supremacy of the Constitution (Basic structure of the Constitution is made indestructible by

the Judiciary)
 Partial rigidity of the Constitution
 Independent Judiciary
 Bicameralism
Unitary Features of the Constitution:

 A strong centre – The Union Government becomes all powerful in certain times like
emergencies. Article 200 of the Constitution of India demands that the States must comply
with the central laws.
 Single Constitution
 Single citizenship
 Flexibility of Constitution
 Integrated judiciary
 Appointment of the Centre. E.g.: Governor
 All India Services
 Emergency provisions
The following four characteristics highlighting the fact that the Indian Constitution is not a
“traditional federal Constitution”:
 Firstly, being that there is no provision of separate Constitutions for each State as required
in a federal state. The Constitution of India is the supreme document, which governs all the
states.
 Secondly, the Constitution can be altered only by the Union Parliament; whereas the States
have no power to alter it.
 Thirdly, in contradiction to a federal Constitution, the Indian Constitution renders supreme

power upon the Courts to invalidate any action which violates the Constitution.
 Fourthly, the distribution of powers facilitates local governance by the states and national
policies by the Centre.
 The main forms of administrative units in India are the Centre and the States. But there are
other forms, too, all set up to address specific local, historical and geographical contexts.
Besides the Centre and the States, the country has Union Territories with a legislature, and
Union Territories without a legislature.
 Just as the Centre and the States do not have matching powers in all matters, there are
some differences in the way some States and other constituent units of the Indian Union
relate to the Centre. This creates a notable asymmetry in the way Indian federalism works
Constitutional Asymmetry in Indian Federalism has been able to accommodate diversity in India
 The Indian Constitution is a constitution sui generis.
 On one hand, the constitution contains features which are of high importance for a federal
arrangement, at the same time it contains provisions which fight for a strong Centre, thus
making it quasi-federal in nature.
 The fact to be appreciated here is that these dual federalism provisions were deliberately
incorporated to best fit a polyglot country like India
 These special provisions in the Constitution help in protecting fundamental rights, and
compensate for initial inequalities in the social system.
 Allowance for separate laws to govern different religious groups, and provisions for various
kinds of affirmative action for extremely disadvantaged groups help in ensuring justice to
them.
 These provisions respects and preserve diversity of the country by protecting vulnerable
group through special powers. This ensure unity in diversity leading to ‘sabka sath sabka
vikas’.
 It act as a solution to satisfy different needs of various federal units, as the result of an
ethnic, linguistic or cultural difference. Asymmetric federalism has helped in reducing
dissatisfaction among various states
 Special powers given to the state of Jammu and Kashmir help in reducing radicalisation. The
state of Jammu and Kashmir was given special power because the state though include
several diverse population, but the majority of the population of the state is Muslim, and the
state was also near the new country “Pakistan’ which is a major ‘Muslim’ country.
 It has helped in providing representation to minority areas and areas with less population
providing them justice.
Conclusion
The Indian Constitution is neither purely federal nor purely unitary, but it’s a combination of both.
Indian Constitution is mainly federal with unique safeguards for enforcing national unity and growth.
Also, federalism is not dead in India, as evidenced by the fact that new regions are demanding
statehood and union has yielded, thus states like Manipur, Tripura, Goa, etc. have been created.
Tensions over centralisation in certain spheres of governance has adversely affected

centre-state relations in the recent past. Do you agree the view that there has been a
rise of unitary tendencies? Critically analyse. (250 words)
Why the question:
To write about the centralising tendency witnessed in India and suggests steps to overcome it.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by defining federalism.
Body:
First, write about the various tensions in the centre-state relations in the recent past. Cite examples
to substantiate.
Next, mention the centralising tendencies witnessed in India prior to the pandemic – monetary share
of the States in Centrally Sponsored Schemes (CSS), the terms of reference of the 15th Finance
Commission, imposition of demonetisation without adequate consultation with the States,
institutionalisation of the Goods and Services Tax (GST), outsourcing of the statutory functions under
the Smart Cities Mission, a delay in transfer of GST compensation, ‘One Nation One Ration’,
Next, write about the other side. Mention the various facets that have promoted federalism in the
recent past.
Conclusion:
Conclude by giving a balanced opinion.
Introduction
India is a federal state where the Centre and the State are the Cooperating units of the polity. Yet
India is an asymmetrical federalism, with the balance of power tilting in the favour of the Centre.
Article 256 deals with Union-state relation and State’s obligation while Article 365 mandates the
state governments to follow and implement the directions of the Central government. Changing
dynamics of party system is shaping the trajectory of Federalism from cooperative to
confrontationalist.
Body
Centre-state relations: Amidst centralisation
 State’s dwindling resources: The findings suggest that recent changes in India’s fiscal
architecture, including the Goods and Services Tax (GST) regime, and increase in state shares
for the Centrally Sponsored Schemes (CSSs) had placed state finances in a precarious
position, even prior to the crisis.
 Increasing dependency on Centre: The dependency of states on the Centre for revenues has
increased, with the share of the revenue from own sources declining from 55% in 2014-15 to
50.5% in 2020-21.
o While part of this is inherent in India’s fiscal structure, wherein states are the big
spenders and the Centre controls the purse strings, the situation has been
exacerbated by the introduction of the GST.
o Barring a few exceptions, such as petroleum products, property tax, and alcohol
excise, indirect taxes have, to a large degree, been subsumed under the GST regime,
eroding the ability of states to raise their own revenues.
 Shortfall in devolution: Adding to state woes is the significant divergence in past periods
between the amount of GST compensation owed and the actual payments made, including
for states such as Uttar Pradesh, Bihar and Jharkhand that need greater fiscal support.
o Even before Covid-19 hit, 11 states estimated a revenue growth rate below the
estimated 14% level, implying higher amounts will be owed as GST compensation.
o With the bulk of the states’ GST coming from goods such as electronics, fashion, and
entertainment — all of which have been impacted by the pandemic — these
revenues are likely to decline further.
Rising unitary tendencies
 Article 355 enjoins the Union to “… ensure that the government of every State is carried on
in accordance with the provisions of this Constitution”.
o Example: When State governments raised concerns about the NPR, the Union
insisted that States are under a constitutional duty to implement laws passed by
Parliament.
 Centrally sponsored Schemes: CSS is the biggest component of Central Assistance to state
plans (CA), where states don’t have much flexibility.
 Enforcement of International Treaties and Agreements. This provision enables the central
government to fulfil its international obligations (Art. 253). The Lokpal and the Lokayuktas
Bill, 2011 was introduced in the Parliament through the provisions of this particular article.
 Article 200: Reservation of state Bills by Governor for President’s assent.

 Article 256 mentions that the executive power of every state shall be so exercised as to
ensure compliance with laws made by Parliament and any existing laws, which apply in that
state, and the executive power of the Union shall extend to the giving of such directions to a
state as may appear to the Government of India to be necessary for that purpose.
 Several issues such as trust deficit and shrinkage of divisible pools plague Centre-State
relations. Together, they make total cooperation difficult.
 On one hand the Centre has increased the States’ share of the divisible pool but in reality
States are getting a lesser share.
o For instance, as per the 16th FC recommendations, many south states are on the
losing side of their share of tax resources.
o The allocation towards various social welfare schemes has also come down,
affecting the States’ health in turn.
 Inter-State water disputes like the Mahadayi issue between Goa and
Karnataka, Mahanadi water disputes (Odisha and Chhattisgarh) requires cooperation from
all quarters (centre and riparian states).
Strengthening of Indian federal polity
 Legislative/Administrative
o Separation of Power: Schedule 7 of Constitution provides strict delineation of
powers between center and state. (Except during emergencies which comes under
judicial review)
o Article 131 of the Constitution, which gives the Supreme Court exclusive
jurisdiction to hear cases between states and the Centre. Eg: Chhattisgarh moved
SC against NIA Act in Jan 2020.
o Coalition governments: It has increased states’ bargaining power.
 Political
o In relation to the imposition of President’s rule under Article 356 of the

Constitution, federalism is far more mature.
 Financial
o GST Council: Passing of GST is a shining example of cooperative federalism where

States and Centre have ceded their power to tax and come up with a single tax
system to realize the dream of one Economic India with ‘One Nation, One Market’.
o Majority decisions have been based on consensus till now, while states gave 2/3rd of
votes.
o Since 10th FC, state’s share has been continuously increasing till 14th FC by
devolving 42%.
 Other Areas
o NITI Aayog: Replacing the erstwhile Planning Commission, the Aayog is promoting
bottom-up approach to development planning.
o Sabka Saath Sabka Vikas involves State’s as equal partners of development. There is
a move towards competitive and cooperative
Conclusion and way forward
 Strengthening of Inter-State Council: Over the year multiple committees have

recommended strengthening of Interstate Council where the concurrent list subjects can be
debated and discussed, balancing Centre state powers. There is far less institutional space to
settle inter-state frictions therefore a constitutional institution like ISC can be a way forward.
 Autonomy to states: Centre should form model laws with enough space for states to
maneuver. Centre should give enough budgetary support to states so as to avoid budgetary
burden. There should be least interference in the state subjects.
 Democratic Decentralization of administration and strengthening governments at all levels

in true spirit. Power should be decentralized based on the principle of subsidiarity.
While in certain areas, it might warrant greater powers to the Union(defence, currency etc), on the
development front (education, health etc.) the Centre should respect the autonomy of the other two
levels of government and consciously avoid the tendency to centralize powers and functions.
The pandemic has worsened the fiscal positions of State governments. Critically
analyse the performance of Fiscal Responsibility and Budget Management Act
(FRBMA), 2003 in ensuring that debt targets of states remain under sustainable levels.
What changes do you suggest in this regard? (250 words)
Why the question:
A decline in revenue and an increase in spending has led to a sharp rise in debt among States with a
higher dependence on Central transfers
To write about the increasing fiscal deficit of the state, its impact and performance of FRMBA in this
regard and changes needed to it.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by writing about the aims and objectives of FRBMA.
Body:
First, write about the impact of the pandemic on fiscal discipline of the states and the impact of a
growing deficit.
Next, write about the performance of FRBMA since its inception especially during phases of low
economic growth and volatility in global economy. Mention the pros and cons of its performance.
Also, mention the various changes made to the act.
Next, write about the changes needed to the act as India recovers from the impact of the pandemic.
Conclusion:
Introduction
FRBM Act was enacted in August 2003. It aims to make the Central government responsible for
ensuring inter-generational equity in fiscal management and long-term macro-economic stability.
The Act envisages the setting of limits on the Central government’s debt and deficits.
It limited the fiscal deficit to 3% of the GDP. For states it is 3% of Gross State Domestic Product
(GSDP) cap on their annual budget deficits.
Body
Impact of the pandemic on fiscal discipline of the states
 The pandemic has worsened the fiscal positions of State governments. Declining tax
revenue, a high share of committed expenses (interest payments, pensions, administrative
expenses etc.,) and rising subsidy burdens meant that States were overly dependent on
Central transfers.
 A decline in revenue and an increase in spending meant a sharp rise in debt. Punjab,
Rajasthan, Kerala, West Bengal, Bihar, Andhra Pradesh, Jharkhand, Madhya Pradesh, Uttar
Pradesh and Haryana had the highest debt burden in 2020-21.
 The revenue expenditure of many of these States constitute 80-90% of the total expenses
and therefore they have poor capital spending.
o . Some States like Rajasthan, West Bengal, Punjab and Kerala spend around 90 per
cent in revenue accounts
 Own tax revenue of Haryana, Kerala and Andhra Pradesh constitutes about half of their total
revenue collections. The major source of revenue of other States is Central transfers. Within
own tax revenue, States’ goods and services tax (SGST), States’ excise duties and sales tax
are the major sources of revenue
Performance of FRBMA since its inception
 The implementation of FRBM Act/FRLs improved the fiscal performance of both centre and
states.
 The States have achieved the targets much ahead the prescribed timeline.
 Government of India was on the path of achieving this objective right in time. However, due
to the global financial crisis, this was suspended and the fiscal consolidation as mandated
in the FRBM Act was put on hold in 2007-08.
 FRBM act has been violated more than adhered to since its enactment. The target fiscal
deficit to GDP ratio of 3% for the Union government was achieved only once, in 2007-08,
when it was 2.5%. That achievement has yet to be emulated again.
 The FRBM Act was amended twice, in 2012 and 2015. The revisions in 2015 shifted the date
for achieving the 3% target to 2017-18. By this year, the amended revenue deficit target was
put at 2% of GDP.
Shortcomings of the Act
 Reduction of expenditure in critical sector: While there is a drastic fall in deficits, it has
largely been on account of reductions in expenditure in critical sectors of the economy such
as education, health etc.
o The Union government’s development expenditure as a proportion of GDP has

declined over time.
 Reduced development expenditure: An analysis of revenue account of the development

expenditure by states shows that in almost all sectors of development, there has been a
decline in the FRBM era.
 Manipulation: Also, at times it has been seen that the government has achieved the deficit
targets by manipulating the revenue and expenditure accounts such as curtailing the
capital expenditure; demanding interim dividend from Public Sector Undertakings (PSUs) in
advance etc.
 No force majeure clauses: Further, the FRBM Act ignores the possible inverse link between
fiscal deficit (fiscal expansion) and bank credit (monetary expansion). That is, if credit growth
falls, fiscal deficit may need to rise and if credit rises, fiscal deficit ought to fall — to ensure
adequate money supply to the economy.
 Investment starved: Data on money supply growth, bank credit and GDP establishes that
both money supply growth and credit expansion have significantly reduced in relation to
GDP growth. Thus, the FRBM Act has not only reduced the fiscal deficit but also starved the
growing economy from much-needed investment.
Reformation of FRBM needed
The government should start by defining a clear objective, based not on arbitrary targets but on
sound first principles: It should aim to ensure debt sustainability. To this end, the government could
adopt a strategy based on four principles.
 Remove multiple fiscal criteria: The current FRBM sets targets for the overall deficit, the
revenue deficit and debt. Such multiple criteria impede the objective of ensuring
sustainability since the targets can conflict with each other, This creates confusion about
which one to follow and thereby obfuscating accountability.
 Target must not be fixed: Around the world, countries are realising that deficit targets of 3
per cent of GDP and debt targets of 60 per cent of GDP lack proper economic grounding. In
India’s case, they take no account of the country’s own fiscal arithmetic or its strong political
will to repay its debt. Any specific target, no matter how well-grounded, encouraging
governments to transfer spending off-budget such as with the “oil bonds” in the mid-2000s
and subsidies more recently.
 Focus on one measure for guiding fiscal policy: In this regard, Arvind Subramanian and Josh
Felmanwe propose targeting the primary balance. This concept is new to India and will take
time for the public to absorb and accept. But it is inherently simple and has the eminent
virtue that it is closely linked to meeting the overall objective of ensuring debt sustainability.
 Have a long-term plan: The Centre should not set out yearly targets for the primary balance.
Instead, it should announce a plan to improve the primary balance gradually, by say half a
percentage point of GDP per year on average. Doing so will make it clear that it will
accelerate consolidation when times are good, moderate it when times are less buoyant,
and end it when a small surplus has been achieved. This strategy is simple and easy to
communicate; it is gradual and hence feasible.
Conclusion
Economic disruption caused by the COVID has prompted calls for a relook at the Fiscal Responsibility
and Budget Management Act (FRBM). The introduction of the FRBM in 2003 reflected the belief that
setting strict limits on fiscal deficits, both for the centre and the states, was the solution. But this
framework didn’t work. It is time to learn from past experience and adapt. Adopting a simple new
fiscal framework based on the primary balance could be the way forward.
Structure, organization and functioning of the Executive and the Judiciary—

Ministries and Departments of the Government; pressure groups and
formal/informal associations and their role in the Polity.
Do you agree with the view that the President of India is just a titular head? Critically
comment. (250 words)
Reference: Indian Express ,Insights on India
Why the question:
The Election Commission has notified the election of India’s next President on July 18. A look at the
voting procedure, how the votes of MLAs and MPs are weighted, and how previous elections have
played out.
To write about the role of President of India in the Indian executive.
Directive word:
opinion thereupon.

Introduction:
Begin by giving a brief about president as the head of the Indian state.
Body:
First, discuss how he is just a titular head – He is the nominal head of the government but the real
power lies with the Prime Minister. Discuss article 53, 74, 75 etc. Use suitable examples of recent
incidents from which it is evident that he is a mere rubber stamp.
Next, give the counter view – situations where President has powers and does not act as a rubber
stamp. For Example -Veto powers of president like pocket veto, suspensive veto etc.
Conclusion:
Conclude with a balanced opinion.
Introduction
Article 53 reads as ‘The executive power of the Union shall be vested in the President and shall be
exercised by him either directly or through officers’ subordinate to him’. In spite of the expression
‘directly’ in Article 53 of the Constitution, India’s President merely ‘reigns and does not rule’. The
role of president is largely ceremonial in nature. This was the consequence of 42nd Constitutional
Amendment that drastically curtailed the President’s powers with respect to the Council of
Ministers. Article 74 (1) now mandates the President to act on the aid and advice of the Council of
Ministers. This prevents the president becoming a power center rivalling that of prime minister.
Body
President’s role in Indian political setup:
 The President of India is the Head of State and the Chief Executive. The executive powers of
the Union are in the hands of the President.
 The President of India is vested with Legislative, Executive and Judicial powers. But as the
advice given by CoM is binding on Indian President, in reality, most of these powers rest with
the COM; but decisions are taken in the name of President of India.
 He exercises these either directly or through officers subordinate to him. However, being the
head of a parliamentary system, he is only a constitutional/titular head and exercises
nominal power.
 The President always acts in accordance with the advice of the Council of Ministers and the
Prime Minister. All his powers are really used by the Prime Minister and the Union Council of
Ministers.
 The President holds the highest office in India, represents the sovereignty of India, enjoys
the highest position and plays a valuable part in the working of the Indian Constitutional
system.
 President is also the supreme commander of armed forces and has powers to prorogue or
dissolve the Parliament.
 He/She further makes appointments to important posts including the PM, state governors
and Supreme Court and High Court judges.
By looking at the powers of the President, it becomes quite easy to evaluate the position of the
President. At the face value, the powers of the President appear to be very big and formidable. A
close review, however, reveals that President of India is a nominal and constitutional executive
head who exercises all his powers on the advice of the Prime Minister and his Council of Ministers.
The President is always bound to accept the advice of the Prime Minister and the Council of
Ministers. However, despite such a provision, the President is neither merely a titular head nor a
rubber stamp in the hands of the Ministry.
President’s discretionary powers:
 Suspensive Veto:
o The President has discretionary power when he exercises suspensive veto ie. when
he returns a bill (not money bill) for reconsideration of the parliament.
o However, if the bill is passed again by the Parliament with or without amendments
and presented again to the President, it is obligatory for him to give his assent to the
bill.
 Pocket Veto:
o This is not a provision mentioned in the Indian constitution, but this is a possible
situation when the President of India can use his discretionary power. In this case,
the President neither ratifies nor reject nor return the bill, but simply keeps the bill
pending for an indefinite period.
o As the time limit within which the President has to take the decision with respect to
a bill presented to him for assent, has not been mentioned in the constitution, in
effect the inaction of the President stops the bill from becoming an act.
 President can seek information from Prime Minister:
o Under article 78 the President enjoys the right to seek information from the PM
regarding the administration of the affairs of the union.
o Under the established convention, the President has the right to warn or encourage
the Council of Minister (CoM) in the exercise of its power.
 Case of no sitting of both houses:
o Under Article 85, the President can summon each House of Parliament to meet at
such time and place as he thinks fit, to ensure that six months shall not intervene
between its last sitting in one session and the date appointed for its sitting in the
next session.
 Case of no majority:
o When no political party or coalition of parties enjoy the majority in Lok Sabha, then
the President has discretion in inviting the leader of that party or coalition of parties
who in his opinion is able to form a stable government.
 Case of no-confidence with CoM- dissolving Loksabha:
o It is for the president to decide if he should dissolve Loksabha or not when CoM
loses the majority in Lok Sabha. The President can dissolve Lok Sabha only on the
advice of CoM but the advice is binding only if the government is a majority
government.
 Case of no-confidence with CoM- dissolving CoM:
o It is for the president to decide if he should dissolve CoM or not when CoM loses the
majority in Lok Sabha.
 Case of a caretaker government:
o A caretaker government does not enjoy the confidence of Lok Sabha and hence it is
not expected to take major decisions but only to make the day-to-day administrative
decisions. It is for the President to decide the day-to-day decisions.
Indian Presidents are not titular heads or mere rubber-stamps:
 While India’s first President Dr. Rajendra Prasad is known to have frequently disagreed with
then PM Jawaharlal Nehru, seventh President Giani Zail Singh is known to have a rocky
relationship with PM Rajiv Gandhi.
 K R Narayanan, India’s tenth President, famously told the Parliament that he is ‘not a rubber
stamp’ while returning a proposal calling for imposition of President’s rule in UP.
 Pranab Mukherjee was more assertive than any of his predecessors. Although he is known to
have rejected 28 mercy petitions, a record number, he commuted four sentences, in
defiance of the government’s wishes and refrained from sending those back to the
government for reconsideration.
President can play an effective role:

The President is not a silent institution and his role stands beyond the constitutional provisions and
established conventions. The powers of the President flow from the oath he takes under Article
60 to ‘preserve, protect and defend the Constitution and submit himself to the service and well -
being of people of India’. Therefore, new norms can be devised and used to preserve the faith and
belief of the common man in the system. These norms can be:
 The Constitution is silent on the limitations on the President’s activities in public affairs.
Public speaking of president can initiate the debate in the society.
 Use of pocket veto in the cases which are considered to be undermining the Constitution.
 Reaching out to the people of India.
Conclusion
The office of the President should not be conceived as merely a ceremonial post or a rubber stamp.
Within the confines of constitution, a president can redefine the activities of his office. The President
can declare Emergency, suspend rights, dissolve state Assemblies and declare the government
bankrupt.
A powerful, independent judiciary is of paramount importance to protect rights of

citizens and country’s socio-economic development. Hence, there is a scope for
reforms to make higher judiciary efficient and effective. Analyse. (250 words)
Introduction
The justice system in any democracy is set up, under the Constitution to serve the public without
“fear or favour, affection or ill-will” as far as judges are concerned. The Indian Judiciary plays an
increasingly important role in the life and the governance of this country. However, several issues
from pendency to vacancies and appointments plague the judiciary.
Body
Background
 The retirements in the topmost rung of the judiciary in 2022 would encompass changes in
the powerful Supreme Court Collegium and see two new Chief Justices in a span of months.
 The working judicial strength is 32 against the sanctioned strength of 34.
 The Supreme Court’s statistics show that 70,362 cases are pending with it as on April 1,
2022.
 While 52,110 are admission matters, 18,522 are regular hearing cases.
 The number of Constitution Bench cases (both main and connected matters) total 422.
Issues plaguing the judiciary
 Credibility of the SC: Controversial collegium system of judicial appointments undermines

the independence of judges and raises doubts about the credibility of the highest court.
 There is a failure to make an assessment of the personality of the contemnor at the
time of recommending his name for elevation.
 Example: The controversy over the proposed elevation of Justice P.D. Dinakaran of
the Karnataka High Court to the Supreme Court by the collegium of the Chief Justice
and four senior-most judges of the Supreme Court was criticized for overlooking
apparently suitable judges by the collegiums
 The judiciary off late has been caught in many such situations of credibility crisis off
late.
 Unequal Representation: The other area of concern is the composition of the higher
judiciary. While data regarding caste is not available, women are fairly underrepresented in
the higher judiciary.
 Delay in Judicial Appointments: The process of judicial appointment is delayed due to delay
in recommendations by the collegium for the higher judiciary.
 Shortage of judges: From 1950 to 1921, the number of Supreme Court judges has increased
nearly four times. Even then, case pendency has steadily kept rising.
 Around 5,580 or 25% of posts are lying empty in the subordinate courts, which leads
to poor Judges to Population Ratio, as India has only 20 judges per million
population. Earlier, Law Commission had recommended 50 judges per million.
 Frequent adjournments: The laid down procedure of allowing a maximum of three
adjournments per case is not followed in over 50 per cent of the matters being heard by
courts, leading to rising pendency of cases.
 Low budgetary allocation leading to poor infrastructure: India spends only about 09% of its
GDP to maintain the judicial infrastructure.
 Infrastructure status of lower courts of the country is miserably grim due to which
they fail to deliver quality judgements.
 A 2016 report published by the Supreme Court showed that existing infrastructure
could accommodate only 15,540 judicial officers against the all-India sanctioned
strength of 20,558.
 Lack of court management systems: Courts have created dedicated posts for court
managers to help improve court operations, optimize case movement and judicial time.
 However, only few courts have filled up such posts so far.

 Judge to population ratio: At present, India has a sanctioned strength of 25,628 judges. This
is when over 4.7 crore cases are pending in courts across the country.
Judicial reforms needed
 Improving infrastructure for quality justice:

 The Parliamentary Standing Committee which presented its report on
Infrastructure Development and Strengthening of Subordinate Courts, suggested:
 States should provide suitable land for construction of court buildings etc. It should
undertake vertical construction in light of shortage of land.
 Timeline set out for computerization of all the courts, as a necessary step towards
setting up of e- courts.
 Addressing the Issue of Vacancies:
 Ensure the appointments of the judges be done in an efficient way by arriving at an
optimal judge strength to handle the cases pending in the system.
 The 120th Law Commission of India report for the first time, suggested a judge
strength fixation formula.
 Supreme Court and High Courts should appoint efficient and experienced judges as
Ad-hoc judges in accordance with the Constitution.
 All India Judicial Service, which would benefit the subordinate judiciary by
increasing quality of judges and help reduce the pendency.
 Timeframe to dispose of cases:
 Having a definite time frame to dispose the cases by setting annual targets and
action plans for the subordinate judiciary and the High Courts. The judicial officers
could be issued a strict code of conduct, to ensure that the duties are adequately
performed by the officials.
 Strict regulation of adjournments and imposition of exemplary costs for seeking it on
flimsy grounds especially at the trial stage and not permitting dilution of time frames
specified in Civil Procedure Code.
 Better Court Management System & Reliable Data Collection:
 For this categorization of cases on the basis of urgency and priority along with
bunching of cases should be done.
 Use of Information technology (IT) solutions:
 The use of technology for tracking and monitoring cases and in providing relevant
information to make justice litigant friendly.
 All the courts in the country must switch to a hybrid virtual mode immediately and
start disposing cases.
 Process reengineering:
 Involves redesigning of core business processes to achieve dramatic improvements
in productivity and quality by incorporating the use of technology in court rules. It
will include:
 Electronic filing of cases: e-Courts are a welcome step in this direction, as they give
case status and case history of all the pending cases across High courts and
Subordinate courts bringing ease of access to information.
 Revamping of National Judicial Data Grid by introducing a new type of search
known as elastic search, which is closer to the artificial intelligence.
Conclusion
The fundamental requirement of a good judicial administration is accessibility, affordability and

speedy justice, which will not be realized until and unless the justice delivery system is made within
the reach of the individual in a time bound manner and within a reasonable cost. Therefore,
continuous formative assessment is the key to strengthen and reinforce the justice delivery system
in India.
Appointment to various Constitutional posts, powers, functions and

responsibilities of various Constitutional Bodies.
A rejuvenated Inter-State Council can play a vital role in better implementation of
governance practices, involve the states more closely in the planning and delivery of
services and lead to a more prudent fiscal discipline. Discuss. (250 words)
Reference: New Indian Express , Insights on India
Why the question:
A defining feature of the eight-year rule of the Narendra Modi government is its often baffling
adherence to secrecy while framing and implementing policies. From demonetisation to the Covid-19
lockdown to the farmers’ bill to the scrapping of Article 370, every major decision of the government
was shrouded in mystery.
To write about the importance of Inter-State Council for centre-state relations and development of
India.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by writing about Inter-State Council Article 263, its aims and objectives.
Body:
First, give brief context of development of ISC with respect to centre-state relations and issues
associated with the ISC.
Next, write about how the ISC can play a part in improving governance, bridging trust deficit
between centre and state and better fiscal management. Substantive with examples.
Conclusion:
Introduction
The Inter-State Council is a constitutional body to facilitate coordination between states and the
centre. It was set up on the basis of provisions in Article 263 of the Constitution of India by a
Presidential Order, 1990 based on the recommendation of Sarkaria Commission.
Tamil Nadu Chief Minister recently wrote to Prime Minister, asking that at least three meetings of
the Inter-State Council should be held every year to “strengthen the spirit of cooperative
federalism”.
Body
Functions of inter-state council:
 Inquiring and advising upon disputes which may have emerged between the States:
 Investigating and discussing subjects in which the States or the Union has a common
interest.
 Making suggestions on any such subject, for the better coordination of policy and action
with respect to that subject.
Benefits of ISC:
 The ISC is the only multilateral centre-state forum that operates directly within the
framework of the Constitution (Article 263 (b) and (c)) where topics like the GST and
contemporary issues like disaster management, terrorism and internal security can be taken
up.
 The constitutional backing of ISC puts the states on more solid footing—an essential
ingredient in building the atmosphere of cooperation needed for calibrating centre-state
relations.
 The council will help bridge the trust deficit between the centre and the states. If not always
a problem solver, it at least acted as a safety valve.
Limitations:
 It is a recommendatory body to investigate and discuss subjects, in which some or all of the
states or the Central government have a common interest.
 The Inter-state council is not a permanent constitutional body for coordination between the
states and Central government. Rather, President can establish it at any time if it appears to
him that the public interests would be served by the establishment of such a council
 The interstate council is proposed to meet thrice a year. Inter-State Council has had just 12
meetings since it was set up in 1990. There was a gap of a decade between the 10th meeting
in 2006 and the 11th meeting in 2016, and the council met again in November 2017.
 The ISC also has to have a permanent secretariat which will ensure that the periodic
meetings are more fruitful.
Way forward to strengthen ISC
 Discuss important bills in ISC first: Bills of national importance should be placed before the
Council before being tabled in Parliament.
 This will enable “effective and interactive communication” between the states and the
Centre on issues of common interest.
 Sarkaria Commission recommendation: In 1988, the Sarkaria Commission suggested the

Council should exist as a permanent body, and in 1990 it came into existence through a
Presidential Order.
 Effective working of ISC will reduce judicial intervention: What could be settled amicably
among the executive branches is often taken to the doorsteps of the judicial branch.
Conclusion
The interstate council is the most dynamic platform to discuss policies and strengthen the Centre-
State relations. This works as an instrument for cooperation, coordination and the evolution of
common policies and acts as a bridge to trust deficit between center and state. The Inter-State
Council should become the forum for political and legislative give and take between the centre and
states
Parliament and State Legislatures – structure, functioning, conduct of business,

powers & privileges and issues arising out of these.
For India to transform into a deeply participatory democracy, India needs a strong
Pre-Legislative Consultative Policy which strengthens the legitimacy and credibility of
the legislative action and facilitates accountability. Examine. (250 words)
Why the question:
In 2014, India’s ministry of law and justice issued a policy on pre-legislative consultation. Most
legislative proposals in India do follow this practice, making it a point to set aside time for public
comments. However, the consultation itself is no more than a formality today.
To write about the importance of a strong Pre-Legislative Consultative Policy for India’s democracy.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by mentioning about the aims of Pre legislative consultative policy.
Body:
First, write about the process involved in Pre legislative consultative policy as proposed in 2014.
Next, write about the importance of the policy in enhancing transparency and building consensus on
contention issues, rectifying any overlooks etc. Substantiate with examples.
Next, write about the bottlenecks in implementation of the policy.
Conclusion:
Introduction
Pre-Legislative Consultation is a process through which citizens engage with the government by
providing feedback and comments on policies and draft bills. A draft bill is a proposal made to the
Parliament to become a law. It is this draft bill that is placed before the public for their feedback. The
Union Government has listed 29 Bills to be tabled in the winter session of Parliament.
In 2014, the Pre-Legislative Consultation Policy was adopted, mandating a host of rules, including
that whenever the Government makes any law, it must place a draft version of it in the public
domain for at least 30 days.
Body
Pre – legislative consultation policy 2014
 The policy also says that along with the draft, a note explaining the law in simple language
and justifying the proposal, its financial implication, impact on the environment and
fundamental rights, a study on the social and financial costs of the bill, etc. should be
uploaded.
 The respective departments should also upload the summary of all the feedback that they
receive on the circulated draft.
 It aimed to create an institutionalised space for public participation in law-making processes.
Importance of Pre-legislative consultation policy 2014
 This policy provides a forum for citizens and relevant stakeholders to interact with the
policymakers in the executive during the initial stages of law-making.
 Protests in the recent past over laws such as the farm laws, the RTI Amendment Act, the
Transgender Persons (Protection of Rights) Act, etc. have all highlighted that there is
discontent among relevant stakeholders and the public at large since they were not looped
in while framing such laws.
 Public consultations enhance transparency, increase accountability and could result in the
building of an informed Government where citizens are treated as partners and not as
subjects.
 For example, concerns raised by civil society members (#SaveTheInternet campaign) were
addressed by the Telecom Regulatory Authority in its framing of the net neutrality rules after
extensive consultation and deliberation processes adopted by them.
Performance of Pre-legislative consultation policy 2014
 During the 16th Lok Sabha (May 2014 to May 2019) 186 bills were introduced in Parliament,
of which 142 saw no consultation prior to introduction.
 From the 44 bills placed in the public domain for receipt of comments, 24 did not adhere to
the 30-day deadline.
 During the 17th Lok Sabha (June 2019 to present), 115 bills were introduced in Parliament,
of which 85 saw no consultation prior to introduction.
 From the 30 bills placed in public domain for receipt of comment, 16 of them did not adhere
to the 30-day deadline.
Challenges faced
 Though it is required that the mandates of an approved policy be heeded by all Government
departments, the absence of a statutory or constitutional right has watered down its effect.
 The effective implementation of the policy requires subsequent amendments in executive

procedural guidelines like the Manual of Parliamentary Procedures and Handbook on
Writing Cabinet Notes.
 The main issues being faced by the government are in terms of awareness of the Pre-
legislative consultation process.
 At times consultations are put out in the public domain but there are no responses from the
citizens.
 On the other hand, large volumes of feedback are often not processed because of internal
capacity constraints.
Way forward
 The effective implementation of the policy requires subsequent amendments in executive

procedural guidelines like the Manual of Parliamentary Procedures and Handbook on
Writing Cabinet Notes.
 Incorporation of pre-legislative consultation in the procedures of the Cabinet, Lok Sabha,

Rajya Sabha etc. should be prioritized.
 Similarly, it must be required of ministers while introducing the bill to place an addendum
note on the details of the pre-legislative consultation.
 Empowering citizens with a right to participate in pre-legislative consultations through a

statutory and constitutional commitment could be a gamechanger.
Value addition
 Importance of Consultation:
o Inclusive, regular and meaningful consultation between national governments and

stakeholders – including civil society – is essential for SDG implementation and
accountability.
o It provides opportunities for diverse voices to be heard on issues that matter to

citizens, allowing people to share their knowledge, insight and experience to advance
implementation.
o Solutions and laws reflect real needs and provide more forward-looking solutions
o Increased legitimacy of proposed changes and enhanced compliance in
implementation
o Increased confidence in government institutions and trust amongst partners
o Establishment of a cross-sector dialogue and information sharing
o Less conflicts amongst different groups and between the private sector and
government agencies
o Partnership, ownership and responsibility in implementation
o More effective and forward-looking harmonization and simplification efforts.
 From protests against laws redefining citizenship and Agri-marketing to suspicions over the
safety of the Covid-19 vaccine and leaks about internal differences over economic policy,
government appears to be suffering from a severe case of hubris.
 The implacable and strident tone of the farmer protests after nine rounds of talks, multiple
concessions, and a Supreme Court-mandated committee are good examples of the current
dissonance between the governed and the government.
 Despite the progressive intent of the laws, the roughshod manner in which they were passed
has detracted from their merits.
 Appearing first as Ordinances, the government leveraged its brute majority in Parliament to
rush through the Bills in a monsoon session, truncated by Covid-19 with the minimum of
debate.
 Later, when farmers hunkered down on Delhi’s borders, the government claimed that it had
held extensive pre-legislative discussions with farm lobbies and then wielded the security
agencies against key protestors.
 Now, the agriculture ministry has admitted in reply to an application under the Right to
Information Act that it has no record of such consultations. Examples such as this do not
encourage trust in the government.
 The upshot has been that, despite assurances that the minimum support price would remain
and that the laws amended to remove the administrative restraints on contractual appeals in
court, the farmers are disinclined to take the government at its word.
 This trust deficit had manifested in nationwide protests against the Citizenship Amendment
Act, of which Delhi’s Shaheen Bagh became a potent symbol.
 Both protests have demonstrated that the absence of a meaningful opposition party does not
preclude the citizenry from mobilizing on its own initiative when it perceives its interests are
at stake.
 In the case of the Covid-19 vaccine drive, the relatively poor turnout in several states points
to distrust over the approval granted to Bharat Biotech’s candidate Covaxin because Phase III
clinical trials had not been completed.
 The fact that this vaccine is administered after the recipient signs a consent form is unlikely
to instill confidence in a large majority of the population that is ill-equipped to comprehend
the risks embedded in clinical trials.
 Now, it transpires from the minutes of the Subject Expert Committee (SEC) meetings, which
were released by the Central Drugs Standard Control Organization, that the SEC initially
expressed reservations about Covaxin but approved it just two days later without
explanation.
 The trust deficit appears to be manifesting itself within government too.
The Speaker has to remain neutral and act independently of political morality and
pressure. How can we guarantee the Speaker’s impartiality? (250 words)
Why the question:
To write about the importance of having non-partisan speaker and suggest steps to ensure his/her
neutrality.
Introduction:
Mention the role of speaker as envisaged by the constitution – their roles and responsibility.
Body:
Write about how over the recent year’s speakers have acted in political manner with respect to
discharge of their constitutional duties. Cite examples from the parliament and state legislatures and
bring out the impact of partisan conduct of speakers.
Suggest reforms to ensure the speaker remains independent, impartial and performs his duty
according to ideals guided by the constitution and not any political affiliations.
Conclusion:
Introduction
The Speaker is the presiding officer of the Lok Sabha (House of the People), the lower house of the
Parliament of India. The speaker is elected generally in the very first meeting of the Lok Sabha
following general elections. Serving for a term of five years, the speaker chosen from sitting
members of the Lok Sabha (House of the People), and is by convention a member of the ruling party
or alliance.
Body:
Importance of office of Speaker:
 The office of the Speaker occupies a pivotal position in our parliamentary democracy.
 It has been said of the office of the Speaker that while the members of Parliament represent
the individual constituencies, the Speaker represents the full authority of the House itself.
 She symbolizes the dignity and power of the House over which she is presiding.
 In the Lok Sabha, as in the United Kingdom, the Speaker is the supreme authority; she has
vast powers and it is his primary duty to ensure the orderly conduct of the business of the
House.
 Every textbook of constitutional law points out the two essential qualities of a
Speaker: Independence and impartiality.
 GV Mavlankar, the first Speaker, observed: “Once a person is elected Speaker, he is

expected to be above parties, above politics. In other words, he belongs to all the
members or belongs to none. He holds the scales of justice evenly, irrespective of party or
person”.
 Pandit Nehru referred to the Speaker as “the symbol of the nation’s freedom and liberty”
and emphasised that Speakers should be men of “outstanding ability and impartiality”.
 MN Kaul and SL Shakdher, in their book Practice and Procedure of Parliament, refer to him
as the conscience and guardian of the House.
 As the principal spokesperson of the Lok Sabha, the Speaker represents its collective
voice and speaks for the House as a whole.
 Her unique position is illustrated by the fact that she is placed very high in the Warrant of
Precedence in our country, standing next only to the President, the Vice-President and the
Prime Minister.
 In India, through the Constitution of the land, through the Rules of Procedure and Conduct
of Business in Lok Sabha and through the practices and conventions, adequate powers are
vested in the office of the Speaker to help her in the smooth conduct of the parliamentary
proceedings and for protecting the independence and impartiality of the office.
 The Constitution of India provides that the Speaker’s salary and allowances are not to be
voted by Parliament and are to be charged on the Consolidated Fund of India.
 Therefore, it is expected that the holder of this office of high dignity has to be one who can
represent the House in all its manifestations.
However, there have been many instances when the Speaker’s office has been in the dock:
 Appointment and tenure: The structural issues regarding the manner in which the Speaker
is appointed and his tenure in office. Usually, the speaker is from the ruling party and this
makes it a more of a political liability on speaker to favour his party.
 Lack of Tenure security: With no security in the continuity of office, the Speaker is
dependent on his or her political party for re-election. This makes the Speaker susceptible to
pulls and pressures from her/his political party in the conduct of the proceedings of the Lok
Sabha.
 Anti-defection law: In recent times, there are number of instances where the role of
speaker has been criticized for decision on membership of MLAs under the anti-defection
law and their ruling have been challenged in courts. The Tenth Schedule says the
Speaker’s/Chairperson’s decision on questions of disqualification on ground of defection
shall be final and can’t be questioned in courts. It was anticipated that giving Speakers the
power to expel legislators would prevent unnecessary delays by courts and make anti-
defection law more effective.
 Discretionary power: There are various instances where the Rules vest the Speakers with
unbridled powers such as in case of declaration of bill as money bill (Lok Sabha Speaker).
This discretionary power comes under criticism when Aadhar bill was introduced in Lok
Sabha as Money Bill.
 Referral to DSRCs: The Speaker is also empowered to refer the Bill to a Standing
Committee. As per prevailing practice house members or speaker usually refers all
important bills to the concerned Departmentally Related Standing Committees for
examination and report. But in recent time speaker uses its discretionary power to pass
many important bills on day after introduction of bill without proper discussion and
references.
 Increased disruptions: Frequent disruptions reduced the time required for important
discussions and compel speaker to allocate less time for discussion. This often questions the
impartiality of speaker as he allegedly provides more time to ruling party. Also, it is alleged
that speaker took harsh punishment against the disrupting member of opposition compared
to government
 Elections: The position of the Indian Speaker is paradoxical. They contest the election for the
post on a party ticket. Yet they are expected to conduct themselves in a non-partisan
manner, while being beholden to the party for a ticket for the next election.
 Political Aspirations: The position is often used to woo the political parties by favouring
them to harbour political ambitions. The need for re-election also skews incentives for the
Speaker. The fear of losing the position in case of not favouring their political parties also
pushes them to compromise neutrality.
Measures needed to ensure Speaker’s impartiality:
 The Page Committee, headed by V.S. Page, suggested that if the Speaker had conducted
himself or herself in an impartial and efficient manner during the tenure of his or her office,
he or she should be allowed to continue in the next Parliament.
 Anyone seeking the office of the Speaker might be asked to run for election on an
independent ticket.
 Any Speaker should be barred from future political office, except for the post of President,
while being given a pension for life.
 Following the UK model of Speaker where the Speaker elect compulsorily resigns from the
party membership. This will ensure neutrality of the office.
 The Speaker should be allowed to recommend a range of disciplinary actions like cuts in
salary, reduction in speaking time for the member based on the recommendation of the
parliamentary committee.
 The Speaker can arrange informal sessions with the members who frequently disrupt the
house. He can try to resolve their grievances if any with respect to the conduct of the house.
 A code of ethics for MPs must be formed to clearly define cases for suspension and
dismissals.
 Power must be given to speaker to form a parliamentary committee to recommend removal

of MPs regularly disrupting the house. The decision of the committee must be subject to
judicial review.
 Ethics committee of Lok Sabha need to be given more mandate like other mature
democracies
Conclusion:
The office of the Speaker in India is a living and dynamic institution which deals with the actual
needs and problems of Parliament in the performance of its functions. It is in her that the
responsibility of conducting the business of the House in a manner befitting the place of the
institution in a representative democracy is invested.
The founding fathers of our Constitution had recognized the importance of this office in our
democratic set-up and it was this recognition that guided them in establishing this office as one of
the prominent and dignified ones in the scheme of governance of the country smoothly.
Value addition
Functions and powers of Lok Sabha speaker:
 Speaker of Lok Sabha is basically the head of the house and presides over the sittings of
Parliament and controls its working.
 The constitution has tried to ensure the independence of Speaker by charging his salary on
the consolidated Fund of India and the same is not subject to vote of Parliament.
 While debating or during general discussion on a bill, the members of the parliament have to
address only to the Speaker.
 Whenever there is a joint sitting of both houses of Parliament (Lok Sabha & Rajya
Sabha), the Speaker of the Lok Sabha presides over this meeting.
 In the normal circumstances the Speaker does not cast his vote over any matter in Lok Sabha.
But whenever there is a tie on votes between the ruling party and opposition, the Speaker at
that time can exercise his vote.
 It is the Speaker who decides the agenda of various discussions.
 The speaker has the power to adjourn or suspend the house/meetings if the quorum is not
met.
 The Speaker ensures the discipline and decorum of the house. If the speaker finds the
behaviour and a member of Parliament is not good, he/she can punish the unruly members
by suspending.
 The Speaker decides whether a bill brought to the house is a money bill or not. In the
case Speaker decides some bill as a money bill, this decision cannot be challenged.
 Speaker is the final and sole authority to allow different types of motions and resolutions
such as No Confidence Motion, Motion of Adjournment, Censure Motion
 The Speaker of Lok Sabha does not leave the office just after dissolution of the assembly. He
continues to be in the office till the newly formed assembly takes its first meeting and elects
the new Speaker.
In view of the multiple political parties with different ideology and a charged political
environment in the recent past, a relook into the appointment, powers and functions
of the Governor under the Indian constitution is the need of the hour. Examine. (250
words)
Why the question:
The West Bengal legislative Assembly on Tuesday passed the West Bengal Private University Laws
Amendment Bill 2022. The Act replaces the Governor with the state’s Education Minister as a Visitor
of private universities. There was no voting as BJP had walked out.
To write about the various issues between the governor and state’s elected executive and steps
needed to ensure a harmonious relations between the both.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by writing role of the governor in legislative process of the state.
Body:
First, write about the increasing politicization of the post of Governor and him/her acting as the
‘agent of centre’ and various responses of the state government to it. Mention the recent examples
of Tamil Nadu, Maharashtra and West Bengal.
Next, write about the relook that is required in the appointment and powers of the governor vis-à-vis
the state executive. Substantiate by citing various committees.
Conclusion:
Conclude by writing a way forward in order to resolve the tussle between legislature and governor.
Introduction
Article 154 of the Constitution envisages Governor as the executive chief of the state. All executive
actions are taken in his name. B R Ambedkar called the office of the Governor as the “office of
dignity”. He is not an agent of the Centre, but the governor’s post in an independent Constitutional
office. His office is the linchpin of Indian Cooperative Federalism.
The controversy over the politicization of the Governor post is once again in the news over delayed
decision making by the Governor of TN in the appointment of CM.
Body
Need for relook into Governor’s post
 Gubernatorial powers:Misusing the powers of Governor.g.: In Maharashtra, Governor

Bhagat Singh Koshyari has stalled the election of Speaker since the post fell vacant in
February 2021. He had refused to accept the recommendation of the Council of Ministers on
the nomination of 12 members to the Legislative Council, until the matter reached the High
Court.
 Locking horns with Government:g.: West Bengal Governor Jagdeep Dhankhar has made
allegations of impropriety in welfare schemes, questioned Government claims about
investments in the State, and taken up the cudgels for the Opposition BJP. He has been
summoning the Chief Secretary and the Director General of Police on a regular basis, and
when they do not turn up, taking to Twitter and often tagging the Chief Minister.
 Governor’s appointment: Article 155says that governor should be appointed (not elected)
from amongst persons of high status with eminence in public. The elected government at
the state is not even consulted while making appointment of the Governors. Further
successive governments have reduced this important constitutional office to a sinecure and
resting place for loyal and retired / about to retired / about to retire politicians apart from
docile bureaucrats.
 Appointment and dismissal of the Chief Minister: Governor appoints Chief Minister, other
ministers, Advocate General, Chairmen and members of the State Public Service Commission
in the state. After elections in the state, there is a convention to invite the largest party to
form government in the state. This convention has been flouted many times at the whim of
the governor. E.g.: The recent episode Maharashtra where Governor inducted a new
government at 5:00 am without ascertaining the requisite numbers for the government.
 Reservation of Bills for Consideration of President: As per Article 200of the Constitution,
the governor can reserve certain types of bills passed by the State Legislature for the
President’s consideration. Centre, through the governor in case of different parties ruling,
used this provision to serve partisan interests. g. In Tamil Nadu, Governor R.N. Ravi has not
acted upon the T.N. Admission to Undergraduate Medical Degree Courses Bill, adopted by
the Assembly in September 2021. the indefinite delay in taking a decision amounts to
undermining the legislature, and is unjustifiable.
 Misuse of Article 356: Article 356is the most controversial article of the Constitution. It
provides for State emergency or President’s rule in State if the President, on receipt of
report from the Governor of a State. But since the SR Bommai case, this has been sparsely
used.
 Removal of the Governor:Article 156 says that the governor will hold office during the
pleasure of the President for five years. The governor has no security of tenure and no fixed
term of office. This prevents to uphold neutrality of the governor, fearing retribution. E.g.:
The mass changing of the governors of state whenever a new government comes to power
at Centre..
Recommendations made regarding the Governor Posts
Sarkaria Commission Report Recommendations

 “The Governors tenure of office of five years in a State should not be disturbed except very
rarely and that too for some extremely compelling reason. It is very necessary to assure a
measure of security of tenure to the Governor’s office.”
 Governor should be an eminent person and not belong to the state where he is to be
posted.
 State chief minister should have a say in the appointment of governor
 Governor should be a detached figure without intense political links or should not have
taken part in politics in recent past.
 Governor should not be a member of the ruling party.
 Governor should be removed before his tenure only on the grounds as if aspersions are cast
on his morality, dignity, constitutional propriety, etc.
The National Commission to Review the Working of the Constitution recommendations:

 Governor’s appointment should be entrusted to a committee comprising the prime minister,
the home minister, the speaker of the Lok Sabha and the chief minister of the concerned
state.
 If they have to be removed before completion of their term, the central government should
do so only after consultation with the Chief Minister.
The Punchhi commission recommendations
 The person who is slated to be a Governor should not have participated in active politics at
even local level for at least a couple of years before his appointment.
 For office of Governor, the doctrine of pleasure should endand should be deleted from the
constitution. Governor should not be removed at whim of central government. Instead, a
resolution by state legislature should be there to remove Governor.
 There should be provisions for impeachment of the Governor by the state legislature along
the same lines as that of President by President.
 The convention of making the Governors as chancellors of universities should be done away
with.
 The commission recommended for “localising emergency provisions” under Articles 355 and
356, contending that localised areas— either a district or parts of a district — be brought
under Governor’s rule instead of the whole state.
The Supreme Court’s interpretation
 In 2010, a constitutional bench of the Supreme Court interpreted these provisions and laid
down some binding principles (B.P. Singhal v. Union of India), the Supreme Court held:
 President, in effect the central government, has the power to remove a Governor at any
time without giving him or her any reason, and without granting an opportunity to be heard.
 However, this power cannot be exercised in an arbitrary, capricious or unreasonable

manner. The power of removing Governors should only be exercised in rare and exceptional
circumstances for valid and compelling reasons.
 The mere reason that a Governor is at variance with the policies and ideologies of the
central government, or that the central government has lost confidence in him or her, is not
sufficient to remove a Governor. Thus, a change in central government cannot be a ground
for removal of Governors, or to appoint more favourable persons to this post.
 Such a decision, to remove a Governor can be challenged in a court of law.
Conclusion
Despite several commissions appointed by Government themselves and the Supreme Court
guidelines, the post of governor is misused again and again.
It is, however, time for a thorough review of the Governor’s powers and the process of appointment
and removal.
 New rules and conventions may need to be put in place so that Governor’s constitutional
mandate is strengthened.
 All part conference to review the role of the Governors, the powers exercised by him and
the manner in which he should be appointed and removed.
 The Constitution should be amended and security of tenure must be provided to the
Governors. The judgment of the Supreme Court delivered in B. P. Singhal case is the law of
the land and the Government should respect it.
 The Governors should be treated with dignity, and should not be fired only for political
considerations.
 The Constitution of the land prohibits the arbitrary exercise of power and the Government is
not an exception to the equality law.
Role of civil services in a democracy.

The civil services ecosystem of the country must move towards a setup which rewards
performance, has enhanced accountability and with a check on abuse of powers by
civil servants. Elaborate. (250 words)
Why the question:
Recently, two babus of the elite IAS were the subject of widespread public derision when an
investigation by this newspaper revealed that one of them had ordered that a government stadium
in the national capital be emptied in order to walk their pet dog.
To write about civil services reforms which are needed in the country.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by giving context of civil services of the country and their role in India’s administrations.
Body:
First, write about the various in the civil services ecosystem of the country.
Next, write about the reforms which are needed in the present times – rewarding good per
romancing, improved accountability mechanisms and preventing abuse of power.
Next, cite suggestions of various committees in this regard.
Conclusion:
Introduction
All civil servants operate in a system of limited accountability with few incentives to perform and
plenty of opportunities to use and abuse their powers. Recently, two babus of the elite IAS were the
subject of widespread public derision when an investigation by this newspaper revealed that one of
them had ordered that a government stadium in the national capital be emptied in order to walk
their pet dog.
A wealth of anecdotal and academic evidence supports the deployment of high- powered incentives
for transforming the bureaucracy from an albatross around the public’s neck into an engine of
growth. To become true Karmayogis, bureaucrats need to have a strong motivation in the form of
good financial incentives.
Body
Existing issues with model of bureaucracy in India
 The permanence of the job is a problem. Punishment for over-reach or misuse of power is a
transfer, either from a weightier ministry to a lighter one or from high-profile capitals to
geographically remote ones.
 Accountability is lacking: The punitive action against bureaucrats is to remove them from
public eye and exonerate them later on.
o The result is that all civil servants, never mind their ability or competence, operate in
a system of limited accountability.
 No motivation or financial incentive to do good work: Many models across the globe serve
as evidence that better financial incentive will shake the bureaucracy from their lethargy
and prevent red tapism.
o The bureaucratic entrepreneurship which transformed China’s economy can largely

be attributed to pay reforms. The low base pay of bureaucrats was supplemented
with high add-on pay for economic performance.
o Similarly, the bureaucracy of Singapore enjoys high supplemental pay that

incentivizes performance.
 Bureaucrats in Singapore can earn four types of performance pay—a non-

pensionable annual allowance, an annual variable component, a
performance bonus and a national bonus.
 All this can add up to 20 months of a bureaucrat’s regular salary.
o Politico-bureaucratic nexus: A sense of professional duty is usually inadequate to

motivate public servants, and other incentives such as plum postings are too weak
and/or randomly assigned (with high error rates) to act as strong motivators.
Advantages of promoting performance by incentives
 In contrast to monitoring or control-based measures, incentives have the potential to

reduce corruption without increasing procedural complexity and processing frictions.
 Also, this approach to reforming the bureaucracy is flexible. Targets and performance
measures can be changed as per the changing needs of the public/state.
o The incentives can also be tweaked and fine- tuned over time.
 Several research studies have shown that bureaucrats in different functions have different
risk preferences.
o For example, a bureaucrat in a more visible function may be more risk-averse (due
to the higher cost of visible failures) than one in a less visible role.
 Financial incentives allow for heterogeneous risk preferences and targets. Various functions
and departments can have incentives designed especially for their performance objectives.
 This also promotes accountability as there will be certain targets set which needs to be
achieved before granting the financial reward.
Conclusion
The civil services system needs to be brought down from its pedestal and placed at par with every
other profession like elsewhere in the world. This will not happen via political diktat. It requires the
weight of public opinion. The system must be manned by capable, competent individuals. This
cannot be decided on the basis of one exam. The bad eggs need to be separated which cannot
happen when the job is for life. It may sound radical for India’s civil services but that is the way the
rest of India and the world function, including the UK from where we inherited the structure. The
best and brightest will be celebrated. They will be given Padma and other awards. And there will be
no high-handed babus to deride. India will get the government it needs for the 21st century.
The rising spate of ‘encounter’ culture for the disbursal instant justice, is a serious
contravention to the rule of law and calls for immediate police reforms to put an end
to this practice. Analyse. (250 words)
Why the question:
A recent report submitted by the commission of inquiry headed by a former Supreme Court of India
judge, Justice V.S. Sirpurkar, indicting the police in Hyderabad for the fake encounter, in 2019, on the
outskirts of Hyderabad near Shamshabad, should serve as an eye-opener to senior police officials
who by-pass the law and due processes and eliminate suspects with impunity.
To write about rising encounters in India, its impact and reforms needed against it.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Body:
In the first part of the body, mentioning role of police in maintaining law and order in the country.
Next, write about the impact of rising encounters as a mode for instant justice. Mention systemic
factors, attitudinal factors, and political factors etc which are responsible for this.
Next, suggest measures to have an efficient, empathetic, sensitive, responsive and an accountable
police force. Include recommendations of various committees.
Conclusion:
Conclude with way forward
Introduction
A recent report submitted by the commission of inquiry headed by a former Supreme Court of India
judge, Justice V.S. Sirpurkar, indicting the police in Hyderabad for the fake encounter, in 2019, on
the outskirts of Hyderabad near Shamshabad, should serve as an eye-opener to senior police
officials who by-pass the law and due processes and eliminate suspects with impunity.
Body
In layman terms what is called as an encounter is actually an extra-judicial killing, that is, a killing
without judicial sanction and beyond the authority of the police. The police are allowed to utilize
force against an accused person, but within the four corners of the law. Section 46 of the Code of
Criminal Procedure, 1973 (CrPC), while detailing out the procedure to make an arrest, provides inter
alia, the power to use necessary force against a person evading arrest.
Impact of rising encounters as a mode for instant justice
 Extra-judicial killings go against the very spirit of rule of law.

 Lower personnel face the axe: When commissions are set up to inquire into fake
encounters, it is usually low-ranking officers, from constables to inspectors, who have to
face the brunt. Senior police officers who may have given their consent to eliminate the
criminals are allowed to go scot free and are rarely indicted.
 Blatant violation of rule of law: If States begin to adopt extra-judicial strategies to bring
down the crime rate, the day may not be far off when the country would be ruled by
criminals in uniform, with the judiciary watching mutely as the protective cover of rule of
law is torn to pieces.
 Against the law of the land: Extra-judicial killings, in a State governed by the rule of law,
should be considered an abomination.
o The Constitution guarantees the right to equality under Article 14 and right to life
and personal liberty under Article 21 which can be taken away only by procedure
established by law.
 Extra-judicial killings are a gross violation of not just human rights, but also the very rule of
law that forms the bedrock of our Constitution.
o It shakes the values the Constituent Assembly attempted to imbibe within the
country’s grundnorm to the very core.
 Existing literature on the subject sheds light on not only the human rights excesses that arise
due to extra-judicial killings but also shows a trend of such killings being prevalent in third-
world, developing nations.
o This gives credibility to the above analysis of how factors such as an underfunded
police force, lack of faith in the judiciary, pendency of cases and other trademark
factors of a developing nation aid and abet the proliferation of extra-judicial killings.
Views of Supreme court on encounters
 In Om Prakash v. State of Jharkhand SC said that “it is not the duty of the police to kill the
accused merely because he is a criminal.” It was further stated that ‘encounters’ amounted
to “state sponsored terrorism.”
 Sathyavani Ponrai v. Samuel Raj: A fair investigation is mandatory under Articles 14, 21 and
39 of the Constitution of India and that it is not only a constitutional right but a natural right
as well.
 Nirmal Singh Kahlon v. State of Punjab: The right to investigation and fair trial is applicable
to both, the accused and the victim under Article 21 of the Constitution of India.
 Prakash Kadam v. Ramprasad Vishwanath Gupta: A fake encounter by a police official falls
under the category of ‘rarest of rare case’ as laid down in Bachan Singh v. State of Punjab
and therefore, the death penalty would be attracted to the concerned police official.
 Public Union for Civil Liberties v. Union of India that not even State can violate the right to
life and obligation to follow the procedure established by law under Article 21 of the Indian
Constitution. The Court opined that encounter killings by the police must be investigated
independently as it “affects the credibility of the rule of law and the administration of the
criminal justice system.”
 For inquiries, one must nominate magistrates from other States who would be impartial and
fair in their inquiries.
 Commissions of inquiry should comprise police officers from other States who enjoy a
reputation of moral rectitude and fair play.
 By way of training programs and by also limiting powers of law enforcement, a legitimate
attempt can be made at preventing such killings.
 In the United States of America, for example, policing agencies can only supply non-lethal
force when confronted with a suspect. Upon overstepping such bounds, officers are heavily
prosecuted, thereby creating a system of deterrence.
 Resolving systemic problems such as underfunding and understaffing and creating a better,
more well-equipped police force may also assist in reducing such killings substantially.
 Therefore, an overhaul of the criminal justice system and better policy making is the need of
the hour, to ensure that procedural and systemic anomalies, coupled with callousness and
impunity, do not result in the loss of precious life.
Value addition
Laws Dealing with Encounters
 At the outset, there is no provision in the Indian law which directly authorizes an official to
encounter a criminal irrespective of the grievousness of the crime committed by him/her.
 However, there are some enabling provisions that may be construed so as to vest officials
with the power to deal with criminals including the power to use force against a criminal.
 Section 100 of the Indian Penal Code, 1860: It authorizes any person to exercise his right of
private defence which may extend to causing death if there is reasonable apprehension in
the mind of the person that there exists a threat to life or limb.
 Section 46 of the Criminal Procedure Code, 1973: It permits a police officer to use all means
necessary to effect the arrest of the person.
 Section 300 of the Indian Penal Code: It provides that culpable homicide is not murder if the
offender, being a public servant acting for the advancement of public justice exceeds the
power given to him by law and causes death by doing an act which he, in good faith, believes
to be lawful and necessary for the discharge of his duty and without ill-will towards the
person whose death is caused.
Government policies and interventions for development in various sectors and

issues arising out of their design and implementation.
Transition to green mobility is quickly picking up, which is an opportune time for India
to take a lead in manufacturing of Electric Vehicles (EV). Examine the various
measures taken by India in this regard. (250 words)
Why the question:
India’s push for electric vehicles (EVs) was renewed when phase-II of the Faster Adoption and
Manufacturing of (Hybrid and) Electric (FAME) Vehicles scheme in India, with an outlay of ₹10,000
crore, was approved in 2019. This was significant since phase-I, launched in 2015, was approved with
an outlay of ₹895 crore.
To write about India’s preparedness and measures taken so far to achieve the transition to electric
vehicles.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Introduce the answer by giving context regarding push towards EV mobility.
Body:
First, mention the impact the EV can have on India economically in terms of reducing dependence on
crude oil and reduced import bill and improved domestic energy independence.
Next, write about the environmental benefits of shift to EV – Give facts and figures relation to
vehicular emission in India, the impact of it and how shifting to EV can be environmentally
advantageous as well as sustainable in the long run.
Next, Examine the various measures taken in this regard so far such as FAME-I, FAME-II, Developing
domestic battery manufacturing capacity, mining for Lithium and Cobalt etc. Mention various steps
taken by state governments in this regard.
Conclusion:
Conclude by writing a way forward to further harness the potential of EV’s in India.
Introduction
An electric vehicle, uses one or more electric motors or traction motors for propulsion. An electric
vehicle may be powered through self-contained battery, solar panels or an electric generator to
convert fuel to electricity. India is among a handful of countries that supports the global EV30@30
campaign, which aims for at least 30 per cent new vehicle sales to be electric by 2030.
Body
Transition to Green Mobility is quickly picking up in India
 As fuel prices skyrocket, there are rising concerns about the steep increase in the cost of
running petrol and diesel vehicles. Electric vehicles seem to be coming into their own at last.
 The Indian electric vehicle market was valued at USD 1,434.04 billion in 2021, and it is
expected to reach USD 15,397.19 billion by 2027, registering a CAGR of 47.09% during the
forecast period (2022-2027).
 The National Electric Mobility Mission Plan (NEMMP) and Faster Adoption and
Manufacturing of Hybrid & Electric Vehicles in India (FAME I and II) helped create the initial
interest and exposure for electric mobility.
 To promote the domestic electric vehicle industry, the Indian government has provided tax
exemptions and subsidies to EV manufacturers and consumers.
 In FY 2020, EV sales for two-wheelers in India increased by 21 percent. For EV buses, the
sales for the same period increased by 50 percent. In contrast, the market for electric cars
remained grim, registering a five percent decline.
 In terms of penetration, EV sales accounts for barely 1.3 per cent of total vehicle sales in
India during 20-21. However, the market is growing rapidly and is expected to be worth
more.
 India’s shift to shared, electric and connected mobility could help the country save nearly
one giga-tonne of carbon dioxide emissions by 2030.
Various measures taken by the government to promote electric vehicles
 Most recently, Government think-tank Niti Aayog has prepared a draft battery swapping
policy, under which it has proposed offering incentives to electric vehicles (EVs) with
swappable batteries, subsidies to companies manufacturing swappable batteries, a new
battery-as-a-service business model, and standards for interoperable batteries, among other
measures.
 Government has set a target of electric vehicles making up 30 % of new sales of cars and
two-wheelers by 2030.
 To build a sustainable EV ecosystem initiative like –National Electric Mobility Mission Plan
(NEMMP) and Faster Adoption and Manufacturing of (Hybrid &) Electric vehicles in India
(FAME India) have been launched by India.
 NEMMP was launched with an aim to achieve national fuel security by promoting hybrid and
electric vehicles in the country.
 FAME India Scheme was launched with the objective to support hybrid/electric vehicles
market development and manufacturing ecosystem.
 The Union power ministry categorized charging of batteries as a service, which will help
charging stations operate without licenses.
 Implementation of smart cities would also boost the growth of electric vehicle
Way Forward:
 For EVs to contribute effectively, we need commensurate efforts in developing an entire

ecosystem.
 Need to shift the focus from subsidizing vehicles to subsidizing batteries because batteries
make up 50% of EV costs.
 Increasing focus on incentivizing electric two-wheelers because two-wheelers account for

76% of the vehicles in the country and consume most of the fuel.
 A wide network of charging stations is imminent for attracting investment.
 Work places in tech parks, Public bus depots, and Multiplexes are the potential places where
charging points could be installed. In Bangalore, some malls have charging points in parking
lots.
 Corporates could invest in charging stations as Corporate Social Responsibility compliances.
 Addressing technical concerns like AC versus DC charging stations, handling of peak demand,
grid stability etc.
 Private investment in battery manufacturing plants and developing low cost production
technology is needed.
 India is highly dependent on thermal sources, which account for about 65% of current
capacity. As EV adoption increases, so should the contribution of renewables.
 Need for a policy roadmap on electric vehicles so that investments can be planned.
 Acquiring lithium fields in Bolivia, Australia, and Chile could become as important as buying
oil fields as India needs raw material to make batteries for electric vehicles.
 Providing waiver of road tax and registration fees, GST refunds and free parking spaces for
EVs.
Value addition
Potential of EVs in India
 Help tackle Climate change and air pollution:
o India has committed to cutting its GHG emissions intensity by 33% to 35% percent
below 2005 levels by 2030.
o As per NITI Aayog’s report EVs will help in cutting down as much as 1 Gigatonne (GT)
of carbon emissions by 2030.
o Electric vehicles don’t produce emissions that contribute to climate change and smog
than conventional vehicles.
o All-electric vehicles produce zero direct emissions, which specifically helps improve
air quality in urban areas.
o According to a recent study by WHO, India is home to 14 out of 20 most polluted

cities in the world. EVs will help in tackling this problem by reducing local
concentrations of pollutants in cities.
o Cost reduction from better electricity generating technologies. This has introduced
the possibility of clean, low-carbon and inexpensive grids.
 Energy security:
o India imports oil to cover over 80 percent of its transport fuel.

o Electric mobility will contribute to balancing energy demand, energy storage and
environmental sustainability.
o Electric vehicles could help diversify the energy needed to move people and goods
thanks to their reliance on the wide mix of primary energy sources used in power
generation, greatly improving energy security.
 Cutting edge Battery Technology:
o Advances in battery technology have led to higher energy densities, faster charging
and reduced battery degradation from charging.
 Innovation:
o EVs manufacturing capacity will promote global scale and competitiveness.
 Employment:
o Promotion of EVs will facilitate employment growth in a sun-rise sector.
While gig work has become a necessity for both the workers and the platforms hiring
them, regulation of the gig work remains vital to ensure that these classes of workers
are given the same opportunities and protections as other employees covered under
various labour laws in India. Comment. (250 words)
Why the question:
Concerned at the lack of job and social security among gig and platform workers, the Centre has
decided to train officials of Central and State Governments on the technological change, new forms
of employment, working conditions, and the mechanisms to protect labour and social security rights
of these workers.
To write about the need to ensure and protect rights of gig workers.
Directive word:
Comment– here we must express our knowledge and understanding of the issue and form an overall
opinion thereupon.
Introduction:
Begin by defining gig workers and present a statistic regarding the number of gig workers in the
Indian economy.
Body:
In the first talk about the ambiguity in gig economy which results in the exploitation of gig workers –
lack of formal employer-employee relationship, remuneration, rigidity of working hours and the
working conditions etc.
Next, write about the benefits of regulating the gig economy.
Conclusion:
Introduction
According to the Oxford Internet Institute’s ‘Online Labor Index’, India leads the global gig economy
with a 24% share of the online labor market. A gig economy is a free market system in which
temporary positions are common and organizations contract with independent workers for short-
term engagements Examples of gig employees in the workforce could include freelancers,
independent contractors, project-based workers and temporary or part-time hires.
Body
Issues faced by gig economy workers
 This workforce has limited employment rights like minimum wages, health benefits, sick
leaves or even retirement benefits to fall back on.
 Also, the payment is assured only on the completion of the project giving a sense of
financial insecurity.
 The lack of any kind of protection was also deterring several talented workers against
participating in the economy
 No stable and secure employment: These so-called jobs do not provide health insurance,
nor pay for overtime with no sick leave.
 Lack of income security: There is no room for wage negotiations, and unions are absent. In
the gig economy, job creation should be seen as the provision of livelihoods for
entrepreneurs.
 Grievance redressal mechanism: For instance, when Ola and Uber started cutting back
incentives, the drivers in Mumbai decided to go on ‘strike’.
o But there was no clarity against whom they were striking. When the strikers agitated
at a local transport commissioner’s office, he had to tell them that he did not
regulate the hail-a-taxi business.
 The Central government recently passed the social security code which could cover gig
worker as well.
 One of the key proposals includes the creation of a social security fund which is around 1
per cent of the aggregators’ annual turnover.
 This fund would be used primarily for the welfare of the unorganized and the gig workforce
Regulation of gig economy
 Constant upskilling and reskilling is required for such talents to stay industry relevant and
market ready.
 A categorical clarification could ensure that social security measures are provided to
workers without compromising the touted qualities of platform work.
 Countries must come together to set up a platform to extend their labour protection to the
workforce who are working part-time in their country.
 Companies employing the workforce on a temporary basis should also be made responsible
to contribute to their insurance and social obligation other than just their tax commitment.
 There is a need for a socio-legal acknowledgement of the heterogeneity of work in the gig
economy, and the ascription of joint accountability to the State and platform
companies for the delivery of social services.
 In the Code on Social Security, 2020, platform workers are now eligible for
benefits. Actualising these benefits will depend on the political will at the Central and State
government-levels and how unions elicit political support.
Way forward
 The government needs to come out with some more regulations to protect the workforce of
the gig economy.
 Also, at present, there is no mechanism to address the issue of redress of disputes.
 It could also mean countries coming together to set up a platform to extend their labour
protection to the workforce who are working part-time in their country.
 Companies employing the workforce on a temporary basis should also be made responsible
to contribute to their insurance and social obligation other than just their tax commitment.
Conclusion
The scope of the gig economy in a country like India is enormous. The government needs to come
out with a comprehensive legislation to empower and motivate many to take this path. The gig
economy and its workforce cannot be overlooked when we talk about the future of employment.
With a population of over 1.3 billion, and a majority of them below the age of 35, relying on the “gig
economy” is perhaps the only way to create employment for a large semi-skilled and unskilled
workforce. Therefore, it is important to hand-hold this sector and help it grow. We need policies and
processes that give clarity to the way the sector should function.
Value addition
Statistics
 Human resources firm TeamLease estimates that 13 lakh Indians joined the gig economy in
the last half of 2018-19, registering a 30% growth compared to the first half of the fiscal
year.
 Better Place, a digital platform that does background verification and skill development in
the informal sector, estimates that of the 21 lakh jobs that will be created in the metros in
2019-20, 14 lakh will be in the gig economy.
 Food and e-commerce delivery will account for 8 lakh positions and drivers will account for
nearly 6 lakh positions, says the report, based on 11 lakh profiles in over 1,000 companies.
 Delhi, Bengaluru and other metros are expected to be the biggest drivers of this sector.
And two-thirds of this workforce will be under the age of 40.
Awarding of death penalty and its sentencing needs a relook in the light of recent
supreme court judgement. Elaborate. (250 words)
Why the question:
The Court’s recent judgment in Manoj and Ors. vs State of MP seeks to address this long ignored yet
critical aspect of death penalty sentencing.
To write about the reforms needed in awarding and sentencing of capital punishment.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Start giving the awarding of capital punishment in ‘rarest of rare’ case.
Body:
First, write about the various developments regarding capital punishment over the years – Bachan
Singh vs State of Punjab, context death penalty.
Next, write about the various lacunae in the awarding of death penalty in Indian criminal justice.
Next, suggest reforms based on recent SC judgement and various recommendations of commissions.
Conclusion:
Introduction
Capital punishment also called as death penalty is the execution of an offender sentenced to death
after conviction by a court of law. The debate on whether to abolish the death penalty or not, has
been raging in India and in several other countries for decades.
Body
Background
 The Supreme Court’s recent judgment in Manoj and Ors. vs State of MPseeks to address
this long-ignored yet critical aspect of death penalty sentencing.
 This specific attempt in Manoj must be seen with the Court’s apparent discomfort over the
last year with procedural unfairness in sentencing being carried out by the lower courts.
Rationale behind death penalty
 The punishment is not arbitrarybecause, it comes out of a judicial process. To call it

arbitrary, one has to necessarily prove the process as flawed.
 It is being implemented in the “rarest of the rare” casesand the fact is during the last 13
years, only four people have been executed.
 The hanging of Ajmal Kasab and Yakub Memon strongly affirms India’s commitment to the
protection of life.
 People criticise it on arbitrariness, irreversibility and human rightsand these are not valid
arguments.
 Its constitutionality is upheld, even in liberal democracies like U.S. It is not reflection of
uncivilised society.
 India’s neighbourhood is not peaceful, unlike Scandinavia. It is not in a group of countries,

like European Union.
 India has got troubled borders. Several forces are trying to destabilise the very idea of our
Nation from across the Border.
 The sacredness of life can only be seen to be protected, if those who take it away
are proportionately punished.
Efficiency of death penalty
 A study by the Centre of Death Penalty – at the National Law University Delhi (NLUD) — in
2015 analyzed data of 15 years to conclude that less than 5 per cent death penalties
awarded by trial courts were confirmed by the time the cases passed the tests in high courts
and the Supreme Court.
 Another NLU Delhi study found that 162 death sentences were awarded across the country
in 2018. Only 23 were confirmed by the high courts.
 The Supreme Court heard 12 death penalty cases in 2018 but confirmed death penalty in
only one case – of Nirbhaya gangrape and murder.
 The Justice JS Verma committee, appointed after the Nirbhaya case, too had examined the
efficiency of death penalty for rape. In its report, Justice Verma did not prescribe death
penalty for rape for the lack of correlation in preventing the crime of rape or gangrape.
Death Penalty is not the panacea
 It unfairly targets poor and marginalised, that means, those without money & power.
 Executions occurred in around five cases for every 1 lakh murdersand it looks quite
arbitrary. It depends on judges personal beliefs.
 India’s murder rate has declinedcontinuously since 1991 and at present the lowest, except
for 1963.
 Punishment should not imitate crime.
 As per the recent Death Penalty India Report by the National Law University, Delhi,
the structural flaws in our criminal procedure and criminal justice system are most
pronounced in death penalty cases.
 Most of the civilised world abolished it. Death penalty has not deterred terrorism, murder
or even theft.
 From 200-2015, Supreme Court imposed 60 death sentencesand subsequently admitted

that it had erred in 15 of them. So, it clearly admitted that it has arbitrarily
imposed the most extreme punishment.
 The Police is not known for its probity or efficiencyin our Country.
 Delays in the Criminal Justice Systemdisproportionately affects those, who suffer the
tyranny of the uncertainty of their life.
Measures needed
 Law Commission in its 262nd report submitted recently recommended the abolition of
capital punishment for all crimes in India, except the crime of waging war against the nation
or for terrorism-related offences.
 It cited several factors to justify abolishing the death penalty, including its abolition by 140
other nations, its arbitrary and flawed application and its lack of any proven deterring effect
on criminals.
 Taking empirical lessons from the fate of Bachan Singh, the Supreme Court may have to now
ask the more fundamental question posed and negatived in Bachan Singh — the question of
the constitutional validity of death penalty.
 The Court may have to revisit Bachan Singh itself in so far as it refused to declare the death
penalty as violative of the right to life envisaged under Article 21 of the Constitution.
 Across the world, 108 nations have abolished death penalty in law and 144 countries have
done so in law or practice, according to the Amnesty Report of 2021.
 In the Indian context, where judgmental error is quite frequent and the quality of
adjudication is not ensured, what is required is a judicial abolition of death penalty.
Conclusion
As Law Commission said that it is the not right time of abolition experiment, the issue needs to be
debated and researched in more detail. But, capital punishment should not become a pent-
up of society’s misplaced anger and sense of judgment. It is also against the reformative purpose of
the Criminal Justice System and we must remember the words of Oscar Wilde, “Every saint has a
past and every sinner a future.”
India’s regulation of surrogacy falls short of protecting bodily autonomy and

guaranteeing reproductive liberty. Critically analyse. (250 words)
Why the question:
Petitioners in the Delhi High Court questioned why marital status, age, or gender were the criteria for
being allowed to commission or not commission surrogacy in India.
To write about the various issues in the regulation of surrogacy and measures to rectify it.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by mentioning the objectives of surrogacy act and recent changes proposed to it.
Body:
First, write about the various issues in the act – strident approval from infertility experts, restrictive
regulations, it does not allow single women, or men, or gay couples to go in for surrogacy etc. write
about the impact on the above.
Next, write about the corrective steps that are needed to rectify the same.
Conclusion:
Introduction
The Surrogacy (Regulation) Bill was introduced in Parliament in November 2016, and passed in the
Winter session of Parliament in 2021.
The Act sought to regulate the surrogacy part of a rather flourishing infertility industry in the
country. Defining ‘surrogacy’ as a practice where a woman undertakes to give birth to a child for
another couple and agrees to hand over the child to them after birth, it allows ‘altruistic
surrogacy’ — wherein only the medical expenses and insurance coverage is provided by the couple
to the surrogate mother during pregnancy. No other monetary consideration will be permitted.
Body
Objectives of Surrogacy ACT
 India has emerged as a hub for infertility treatment, attracting people from the world over
with its state-of-the-art technology and competitive prices to treat infertility.
 Soon enough, due to prevailing socio-economic inequities, underprivileged women found

an option to ‘rent their wombs’ and thereby make money to take care of their expenses —
often to facilitate a marriage, enable children to get an education, or to provide for

hospitalisation or surgery for someone in the family.
 Once information of the availability of such wombs got out, the demand also picked up.
 Unscrupulous middle men inveigled themselves into the scene and exploitation of these
women began.
 Several instances began to emerge where women, in often desperate straits, started lodging
police complaints after they did not receive the promised sum.
 Other issues also began to crop up. For instance, in 2008 a Japanese couple began the
process with a surrogate mother in Gujarat, but before the child was born they split with
both of them refusing to take the child. In 2012, an Australian couple commissioned a
surrogate mother, and arbitrarily chose one of the twins that were born.
Issues with the ACT
 As per the Surrogacy Act, a married couple can opt for surrogacy only on medical grounds.
 It also prescribes an age-criteria for both the man and woman.
 Though the law allows single women to resort to surrogacy, she has to either be a widow
or a divorcee.
o Single men are not eligible.

 The Bill raises questions over the reproductive rights of a woman. The right to life enshrines
the right of reproductive autonomy, inclusive of the right to procreation and parenthood,
which is not within the domain of the state, warranting interference of a fundamental right.
 Only a close relative of the couple can be a surrogate mother. She should have been
married, with a child of her own. She can only be a surrogate mother once.
 Even at the Bill stage, there was some apprehension about the too restrictive regulations.
For instance, it does not allow single (never been married) women, or men, or gay couples
to go in for surrogacy.
Corrective steps that are needed to rectify the same
 For surrogacy to happen, we need embryos, and embryos are cultured in various In-Vitro
Fertilisation (IVF) laboratories.
o So regulation of surrogacy must be preceded by law on Assisted Reproductive
Technology (ART) which is now realised.
 Rather than penalising surrogacy, the person providing a womb for surrogacy must
be secured with a contract, ensuring proper, insurance and medical checks.
 The Standing Committee had recommended a model of compensated surrogacy which

would cover psychological counselling of the surrogate mother and/or her children, lost
wages for the duration of pregnancy, child care support, dietary supplements and
medication, maternity clothing and post-delivery care. The Bill should, at the very least,
incorporate these provisions.
 Right to privacy of donor as well as surrogate mother should be protected.
 Surrogacy should be made inclusive for all class of people irrespective of their sexuality
Conclusion
Although the bill bans commercial surrogacy, it falls short to effectively tackle the larger social,
physical, psychological, emotional and economic issues that continue to challenge the welfare and
safety of both the surrogate mother and the child. The rights of surrogate mother and child born
must comprehensively be formulated, along with that ART must be regulated thoroughly.
How does infrastructure play a role in transformation of economy leading to

economic development? Discuss the policies of the government aimed at providing
major infrastructural push in the recent years. (250 words)
Why the question:
India’s march towards a $5 trillion economy hinges on infrastructure. India should have a truly robust
system of monitoring projects that’s fed with timely and useful data
To write about the role of infra in the economy and recent steps to promote infra.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Start by giving defining the role of infrastructure in development.
Body:
First, write about the role of infra in development – it takes economy away from low-productivity
agriculture and towards higher productivity manufacturing and services. Substantiate with facts and
examples.
Next, write about major infrastructural push provided by the government in the recent years –
National Monetisation Pipeline, Gati Shakti scheme etc. Also, mention their objectives, pros and cons.
Conclusion:
Conclude by summarising the importance of infra.
Introduction
Infrastructure sector is a key driver for the Indian economy. The sector is highly responsible for
propelling India’s overall development and enjoys intense focus from Government for initiating
policies that would ensure time-bound creation of world class infrastructure in the country.
Infrastructure sector includes power, bridges, dams, roads, and urban infrastructure development.
Basic infrastructure facilities in the country provide the foundation of growth. In the absence of
adequate infrastructure, the economy operates at a suboptimal level and remains distant from its
potential and frontier growth trajectory.
Body
Background
The infrastructure sector will be the key to overall economic growth and macroeconomic stability,
the Survey said emphasising that the year after the crisis (2021-22) will require sustained and
calibrated measures to facilitate the process of economic recovery and enable the economy to get
back on its long-term growth trajectory.
Role of infrastructure in transformation of economy leading to economic development
 Foundation for growth:
o Basic infrastructure facilities in the country provide the foundation of growth.
o In the absence of adequate infrastructure, the economy operates at a suboptimal

level and remains distant from its potential and frontier growth trajectory.
 Increases employment:
o Infrastructure development such as road construction, real estate, railway

construction, etc. is labour intensive, leading to increase in employment
opportunities in formal and informal sectors and thus, fuelling domestic demand.
 Raises Farmer’s Income:
o Investment in infrastructure would play critical role in ensuring doubling of farmers

income through focus on increased irrigation infrastructure and storage, processing
and marketing infrastructure.
 Health and Well-being:
o Infrastructure development of superior healthcare facilities, electronic health

records and better equipped health infrastructure at primary levels. (Telemedicine)
 Reduces Logistic Cost:
o Building world class roads, railways, ports, inland water ways, will cut down logistic
costs and improve competitiveness and promote exports.
o This would bring more revenues to government and may promote socio – economic
development.
Major Policies on Infrastructure
 Government of India has launched National Infrastructure Pipeline (NIP)in 2019, wherein it
has planned to invest about INR 102 lakh crores on infrastructure projects by 2024-25.
 In 2020, NITI Aayog and Quality Council of India (QCI) launched the ‘National Program and
Project Management Policy Framework’ (NPMPF).
 The government of India has launched the National Monetisation Pipeline (NMP), a
roadmap for asset monetisation of various brownfield infrastructure assets across sectors.
 NMP will help in evolving a common framework for monetisation of core assets. The NMP
estimates aggregate monetisation potential of Rs 6 lakh crores through core assets of the
Central Government, over a four-year period, from FY 2022 to FY 2025.
 Union budget 2021-22 gave a massive push to infrastructure sector by allotting Rs 233083
crore to enhance transport infrastructure and through National Infrastructure Pipeline
(NIP) a Rs 111 lakh crore plan for financial year 2019-25.
Way forward
 Rs 111 trillion National Infrastructure Pipeline for 2020-2025 will be a game-changer for the
Indian economy. Sectors like energy, roads, urban infrastructure, railways have a lion’s share
in it that will help boost growth.
 To boost private investment in infra sector, it said the government has set up the Public
Private Partnership Appraisal Committee (PPPAC) for appraisal of PPP projects.
 Revamping of the proposed VGF scheme will attract more PPP projects and facilitate the
private investment in social sectors (Health, Education, Waste Water, Solid Waste
Management, Water Supply etc.)
 The Aatmanirbhar Bharat has brought manufacturing at centre stage and emphasized its
significance in driving India’s growth and creating jobs.
Given our developmental targets and ambition, a massive scale-up in capacity-building

is needed at the bureaucratic level. In this context, discuss the role of Mission
Karmayogi in efficiency in action for producing maximum results. (250 words)
Why the question:
Recently, the Government of India’s Mission Karmayogi programme to build civil service capacity
received a $47 million boost from the World Bank.
To write about the role of Mission Karmayogi in achieving India’s developmental targets.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Start by giving aims and objectives of Mission Karmayogi.
Body:
First, write about the scale up needed up bureaucratic levels to achieve developmental targets.
Mention the changes that are needed.
Next, write about Missions Karmayogi , its features and how it will play a part in the above by
competency driven capacity building approach that focuses on imparting competencies critical to
discharge its roles.
Conclusion:
Introduction
The ‘National Programme for Civil Services Capacity Building – Mission Karmayogi’ was
launched to affect a transformational shift from rule-based training to role-based capacity
development of all civil services in the country so as to enhance citizen experience for government
services and improve availability of competent workforce.
Body
Issues in the present bureaucratic system
 There is a tendency in the Bureaucracy to resist the change which challenges their status
quo.
 The bureaucracy too must understand the need of domain knowledge and the importance
of moving away from generalist to specialist approach.
 In today’s world the governance is getting technical with each passing day and hence it’s
important that the person in authority too should have the requisite skill and experience in
that particular area.
 Thus, there should be a behavioural change in the bureaucracy too and they must embrace
the change as a need of the hour and not an attack on their status quo.
 Moreover, these online courses must not become another opportunity for the officers to go
for the sabbatical leaves.
 It must be ensured that they are actually attending the courses and participating in it so that
the purpose doesn’t get defeated.
Objectives of Karmayogi mission
 It is aimed at building a future-ready civil service with the right attitude, skills and
knowledge, aligned to the vision of New India.
 It aims to prepare Indian civil servants for the future by making them more creative,
constructive, imaginative, proactive, innovative, progressive, professional, energetic,
transparent, and technology-enabled.
 Comprehensive reform of the capacity building apparatus at the individual, institutional and
process levels for efficient public service delivery.
 To cover around 46 lakh central employees, a sum of Rs 510.86 crore will be spent over a
period of 5 years from 2020-21 to 2024-25.
 The expenditure is partly funded by multilateral assistance to the tune of $50 million.
Need for introducing Mission
 As the Indian economy grows, it will get more complex to govern; the governance capacities
will have to be enhanced proportionately which this reform undertakes.
 There is a need to develop domain knowledge besides administrative capacity in the

bureaucracy.
 There is a need to formalize the recruitment process and match the public service to a
bureaucrat’s competence, so as to find the right person for the right job.
 The plan is to begin right at the recruitment level and then invest in building more capacity
through the rest of their career.
 The reforms in the Indian bureaucracy are the need of the hour and it is a major reform
undertaken in recent years to transform it.
Conclusion
The ultimate aim of Mission Karmayogi is to ensure “Ease of Living” for the common man, “Ease of
Doing Business” and Citizen-Centricity that is reducing the gap between the government and the
citizens. Mission Karmayogi aims to prepare the Indian Civil Servant for the future by making him
more creative, constructive, imaginative, innovative, proactive, professional, progressive, energetic,
enabling, transparent and technology-enabled. This can only be achieved by regular and constructive
involvement by the government and civil servants.
Value addition
About igot platform

 The Karmyogi Programme will be delivered by setting up an Integrated Government Online
Training (iGOT) Karmayogi Platform.
 iGOT-Karmayogi is a continuous online training platform, which would allow all government
servants from assistant secretary to secretary level to undergo continuous training,
depending on their domain areas.
 Courses from international universities will be made available on the platform for officers to
take any time
 The platform is expected to evolve into a vibrant and world-class market place for content
where carefully curated and vetted digital e-learning material will be made available.
 Besides capacity building, service matters like confirmation after probation period,
deployment, work assignment and notification of vacancies etc. would eventually be
integrated with the proposed competency framework.
Welfare schemes for vulnerable sections of the population by the Centre and
States and the performance of these schemes; mechanisms, laws, institutions
and Bodies constituted for the protection and betterment of these vulnerable
sections.
Evaluate the performance of Member of Parliament Local Area Development Scheme
(MPLADS). The issue underutilisation and misutilisation of MPLADS funds poses some
serious question to the viability of the scheme in the future. Analyse. (250 words)
Reference: Down to Earth
Why the question:
Several irregularities in the utilisation of funds disbursed under the MPLAD programme were
highlighted by an MPLAD committee member during a recent meeting held in Delhi.
To write about the successes and limitations of MPLADS and its viability in the long run.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by stating the objectives of MPLAD scheme.
Body:
First, in brief, write about the major achievements of MPLADS – creation of durable community
assets, effective development of each constituency and quick works etc.
Next, write about the major shortcomings of MPLADS – underutilisation and misutilisation, lack of
accountability, lapse of funds etc.
Conclusion:
Conclude by stating your opinion on the future viability of the scheme.
Introduction
The Members of Parliament Local Area Development Scheme (MPLADS) was launched in
December, 1993, to provide a mechanism for the Members of Parliament to recommend works of
developmental nature for creation of durable community assets and for provision of basic facilities
including community infrastructure, based on locally felt needs. The MPLADS is a Central Sector
Scheme which is fully funded by Government of India. The annual MPLADS fund entitlement per MP
constituency is Rs. 5 crore.
Several irregularities in the utilisation of funds disbursed under the MPLAD programme were
highlighted by an MPLAD committee member during a recent meeting held in Delhi. The committee,
made for fund monitoring of Rajya Sabha members, has 10 members, with representatives from
most major political parties.
Body
Challenges in MPLADS
 Since its inception in 1993, MPLADS has attracted increasing scholarly and media attention
focusing on the various ways in which its politicised nature leads to the underutilisation of
funds or the misallocation of funds over space and time.
 MPs in the run-up to an election allocate significantly more funds than at other times to
projects that eventually end up incomplete.
 TheComptroller and Auditor-General of India (CAG) has time and again flagged instances of
financial mismanagement and artificial inflation of amounts spent.
 Within MPLADS, the automatic ‘rollover’ of unspent MPLADS funds from one year to the
next enables politicians to concentrate their project recommendations before anticipated
election dates, which is associated with higher project failure rates.
 MPLADS is not governed by any statutory law and is subject to the whims and fancies of the
government of the day.
 MPLADS encroaches upon the domain of local self-governing institutions and thereby
violates Part IX and IX-A of the Constitution.
 The scheme faces conflict with Doctrine of Separation of Powers as MPs are involved in
executive functions.
Way forward
 There is a need to eliminate the automatic rollover provision.
 In addition, providing information to voters on the efforts of incumbents, or lack thereof,

with regard to the progress of specific public works projects could incentivize newly elected
MPs to follow through on the proposals made by their predecessors.
 Political parties could also help by encouraging competent incumbents to stand for election
again in the same constituency which could have beneficial effects on any future
discretionary spending programmes.
 More broadly, policies that minimise discretion and that require more stringent and
standardised criteria for the approval of project proposals could also reduce the negative
effect of democratic elections on public service provision.
 This could also reduce negative effects of demands by the public for greater accountability
and transparency from lawmakers to design programmes to benefit the public instead of
supporting the interests of incumbent politicians.
Value addition:
Objectives:
 To enable MPs to recommend works of developmental nature with emphasis on the creation
of durable community assets based on the locally felt needs to be taken up in their
Constituencies.
 Lok Sabha Members can recommend works within their constituencies and elected Members
of Rajya Sabha can recommend works within the State they are elected from.
 Nominated Members of both the Rajya Sabha and Lok Sabha can recommend works
anywhere in the country.
 To create durable assets of national priorities viz. drinking water, primary education, public
health, sanitation and roads, etc.
Features for effective development of each constituency

 An MP knows the developmental and welfare issues of his constituency better than anyone
else.
 The MPLADS has enabled MPs to play a leadership role in the developmental process of his
constituency and sort out its day-to-day problems.
 It is one of the ways government funds are transferred to the grassroots with precision.
 Local MPs can channel fund for specific needs of local communities, whether it is to tar a
road, install streetlights or water pumps, or bolster local school and healthcare
infrastructure.
 Besides capacity building in the local economy, these works also offer jobs to local people.
 The pork barrel policy of State and Union Governments often leads to skewed development
and regional imbalance. The ruling party channels public money to particular constituencies
based on political considerations, at the expense of broader public interests. The elected
opposition legislators of those constituencies fall victim to this pork barrel politics.
 MPLADS has been an antidote to the above favouritism. The Scheme provided opposition
MPs some chance to cater to the developmental needs of their constituency.
 Of the MPLADS corpus, 15% has been earmarked for the development of Scheduled
Castes and 5% for the Scheduled Tribes. Around ₹20 lakh of the MPLADS fund per
annum has been allotted for the welfare of differently abled people.
Issues relating to development and management of Social Sector/Services

relating to Health, Education, Human Resources.
The importance of public health has been known for decades with every expert
committee underscoring it. However, the process of reform to create a public health-
centred primary healthcare system has been lackadaisical. Can universal right to
health be a panacea for this? Critically examine. (250 words)
Why the question:
It is time our political systems listen to people and take care of their everyday needs, instead of going
for easy options like privatisation, commodification and medicalisation of healthcare.
To write about the need to implement Health as a Right in India and its feasibility.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by giving a brief about health care in India and cite statistics to substantiate.
Body:
First, write about the various issues plaguing the health care system in India.
Next, mention the need for Right to Health that would promote the health of various weaker sections
of the society and also boost economic development. Further link the benefits of better healthcare
systems to that of various existing schemes like Ayushman Bharath.
Next, bring out the impediments to declare health care a Fundamental Right.
Conclusion:
Conclude by highlighting that Right to Health is only a detailed interpretation of Right to life that is
already a constitutional right.
Introduction
The right to health, as with other rights, includes both freedoms and entitlements and would be a
part of Article 21. Freedoms include the right to control one’s health and body (for example, sexual
and reproductive rights) and to be free from interference (for example, free from torture and non-
consensual medical treatment and experimentation).
Entitlements include the right to a system of health protection that gives everyone an equal
opportunity to enjoy the highest attainable level of health.
Body
Problems in India’s health sector
 There is a massive shortage of medical staff, infrastructure and last mile connectivity in rural
areas. Eg: Doctor : Population 1:1800 and 78% doctors cater to urban India (population of
30%).
 Massive shortages in the supply of services (human resources, hospitals and diagnostic
centres in the private/public sector) which are made worse by grossly inequitable availability
between and within States.
o Data from the National Health Profile-2019, the total number of hospital beds in the
country was 7,13,986 which translates to 0.55 beds per 1000 population.
o Furthermore, the study also highlighted that 12 states that account for 70 per cent
of India’s 1.3 billion population were found to have hospital beds per 1000
population below the national average of 0.55 beds.
o For example, even a well-placed State such as Tamil Nadu has an over 30% shortage
of medical and non-medical professionals in government facilities.
 Health budget: The health budget has neither increased nor is there any policy to
strengthen the public/private sector in deficit areas. While the Ayushmaan Bharat provides
portability, one must not forget that it will take time for hospitals to be established in deficit
areas.
o This in turn could cause patients to gravitate toward the southern States that have a
comparatively better health infrastructure than the rest of India.
 Infrastructure constraints: There are doubts on the capacity of India’s infrastructure to take
on the additional load of patients during pandemics like Covid-19 as seen recently.
o There is a growing medical tourism (foreign tourists/patients) as a policy being

promoted by the government, and also domestic patients, both insured and
uninsured.
 Absence of primary care: In the northern States there are hardly any sub-centres and
primary health centres are practically non-existent. First mile connectivity to a primary
healthcare centre is broken. For eg, in Uttar Pradesh there is one PHC for every 28 villages.
 Out of pocket expenditure high: Even the poor are forced to opt for private healthcare, and,
hence, pay from their own pockets. As a result, an estimated 63 million people fall into
poverty due to health expenditure, annually.
 Healthcare without holistic approach: There are a lot of determinants for better health like
improved drinking water supply and sanitation; better nutritional outcomes, health and
education for women and girls; improved air quality and safer roads which
are outside the purview of the Health Ministry.
Need for right to health
Impediments to declare it a fundamental right
 The existing public primary health care model in the country is limited in scope.
o Even where there is a well-functioning public primary health centre, only services
related to pregnancy care, limited childcare and certain services related to national
health programmes are provided.
 Expenditure on public health funding has been consistently low in India (approximately 1.3%
of GDP).
o As per OECD, India’s total out-of-pocket expenditure is around 2.3% of GDP.
o The government is committed to spend 2.5% of GDP on health by 2025.
 Sub-optimal health system. Due to this, it is challenging to tackle Non-communicable

Diseases, which is all about prevention and early detection.
o It diminishes preparedness and effective management for new and emerging threats
such as pandemic like Covid-19.
Measures needed
 The implication of and central to the success of such a reset lies in creating appropriate
cadres.
 More immediately, there must be a public health cadre manning the posts at the PHC and
CHCs consisting of sub-specialists in family medicine, public health and public health
management.
 Likewise, among nurses, the cadre should comprise two distinct sets of personnel — public
health nurses (not ANMs promoted based on seniority) and nurse midwives capable of
independently doing all clinical functions for handling pregnancies and women’s health
issues except surgical interventions.
 Primary care in India can get traction only if new skills, drastically upgraded competencies
and a new mindset are embedded within the vision of a patient, family and community-
centred health system.
 There is also a need to declutter policy dialogue and provide clarity to the nomenclatures.
Currently, public health, family medicine and public health management are used
interchangeably.
 It is time our political systems listen to peoples’ voices for a family doctor to ensure their
everyday needs — and not easy options like privatisation, commodification and
medicalisation of the system.
 Resetting the system to current day realities requires strong political leadership to go
beyond the inertia of the techno-administrative status quoist structures.
Conclusion
The lesson emerging most unequivocally from the pandemic experience is that if India does not want
a repeat of the immeasurable suffering and the social and economic loss, we need to make public
health a central focus. The virus is still around. We have no option but to live with that reality.
Covid has also shifted the policy dialogue from health budgets and medical colleges towards much-
needed and badly-delayed institutional reform. It is heartening to note that the Ministry of Health
has issued guidelines to states to establish a public health cadre.
Issues relating to poverty and hunger.

Malnutrition occurs as a result of complex interplay among various factors. However,
simple yet practical and innovative solutions can contribute towards ending
malnutrition and anaemia. Elaborate. (250 words)
Why the question:
The National Family Health Survey (NFHS-5) has shown marginal improvement in different nutrition
indicators, indicating that the pace of progress is slow. Children in several States are more
undernourished now than they were five years ago.
To write about causes for Malnutrition and measures needed to overcome it.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by giving statistic related to status of malnutrition in India.
Body:
First, write about the various causes of malnutrition – poverty, maternal health illiteracy, diseases
like diarrhoea, home environment, dietary practices, hand washing and other hygiene practices, etc.
Briefly mention its impact.
Next, write about the simple and innovative solutions that are needed to tackle it.
Conclusion:
Introduction
India has 5,772,472 children below five years affected by severe wasting, the most in the world,
alerted UNICEF. It had been reported in 2017 by the National Health Survey that approximately 19
crore people in the country were compelled to sleep on an empty stomach every night.
Underweight is most common among the poor, the rural population, adults who have no education
and scheduled castes and scheduled tribes. Hence it clear that hunger and malnutrition is also a
direct consequence of socio-economic status of people in India.
Body
Malnutrition in India
 India, currently has the largest number of undernourished people in the worlde. around
195 million.
 Nearly 47 million or 4 out of 10 children in India do not meet their full human potential
because of chronic undernutrition or stunting.
 9% of children under 5 years are stunted and 20.8% are wasted, compared to the Asia
average of 22.7% and 9.4% respectively.
 Rate of overweight and obesity continues to rise, affecting almost a fifth of the adults, at
21.6% of women and 17.8% of men.
 Inequities in food and health systems increase inequalities in nutrition outcomes that in turn
can lead to more inequity, perpetuating a vicious cycle.
Causes of hunger and malnutrition in India
 Poverty: Poverty restricts the food choices and has been the causative factor of hunger
related deaths.
o If the persistent high prices of food items and the regional disparities in terms of
development, especially the backwardness among the hilly and tribal areas also
taken into account, the percentage of people who cannot afford balanced nutrition
will be much higher in India.
 Poor access to safe drinking water: Safe and tap drinking water is still a luxury in many parts
of rural India and urban slums/shanties. Unsafe water causes water borne diseases and
children are prone to it more than adults.
 Issues with agriculture: The change from multi to mono cropping systems limits the diversity
of agricultural products.
o Inclination towards cash crops and changing food habits result in malnutrition,
undernutrition and even micro-nutrient deficiencies.
o Local cuisine such as millets are not being consumed causing nutrient deficiencies
and anaemia.
 Food wastage: Food wastage is also an emerging challenge that undermines the efforts to
end hunger and malnutrition. According to the FAO, the global volume of food wastage is
estimated at 6 billion tonnes of primary product equivalents.
 Poor health services: The relationship between poverty and access to health care can be
seen as part of a larger cycle, where poverty leads to ill health and ill health maintains
poverty.
 Insufficient education and training: In developing countries, children do not have access to
basic education because of inequalities that originate in sex, health and cultural identity. It
has been revealed in reports that illiteracy and lack of education are common factor that
lead to poverty and in turn hunger.
 Covid-19 impact: The momentum set by this entire nutrition movement was disturbed once
Covid lockdowns led to the shutting of schools, Anganwadi centres, Nutritional
Rehabilitation Centres.
o Further, frontline workers had to be engaged in Covid-related work that took

precedence over their daily duties, which entailed identifying, referring and
monitoring children suffering from severe acute malnutrition and moderate acute
malnutrition among other nutrition-strengthening activities.
 States tried to cope to the best of their abilities by replacing hot-cooked meals with dry
ration or cash transfers.
 Moreover, indirect forces triggered by the pandemic such as disruption in food systems,
dried-up income sources, job losses and consequent financial hardships also mean that
access to nutrient-rich food might have reduced among economically vulnerable people.
Measures needed to tackle hunger
 Agriculture-Nutrition linkage schemes have the potential for greater impact in dealing with
malnutrition and thus, needs greater emphasis.
o Recognising the importance of this link, the Ministry for Women and Child
Development launched the Bharatiya Poshan Krishi Kosh in 2019.
o There is a need to promote schemes directed to nutrition-agriculture link activities

in rural areas. However, implementation remains the key.
 Early fund disbursement: The government needs to ensure early disbursement of funds and
optimum utilisation of funds in schemes linked to nutrition.
 Underutilisation of Resources: It has been pointed out many a times that expenditure made
under many nutrition-based schemes is considerably lower than what was allocated under
them. Thus, emphasis needs to be on implementation.
 Convergence with other Schemes: Nutrition goes beyond just food, with economic, health,
water, sanitation, gender perspectives and social norms contributing to better nutrition. This
is why the proper implementation of other schemes can also contribute to better nutrition.
o The convergence of Swachh Bharat Abhiyan, Jal Jeevan Mission with schemes
pertaining to nutrition, will bring holistic changes to India’s nutrition scenario.
 Mid-Day Meal Scheme: The Mid-Day Meal Scheme aims to enhance the nutrition of school
children by providing a balanced diet in schools.
o By including milk and eggs in each states’ menu, preparing a menu based on climatic
conditions, local foods etc. can help in providing the right nutrition to children in
different States.
Conclusion
Welfare measures must continue to reach the most vulnerable population and children and mothers
must be at the centre of the focus to target hunger and malnutrition. Achieving zero hunger
requires agriculture and food systems to become more efficient, sustainable, climate-smart
and nutrition–sensitive. It is important to look at the future of food production to achieve the zero-
hunger goal. Human resource capacity building is the key as is access to education and health
services and empowering the poor through partnerships.
Value Addition
Government welfare measures
 Eat Right India: An outreach activity organised by the Food Safety and Standards Authority
of India (FSSAI) for citizens to nudge them towards eating right.
 Pradhan Mantri Matru Vandana Yojana: A centrally sponsored scheme executed by the
Ministry of Women and Child Development, is a maternity benefit programme being
implemented in all districts of the country with effect from 1st January, 2017.
 Food Fortification: Food Fortification or Food Enrichment is the addition of key vitamins and
minerals such as iron, iodine, zinc, Vitamin A & D to staple foods such as rice, milk and salt to
improve their nutritional content.
 National Food Security Act, 2013: It legally entitled up to 75% of the rural population and
50% of the urban population to receive subsidized food grains under the Targeted Public
Distribution System.
 Mission Indradhanush: It targets children under 2 years of age and pregnant women for
immunization against 12 Vaccine-Preventable Diseases (VPD).
 Integrated Child Development Services (ICDS) Scheme: Launched on 2nd October, 1975, the
ICDS Scheme offers a package of six services to children in the age group of 0-6 years,
pregnant women and lactating mothers.
o Supplementary Nutrition,
o Pre-school non-formal education,
o Nutrition & health education,
o Immunization,
o Health check-up and
o Referral services.
 POSHAN Abhiyaan: Also called National Nutrition Mission, was launched by the government
on the occasion of the International Women’s Day on 8th March, 2018.
 The Abhiyaan targets to reduce Stunting, undernutrition, Anaemia (among young children,
women and adolescent girls) and reduce low birth weight by 2%, 2%, 3% and 2% per annum
respectively.
 It also targets to bring down stunting among children in the age group 0-6 years from 4% to
25% by 2022.
What are the different ways in which poverty is measured in India? Though the
statistics point to a reduction in poverty in the last decade but India remains far from
achieving Sustainable Development Goal-1 (SDG-1). Examine. How can SDG-1 be
achieved by 2030? (250 words)
Reference: Live Mint , Insights on India
Why the question:
The all-India poverty ratio in 2020-21 is 17.9%, compared to 21.9% in 2011-12, with lower poverty in
urban India compared to rural India.
To write about the measurement of poverty, reasons for poverty despite poverty alleviation
measures and ways to SDG-1.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin the answer by giving context regarding the reduction in poverty by citing a statistic.
Body:
First, write about the various ways to measure poverty – National Sample Survey (NSS) based per
capita consumption, Income based poverty line, consumption-based poverty line, Poverty line basket,
Various committees and international standards etc.
Next, write about the reasons as to why despite poverty alleviation measures poverty is at a higher
rate in India.
Next, write about ways to achieve SDG-1.
Conclusion:
Conclude with a way forward to achieve SDG-1.
Introduction
Poverty is a state or condition in which a person or community lacks the financial resources and
essentials for a minimum standard of living. Poverty means that the income level from employment
is so low that basic human needs can’t be met. In India, 21.9% of the population lives below the
national poverty line in 2011.
The all-India poverty ratio in 2020-21 is 17.9%, compared to 21.9% in 2011-12, with lower poverty in
urban India compared to rural India. Poverty ratios have declined over this period, though by not as
much as they might have.
Body
Various ways to measure poverty
 Planning Commission Expert Group (1962), working group constituted by the Planning
Commission formulated the separate poverty lines for rural and urban areas (₹20 and ₹25
per capita per year respectively).
 VM Dandekar and N Rath (1971), made the first systematic assessment of poverty in India,
based on National Sample Survey (NSS) data.
o Unlike previous scholars who had considered subsistence living or basic minimum
needs criteria as the measure of poverty line, VM Dandekar and N Rath were of the
view that poverty line must be derived from the expenditure that was adequate to
provide 2250 calories per day in both rural and urban areas.
o Expenditure based Poverty line estimation, generated a debate on minimum calorie

consumption norms.
 Alagh Committee (1979): Task force constituted by the Planning Commission under the
chairmanship of YK Alagh, constructed a poverty line for rural and urban areas on the basis
of nutritional requirements and related consumption expenditure.
o Poverty estimates for subsequent years were to be calculated by adjusting the price
level for inflation.
 Lakdawala Committee (1993): Task Force chaired by DT Lakdawala, based on the

assumption that the basket of goods and services used to calculate Consumer Price Index-
Industrial Workers (CPI-IW) and Consumer Price Index- Agricultural Labourers (CPI-AL)
reflect the consumption patterns of the poor, made the following suggestions:
o Consumption expenditure should be calculated based on calorie consumption as
earlier.
o State specific poverty lines should be constructed and these should be updated
using the CPI-IW in urban areas and CPI-AL in rural areas.
o Discontinuation of scaling of poverty estimates based on National Accounts

Statistics.
 Tendulkar Committee (2009): Expert group constituted by the Planning Commission and,
chaired by Suresh Tendulkar, was constituted to review methodology for poverty
estimation and to address the following shortcomings of the previous methods:
o Obsolete Consumption Pattern: Consumption patterns were linked to the 1973-74

poverty line baskets (PLBs) of goods and services, whereas there were
significant changes in the consumption patterns of the poor since that time, which
were not reflected in the poverty estimates.
o Inflation Adjustment: There were issues with the adjustment of prices for
inflation, both spatially (across regions) and temporally (across time).
o Health and Education Expenditure: Earlier poverty lines assumed that health and
education would be provided by the state and formulated poverty lines accordingly.
 The Consumer Price Index (CPI) for price changes since 2011-12, to arrive at corresponding
poverty lines for 2020-21.
 PLFS 2020-21 household monthly consumption data: using this the percentage of
population living below that poverty line has been estimated.
Means to achieve SDG1:
 Immediate support package will need to quickly reach both the existing and new poor.
o While existing safety net programs can be mobilized to get cash into the pockets of
some of the existing poor relatively quickly, this is not the case for the new poor.
o In fact, the new poor are likely to look different from the existing poor, particularly
in their location (mostly urban) and employment (mostly informal services,
construction, and manufacturing).
o the identification of poor and vulnerable groups is need of the hour.
o India should consider fixing a universal basic income in the post-Covid period
through a combination of cash transfers, expansion of MGNREGA, and introduction
of an urban employment guarantee scheme
 Employment generation for the masses:
o A large fiscal stimulus along with intermediate informal employment insurgency

through MGNREGA and other employment generation programmes are urgent to
rein the adverse impact of covid-19 on the welfare of the masses.
 Multilateral global institutions must support the developing nations:
o Oxfam is calling on world leaders to agree on an Emergency Rescue Package of 2.5

trillion USD paid for through the immediate cancellation or postponement of 1
trillion in debt repayments, a 1 trillion increase in IMF Special Drawing Rights
(international financial reserves), and an additional 500 billion in aid.
 An effective response in support of poor and vulnerable households will require significant
additional fiscal resources.
o Providing all the existing and new extreme poor with a cash transfer of $1/day
(about half the value of the international extreme poverty line) for a month would
amount to $20 billion —or $665 million per day over 30 days.
o Given that impacts are likely to be felt by many non-poor households as well and
that many households are likely to need support for much longer than a month, the
sum needed for effective protection could be far higher.
 Decision-makers need timely and policy-relevant information on impacts and the

effectiveness of policy responses.
o This can be done using existing, publicly available data to monitor the unfolding
economic and social impacts of the crisis, including prices, service delivery, and
economic activity, as well as social sentiment and behaviours.
o In addition, governments can use mobile technology to safely gather information

from a representative sample of households or individuals.
o Phone surveys can collect information on health and employment status, food
security, coping strategies, access to basic services and safety nets and other
outcomes closely related to the risk of falling (further) into poverty.
Conclusion
The World Health Organization has described poverty as the greatest cause of suffering on earth.
Poverty eradication should not be the goal of the government but the goal of the government
policies should be to create prosperity. Both monetary and non-monetary measures of poverty are
needed to better inform the policies intended to address the needs and deprivations faced by poor
populations
Value addition
Various poverty alleviation programs in India since Independence:
 Integrated Rural Development Programme (IRDP)
 Jawahar Rozgar Yojana/Jawahar Gram Samriddhi Yojana
 Rural Housing – Indira Awaas Yojana
 National Old Age Pension Scheme (NOAPS)
 Sampoorna Gramin Rozgar Yojana (SGRY)
 Mahatma Gandhi National Rural Employment Guarantee Act (MGNREGA) 2005
 The Public Distribution System (PDS)
 The National Food Security Act (NFSA)
 National Rural Livelihood Mission: Ajeevika (2011)
 National Urban Livelihood Mission
 Pradhan Mantri Kaushal Vikas Yojana
 Pradhan Mantri Jan Dhan Yojana
Important aspects of governance, transparency and accountability, e-

governance- applications, models, successes, limitations, and potential; citizens
charters, transparency & accountability and institutional and other measures.
Many companies think that corporate social responsibility (CSR) is a peripheral issue
for their business and customer satisfaction is more important for them. Analyse. (250
words)
Difficulty: Moderate
Why the question:
After having lobbied policymakers for years since 2014 on how they could deploy corporate social
responsibility (CSR) funds, Indian companies ran into some essential amendments made in 2021.
To wrote about the issues with CSR and steps needed to make it more effective.
Directive:
Introduction:
Begin by defining CSR and its evolution in India.
Body:
First, write about the various aims and objectives behind CSR in India.
In the next part, write about the various issues in CSR – lack of community participation in CSR
activities, need to build local capacities, issues of transparency and non-availability of clear CSR
guidelines.
Next, write about the various measures that are needed to make CSR more effective.
Conclusion:
Introduction
Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) is referred as a corporate initiative to assess and take
responsibility for the company’s effects on the environment and impact on social welfare and to
promote positive social and environmental change.
Body
CSR is based on the philosophy of Trusteeship believes in inherent goodness of human beings.
Companies have to spend at least 2% of last 3 years’ average net profits on CSR activities. This may
sound costing companies on their profit but in reality it can make companies more profitable and
sustainable.
Importance of CSR
 Corporate Social Responsibility links Corporate Sector to Social Sector
 Upholds Trusteeship: Corporate social responsibility gives a chance to the organization to

contribute towards the society, environment, country and so on.
 Promote Relationship: Relationship is the oxygen of life. It enhances the “social quotient” of
the company hence help in getting appeal for its product from people. Ex Lifebuoy soap
success story
 It imparts an ethical, responsible character to company’s profile, helps it to justify its
product, growth and create a distinct aura of company in public sphere. E.g.: Nanhi Kali
project of Godrej group.
 Competitive advantage: Businesses that show how they are more socially responsible than
their competitors tend to stand out. Research shows that a strong record of CSR improves
customers’ attitude towards the company. TATA group enjoys much social appeal when
compared with fellow competitors. The Classmate notebooks which contributed Rs. 1
towards social welfare gained appeal over other brands.
 Boosts employee morale: CSR practices have a significant impact on employee morale, as it
reinforces his confidence on Company’s empathy.
 Presence and involvement of company in CSR activity will provide a soft corner to it in
government’s approval, preferences. Its active involvement to implement government
flagship program like Swaccha Bharat Mission enhances company’s credibility in
government’s eyes.
 Promotes Socio-Economic Development: If the company is engaged in CSR programs it

attracts foreign investment and helps the country to get valuable foreign exchange. This in
turn leads to socio-economic developmental activities.
 Attracts FDI: If the company is engaged in CSR programs it attracts foreign investment and
helps the country to get valuable foreign exchange
Companies think CSR is a peripheral issues for their business:
 The games promoters played included many innovations, such as setting up their own non-
profit units and trusts to siphon funds and using third parties to route money back to their
pockets for a commission.
 The idea behind India becoming the world’s first country to have a CSR tax was undermined
by such silly games, resulting in a sub-optimal impact of this initiative on the ground.
 The most common reason that companies cited for not meeting the target is that they had
undertaken long-term projects. This means that the amount was earmarked for a long-term
initiative and the company is carrying forward the spend.
 Many companies also said that they lacked prior expertise and delay in project identification
as reasons for not spending.
 There has been very little strategic thinking and innovation in the CSR where corporations
can play a leadership role in contributing to society.
 This also shows that companies in India have generally not understood the larger goals of
CSR, viewing it more as a charitable endeavour.
 More industrialised states are winning over poorer, more remote regions where
development aid is acutely needed.
Conclusion
Socially beneficial activities involve an element of welfare, charity and providing maximum good to
maximum number of people. While doing them the donator will definitely get benefitted in terms of
positive wishes, economic gains or prestige enhancement. Hence Corporate Social Responsibility
makes companies more profitable and sustainable.
What do you understand by digital democracy? Examine its relations with various
aspects of governance. (250 words)
Why the question:
A country with size & complexity of India can showcase not only how tech can be used but also how
to effectively curb its adverse impact & misuse. Therefore, this is one area where it is natural leader
among digital democracies.
To write about digital democracy and its relation with various aspects of governance.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin the answer by defining digital democracy.
Body:
First, write about the various components of digital democracy – information and communications
technology to promote democracy; such technologies include civic technology and government
technology. Social, economic and cultural conditions that enable the free and equal practice of
political self-determination.
Next, write about the relation of digital democracy with various governance parameters.
Substantiate with examples
Conclusion:
Conclude by summarising the importance of digital democracy.
Introduction
Digital democracy is, in a sense, the next phase of democracy as it encompasses all the
opportunities and challenges of asserting sovereignty for nation states. It is important to
understand that countries must now cooperate not only in politics, trade and humanitarian issues,
but a vital aspect of cooperation is transborder technological cooperation to assert sovereignty,
including to multinational tech giants.
The most important task in such an era is the construction of technological architecture as a public
good—which is owned not by any one private entity. In building and deploying such architecture at
scale (for more than a billion people), India has shown unique innovation skills and achieved
unprecedented success.
Body
India and digital democracy
 According to recent independent research reports, digital transactions in India could rise to
$10 trillion in value by 2026.
 Two out of five transactions in India are estimated to be using digital tools, and it is set to
rise exponentially in the next few years.
 Whether in financial technology or identity architecture, India is today building bigger and
better digital public infrastructure at scale than any other democracy in the world.
 It, therefore, is the natural leader of the world of digital or digitising democracies.
 India is not only building such technologies and infrastructure at home, but is also pitching
to deploy it around the world.
 The India pitch is mass-use digital technology that can be utilised as public infrastructure by
countries to digitise their governance processes and public goods delivery mechanisms.
Digital democracy and aspects of governance
 Public diplomacy: The use of digital technology among democracies is one of the most
important platforms for public diplomacy today and this will become more necessary in the
near future.
o A country with the size and complexity of India can showcase not only how
technology can be used but also how to effectively curb its adverse impact and
misuse. Therefore, this is one area where India is a natural leader.
 Innovation and service delivery: It can bring to the table the full weight of its enormous
expertise in running programmes like Aadhaar, direct-benefit transfer, and ongoing efforts
to improve digital health and education.
 Financial technology: Apart from this, India has innovations like the Unified Payments
Interface (UPI) (which powers fintech and has created a unique level playing field) and is
working towards creating a unified digital platform for commerce.
 Soft power: There is an underlying logic to this—democracies must cooperate both non-
digitally and digitally to take on the challenges of the so-called decentralised Web3 world of
blockchain and artificial intelligence that is emerging.
o India can and should lead such cooperation. It has both the size and the cutting-edge
technology and can offer both expertise and scale.
Conclusion
This leadership role for India, already apparent, is set to expand considerably in the years to come as
democracies that extensively use digital tools come together to boost ease of living for their citizens
and tackle crises that require worldwide collaboration.
What is Environmental, Social, and Governance (ESG)? Is India ready to adopt ESG
model given its diversity and developmental challenges? Analyse. (250 words)
Reference: Live Mint , investopedia.com
Why the question:
Sustainable climate funding initiatives that broadly comprise the ‘E’ of ESG transition finance have for
long been paid lip service to and perceived as assurers of mere bragging rights. Yet, as
Environmental, Social and Governance (ESG) action assumes importance, change is in the air.
To write about ESG and India’s readiness in adapting it.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by defining ESG
Body:
First, write about the various features of ESG and the benefits associated with it.
Next, write about the readiness of India to adopt ESG – mention areas which it can and mention
areas which it cannot. Also mention how India can adopt ESG and still achieve its developmental
objectives.
Conclusion:
Introduction
ESG environmental, social and governance describes areas that characterize a sustainable,
responsible or ethical investment. It is a generic term used in capital markets and used by investors
to evaluate corporate behaviour and to determine the future financial performance of companies.
ESG is a subset of non-financial performance indicators which include sustainable, ethical and
corporate governance issues such as managing a company’s carbon footprint and ensuring there
are systems in place to ensure accountability.
Body
About ESG
 ESG refers to a class of investing that is also known as “sustainable investing.” This is an
umbrella term for investments that seek positive returns and long-term impact on society,
the environment, and the performance of the business.
 There are several different categories of sustainable investing.
o They include impact investing, socially responsible investing (SRI), ESG, and values-
based investing.
o Another school of thought puts ESG under the umbrella term of SRI. Under SRI
are ethical investing, ESG investing, and impact investing.
 Responsible investors evaluate companies using ESG criteria as a framework to screen

investments or to assess risks in investment decision-making.
 Environmental factors determine a company’s stewardship of the environment and focus

on waste and pollution, resource depletion, greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions, deforestation,
and climate change.
India’s readiness to adopt ESG model
 Heavy industries like iron and steel can help reduce India’s carbon dioxide exhaust by
undertaking incremental capacity expansion through smaller ‘scrap based steel process
plants’ (recycling) located near urban centres.
o Once deep decarbonization steel technologies develop on a commercial scale,

including green hydrogen from electrolysis of water or blue hydrogen from natural
gas (where carbon by-products get captured), polluting entities could choose to
make the appropriate technology investments.
 In the energy and commodities space where coal and hydrocarbons are necessities, refining
companies that guzzle finance to the tune of $20-40 million for every imported tanker
consignment, could do more, given the sheer scale of their operations.
o Business and corporate social responsibility support is needed to promote greener

technologies and bring about a large CO2 impact.
o Projects like the afforestation of habitats and revival of lost water bodies need
priority.
 Power distribution companies can do their bit to support electric vehicle (EV) usage by
upgrading back-end transformer infrastructure and raising the sanctioned loads of
connections , which remain as low as 5 KWh, leaving little spare load for quick EV battery
charging at most alternative-current plug-in points.
 In the construction industry, rain water harvesting (RWH) systems should be a strict
precondition for issuing building plan approvals to reverse groundwater depletion and
prevent urban flooding.
o If water-challenged Tamil Nadu could successfully implement mandatory RWH for all
buildings across urban and later rural areas in the early 2000s, surely such best
practices require replication today in heavy consumption areas across the country.
Conclusion
A green economic transition and the financing needed for ESG should not be elusive buzzwords, but
an opportunity that Indian corporates and financiers should act upon right away before climate
action regulations start hitting them hard.
India and its neighborhood- relations.

Myanmar is the lynchpin of India’s Act East Policy. India should focus on building
supportive international environment, so that the Myanmar could be encouraged to
follow the democratic road map. However, other measures of reaching out to east
must also be explored. Critically examine. (250 words)
Why the question:
Even a cursory look at the situation in Myanmar, post the February 1, 2021, military takeover,
conjures up a picture of a country that is spiralling downwards. There are reliable reports of the
strengthening of the People’s Defence Force, with the support of various ethnic militias. There is no
sign of the restoration of normalcy as witnessed by one of the authors during a recent tour of the
India-Myanmar border.
To write about the importance of Myanmar to India’s act east policy and steps needed put Myanmar
back on a democratic path.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin giving context regarding Indo-Myanmar relations.

Body:
In the first part, mention about the importance of Myanmar to India’s Act East Policy.
Next, write the various options to ensure the return of democracy in Myanmar. Using U.N and
ASEAN, Bilateral diplomacy etc.
Next, write about the other measures of outreach that must be explored by India for a successful Act
east policy.
Conclusion:
Introduction
Myanmar (formerly called Burma) military grabbed power in a coup, third time in the nation’s
history since its independence from British rule in 1948. Military (also called Junta and Tatmadaw)
has alleged that the general elections held in November 2020 were full of irregularities and that
therefore, the results are not valid. This marked the end of Myanmar’s short-lived experience with
democracy which began in 2011, when military implemented parliamentary elections and other
reforms.
Body
Geo-strategic significance of Myanmar for India
 Geopolitical interests: Myanmar sits at the intersection of India’s ‘Neighbourhood First’

and ‘Act East’ policies, and therefore is an essential element in India’s practice of regional
diplomacy in the Indo-Pacific, and serves as a land bridge to connect South Asia and
Southeast Asia.
 Strategic location: It serves as a buffer between India and China. Myanmar has coastal
access to the Bay of Bengal. It connects Bangladesh, China and the restive North-eastern
states of India. It is also close to India’s Nicobar archipelago.
 National security: Myanmar-China border has become the epicentre of local armed
separatist groups operating on Myanmar soil, and Indian groups, ranging from ULFA in
Assam to the NSCN (IM) in Nagaland.
 Economic interests: India has interests in natural resources of Myanmar and also developing
certain projects like India–Myanmar–Thailand trilateral highway and Kaladan multi-modal
project which is to link India’s landlocked north-eastern States to the Myanmar Port of
Sittwe, located in the Bay of Bengal. Instability in Myanmar will be a roadblock to these
ambitions.
 Countering China: A weakened Myanmar falling into the clutches of China as a satellite state
will pressurize India to do Beijing’s bidding in regional affairs.
Various options to ensure the return of democracy in Myanmar
 International efforts should provide strong incentives and support for critical democracies in
the region such as India, Japan and Indonesia to increase dialogue with and assistance for
pro-democracy political parties and non-state ethnic nationalities authorities in Myanmar.
 The United States should increase high-level diplomatic engagement with ASEAN to enhance
that organization’s resilience to attempts by China to undermine the role the bloc may play
in putting the country back on a path toward democracy.
 Despite the military’s best effort to quash it, civil society in Myanmar persists and serves an
increasingly important role providing essential services to vulnerable communities and by
organizing anti-coup activities.
 The United States and other democracies should continue to provide financial and technical
support to civil society.
 Support political dialogues across Myanmar’s diverse, anti-coup movement. These include
dialogues under the People’s Representative Committee for Federalism and the National
Unity Consultative Council.
 Where possible, the United States should support solidarity and trust-building within the
anti-coup movement.
 Dialogues should aim to sincerely address past discrimination and abuses, including those by
the NLD and others who have held positions of power.
Approach to be taken by India
 India faces the most challenging dilemma on how to respond to the military coup in
Myanmar. India supports the process of democratic transition in Myanmar.
 Though India has expressed deep concern over recent developments in Myanmar, cutting
off from the Myanmar military is not a viable option as India has significant economic and
strategic interests in Myanmar and its neighbourhood.
 The dual power centres of the military and the civilian government that existed in Naypyitaw
until recently, suited India.
 While India’s national interests clearly lie in dealing with whoever is in power in
Myanmar, India would find it difficult to openly support the junta given the strong western
and American stance.
 On the other hand, it can ill-afford to offend the junta by actively seeking a restoration of
democracy there.
 India should continue to engage with the present regime in Myanmar working towards
mutual development of people of both the countries while it should support sharing
experiences in constitutionalism and federalism to assist Myanmar in resolving the
prevailing stalemate.
Conclusion
India is left with very few clear policy options. And yet, it must continue to maintain relations with
the government in power in Myanmar while discreetly pushing for political reconciliation in the
country. In the meantime, the focus must be on improving trade, connectivity, and security links
between the two sides.
The changing dynamics of the world order could provide BIMSTEC the opportunity to
expand its role. Can BIMSTEC be an alternative to SAARC? Examine. (250 words)
Why the question:
June 6 marked the completion of 25 years since the 1997 Bangkok Declaration launched a modest
grouping (of Bangladesh, India, Sri Lanka and Thailand), with the acronym, BIST-EC. Three countries
(Nepal, Bhutan and Myanmar) joined it later to make it the Bay of Bengal Initiative for Multi-Sectoral
Technical and Economic Cooperation (BIMSTEC).
To write about the role BIMSTEC can play in the changing geopolitics and if it can be an alternative to
SAARC.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by mentioning the mandate behind the launch of BIMSTEC.
Body:
First, write the role BIMSTEC can play in the changing geopolitics – BIMSTEC allows the confluence of
its Act East and the Neighbourhood Policies, development of ‘Blue Economy’, collaboration on
security and communication etc.
Next, give context regarding SAARC and examine if BIMSTEC can be a suitable alternative.
Conclusion:
Conclude writing a balanced opinion.
Introduction
The Bay of Bengal is fast becoming a key area of economic and strategic competition in the Indo-
Pacific. It’s the largest bay in the world and forms an important part of southern Asia. The limitations
of SAARC due to multiple reasons have led to South Asian region being the least integrated
region in the world vis-à-vis the European and ASEAN experiences.
The Bay of Bengal Initiative for Multi-Sectoral Technical and Economic Cooperation (BIMSTEC) is a
bridge between South Asia and South East Asia. BIMSTEC has gained more favour as the preferred
platform for regional cooperation in South Asia
Body
The changing dynamics of the world order
 Admittedly, the world has recently seen the rise of authoritarian rulers in many countries.
However, this can hardly be viewed as a new phenomenon.
 The role of China is possibly the most disrupting one, given the challenge it poses to the
existing international order.
 Militarily, China is openly challenging U.S. supremacy in many areas, including ‘state-of-the-
art weaponry’such as hyper-sonic technology.
 USA’s pivot to Indo-Pacific region has added a new dimension to the world order.
 The other major risk stems from the ongoing conflict between Russia and Ukraine— the
latter being backed by the U.S. and North Atlantic Treaty Organisation (NATO)
 Taliban’s return to power in Afghanistanhas led to a material shift in the balance of

power in an already troubled region on India’s periphery.
 In Central Asia, India will be challenged on how best to manage its traditional friendship
with Russiawith the pronounced tilt seen more recently in India-U.S. relations.
 In West Asia, the challenge for India is how to manage its membership of the Second
Quad(India, Israel, the UAE and the U.S.) with the conflicting interests of different players in
the region.
 Indian diplomacy will be under severe test to manage the extant situation in both regions.
BIMSTEC provides an alternative to SAARC due to the following reasons:
 Connectivity:
o BIMSTEC serves two purposes for India – it makes it easier for India to share a
common regional platform with its neighbours in South Asia (sans Pakistan) and
secondly, BIMSTEC also establishes a linkage between South and Southeast Asia.
o Urgency of promoting regional and sub-regional cooperation via BIMSTEC and BBIN
has to be seen in the context of China’s BRI and the compelling strategic challenge
posed by China’s muscular geo-economic and geo-political interventions in Asia,
particularly in India’s neighbourhood.
o The development of the North-eastern region, by opening up to Bangladesh and

Myanmar, is another incentive for India.
 Regional Co-operation: Regional cooperation under the ambit of SAARC has become difficult
made BIMSTEC more viable:
o Despite India’s keen interest in cooperating and strengthening intra-regional

connectivity by backing the SAARC–Motor vehicle agreement, the agreement was
stalled following Pakistan’s reluctance.
o Similarly, the SAARC satellite project that India proposed was abandoned following
objection from Pakistan in 2016
o SAARC has also faced obstacles in the area of security cooperation. A major
hindrance in this regard has been the lack of consensus on threat perceptions, since
member countries disagree on the idea of threats. Example: cross-border terrorism
emanating from Pakistan.
 Cordial Relationship:
o The member countries have generally cordial relationships, something patently

missing among the SAARC countries.
o BIMSTEC’s major strength comes from the fact that it includes two influential
regional powers: Thailand and India. This adds to the comfort of smaller
neighbours by reducing the fear of dominance by one big power.
 Economic vistas: As a trade bloc, BIMSTEC provides many opportunities.
o The region has countries with the fastest-growing economies in the world. The
combined GDP in the region is around US$2 trillion and will likely grow further.
o Trade among the BIMSTEC member countries reached six percent in just a decade,
while in SAARC, it has remained around five percent since its inception.
o Compared to SAARC, BIMSTEC has greater trade potential as well. Among the
member countries, India’s intra-BIMSTEC trade is around 3 percent of its total
trade.
o BIMSTEC regional grouping happens to have five nations that are also part of SAARC.
The fact that this region is growing at 6.5% per annum, collectively comprises of 1.5
billion people, is the drive behind India’s focus being part of BIMSTEC.
However, there are concerns which need to be addressed:

 Infrequency of the BIMSTEC summits, the highest decision-making body of the organisation.
In its 20 years of existence, the BIMSTEC summit has taken place only thrice.
 The delay in the adoption of the Free Trade Agreement (FTA), a framework that was agreed
upon in 2004, fuels doubts about BIMSTEC’s efficacy.
 BBIN Motor Vehicles Agreement [MVA] is an instrument that was conceived to transform
and facilitate trade. It has not yet been completely successful as Bhutan is worried about
security and environmental fallout of such an agreement.
 In the latest summit in 2018, it was noted that the Motor Vehicle Agreement and the
Coastal Shipping Agreement would still need more time for finalisation.
 Both Thailand and Myanmar are criticised for having ignored BIMSTEC in favour of ASEAN.
 Region lacks physical connectivity. The tri-lateral highway connecting India-Myanmar-

Thailand has been a non-starter.
 BIMSTEC has identified 14 priority sectors and has signed an FTA (2004) and a Convention
on Cooperation in Combating International Terrorism, Transnational Organized Crime and
Illicit Drug Trafficking (2009). The pace of implementation has been quite sluggish so far.
Conclusion
Both SAARC and BIMSTEC focus on regions which are geographically overlapping but this does not
make them equal alternatives. SAARC is a purely regional organization, whereas BIMSTEC is
interregional and connects both South Asia and ASEAN. Hence, SAARC and BIMSTEC complement
each other in terms of functions and goals and India has a unique opportunity to connect with
ASEAN through 3Cs (Commerce, Culture and Connectivity).
India and Iran share close historical ties from time immemorial. Given the various ups
and downs in bilateral relations between both the countries, time is therefore ripe for
a reset in the relations to achieve collective goals and prosperity. Analyse. (250 words)
Why the question:
Iran’s Foreign Minister Hossein Amir-Abdollahian’s three-day visit to India, last week, was the first
ministerial-level visit from Iran since Ebrahim Raisi assumed the Iranian presidency in August last
year.
To write about the potential reset needed in the Indo-Iranian ties.

Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by explaining historical ties between India-Iran
Body:
First, give a brief context about the evolution of Indo-Iranian ties post-independence and its various
ups and downs.
Next, write about the importance of Indo-Iranian ties for both countries to achieve collective goals
and ensure prosperity in the region
Next, suggest changes reset ties and to ensure cooperation.
Conclusion:
Introduction
India had close relations with Persia (Iran) from very ancient times. Iranian contacts with India lasted
for about two centuries (516 to 326 B.C). Greek Invasion is traced back to 327 BC when Alexander
invaded North-West India.
The sanctions imposed by the US on Iran after Tehran withdrew from the nuclear deal in 2018 may
have virtually destroyed India-Iran trade, especially India’s energy imports from Iran, but the
geopolitical logic underpinning relations between the two countries remains firm.
Body
Significance of Iran for India
 Energy security: Iran is the third largest supplier of crude to India. It has also the world’s
second-largest reserves of natural gas which could be well leveraged by India.
 Connectivity: The Chabahar port, being developed by India in Iran is strategically important
to India for a variety of reasons. o India is constructing a 560 mile long railway line linking
the Iranian port with the Hajigak in southern Afghanistan which is close to Zaranj-Delaram
Highway.
o Iran is the key link to provide connectivity to Central Asia and Europe, via the
International North South Transport Corridor (INSTC).
 Trade and investment: India decided to set up plants in sectors such as fertilizers,
petrochemicals and metallurgy in Chabahar Free Trade Zone (FTZ). However, it is currently
not progressing due to sanctions,
o This will promote India’s energy security while providing financial resources and
employment opportunities to Iran.
o Iran is a big market for India for India’s agro-products, software services,
automobiles, petrochemical products among others, here the scale could be
substantially increased.
o Crucially, Tehran has consistently offered New Delhi very favourable terms, including
non-dollar oil sales.
 Geopolitical: Iran is a major player in securing stability in the overall West Asian region,
especially with respect to India to maintain a balance between Shia-Sunni conflict and Arab-
Israel conflict.
Challenges between the nations
 Internal Political issues: The present government in Iran is under considerable pressure both
on the domestic front, in political as well economic areas. Iran has not been able to diversify
its economy which is heavily dependent on oil exports and promote entrepreneurship
causing consistent rise of unemployment, inflation and decline in per capita income. Also,
complex structure of government, tightly controlled rights to free expression are leading to
protests.
 Bilateral trade: On bilateral trade the biggest stumbling block is banking channels. The two
sides are now discussing the possibility of alternate payment mechanism, in addition to the
current channel through UCO Bank for rupee payments. Also, Indian exports to Iran have
steadily declined from $4.9 billion in 2013-14 to $2.379 billion in 2016-17, increasing the
trade deficit.
 India-relation with Israel & USA : Israel, one of the closest US allies in the region, has also
been vocal against the nuclear deal, and considers Iran its biggest security threat. India’s
relationship with the United States, and American concerns about Iran have also affected
the India-Israel relationship.
 India relation with Gulf countries: Iran’s relations with Saudi Arabia remain tense. India has
reinforced its historical ties with countries on both sides of the Gulf. This may come out to
be an issue.
 Kashmir Issue: Iran’s supreme leader Ayatollah Khamenei equated the on-going Kashmir
conflict with that of Yemen and Bahrain which has created suspicion on India.
Time for reset
 Short term course can be developing alternate mode of payment to Iran and promoting
flexibility in investment mode.
 Carrying out high level talks with US about the security and strategic concerns of India Vis a
Vis China.
 In the long term, India has to keep aligning with the other members of Iran nuclear deal to
carry out peaceful solution to end nuclear terrorism.The Iran nuclear deal is a fair deal and
US cannot unilaterally end it.
 The engagement with Iran has to be fastened and the work on various Indian projects in Iran
has to speed up. The engagement with Iran has to be moved to a partnership level g.
development INSTC.
 India also needs to develop a comprehensive energy policy to arrest its west Asian energy
dependence. o As India has learnt the art of de-hyphenation, its time it brings a consistent
and autonomous Iran policy.
Conclusion
India abstained during the recent voting on the resolution by the US and its allies to censure Iran at
the IAEA. This is in keeping with its stance of resolving the issue through dialogue. While the revival
of the nuclear deal could give a fillip to India’s economic ties with Iran, India’s interests in
continental Asia will be served well by heeding Iran’s call for developing a long-term roadmap for
bilateral relations.
Bilateral, regional and global groupings and agreements involving India and/or
affecting India’s interests.
The formation of the Indo-Pacific Economic Framework for Prosperity (IPEF) holds
good potential for India with respect to economic growth and integration but India
must be careful of the pitfalls it may pose in the future. Analyse. (250 words)
Why the question:
On May 23, the Joe Biden administration took a significant step to turn the clock back to the Obama
Presidency by launching its own version of a “pivot to Asia” through the establishment of the Indo-
Pacific Economic Framework for Prosperity (IPEF) with other partner countries — Australia, Brunei,
India, Indonesia, Japan, the Republic of Korea, Malaysia, New Zealand, the Philippines, Singapore,
Thailand, Vietnam and the United States.
To write about the potential of IPEF and pitfalls it can pose in the future for India.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by giving background regarding the formation of IPEF.
Body:
First, write about advantages IPEF can offer for India – cooperation on infrastructure and clean
energy, apart from coordination over taxation, rule enforcement and its trade prospects etc.
Next, write about various potential pitfalls for India that could arise on the account of it joining IPEF.
Conclusion:
Conclude with a way forward to address those pitfalls.
Introduction
In the presence of United States President Joe Biden in Tokyo, Indian Prime Minister
announced India’s partnership in the Indo-Pacific Economic Framework for Prosperity (IPEF), the
US-led economic initiative that has on board the four Quad partners apart from South Korea and
New Zealand and seven of the 10 Southeast Asian nations.
The IPEF will focus on trade, supply chains, clean energy, taxation and anti-corruption measures. It is
a declaration of the collective will to make the region an engine of global economic growth while
pushing for “trust, transparency and timeliness” as the three main pillars of resilient supply chains.
Body
Background: IPEF
 The move of these 13 nations to strengthen economic partnership to enhance resilience,

sustainability, economic growth, fairness, and competitiveness in the Indo-Pacific is
significant, given China’s economic and military assertiveness in the region.
 The door has been left open for more nations in the region.
 Apart from the Quad members US, India, Australia and Japan, the new grouping contains
Australia, Brunei, Indonesia, South Korea, Malaysia, New Zealand, the Philippines, Singapore,
Thailand and Vietnam.
Potential of IPEF for India
 Economy: The Indo-Pacific covers half the population of the world and more than 60% of
the global GDP and the nations who will join this framework in the future, are signing up to
work toward an economic vision that will deliver for all people.
 Trade: It intends to build high-standard, inclusive, free, and fair-trade commitments and
develop new and creative approaches in trade and technology policy that advance a broad
set of objectives that fuels economic activity and investment, promotes sustainable and
inclusive economic growth, and benefits workers and consumers.
 Supply Chains: IPEF is committed to improving transparency, diversity, security, and

sustainability in supply chains to make them more resilient and well-integrated.
o To coordinate crisis response measures; expand cooperation to better prepare for

and mitigate the effects of disruptions to better ensure business continuity; improve
logistical efficiency and support; and ensure access to key raw and processed
materials, semiconductors, critical minerals, and clean energy technology.
 Clean Energy, Decarbonization, and Infrastructure: In line with the Paris Agreement goals
and efforts to support the livelihood of peoples and workers, it plans to accelerate the
development and deployment of clean energy technologies to decarbonize our economies
and build resilience to climate impacts.
o This also involves deepening cooperation on technologies, on mobilizing finance,

including concessional finance, and on seeking ways to improve competitiveness and
enhance connectivity by supporting the development of sustainable and durable
infrastructure and by providing technical assistance.
 Tax and Anti-Corruption: It is committed to promoting fair competition by enacting and

enforcing effective and robust tax, anti-money laundering, and anti-bribery regimes in line
with existing multilateral obligations, standards, and agreements to curb tax evasion and
corruption in the Indo-Pacific region.
o This involves sharing expertise and seeking ways to support the capacity
building necessary to advance accountable and transparent systems.
Challenges and pitfalls of IPEF for India
 Issue of IPRs: One notable exclusion from this list is intellectual property rights (IPRs) that
have generally been at the heart of the U.S.’ economic engagements with its partner
countries.
o But this may soon change and IPRs could soon figure in the IPEF negotiations.
o India has historically not been aligned with USA on the issue of IPR’s as it may prove
costly to developing economies.
 Labour rights: Enforcement of labour rights using trade rules is quite contentious, having
been rejected by the members of the World Trade Organization (WTO) on several
occasions.
o India should also be wary of the considerable emphasis that is being given to
strengthening labour rights in the on-going discussions on the IPEF, both by
corporate interests and members of the Congress.
 Environment: As regards the environment, the United Nations Framework Convention on

Climate Change (UNFCCC) had cautioned that “measures taken to combat climate change,
including unilateral ones, should not constitute a means of arbitrary or unjustifiable
discrimination or a disguised restriction on international trade”.
o The IPEF could threaten abrogation of these decisions at the WTO and the UNFCCC.
 Data portability: A third set of issues, whose ramifications on the future of the digital
economy and beyond can be far reaching, are those related to standards on cross-border
data flows and data localisations.
o On this issue of data localisation, the Government of India has not yet taken a clear
position.
o In 2019, its likely preference was revealed in the Draft National e-Commerce Policy,
wherein it had backed restrictions on cross-border data flows.
o The key challenge for India is to sustain this diametrically opposite view to an
uncompromising position of the U.S. on data localisation.
 India needs to go beyond bilateral pacts and focus on broad competitiveness instead of two-
way particulars.
 On its part, the US would do well not to insist on caveats that could blunt any Indian
advantage.
 Our put-offs will have to be spelt out with clarity right at the onset of IPEF talks.
 But then, just as the White House is seized of the need to keep Indo-Pacific sea-lanes free of
a Chinese shadow, it must also be aware of how constraints on Indian export success could
work against the Quad’s geopolitical goals.
The BRICS are at a turbulent crossroads as renewed great power competition

intersects with countervailing tendencies in the emerging multipolar arena. Analyse.
What course corrections are required to ensure deeper collaboration among the
BRICS nations? (250 words)
Why the question:
Russia’s conflict with Ukraine has complicated the agenda of the two-day BRICS summit that begins
on Thursday.
To write about the issues among the BRICS countries in the present day and measures needed to
overcome them.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by giving aims and objectives of BRICS.
Body:
In the first part, write about the various issues among the BRICS member countries which has brough
them at a crossroad. Mention the current limitations of the BRICS bloc and hindrances to achieve its
potential.
Next, mention the course corrections that are required – the role of trade and connectivity that can
lead to collective economic benefits to the BRICS countries especially in the face of global economic
turmoil, political consultation, deeper engagement over key areas etc.
Conclusion:
Conclude with a way forward and diplomatic steps needed to be taken in this regard.
Introduction
Russia’s conflict with Ukraine has complicated the agenda of the two-day BRICS summit that begins
on Thursday. The focus of the Beijing-hosted virtual summit will be centred on the conflict and the
association’s future. The leaders of BRICS countries — Brazil, Russia, India, China and South Africa —
will navigate the crucial dilemma of evolving a common stance on the Russian-Ukraine conflict.
Body
BRICS at turbulent crossroads
 Varied Political Structures and values: While Brazil, India and South Africa are democratic,
China and Russia are not.
o Structure of financial systems, levels of income, education, inequality, health

challenges also differ substantially within BRICS which makes it hard for them to
speak with a unified voice and to coordinate action.
 Different geopolitical agenda: The Brasilia declaration notes shared perceptions on global
economic and financial governance. However, their interpretation by each country depends
on its national interest in specific circumstances.
o g. on expansion of the UN Security Council, BRICS exposed its disunity yet again by
sticking to the formulation that refuses to go beyond China and Russia supporting
the “aspiration” of Brazil, India and South Africa “to play a greater role in the UN”.
o Also the China-Pak axis will always be a hindrance for India to fully cooperate with
China. China’s rejection of NSG membership to India is an example.
 Diverging long-term economic goals of member countries: Though the five nations have
greatly increased their combined economic heft since the turn of the century, the share is
imbalanced.g. Brazil, Russia and South Africa’s shares of global output have
actually shrunk since 2000.
o Despite their combined population accounting for 40% of humanity, intra-BRICS

trade still makes up just 15% of world trade.
o Brazil also took India to WTO dispute resolution wrt sugar production.
 Ukraine crisis with Russia: The primary agenda of BRICS was rebalancing an international
system dominated by the West.
o However, the Ukraine crisis could act as a distraction from that primary agenda.
o The geopolitical considerations of its members can come in the way of attaining the
grouping’s original goal.
Overcoming the problems

 Create institutional arrangement: Challenging the economic might of the West in the near
future might be close to impossible. Despite the group comprising China, India and Russia,
intra-BRICS trade accounts for less than 20 per cent of global trade.
o BRICS is far from having its own payment mechanisms, international messaging
systems or cards.
o The Ukraine crisis should drive home the need to create institutional arrangements
that can cushion against similar financial turbulence in the future.
 Recalibrate structure and expand: BRICS requires a recalibration of its structure and agenda.
Creating financial mechanisms and technological institutions could turn BRICS into a G20 for
developing nations.
o It’s time to revisit the idea of expanding the grouping by inviting new members.
o This could also impart new vigour to the BRICS’s developmental goals.
 Economic cooperation between India and China: Economic cooperation between India and
China is vital for the success of any future BRICS endeavour. The border conflict has created
a mistrust of China in India.
 In the current situation, New Delhi is unlikely to take an anti-West stance.
 India, unlike China, is neither a UN Security Council member nor does it have major sticking
points with the West.At the same time, India is not a part of the Western camp.
 That does open up the possibility of New Delhi taking a more proactive position in
BRICS.The two powers need to come together for the sake of global governance reform.
Conclusion
The Ukraine crisis could be an occasion for the leaders of BRICS nations to commit themselves to the
original goal of the bloc. It’s an opportunity they shouldn’t let go of. A significant amount of
convergence on economic issues is required for BRICS to work as a strong multilateral body that will
have a significant effect on global governance.
Value Addition
Significance of BRICS
 Economically, militarily, technologically, socially and culturally, BRICS nations represent a

powerful bloc.
 40 per cent of the world’s population: They have an estimated combined population of 3.23
billion people, which is over 40 per cent of the world’s population.
 25 per cent of global GDP: They account for over more than a quarter of the world’s land
area over three continents, and for more than 25 per cent of the global GDP.
 Two fastest growing large economies: The grouping comprises two of the fastest-growing
nations, India and China.
 It has proved its mettle to an extent by establishing the BRICS New Development Bank
(NDB) and the Contingency Reserve Arrangement (CRA).
The Indo-Pacific construct has significantly enhanced the strategic salience of ASEAN.
India’s Indo-Pacific strategy works in tandem with its Act East Policy. Examine. (250
words)
Reference: Indian Express ,Insights on India
Why the question:
The recent India-Asean Foreign Ministers’ Meeting in New Delhi appeared on the geopolitical scene
almost against the trend of events, with the high-profile focus on Europe at one end and on the Quad
at the other. Yet, it was one of the most welcome events.
To understand the role of strategic partnership with ASEAN and its mutual benefits for both sides and
its role in India’s Indo-Pacific strategy.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by mentioning the historic engagement of India-ASEAN relationship.
Body:
First, write about India’s of strategic partnership with ASEAN – bring out the importance of
geographical proximity of the ASEAN countries and its strategic, security and economic implications
to India. Also mention about the sociocultural dynamics, mobilisation of group level funds and
promotion of domestic infrastructure projects based on few examples.
Next, write about the linkages between India’s Indo-Pacific strategy and Act East Policy.
Conclusion:
Conclude by stating that a good relation with ASEAN nations is crucial for India, in order for India to
look beyond its neighbours, in its global diplomatic journey.
Introduction
Under the AEP, the India-Japan strategic partnership has been lifted to an entirely new level,
underscoring the importance of Indo- Pacific cooperation. India believes in an Indo-Pacific that is
free, open and inclusive, and one that is founded upon a cooperative and collaborative rules-based
order. ASEAN’s centrality remains the abiding contemporary characteristic of the Indo-Pacific at the
regional level.
India has placed the Indo-Pacific at the heart of its engagement with the countries of south,
southeast and east Asia to counter China.
Body
India’s of strategic partnership with ASEAN
 India's relationship with ASEAN is a key pillar of her foreign policy and the foundation of Act
East Policy. India and ASEAN already have 25 years of Dialogue Partnership, 15 years of
Summit Level interaction and 5 years of Strategic Partnership with ASEAN.
 Economic Cooperation: ASEAN is India's fourth largest trading partner.India's trade with
ASEAN stands at approx. 10.6% of India's overall trade.
 India's export to ASEAN stands at 11.28% of our total exports. The ASEAN-India Free
Trade Area has been completed.
 ASEAN India-Business Council (AIBC) was set up in 2003 to bring key private sector
players from India and the ASEAN countries on a single platform.
 Socio-Cultural Cooperation: Programmes to boost People-to-People Interaction with ASEAN,

such as inviting ASEAN students to India, Special Training Course for ASEAN diplomats,
Exchange of Parliamentarians, etc.
 Delhi Declaration: To identify Cooperation in the Maritime Domain as the key area of
cooperation under the ASEAN-India strategic partnership.
 Delhi Dialogue: Annual Track 1.5 event for discussing politico-security and economic issues
between ASEAN and India.
 ASEAN-India Centre (AIC): To undertake policy research, advocacy and networking activities
with organizations and think-tanks in India and ASEAN.
Linkages between India’s Indo-Pacific strategy and Act East Policy
 Political Security Cooperation: India places ASEAN at the centre of its Indo-Pacific vision of
Security and Growth for All in the Region.
 Act East consequently represents the securitization of India’s eastward engagement, reflects
a wider scope that encompasses the Indo-Pacific region, and heralds a greater urgency.
 It is meant to preserve a favourable balance of power by ensuring a free, open, and

inclusive Indo-Pacific.
 The Indo-Pacific region is also highly heterogeneous in terms of economic size and level of
development.
 There are significant differences in security establishments and resources.
 More than tariff barriers, the non-tariff measures (NTMs) act as a major impediment
to trade in this region.
 Strengthening of India’s relationship with ASEAN also implies strengthening of the

foundation of Indo-Pacific.
 Indo-pacific was inherently a construct to counter Chinese aggression in the region, aided
by USA and other nations. Without ASEAN, it will fall short of its objectives as many ASEAN
nations have disputes with China regarding South China sea and disputed islands.
 A greater cooperation with ASEAN under Act East and Indo-pacific can lead to rebalancing of
relations in Asia.
Challenges remain
 The Quad does not inspire confidence because of its long history of differences and the slow
development of its security orientation.
 Perhaps that was also one of the reasons for the creation of AUKUS, a kind of
supplementary arrangement to inspire more confidence and message the US intent of
relying on a plethora of relationships that it enjoys.
 Asean is unable to understand the nature of the relationship between India and China
which brings close economic cooperation between the two giants and yet a massive trust
deficit.
 Sino-Indian relations remain a bugbear for Asean.
 Except for the Singapore think tanks which find a fair presence of Indian
intelligentsia, the other Asean nations do not have the benefit of listening to and
constantly appreciating the Indian standpoint on the relationship between India and
China.
 Asean is not convinced by India’s exit from the Regional Comprehensive Economic
Partnership (RCEP) after eight long years of negotiation.
 India was always convinced that its interests were not served because it would get
swamped by Chinese exports and upset the already tenuous trade deficit.
Conclusion
ASEAN centrality would be a major driving force for speeding up cooperation within the Indo-Pacific.
India will continue to play a key role in stabilising and fostering co-operation in the region. The Indo-
Pacific would not only strengthen economic relations, but would, also enhance regional capacities
while dealing with the region’s complex security challenges.
Effect of policies and politics of developed and developing countries on India’s

interests, Indian Diaspora.
Traditionally dominated by the trade, energy and Diaspora ties, the India-UAE
relationship has been growing substantially in the security arena. Analyse. (250 words)
Why the question:
Prime Minister Narendra Modi’s visit to the UAE on June 28 was his fourth, having visited the country
earlier in August 2015, in February 2018 and again in August 2019.
To write about the growing India-UAE relations in aspects of trade, energy, diaspora as well as
security.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by giving context of growing India-UAE relations in the past.
Body:
In the first part, in brief, giving an account of tries between India-U.A.E till recent times. (You can
make use of a flow chart for better presentation).
Next, describe the trade relations – FTA– how it will benefit both India and U.A.E in terms of trade,
investments, technology, infrastructure, diaspora and cultural contacts etc.
Next, write about the relations in relation with energy and diaspora.
Next, write about the growing relations in terms of security.
Conclusion:
Conclude with a way forward for realisation of a long and stable partnership.
Introduction
UAE is India’s closest partner in the Arab world and fortunately, there is enough resilience in
bilateral ties to withstand the recent convulsions. The visit assumes significance in the backdrop of
the recent controversy generated by the offensive comments against the Prophet. While the UAE
had expressed concern over the comments, it did not summon the Indian envoy and welcomed the
action against the accused.
Body
India-UAE relations: Growth in strategic aspect and security
 Energy Security: UAE is the 5th largest import source and accounts for about 6% of our
total crude imports. Both signed agreements related to energy security on acquisition of
stakes in Lower Zakum oil and gas field.
 Investment: The UAE government has committed USD 75 billion towards developing Indian
infrastructure. The NIIF entered into an agreement with a Dubai based firm for investment
up to USD 3 billion.
 Important trading Partner: Bilateral trade with UAE stood at around USD 59 billion last year.
 Indian Community: More than 2.5 million Indians live in the UAE, which is among the
largest number of expatriates anywhere in the world, repatriating $13.6 billion a year to
India.
 Shared Security Concern: The two countries have a common interest in ensuing maritime
security in the Indian Ocean and the Gulf region.
 Further, given the current state of flux in West Asia, India sees the UAE as an
important partner to maintain peace and stability in the region.
 In this background India looks to enhance security cooperation with the Gulf
countries including the UAE to counter terrorist threats and combat online
radicalization.
 Defense: Défense exercises are increasingly undertaken. For example, ‘Desert Eagle II’, a
ten-day air combat exercise, was held in May-June 2016 between the air forces of India and
UAE. Also, both elevated their relationship to Comprehensive Strategic Partnership
agreement and have move beyond just buyer-seller relationship.
 Maritime security: India approved the bilateral pact on maritime education and training
and a MoU to facilitate and promote maritime transport, simplification of customs and
facilitation of use of existing installations for the disposal of waste.
Challenges
 Slow implementation process: As far as investments are concerned, the systemic problem
faced due to slow implementation of various projects from Indian side is a major obstacle.
 Lack of commercial clarity in UAE: Indian companies operating in the UAE also face
problems due to lack of clarity in many aspects of commercial regulations, labour laws and
lack of transparency on part of Emirati businesses.
 Decrease in opportunities for Indian workers: There is also a need to smoothen problems
faced by Indian migrants due to cumbersome and strict regulations that favour the Emirati
employers and at times leads to serious problems for Indian workers, especially unskilled
workers.
Conclusion
The growing engagements between India and the UAE has to be seen within the broader contexts of
UAE’s policy of engaging with Asia to improve economic prospects and India’s search for foreign
investments to expedite economic growth and address the threat of extremism and terrorism.
Medical tourism can be an important area where India can attract UAE given India’s high quality man
power in medical sector and improving medical infrastructure in the country.
There are further untapped potentials in the arena of renewable energy. The cost for production
and transmission of solar energy in the UAE are a fraction to that of India and this is a priority area
for the UAE government.
INSIGHTSIAS

GS-III
JUNE 2022
are NOT synopsis too if we go by definition of the term. What we are providing
is content that both meets demand of the question and at the same time gives you
Table of Contents
Indian Economy and issues relating to planning, mobilization of resources, growth, development and
employment. ..................................................................................................................................... 7
What are the objectives of National Asset Reconstruction Company Limited (NARCL)? Discuss the
factors that are needed to ensure that NARCL will serve as effective and efficient bad bank. (250
words) ........................................................................................................................................... 7
As the economy recovers from the impact of the pandemic, a coordinated policy response – fiscal,
monetary, trade and industry – will be required for balancing the multiple macroeconomic policy
objectives and achieve even growth. Analyse. (250 words) ............................................................ 9
What is stagflation? What are the factors that lead stagflation? How can the Indian economy
avoid it amidst rising inflationary pressures? Discuss. .................................................................. 11
Does a ban on agricultural exports help in reducing inflation and achieving food security? State
your opinion in light of the recent ban on wheat exports and restrictions on sugar exports. (250
words) ......................................................................................................................................... 13
Analyse the implications of high rates of unemployment on the Economy. Suggest measures to
create long-term and sustainable employment amidst global volatility. (250 words)................... 15
Inflation further exacerbates inequalities and affects poor the most. Discuss the policy measures
that are needed to ensure that inequalities do not deepen amidst rising inflation. (250 words) ... 17
While the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code (IBC) has successfully chartered a new era in the
history of bankruptcy resolution in India, it needs reform in order to speed up resolution and
recovery from insolvency firms. Analyse. (250 words).................................................................. 23

What is depreciation of Indian rupee? Examine the factors behind its recent depreciation and its
impact on the economy in general. (250 words) .......................................................................... 26
What is Foreign Portfolio Investment (FPI)? Throw light on FPI regime as a route for foreign
investment in India. Examine the impact of FPI withdrawal on the Indian economy. (250 words) 28
Critically examine the performance of the present goods and services tax (GST) regime in the first
five years since its inception and suggest possible reforms. (250 words) ...................................... 31
Inclusive growth and issues arising from it. ...................................................................................... 34
Though microfinance is a very effective tool in providing access to capital for individuals who are
financially underserved. The unauthorised digital lending is bane that must be addressed on an
urgent basis. Analyse. (250 words)............................................................................................... 34
With the emergence of technology-enabled gig work platforms, gig economy will be a major
building block in inclusively achieving the $5 trillion economy goal, bridging the income and
unemployment gap. Critically Analyse. (250 words) ..................................................................... 38
Can the complete privatization of state-owned banks be the panacea to all the aliments that affect
the public sector banks (PSBs)? Critically analyse. (250 words) .................................................... 40
Effects of liberalization on the economy, changes in industrial policy and their effects on industrial
growth. ........................................................................................................................................... 42
India is a significant player in the global medicines industry. In addition, the country holds a large
number of scientists and engineers that can propel the sector forward to even greater heights.
Analyse. (250 words) ................................................................................................................... 42
Government Budgeting. .................................................................................................................. 45
What is twin deficit? Examine as to how India can avoid the twin deficit problem amidst rising
commodity prices and subsidy burden. (250 words) .................................................................... 45
Major crops cropping patterns in various parts of the country, different types of irrigation and
irrigation systems storage, transport and marketing of agricultural produce and issues and related
constraints; e-technology in the aid of farmers ................................................................................ 47
What is Plasticulture? Do you think its environmental costs outweigh its economic benefits?
Critically comment. (250 words) ................................................................................................. 47
National Mission on Edible Oils and Oil Palm (NMEO-OP) may be a step towards “atmanirbharta”
in palm oil production but its fraught with economic and ecological concerns which need to be
addressed. Analyse. (250 words) ................................................................................................. 50
Issues related to direct and indirect farm subsidies and minimum support prices; Public Distribution
System- objectives, functioning, limitations, revamping; issues of buffer stocks and food security;
Technology missions; economics of animal-rearing.......................................................................... 54
Agriculture is extremely vulnerable to climate change. The accelerating pace of climate change,
combined with global population and income growth, threatens food security everywhere.
Discuss. (250 words) .................................................................................................................... 54
Minimum support prices (MSP) are meant to function as a safety net. Yet, they are unable to
become the means of farmer’s income security as intended. Analyse. (250 words) ..................... 56
Soil Security and Food and Nutrition Security are interconnected. Soil degradation drives food
insecurity and sustainable interventions are urgently needed in this regard. Analyse. (250 words)
.................................................................................................................................................... 59
Food processing and related industries in India- scope and significance, location, upstream and
downstream requirements, supply chain management. .................................................................. 62
Food processing industry in India is poised for huge growth, increasing its contribution to world
food trade every year. It has emerged as a high-growth and high-profit sector due to its immense
potential for value addition. Elaborate. (250 words) .................................................................... 62
Infrastructure: Energy, Ports, Roads, Airports, Railways etc. ............................................................ 65
Nuclear energy is proven, scalable and reliable, and its expanded use will be essential for many
countries to achieve their decarbonization goals. Do you think its benefits outweigh the risks
posed by it? Comment. (250 words) ............................................................................................ 65
Investment models. ......................................................................................................................... 67
Infrastructure is critically linked to growth and economic performance. Critically analyse the role
of National Monetisation Pipeline (NMP) as a pioneering initiative of value creation in
Infrastructure. (250 words) .......................................................................................................... 67
Science and Technology- developments and their applications and effects in everyday life;
Achievements of Indians in science & technology; indigenization of technology and developing new
technology. ..................................................................................................................................... 69
What is assistive technology? Discuss its role in lowering barriers faced by People with disabilities.
What steps are required to ensure that this technology is available to the masses with minimal
cost? (250 words) ....................................................................................................................... 69
What is crypto lending? How does crypto lending further complicate the crypto currency
paradigm? Discuss the measures that are needed to overcome the complications. (250 words) .. 71
Despite significant scientific advances made by Artificial intelligence (AI), there are concerns
associated with it which needs immediate addressing. Analyse. (250 words) ............................... 73
Awareness in the fields of IT, Space, Computers, robotics, nano-technology, bio-technology and
issues relating to intellectual property rights. .................................................................................. 76
What are the different types of Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs)? Examine the various issues in
administration of IPRs in India and suggest reforms to have a thriving IPR regime in the country.
(250 words) ................................................................................................................................. 76
In what ways can the science, innovation, and research & development (SIRD) be given an impetus
in the country? Discuss the role that ‘petty patents’ can play in this regard. (250 words) ........... 80
In order to make Digital India project inclusive, the need of the hour is to unlock the full potential
of India’s optical fibre industry, while achieving atmanirbharta in its 5G journey. Discuss. (250
words) ......................................................................................................................................... 82
Conservation, environmental pollution and degradation, environmental impact assessment .......... 84
The sequestration of atmospheric carbon dioxide as organic carbon in the soil attracts attention as
an alternate way to help stem the rate of greenhouse gas growth and associated changes in our
climate. Elaborate. (250 words) ................................................................................................... 84
Biomass being a product of natural resources viz. land, water, air and sun’s energy, gives much
hope as an alternative, reliable and renewable source of energy. Discuss. (250 words) ............... 86
As the human activities increased and development took place on a large scale, the wildlife and
the ecosystems were affected by it. Analyse. Do you think that environmental objectives should
be secondary to developmental objectives? (250 words) ............................................................ 88
Evaluate India’s response to the climate change crisis. Has India has prioritised economic growth
over environmental sustainability? (250 words)........................................................................... 90
How is air pollution measured and tracked in India? What are the recent changes introduced to air
pollution measurement? (250 words) ......................................................................................... 93
What are microplastics? What are the threats posed by it? Discuss the steps that are needed to
overcome these treats. (250 words) ............................................................................................ 95
What is single-use plastic and what are the concerns associated with it? How can it be successfully
phased out in the country? (250 words) ...................................................................................... 98
Wetlands perform a wide range of biodiversity functions especially with respect to naturally
protecting surrounding areas from flooding. Elucidate. (250 words) .......................................... 100
The process of burning farm residue is one of the major causes of air pollution in parts of north
India, deteriorating the air quality. Moreover, the inability to convert stubble as fodder leads to
economic losses as well. Examine. (250 words) .......................................................................... 103
What are Payments for Ecosystem Services (PES)? Evaluate the feasibility of PES projects in India
for conserving and sustainable use of bio-diversity. (250 words)................................................ 106
Security challenges and their management in border areas – linkages of organized crime with
terrorism. ...................................................................................................................................... 107
What are the various measures taken by government to fight drug menace in the country? How
can the country’s fight against illicit drugs be made more effective? (250 words) ...................... 107
Various Security forces and agencies and their mandate. .............................................................. 112
Military exercises establish India’s military capabilities and is also a great way of securing allies,
which will help in times of need. Analyse. (250 words) .............................................................. 112
Describe the features of Agnipath scheme for recruiting soldiers. Evaluate the various benefits and
risks associated with the scheme. (250 words)........................................................................... 114
Challenges to internal security through communication networks, role of media and social
networking sites in internal security challenges, basics of cyber security; money-laundering and its
prevention..................................................................................................................................... 116
What is ‘critical information infrastructure’? There is a need for a more integrated and strategic
approach to securing critical information infrastructure, as they are so crucial to the economic,
social and political wellbeing of the country. Examine. (250 words) ........................................... 116
Despite multiple efforts to end the menace of black money, it has remained a ‘unsolvable
problem’ for India. How does black money impact the country? Discuss the measures that are
needed to put an end to it. (250 words) ..................................................................................... 119
What is a spyware? What are the problems caused by spywares? Suggest various precautions that
are needed to prevent malicious attacks by spywares. (250 words) ........................................... 121


Indian Economy and issues relating to planning, mobilization of resources,

growth, development and employment.
What are the objectives of National Asset Reconstruction Company Limited (NARCL)?
Discuss the factors that are needed to ensure that NARCL will serve as effective and
efficient bad bank. (250 words)
Why the question:
The National Assets Reconstruction Company Ltd (NARCL), the government-backed bad bank, on
Tuesday said it has appointed former State Bank of India (SBI) official Natarajan Sundar as its
managing director and chief executive.
To discuss the need & nature of Asset Reconstruction Company and factors that will make it effective.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by mentioning the aims and objectives of NARCL.
Body:
First, describe the structuring of the NARCL and also mention its mandate that makes it a bad bank.
Next, highlight the impact of bad debts being spread over various financial institutions
Next, suggest need of right team with the right incentive structure and an innovative approach in
handling assets for an effective performance of NARC.
Conclusion:
Conclude by saying that global best practices coupled with local realities and needs, must be
emulated for an effective resolution of bad debts.
Introduction
The Reserve Bank of India on October 4, 2021 gave licence to the Rs 6,000 crore National Asset
Reconstruction Company Ltd (NARCL), a move that will help kickstart operations of the bad bank. K
V Kamath Committee also suggested setting up Bad bank to revive sectors such as Trade, Textile,
NBFCs, Steel and construction, etc.
The National Assets Reconstruction Company Ltd (NARCL), the government-backed bad bank, has
appointed former State Bank of India (SBI) official Natarajan Sundar as its managing director and
chief executive.
Body
Objectives of NARCL
 NARCL has been incorporated under the Companies Act and has applied to Reserve Bank of
India for license as an Asset Reconstruction Company (ARC).
 NARCL has been set up by banks to aggregate and consolidate stressed assets for their
subsequent resolution.

 NARCL will acquire fully provisioned stressed assets by making an offer to the lead bank in a
consortium of lenders; once the offer is accepted, NARCL will engage with India Debt
Resolution Company Ltd. (IDRCL) for management and resolution of the stressed assets.
 In IDRCL, private entities will maintain 51 percent ownership, with the government holding
the rest.
Factors needed for Effective functioning of NARCL
 While there are 28 ARCs in the private sector, there was a need for government-backed
receipts for big ticket resolutions.
 The government guarantee for the proposed security receipts is a positive stepping stone
for unlocking stressed assets’ value.
 The upfront cash payment by the NARCL to banks will immediately be accretive for the
profitability and capital of the banks, however the ability of the NARCL to resolve these
assets in a time-bound manner will be critical for future provision writeback by banks
 The whole idea is to ensure that these assets for which this whole set-up is being created,
and the value that is locked in the assets is realised and comes back to the banks; they use
it as a growth capital and the banking system becomes more robust
 From the perspective of a commercial bank saddled with high NPA levels, it will help.
o That’s because such a bank will get rid of all its toxic assets, which were eating up its
profits, in one quick move.
o When the recovery money is paid back, it will further improve the bank’s position.
o Meanwhile, it can start lending again.
 From the perspective of the government and the taxpayer, the situation is a little more
muddled.
o After all, whether it is recapitalising PSBs laden with bad loans or giving guarantees
for security receipts, the money is coming from the taxpayers’ pocket.
o While recapitalisation and such guarantees are often designated as “reforms”, they
are band aids at best.
o The only sustainable solution is to improve the lending operation in PSBs.
 Lastly, the plan of bailing out commercial banks will collapse if the bad bank is unable to sell
such impaired assets in the market.
Conclusion
While the objective of NARCL is a novel one, the success lies in its implementation and downstream
reforms in banks in lending. The NARCL will have to deliver on the recovery front or risk being a
dump yard. Dump yards do not facilitate redistribution of capital in an economy and therefore have
a cost.
Value addition
About National Asset Reconstruction Company Ltd (NARCL)

 It will be a five-year guarantee for the National Asset Reconstruction Company Limited
(NARCL)-issued security receipts to banks.
 Under the proposed mechanism, the NARCL will acquire assets by making an offer to the
lead bank.
 Private sector asset reconstruction (ARCs) firms may also be allowed to outbid the NARCL.
 Separately, public and private lenders will combine forces to set up an India Debt Resolution
Company (IDRC) that will manage these assets and try to raise their value for final
resolution.
 A 15% cash payment would be made to the banks based on some valuation and the rest will
be given as security receipts.
 Once the NARCL and the IDRC have finally resolved the asset, the balance 85% held as
security receipts would be given to the banks.
 If the bad bank is unable to sell the bad loan, or has to sell it at a loss, then the government
guarantee will be invoked and the difference between what the commercial bank was
supposed to get and what the bad bank was able to raise will be paid from the Rs 30,600
crore that has been provided by the government
As the economy recovers from the impact of the pandemic, a coordinated policy
response – fiscal, monetary, trade and industry – will be required for balancing the
multiple macroeconomic policy objectives and achieve even growth. Analyse. (250
words)
Why the question:
At 8.7 per cent, the National Statistical Office’s latest estimate for GDP growth in 2021-22, while
marginally lower than the 8.95 per cent projected in late February, is quite good given the headwinds
the economy faced.
To write about the policy response to ensure even growth in all sectors in post pandemic recovery.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by giving context and cite statistic to substantiate the same.
Body:
First, write in detail about the various issues that led to uneven growth in the post pandemic
recovery– inflation, uneven focus, lack of coordination, disproportionate impact of pandemic on
various sectors etc.
Next, write about the coordinated policy response that is needed in order to overcome the same.
Mention the various components of fiscal, monetary, trade and industry which should be part of the
response.
Conclusion:
Introduction

Pandemic shattered the upward growth of Indian economy, even though economic slow-down had
seeped in even before covid-19 hit the world. At 8.7 per cent, the National Statistical Office’s latest
estimate for GDP growth in 2021-22, while marginally lower than the 8.95 per cent projected in late
February, is quite good given the headwinds the economy faced. The slower growth in 2021-22 was
due to a downward revision of the estimates in the first two quarters of the year. However, these
numbers need to be interpreted carefully, given the base effects of a 6.6 per cent contraction in
2020-21
Body
Coordinated policy response is the need of the hour

 Managing the Elevated Inflation Levels: India is at the risk of inflation; it is at an elevated
level which is why the RBI has been conservative.
o India has to walk on a very fine line balancing the growth imperatives and inflation
o The RBI has also adopted a policy to support economic growth.
o It has increased the limit of ways and means advances to the states and has allowed
them to borrow more amounts from the RBI.
 Role of Government Policies: The growth projection also depends upon policies adopted by
the government, especially the fiscal policy and monetary policies.
o So far India has proved to adopt such policies more wisely as compared to other
countries.
o India implemented massive economic reforms in the year 2020 (Atmanirbhar

Abhiyan) when the pandemic was at its peak.
o Also, India has freed up a lot of sectors from the over regulation by the
government interference which will be fruitful in better and faster economic
growth.
 Address the issues facing agricultural sector: It will have a direct impact on the welfare of
nearly half the country’s workforce, increase in domestic demand, reduce the rural-urban
earnings gap, migration, informality and unemployment, and therefore lead to better
working conditions in the cities and a fall in commodity prices and reduced inflationary
pressures.
 Targeted Programmes for Employment Generation: Programmes like Mahatma Gandhi

National Rural Employment Guarantee Scheme must be reformed to ensure that rural
unemployed find adequate employment on a more sustainable basis and there are
increased opportunities for women and other socially disadvantaged groups.
 Education and Skill Development: Government must ensure that the education, training
and skill development system is aligned with the changing requirements of the economy.
o It includes measures to integrate vocational education with formal education (NEP

2020), ensure greater participation of the private sector in skill development and
wider use of the apprenticeship programmes by all enterprises.
Way forward

 The government must spend where necessary at this time to alleviate the pain in the most
troubled areas of the economy.
 Announcing a credible target for the country’s consolidated debt over the next five years
coupled with the setting up of an independent fiscal council to put forward on the quality of
the budget would be very useful steps.
 Budgetary resources can be expanded through asset sales, including parts of government
enterprises and surplus government land.
Conclusion
India as the fifth largest economy in the world has to focus on growth recovery that is more
sustainable and by just drawing satisfaction from just the growth numbers would not do much. India
is slowly but surely on the path to economic recovery and investment is the way to sustain this
growth momentum.
What is stagflation? What are the factors that lead stagflation? How can the Indian
economy avoid it amidst rising inflationary pressures? Discuss.
Reference: Live Mint , The Hindu
Why the question:
Three monetary policy statements in as many months. And the first quarter of the current financial
year is not yet over. This sort of exemplifies the fraught times we live on. But the latest statement
released by the Reserve Bank of India (RBI) on Wednesday is markedly different from its preceding
two documents. It includes for the first time the dreaded “S” word: stagflation.
To write about stagflation, factors that lead to it and measures needed to avoid it.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by defining stagflation.
Body:
First, write about the factors that can lead stagflation in the economy and the impact of the
stagflation.
Next, write about the measures that are needed to ensure India does not witness stagflation.
Conclusion:
Introduction
Stagflation, as defined by Princeton economist Alan S. Blinder, is “the simultaneous occurrence of

economic stagnation and comparatively high rates of inflation”. Stagflation is an economic condition
that’s caused by a combination of slow economic growth, high unemployment, and rising prices. It is
said to happen when an economy faces stagnant growth as well as persistently high inflation.
Body
Background

 While economic growth prospects remain wobbly, India has been witnessing a hardening
inflationary environment over the past few months.
 Producer prices, reflected in the wholesale price index growth, have been rising by double-
digits for some months now.
 This is now feeding into end-user prices, with the consumer price index rising by 7.8% in
April 2022.
 The latest policy statement of RBI remains “focused on withdrawal of accommodation to

ensure that inflation remains within the target going forward, while supporting growth”.
Factors that lead to stagflation
 The two root causes of stagflation economists generally agree upon are supply shocks and
fiscal and monetary policies.
 A supply shock is anything that reduces the economy’s capacity to produce goods and
services at given prices. For example, throughout the pandemic, there have been supply
shocks in:
o Labor, with fewer people working
o Goods, for example, semiconductor shortages, which started even before the
pandemic
o Services, as people postponed elective surgeries and other health-care procedures
 The instability and uncertainty in the global economy that exacerbates the apprehensions of
stagflation.
 Recent happenings
 The outbreak of Covid-19 and lockdowns followed by subsequent fiscal and Monetary
Measures taken to address the downturn, including substantial increases in liquidity in most
of the advanced economies, fuelled a sharp upsurge in inflation.
 The ongoing war in Ukraine following Russia’s invasion and the consequent Western
sanctions on Moscow have caused a fresh and as yet hard-to-quantify ‘supply shock’.
Measures needed to tackle stagflation
 A strong monetary policy support for a sustained and inclusive recovery is the need of the
hour.
 The focus should be to normalise the prudential policies and the strengthen the insolvency
frameworks and restructure mechanisms, including for the overhang of public and private
debt.
 There is a need to increase aggregate supply through supply-side policies, for example,
privatisation and deregulation to increase efficiency and reduce costs of production.
 Private sector must be incentivised to invest more and to increase supply through tax
measures.

 Higher liquidity and disposable income, and increased employment can pull us out of the
quagmire.
 reduction and reform of direct individual and corporate taxes, and indirect taxes.
 Frictions in the labour market should be reduced by reducing the time and cost involved in
obtaining information about employment opportunities.
 Barriers which either limit entry into a profession or maintain wages at artificially high rates
should be removed.
 The government needs to hold granular conversations with the private sector.
 A skills and industrial policy which can make full use of an abundant pool of reasonably
priced labour
Conclusion
There is a need to control Stagflation at the earliest by arresting inflation through policy and
structural means. Meanwhile, the government should engage all stakeholders to address the supply-
side issues, a calming down of food prices will help the government to prevent stagflation in the
economy.
Value addition
Stagflation:
 Stagflation is a portmanteau of stagnant growth and rising inflation.
 Typically, inflation rises when the economy is growing fast.
 That’s because people are earning more and more money and are capable of paying higher
prices for the same quantity of goods.
 When the economy stalls, inflation tends to dip as well – again because there is less money
now chasing the same quantity of goods.
 Stagflation is said to happen when an economy faces stagnant growth as well as persistently
high inflation.
 That’s because with stalled economic growth, unemployment tends to rise and existing
incomes do not rise fast enough and yet, people have to contend with rising inflation.
 So people find themselves pressurised from both sides as their purchasing power is reduced.
Does a ban on agricultural exports help in reducing inflation and achieving food
security? State your opinion in light of the recent ban on wheat exports and
restrictions on sugar exports. (250 words)
Why the question:
Over the last month, the government has banned the export of wheat and imposed quantitative
restrictions on outbound sugar shipments.
To write about the implications of ban on certain agricultural exports by the government.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Body:
In the first part, bring out the factors as to why the ban was announced.
Next, write about the implications of the ban – on food security, on farmers, wheat prices, exports,
procurement etc.
Conclusion:
Conclude with a balanced opinion on the wheat export ban by India.
Introduction
The Government has banned wheat exports with effect from May 13, with some minor exceptions
for those who have irrevocable letters of credit or where the governments of importing countries
request the Indian government for food security purpose. The rationale was that wheat stocks were
depleting as well as high food inflation. The move is said to help the poor man battle food inflation.
Body
Reasons for ban on wheat exports from India
 Government stock depletion: The anticipated production levels were not fulfilled and the
fear of low wheat stocks due to less procurement paved way for this decision.
 Crop damage due to heat wave: The fall has been caused due to low wheat production after
high temperatures in March resulted in the shrivelling of wheat grains, thus impacting the
quantity of the crop.
 Keeping domestic prices in check: India’s ban on wheat exports is not a crisis-driven
reaction but top keep food inflation in check as wheat prices were soaring and poor people
were affected badly.
o The move to ban the export of wheat was prompted by rising inflation, (WPI) in
India has moved up from26 per cent at the start of 2022 to 14.55 now.
o Retail inflation, too, hit an eight-year high of 7.79 per cent in April, driven by rising
food and fuel prices.
 Food security of neighbours: This move is being done to manage overall food security of the
country and to need the support of the neighbouring and vulnerable nations.
Implications of the ban
 Farmers exports hindered: India’s sudden decision to ban wheat exports with immediate
effect citing food security may prove costly for its farmers. Many of them have held back
their crop in the hopes of getting higher prices in the coming weeks.
o There was an expectation of a MEP (minimum export price below which shipments
cannot happen) or a tariff and not a complete ban on private export. This may hurt

farmers who have stocked their wheat crop and were hoping to reap gains from
higher prices.
 Falling prices and farmer income impacted: The impact of this decision is already being seen
in wheat mandis (wholesale markets), which have seen a fall of Rs 50-100 per quintal on
average since the morning of May 14, 2022.
o Not all wheat gets procured from the government at MSP and hence most farmers
who sell in open market are affected badly.
o Farmers may now be forced to sell to government procurement agencies at MSP,

much below than what they were getting currently.
 Lost opportunity to capture global market: India had earlier hoped to export 10 million
tonnes of wheat and capture the global market made available after the Russian invasion of
Ukraine.
o It had forecast a record output of 111 million tonnes.
o The sudden decision comes on the heels of an expected sharp fall in government
wheat stocks.
Conclusion
With domestic cereal price inflation still on the rise, the current export ban could also be long
lasting, if global food prices remain elevated. Earlier, India had banned wheat exports in February
2007 and maintained a status quo for over four years before lifting it in September 2011, due to
record output and to free up storage space.
If India’s wheat ban leads to higher price of substitutes like rice, then there could be upward
pressure on other food prices. India must not continue the ban for long time and must focus on
improving food security and inflation through other monetary policy measures.
Analyse the implications of high rates of unemployment on the Economy. Suggest

measures to create long-term and sustainable employment amidst global
volatility. (250 words)
Reference: Economic Times
Why the question:
Former Reserve Bank of India Governor Raghuram Rajan has said that if unemployment rates in India
remain high, it may lead to ‘entrepreneurial’ politicians who cater to religious divisions, rather than
focusing on actually enhancing jobs.
To write about the implications of employment and ways to tackle it.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by citing a statistic to show the extent of unemployment in India.
Body:

First, mention the factors that have contributed to unemployment in India and its impact – reduced
demand, consumption, and buying power, which in turn causes lower profits for businesses and leads
to budget cuts and workforce reductions.
Next, write about the measures that are needed to create jobs.
Conclusion:
Introduction
According to data from the Centre for Monitoring Indian Economy (CMIE), India’s unemployment
rate touched a four-month high of 7.9% in December 2021. Pandemic has worsened the
employment situation in India further. Approximately 10 million salaried jobs have been lost, across
urban and rural India, and one is not sure how many people will get back their livelihoods.
India needs to bring policy reforms to ensure that employment rate in the country increases so that
there is productive growth in the economy and soon we may reach 5 trillion .
Body
Causes of unemployment in India
 Agriculture: Agriculture remains the biggest employer in the country contributing to 51%
employment. But the sector contributes a meagre 12-13% to the country’s GDP. The
problem of disguised unemployment is the biggest contributor behind this deficit. Also, the
seasonal nature of employment in the sector lead to recurring cycles of unemployment for
the rural population.
 Lack of skills: There has been a push towards providing the employment opportunities to
the people by government by skilling them. But skill deficit still is a big issue.
 Poor Industrialisation: The industrial sector in India still lags behind. Agriculture still remains
as the biggest employer in the country.
 Rush for government jobs: Many educated youth run behind government jobs due to job
profile and security. This led to many remain unemployed due to students preparing for
government jobs.
 Lack of Investment: Inadequacy of capital investment has been a key contributor in not
generating enough industry that in turn provides employment to the labour force.
 About 90% of Indian Workforce is in the unorganized sector which was majorly affected
during Demonetization and GST introduction.
 Declining Capital formation which is not backed by Public and Private Investment.
 Low female LFPR to the tunes of 24% also adds to high unemployment rate.
 Automation and IR4.0 is a looming threat to many jobs which have repeated work or
sequential work.
Measures to remedy unemployment
 One of the remedies of the unemployment situation in India is rapid

industrialisation. Increased number of industries will translate into increased number of
employment

 The curriculum should be changed with increased focus on learning and skill development.
o More institutions need to be established that offer vocational courses that will
translate directly into relevant jobs.
o New Education policy must be implemented in war footing.
 Self-employment should be encouraged more with introduction of liability free loans and
government assistance for funding.
o Incubation centres need to be promoted to cultivate original business ideas that

will be financially viable.
 Precision farming: Better irrigation facilities, better farming equipment, dissemination of

knowledge regarding multiple crop rotation and crop management should be focused on.
 Government as well as leading business houses of the country should seek to invite more
foreign collaboration and capital investment in every sector.
 There are number of labour-intensive manufacturing sectors in India such as food

processing, leather and footwear, wood manufacturers and furniture, textiles and apparel
and garments. Special packages, individually designed for each industry are needed to create
jobs.
 Public investment in sectors like health, education, police and judiciary can create many
government jobs.
Conclusion
The low level of economic growth in primary sector curtailed the job opportunities at rural level.
Thus, it resulted in jobless growth. Further, rapid population growth adds more labour force to the
market. More population means more consumption and less saving, less saving implies less capital
formation and less production which finally leads to less employment. Thus, a collaborative effort is
needed by government and industry to nudge an inclusive growth by supporting new sectors.
Inflation further exacerbates inequalities and affects poor the most. Discuss the policy
measures that are needed to ensure that inequalities do not deepen amidst rising
inflation. (250 words)
Why the question:
The Wholesale Price Index (WPI) and the Consumer Price Index (CPI) show an upward rising trend,
annually, at 13.11 per cent and 6.07 per cent respectively. Inflation is here to stay because it has
much to do with the decline in value of the rupee that has fallen to its lowest, which makes imports
of oil and gas more expensive.
To write about the relation of inflation with inequalities and measures need to ensure that inflation
does not deepen inequalities.
Directive:

Introduction:
Begin the giving context of by providing a statistic of rising inflation.
Body:
Frist, write about the impact of inflation on inequalities and how it affects poor the most. Cite
statistics and examples to substantiate.
Next, write about the policy changes and tweaks that can be brought in by the government to ensure
that this does not happen.
Conclusion:
Write a way forward.
Introduction
Inflation refers to the rise in the prices of most goods and services of daily or common use,
such as food, clothing, housing, recreation, transport, consumer staples, etc. Inflation measures the
average price change in a basket of commodities and services over time. The opposite and rare fall in
the price index of this basket of items is called ‘deflation’. Inflation is indicative of the decrease in
the purchasing power of a unit of a country’s currency. This is measured in percentage.
The Wholesale Price Index (WPI) and the Consumer Price Index (CPI) show an upward rising trend,
annually, at 13.11 per cent and 6.07 per cent respectively.
Body
Inflation & Inequalities
 This upsurge of inflation is affecting the poor more than any other social group.
 This is because some of the commodities whose prices are increasing the most like petrol
and certain food items represent a larger fraction of the budget of the most vulnerable
sections of society.
 For instance, WPI and CPI inflation rates of food were at 8.5 per cent and 5.9 per cent,
respectively.
 the State of Inequality in India report showed that an Indian making Rs 3 lakh a year
belonged to the top 10 per cent of the country’s wage earners.
 Inequalities are also increasing among salaried people, who are privileged compared to
those of the informal sector: The bottom 50 per cent account for only 22 per cent of the
total salary income.
 The situation of the lower-middle class and poor is deteriorating. A recent report from CRISIL
pointed out that the data from the Reserve Bank of India shows slow farm wage growth in
nominal terms.
 India’s spending on healthcare is among the lowest in the world.
 A decent level of healthcare is available only to the ones who can afford it because of
increasing out-of-pocket expenditure — the payment made directly by individuals for the
health service, not covered under any financial protection scheme.
Policy measures to keep the inflation under control
 Monetary policy Measures:

o Maintaining price stability is the foremost objective of the monetary policy

committee of RBI. However, during the pandemic, growth has taken centre stage
and RBI has rightly cut interest rates.
 Job creation:
o A higher allocation of funds for MGNREGS in rural areas, as well as the introduction
of similar employment generation schemes in urban areas, should, therefore, be a
priority.
 Bond markets:
o At the state level, the development of municipal bond markets could be a plausible
alternative.
 Fuel prices:
o A reduction in the excise duty on fuel prices and easing the fuel tax burden could
also supplement the disposable income and reduce the input cost burden for
producers.
o Bringing them under GST would reduce the prices by at least 30 rupees. GST council
must agree to this with haste.
 Commodity prices:
o GoI needs to remove supply side bottlenecks. For example, GoI can immediately
offload 10-20% of its pulses stock with NAFED in the open market.
 Policy measures:
o Navigating out of this will need a fiscal stimulus to shore up consumer spending, an
investment revival to increase the productive capacity of the economy, and a careful
management of inflationary expectations.
 Other measures:
o Concomitantly, the government will also need to pursue redistribution of income to
reduce the widening disparity.
o This also calls for fiscal prudence to cut wasteful spending, find new
revenue through asset sales, mining and spectrum auctions, and build investor
confidence.
Conclusion
With the rise in inflation amidst a second wave, the balancing acumen of the MPC will now be sorely
tested. Factors like rising commodity prices, supply chain disruptions are expected to raise overall
domestic inflation. Government and RBI need to chalk out a fiscal plan to ensure that the inflation
doesn’t burden the common man in the country
What is demographic dividend? Examine the impact of unemployment on India’s demographic

dividend. Do you think high public sector employment can be a panacea to waning dividend due to
unemployment? (250 words)

Why the question:
For a nation that has had a significant demographic dividend — the working age population is much
larger than the non-working age sections — finding productive employment for its youth was to be
an imperative for India. Yet, in the last few years, unemployment has remained a major concern —
the leaked Periodic Labour Force Survey (PLFS) in 2018 revealed that India’s unemployment rate was
the highest (6.07%) in four decades.
To write about demographic dividend, how unemployment affects it and can public sector hiring be
a panacea to it.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by defining demographic dividend and its various features.
Body:
First, write about the impact of unemployment on demographic dividend – demographic dividend
may turn into a liability in the absence of enough jobs and the required skilled workforce etc.
Next, write about how public sector employment can help utilise demographic dividend. Write boath
sides of the argument which highlights the potential as well as limitations of public sector
employment.
Next, suggest ways to overcome the limitations.
Conclusion:
Introduction
Demographic dividend, as defined by the United Nations Population Fund (UNFPA) means, “the
economic growth potential that can result from shifts in a population’s age structure, mainly when
the share of the working-age population (15 to 64) is larger than the non-working-age share of the
population (14 and younger, and 65 and older).” India has one of the youngest populations in an
aging world. By 2020, the median age in India was 28 years. Demographics can change the pace and
pattern of economic growth.
Body
Background
 Periodic Labour Force Survey (PLFS) in 2018 revealed that India’s unemployment rate was
the highest (6.07%) in four decades.
o The latest PLFS suggests that the numbers now are not so drastic, with the overall
unemployment rate at2% in 2020-21 compared to 4.8% in 2019-20 and the labour
force participation rate (LFPR) increasing to 41.6%, up from 40.1% in 2019-20.
 In terms of the more widely used statistic internationally, the current weekly status of
unemployment, the figure of5% for all persons in 2020-21 is still worrying.
 The study on demographic dividend in India by United Nations Population Fund

(UNFPA) throws up two interesting facts.
 The window of demographic dividend opportunity in India is available for five decades from
2005-06 to 2055-56, longer than any other country in the world.
 This demographic dividend window is available at different times in different states because
of differential behaviour of the population parameters.
 Since 2018, India’s working-age population (people between 15 and 64 years of age) has
grown larger than the dependent population (defined as children aged 14 or below as well
as people above 65 years of age).
 This bulge in the working-age population is going to last till 2055, or 37 years from its
beginning.
 This transition happens largely because of a decrease in the total fertility rate (TFR, which is
the number of births per woman) after the increase in life expectancy gets stabilised.
 Many Asian economies — Japan, China, South Korea — were able to use this ‘demographic
dividend’, defined by the United Nations Population Fund (UNFPA) as the growth potential
that results from shifts in a population’s age structure.
Impact of unemployment on India’s demographic dividend.
 Jobless growth: There is mounting concern that future growth could turn out to be jobless
due to de-industrialization, de-globalization, the fourth industrial revolution and
technological progress. As per the NSSO Periodic Labour Force Survey 2017-18, India’s
labour force participation rate for the age-group 15-59 years is around 53%, that is, around
half of the working age population is jobless.
 Asymmetric demography: The growth in the working-age ratio is likely to be concentrated in

some of India’s poorest states and the demographic dividend will be fully realized only if
India is able to create gainful employment opportunities for this working-age population.
 Lack of skills: Most of the new jobs that will be created in the future will be highly skilled
and lack of skill in Indian workforce is a major challenge. India may not be able to take
advantage of the opportunities, due to a low human capital base and lack of skills.
 Low human development parameters: India ranks 130 out of 189 countries in UNDP’s
Human Development Index, which is alarming. Therefore, health and education parameters
need to be improved substantially to make the Indian workforce efficient and skilled.
 Informal nature of economy in India is another hurdle in reaping the benefits of

demographic transition in India.
Can public sector employment alleviate the problem?

 The latest data showed that there were 86 lakh vacant jobs among all central government
civilian posts as of March 2020.
 The government recently announced Agnipath scheme for youth as a contract employment
of four years.
 But even this measure would be ameliorative in the real economy that continues to remain
distressed, a consequence of effects of the pandemic in the last few years.
 The country cannot afford to squander more years in its race to reap the benefits of its
demographic dividend, and the push to provide jobs for those seeking to enter the labour
force, even if belated, will help ease matters for the medium term.
 Real jobs in manufacturing, industries, MSME’s are the key to reaping demographic
dividend. Skill development will also help in youth getting jobs in high paying services sector.
Measure needed and way forward
 Building human capital: Investing in people through healthcare, quality education, jobs and
skills helps build human capital, which is key to supporting economic growth, ending
extreme poverty, and creating a more inclusive society.
 Skill development to increase employability of young population. India’s labour force needs
to be empowered with the right skills for the modern economy. Government has established
the National Skill Development Corporation (NSDC) with the overall target of skilling/ up
skilling 500 million people in India by 2022..
 Education: Enhancing educational levels by properly investing in primary, secondary and

higher education. India, which has almost 41% of population below the age of 20 years, can
reap the demographic dividend only if with a better education system. Also, academic-
industry collaboration is necessary to synchronise modern industry demands and learning
levels in academics.
o Establishment of Higher Education Finance Agency (HEFA) is a welcome step in this

direction.
 Health: Improvement in healthcare infrastructure would ensure higher number of

productive days for young labourforce, thus increasing the productivity of the economy.
o Success of schemes like Ayushman Bharat and National Health Protection

scheme (NHPS) is necessary. Also nutrition level in women and children needs
special care with effective implementation of Integrated Child Development (ICDS)
programme.
 Job Creation: The nation needs to create ten million jobs per year to absorb the addition of
young people into the workforce. Promoting businesses’ interests and entrepreneurship
would help in job creation to provide employment to the large labourforce.
o India’s improved ranking in the World Bank’s Ease of Doing Business Index is a good
sign.
o Schemes like Start-up India and Make in India , if implemented properly, would
bring the desired result in the near future.

 Urbanisation: The large young and working population in the years to come will migrate to
urban areas within their own and other States, leading to rapid and large-scale increase in
urban population. How these migrating people can have access to basic amenities, health
and social services in urban areas need to be the focus of urban policy planning.
o Schemes such as Smart City Mission and AMRUT needs to be effectively and
carefully implemented.
Conclusion
India is on the right side of demographic transition that provides golden opportunity for its rapid
socio-economic development, if policymakers align the developmental policies with this
demographic shift.
To reap the demographic dividend, proper investment in human capital is needed by focussing on
education, skill development and healthcare facilities.
While the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code (IBC) has successfully chartered a new era
in the history of bankruptcy resolution in India, it needs reform in order to speed up
resolution and recovery from insolvency firms. Analyse. (250 words)
Why the question:
As the Narendra Modi government celebrates “Azadi ka Amrit Mahotsav”, an initiative to
commemorate 75 years of independence, it is worth assessing the success of India’s bankruptcy code,
which is arguably one of the most progressive commercial laws brought into force in recent times by
the country, providing companies with the “freedom of exit”.
To write about the successes of IBC and reforms needed in it to make it more holistic.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by writing about Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code (IBC) its aims and objectives.
Body:
First, list down the various features and achievements of IBC since its introduction.
Next, write about the various limitations in the performance of IBC.
Next, write about the reform that is needed to ensure that IBC performance leads to strengthening of
its supporting role in capital formation and economic growth of the country.
Conclusion:
Introduction
The game-changing IBC law made its debut in 2016, in the form of India’s Insolvency and
Bankruptcy (IBC) Code, which allowed companies an easy and time-bound exit. The IBC effected a
tectonic shift in the way lending was perceived. At the start of its implementation, a default as small
as ₹1 lakh could lead to insolvency proceedings being initiated by the affected creditor. This gave
creditors the confidence that borrowers, especially promoters, would take their debt obligations
seriously.
Body
Success of IBC Code
 The IBC has initiated a cultural shift in the dynamics between lender and borrower,
promoter and creditor. It played a critical role in reshaping behaviour of borrowers.
 Before enactment of the IBC, the recovery mechanisms available to lenders were
through Lok Adalat, Debt Recovery Tribunal and SARFAESI Act.
o While the earlier mechanisms resulted in a low average recovery of 23%, the
recoveries have risen to 43% under the IBC regime.
 Since enactment of the IBC, India significantly improved its ‘Resolving

Insolvency’ ranking 108 in 2019 from 134 in 2014 where it remained stagnant for several
years.
 India won the Global Restructuring Review award for the most improved jurisdiction in 2018.
 An IMF-World Bank study in January 2018 observed that India is moving towards a new
state-of-the-art bankruptcy regime.
 Insolvency law has led to stability in financial systems.
 Recovery through the IBC was about Rs 70,000 crore in fiscal 2019 twice the amount
recovered through other resolution mechanisms such as the Debt Recovery Tribunal,
Securitisation and Reconstruction of Financial Assets and Enforcement of Securities Interest
Act, and Lok Adalat in fiscal 2018.
 The recovery rate is also twice the liquidation value for these 94 cases, which underscores
the value maximisation possible through the IBC process.
Issues persisting
 In its initial years, the IBC faced teething problems and it was expected that with the passage
of time, these will be resolved and its functioning will improve.
 However, according to the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Board of India (IBBI) newsletter for
January-March 2022, 7% of all the cases admitted for the corporate insolvency resolution
process (CIRP) since 2016 that have been closed, 11% have been withdrawn, about 14 %
settled, 30% liquidated and 9% resolved (wherein a resolution plan was approved).
 Data released by the IBBI shows that the resolution rate of cases under CIRP is rather
low and that the number of cases seeing liquidation are three times more than those being
resolved.
 Thus, it is clear that the CoC and courts have been bottlenecks for the IBC’s success.
 Banks, especially those in the public sector, are unable to take pragmatic decisions as any
risk-taking that could potentially yield a low rate of dues recovery in the short term may be
subjected to vigilance inquiries and audits.
Measures to be taken

 Freedom to banks: Allow banks to take bold decisions and not create an environment
where they limit their decisions to choosing the ‘L1’ or lowest possible haircut quote in fear
of future trouble.
o Most importantly, banks need to be freed of this regulatory overhang so that they
can take bold measures for restructuring.
o To achieve this, bankers should be protected for bona fide decision-making during
the resolution process, based on a premise like the ‘business judgement’ rule
available for board directors in many countries.
 Written plea: Also, given that most of the delay occurs at the stage of case admission, it is
worth making applications for admission under sections 7, 9 and 10 of the IBC disposable on
a written plea rather than on oral arguments.
 Further, one could identify provisions under the IBC where courts are mandated not to
adjudicate but only administrate.
o But concerns will remain over the expertise of commercial court judges to decide on
such matters.
o Commercial courts need fresh talent with an understanding of business for proper
decision-making.
 The insolvency litigation procedure should aim at reducing the duration of the process and
also case volumes, so as to reduce uncertainties that result.
o This can be done by shortening the window within which a party must lodge a
claim, whether it is an initial challenge or an appeal, which elsewhere is often
shorter than in other civil or criminal litigation.
o In France, it is usually 10 days; in 2021, through insolvency and restructuring law

reforms, it extended this further by providing for the full judicial resolution of
certain disputes ahead of the confirmation of a restructuring plan by a court.
o In the same spirit of limiting insolvency litigation, the reform also limits which
parties may initiate certain legal actions.
o These entail court-appointed insolvency practitioners or parties involved in the

restructuring process.
 Another feature that is worth weighing is to either give some adjudicating power to the
case’s insolvency professional or appoint a supervisory judge for each case. In France, such
judges have exclusive power to authorize important settlements with the insolvent
company, some of which also require insolvency court ratification.
o They are often the first to decide an issue, and though their decisions are subject to
challenge at the insolvency court and the latter’s decision can be challenged before
a court of appeal, insolvency courts tend to confirm the orders of supervisory
judges.
 Most litigants expect they would need to escalate their case to a court of
appeal to effectively challenge a supervisory judge’s decision, which is not
easy.

Conclusion
In conclusion, we need a serious rethink on how to design a suitable insolvency ecosystem for India
amid our existing challenges of limited court capacity and high regulatory cholesterol. Whatever the
government decides, it is important to act in time before the IBC loses its sheen and stakeholders
who looked up to this law as a saviour give up hope and search of a newer regime.
Value Addition
About IBC
The IBC was enacted in 2016, replacing a host of laws, with the aim to streamline and speed up the
resolution process of failed businesses.
The Code also consolidates provisions of the current legislative framework to form a common forum
for debtors and creditors of all classes to resolve insolvency.
The Code creates various institutions to facilitate resolution of insolvency. These are as follows:
 Insolvency Professionals.
 Insolvency Professional Agencies.
 Information Utilities.
 Adjudicating authorities: The National Companies Law Tribunal (NCLT); and the Debt
Recovery Tribunal (DRT).
 Insolvency and Bankruptcy Board.
What is depreciation of Indian rupee? Examine the factors behind its recent
depreciation and its impact on the economy in general. (250 words)
Why the question:
The Indian currency is facing one of the toughest fights of its life. In the crosshairs of a triple-barrelled
gun of capital outflows, higher crude oil prices and widening.
To write about the causes for depreciation of rupee, its impact and measures needed to counter it.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by explaining the concept of depreciation of rupee.
Body:
First, write about the causes behind the recent depreciation – rising interest rates in USA, flight of
capital has taken place from developing countries like India, portfolio investors tend to withdraw
from these markets, Increasing crude oil prices and Ukraine crisis etc.
Next, discuss the impact of falling rupee value on inflation, cad, price of essential imports etc.
Next, write about the various steps that are required to counter it.
Conclusion:

Introduction
Currency depreciation is a fall in the value of a currency in a floating exchange rate system. Rupee
depreciation means that the rupee has become less valuable with respect to the dollar.
In the crosshairs of a triple-barrelled gun of capital outflows, higher crude oil prices and widening
Current Account Deficit (CAD), the domestic unit yet again hit a new low of 78.29 against the US
dollar. So far this year, the rupee has fallen about 5%, while the dollar index—pegged to a basket of
six currencies—has shot up 10%.
Body
Various factors behind the depreciation of Indian rupee
 Sell-off of the Equity: A sell-off in the global equity markets which was triggered by the hike
in interest rates by the U.S. Federal Reserve (central bank), the war in Europe and growth
concerns in China due to the Covid-19 surge, led to the rupee depreciation.
o With the US Federal Reserve hiking rates by 50 basis points, there has been a sell-off
in global markets as investors have rushed to the dollar.
 Outflow of Dollar: The outflow of dollars is a result of high crude prices and the correction
in equity markets is also causing adverse flow of dollars.
o In India, foreign portfolio investors have pulled out around $5.8 billion since the
beginning of this financial year as per data from Kotak, exerting downward pressure
on the currency.
 Tightening of Monetary Policy: Steps taken by RBI to tighten the monetary policy to
counter rising inflation has also led to depreciation.
 Trade deficit: here is also the pressure owing to the rising trade deficit — in April the deficit
stood at $20 billion, up from $18.7 billion in March. In fact, according to analysts, the current
account deficit is likely to be at its highest level since the crisis of 2013.
Impact on the Indian economy of falling rupee

 The current account deficit is bound to widen, depleting foreign exchange
reserves and weakening the rupee.
 With higher landed prices of crude oil and other crucial imports, the economy is definitely
inching towards cost-push inflation.
o Cost-push inflation (also known as wage-push inflation) occurs when overall prices
increase (inflation) due to increases in the cost of wages and raw materials.
 Companies may not be allowed to fully pass on the burden of high costs to consumers,
which, in turn, affects government dividend earnings, raising questions about
budgeted fiscal deficits.
 Depreciation in rupee is a double-edged sword for the Reserve Bank of India.
o Weaker rupee should theoretically give a boost to India’s exports, but in an

environment of uncertainty and weak global demand, a fall in the external value of
rupee may not translate into higher exports.

 Inflation: It poses risk of imported inflation, and may make it difficult for the central bank to
maintain interest rates at a record low for longer.
o India meets more than two-thirds of its domestic oil requirements through
imports.
o India is also one of the top importers of edible oils.
o A weaker currency will further escalate imported edible oil prices and lead to a
higher food inflation.
Measures required to counter the depreciation
 Curbing imports of non-essential goods will lessen the demand for Dollars and promoting
export will help in increasing the flow of Dollars into the country, thus, helps in control rupee
depreciation.
 The Masala Bond is directly pegged to the Indian currency. If Indian borrowers issue more
rupee denominated Masala Bonds, this would increase liquidity in the market or increase in
the rupee stock against few currencies in the market and this would help in supporting the
rupee.
 External Commercial Borrowing (ECB) is a type of loan in foreign currencies, made by non-
resident lenders. Thus, easing conditions of ECB’s helps in receiving more loans in foreign
currencies would increase the inflow of forex, leading to rupee appreciation.
 The Reserve Bank of India (RBI) has been intervening to soften the currency’s slide — the
fall in its foreign exchange reserves suggests that is the case. This reduces the volatility of
the currency.
Conclusion
Considering that the rupee is overvalued, the central bank should allow the currency to slide,
allowing it to find its own level, intervening only to smoothen excess volatility. Currency depreciation
will act as an automatic stabiliser. It will help ease current account pressures by curbing imports, but
more importantly, it will help boost exports a critical driver of the country’s economy at the current
juncture.
What is Foreign Portfolio Investment (FPI)? Throw light on FPI regime as a route for
foreign investment in India. Examine the impact of FPI withdrawal on the Indian
economy. (250 words)
Why the question:
Foreign portfolio investors have pulled out Rs 42,000 crore this month amid rising inflation and
monetary policy tightening in the US.
To write about FPI, its importance and impact of its withdrawal.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by defining FPI. Cite statistic related to the extent of FPI in India.
Body:
In the first part, write about importance of FPI as mode of investment and its importance to the
Indian economy.
Next, give context regarding the withdrawal of FPI due to rising inflation and monetary policy
tightening in the US. Write about the impact of the withdrawal on macroeconomic parameters.
Conclusion:
Conclude with a way forward to ensure that withdrawal of FPI does not affect the economy.
Introduction
Foreign portfolio investment (FPI) consists of securities and other financial assets held by investors
in another country. It does not provide the investor with direct ownership of a company’s assets and
is relatively liquid depending on the volatility of the market. Along with foreign direct
investment (FDI), FPI is one of the common ways to invest in an overseas economy. FDI and FPI are
both important sources of funding for most economies.
Foreign portfolio investors have pulled out Rs 42,000 crore this month amid rising inflation and
monetary policy tightening in the US.
Body
FPI regime as a route for foreign investment in India
 FPIs are the largest non-promoter shareholders in the Indian market and their investment
decisions have a huge bearing on the stock prices and overall direction of the market.
 Holding of FPIs, in value terms, in companies listed on NSE stood at Rs 51.99 lakh crore as on
March 31, 2022
 FPIs hold sizeable stakes in private banks, tech companies and big caps like Reliance
Industries.
 The US accounts for a major chunk of FPI investments at Rs 17.57 lakh crore as of May 2022,
followed by Mauritius Rs 5.24 lakh crore, Singapore Rs 4.25 lakh crore and Luxembourg Rs
3.58 lakh crore, according to data available from the National Securities Depository Ltd
(NSDL).

Impact of FPI withdrawal on Indian Economy
 The pullout is dampening sentiment in equity and forex markets.
 The benchmark Sensex has plunged by 16% from the October 2021 high of 62,245.43 to
52,266.72 on June 23.
 The impact of FPI selling on markets is visible, with increase in volatility and declining equity
prices.
 The retail flow and DII inflow is weakening now, and the markets could weaken further if the
FPI outflows continue.
 India’s foreign exchange reserves have fallen $46 billion in the last nine months to $596.45
billion as on June 10, 2022, mainly due to the dollar appreciation and FPI withdrawals.
 The rupee has plunged 7.3% to an all-time low of 78.30/32 against the dollar.
 Aa lower rupee against the dollar keeps import bills higher, pushing inflation even higher
than it is now. Higher inflation is detrimental to the overall market.
 If the rupee does not strengthen, FPI outflows will continue, which is another negative.
 With the dip in the rupee, oil imports and other imported components will get costlier,
which will further lead to higher inflation.
 Travellers and students studying abroad will have to shell out more rupees to buy dollars
from banks.
 People are directly impacted by the rupee fall as fuel prices shoot up.
Conclusion
The heavy inflow of FPI can provide Indian economy a non-debt creating source of foreign
investment. It also reduces the pressure of foreign exchange gap. The FPI has an added advantage of
the flow of resources into the capital-scant countries like India. Significant reforms like wider

taxation bracket, KYC norms, land arbitration, ease of doing business ,ease of governance will
definitely attract FPI in coming years.
Critically examine the performance of the present goods and services tax (GST) regime
in the first five years since its inception and suggest possible reforms. (250 words)
Why the question:
India’s goods and services tax (GST) will be five years old on July 1. The GST Council, comprising
minister representatives from all states and union territories, will be meeting over the next few days.
To write about various successes and limitations of GST and reforms that are needed in it.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by aims and objectives behind the launch of GST.
Body:
First, write about the achievements of GST in the past 5 years. Substantiate with examples, facts or
statistics.
Next, write about the shortcomings of GST in the past 5 years. Substantiate with examples, facts or
statistics.
Next, suggest reforms in GST.
Conclusion:
Introduction
The Goods and Services Tax (GST) is an indirect tax system which was rolled out in 2017 with the
aim of ‘One Nation, one tax’. The Comptroller and Auditor General of India (CAG) has pointed out
lacunae in the GST regime, saying that system-validated input tax credit through invoice matching
is not in place and a non-intrusive e-tax system still remains elusive.
India’s goods and services tax (GST) will be five years old on July 1, 2022.
Body
Various issues with respect to goods and services tax (GST) regime
 The breakdown of trust and cooperative federalism between states and the Union
government:
o It turned out to be prescient as GST failed to live up to its economic promises and
states’ revenues were protected through this guarantee, despite Finance’s attempt
to wriggle out of this commitment during the pandemic under the alibi of an “act of
God”.
o The Union government’s proclivity to levy and appropriate cess revenues for itself
without sharing them with the states has lent credence to the wisdom of
guaranteed compensation for states.
o This guarantee is now set to expire..
 The recent Supreme Court’s judgment highlighting that the GST Council’s recommendations
are not binding on the states:
o The SC recently observed that it is in the national interest to have both cooperative
and competitive federalism, and hence, the GST Council’s decisions are not binding
on the states.
o This means that states had and continue to have the right to either comply fully with
the Council’s recommendations or modify them as they deem necessary.
o This has opened the window for states to override the fundamental GST premise of
a “one nation one tax”.
o If pushed to a corner, states may now use the SC ruling as a shield.
 Expiry of the revenue guarantee that protected states’ revenues
o GST is too precariously perched to yank away the compensation guarantee for
states.
o the Union government is not desirous of extending the compensation guarantee.
 Difficulty in tax administration:
o Goes against the canons of taxation.
o A modern tax system should be fair, uncomplicated, transparent and easy to

administer.
o It must yield revenues sufficient to cover the cost of government services and public
goods.
o Lack of clarity on many rules is also leading to various litigation and different
interpretations (of the same laws) by Advanced Ruling Authorities in different states.
 Complicated taxation structure:
o A World Bank study published in May 2018 said that the Indian GST rate was the
second highest among the 115 countries with a national value-added tax.
o It was also the most complicated, with five main tax rates, several exemptions, a
cess and a special rate for gold.
o The multilateral lender said that only five countries had four or more non-zero tax
rates—India, Italy, Pakistan, Luxembourg and Ghana.
o Falling revenue amid disruptions caused by the Covid-19 pandemic has continuously
delayed the reform, leaving a large number of items in high tax slabs.
 High compliance costs: are also arising because the prevalence of multiple tax rates implies
a need to classify inputs and outputs based on the applicable tax rate. Along with the need
to apply the correct rate, firms are required to match invoices between their outputs and
inputs to be eligible for full input tax credit, which increases compliance costs further.

 GST Council meetings: the meetings of the GST Council are not as frequent as they were
earlier, if the recent incidents are anything to go by, and it often end up with disagreement,
fight and strong letters and statements. States have also accused the Centre of cornering a
substantial portion of tax in forms of cess.
 There has been lack of coordination between the Department of Revenue, the Central Board
of Indirect Taxes and Customs and the GST Network.
However, there are gains too from the GST Regime
 Introduced as one of the biggest economic reforms by the incumbent government, the GST
kicked off with the promise to streamline taxation and compliance burden.
 Based on the one nation one tax ideology, GST has helped in reducing the cascading effect
of tax considerably.
 Also, multiplicity of compliances under various indirect taxes has been reduced.
 Hence, introduction of GST in India has brought in efficiencies in indirect tax compliance,
incidence and reduced the number of indirect tax authorities that a taxpayer needed to
interact with
 Another positive is the concept of e-invoicing which seeks to ensure greater transparency in
supplier-receiver transactions.
 The introduction of e-way bill coupled with the crackdown on fake invoicing has helped in
bringing in a substantial portion of GST revenues, which were either being evaded or under-
reported, in order.
Way Forward
 The first target should be to move to at least a three-rate structure, a lower rate for
essential goods, a relatively high rate for luxury goods, and a standard rate for the majority
of goods and services.
 The next step would be simplifying the tax returns process.
 The scope for lowering the GST rate is umbilically linked to direct tax reform.
 A better way to make a tax system more just is by lowering regressive indirect tax rates
while widening the base for progressive direct taxes on income and corporate profits.
 The government needs to establish GST Tribunals to reduce litigation timelines and the
pressure on courts.
 The state authorities for Advance Ruling should ideally also have an independent jurist
member, apart from a representative from the tax department.
 Many goods are still outside the GST net, which comes in the way of seamless flow of input
tax credit. Key items outside its ambit are electricity, alcohol, petroleum goods and real
estate. This aspect need to be looked into.
 Emulating the best practices. The GST in New Zealand, widely regarded as the most efficient
in the world, has a single standard rate of 12.5 percent across all industry groups.

 The Fifteenth finance commission, in its latest report, has addressed many issues including
large shortfall in collections as compared to original forecast, high volatility in collections,
accumulation of large integrated GST credit, glitches in invoice and input tax matching, and
delay in refunds.
 The Commission also observed that the continuing dependence of states on compensation
from the central government for making up for the shortfall in revenue is a concern.
 While at the same time it suggested that the structural implications of GST for low
consumption states need to be considered.
Conclusion
While the GST’s journey has given its stakeholders some causes to celebrate, it has also given
moments of worry. But then, no transformation of the scale and complexity can be achieved without
its share of hiccups and challenges. The process of evolution will take a few years more for the
mammoth structural change to stabilize. The four-year journey of GST has been a roller-coaster ride
for all stakeholders with equitable share of hits, misses and expectations. A work-in-progress in its
transformational journey, GST suffers from several shortcomings which need to be resolved quickly,
but its journey to ‘Good & Simple Tax’ is still quite long.
Inclusive growth and issues arising from it.

Though microfinance is a very effective tool in providing access to capital for
individuals who are financially underserved. The unauthorised digital lending is bane
that must be addressed on an urgent basis. Analyse. (250 words)
Why the question:
The last few months have seen an exponential growth of digital loan sharks who have been
ensnaring thousands of innocent consumers in need of small loans.
To write about microfinance industry, its role in the economy and the perils of digital lending and
ways to tackle it.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by mentioning the credit lending structure of microfinance industry.
Body:
First, describe the lack of formal credit lending structures to the poor for initiating some business or
investment activity and with no collateral.
Next, highlight the role of microfinance sector in empowering women and help the poor to begin an
income generating activity and take up small entrepreneurial ventures through small capital
financing.
Next, write about the drawbacks of digital lending and steps to regulate it and ensure people are not
harassed.
Conclusion:
Introduction
Digital lending refers to the online disbursal of loans where all processes, even loan approval and
recovery, take place remotely, typically through mobile apps. The shift is part of the digital
transformation pushed by the pandemic. Loan apps comprised just 4.9% of all apps installed in India
in October 2020, but this rose to 11% in October 2021, said analytics firm AppsFlyer.
Body
Importance of Microfinancing through Digital loans:
 Digital lending has the potential to make access to financial products and services more fair,
efficient and inclusive.
 From a peripheral supporting role a few years ago, FinTech-led innovation is now at the core
of the design, pricing and delivery of financial products and services.
 In comparison to bank loans, digital lending does not require a long banking relationship or a
rigid appraisal or onsite visits and other credit processing methods. They need just a bank
account as a reference point where loans can be credited. The DLCs requirements are lower,
and the process is significantly quicker.
 Besides providing loans for individuals, DLCs also serve MSMEs and they are emerging as a
new source of funding to smaller units. An already high credit demand in this sector was
fueled by the pandemic.
 P2P lenders are online entities akin to DLCs for the purpose of providing finance to
unorganised sector on mutually agreed terms, except that the financing products are
customized one to one basis and may not necessarily be algorithm driven.
 But they do play a good role in providing funds to the needy entrepreneurs on mutually
agreed terms.
Challenges posed by Unauthorised digital lending
 They attract borrowers with promise of loans in a quick and hassle-free manner.
 But, Excessive rates of interest and additional hidden charges are demanded from
borrowers.
 Such platforms adopt unacceptable and high-handed recovery methods.
 For instance, the unfortunate death by suicide of a Mumbai resident three weeks ago after
he was harassed by digital, app-based lenders has sparked a spate of criminal complaints
and FIRs.
 They misuse agreements to access data on the mobile phones of the borrowers.
 The last few months have seen an exponential growth of digital loan sharks who have been
ensnaring thousands of innocent consumers in need of small loans.
 As per the findings of an RBI Working Group, released in November 2021, as many as 600
out of 1100 lending apps currently available for Indian Android users across 80 application
stores are illegal apps.
 And as the number of lending apps grow, this trend would spike, since a user downloading a
lending app cannot identify if the app is legitimate or not.

 It is also likely that several copycat apps and websites will mushroom across the internet.
 It could collect the user’s personally identifiable information (PII), financial data and other
sensitive details, which can then be used to compromise the user’s accounts, carry out
phishing attacks and identity theft.
Way forward
A Reserve Bank of India (RBI) Working Group (WG) on digital lending, including lending through
online platforms and mobile apps submitted its recommendations in 2021.

Conclusion
The lack of easy access to loans is pushing people to clutch at desperate straws. While safeguarding
business interests, banks and the finance ministry will have to rework lending policies to make them
more people-oriented. A balanced approach needs to be followed so that the regulatory framework
supports innovation while ensuring data security, privacy, confidentiality and consumer protection.

With the emergence of technology-enabled gig work platforms, gig economy will be a
major building block in inclusively achieving the $5 trillion economy goal, bridging the
income and unemployment gap. Critically Analyse. (250 words)
Why the question:
The government’s policy think tank Niti Aayog has recommended that measures should be taken to
provide for social security, including paid leave, occupational disease and work accident insurance,
support during irregularity of work and pension plans, for the gig workforce in the country, which is
expected to grow to 2.35 crore by 2029-30.
To write about the role and limitations of gig economy in achieving 5 trillion dollars economy.
Introduction:
Begin by giving the advent of gig work in the recent past and statistic related to it.
Body:
First, write how technology has resulted in furtherance of gig work and pandemic also played a part
in it.
Next, write about the various benefits associated with gig work and its role in achieving 5 trillion-
dollar economy – upgrading or augmenting skills, equipping modern tools for better efficiency,
people at gig jobs can earn more, some becoming even micro-entrepreneurs.
Next, write about the various limitations and drawbacks associated with gig works.
Conclusion:
Conclude with a way forward to overcome the above drawbacks.
Introduction
A gig economy is a free market system in which temporary positions are common and organizations
contract with independent workers for short-term engagements. Examples of gig employees in the
workforce could include freelancers, independent contractors, project-based workers and
temporary or part-time hires.
According to a study by the government’s policy think tank Niti Aayog, the gig workforce in the
country, which is expected to grow to 2.35 crore by 2029-30. According to the study released by Niti
Aayog, the number of workers engaged in the gig economy is estimated to be 77 lakh in 2020-21.
Body
The potential of India in becoming the capital of gig-workers of the world:
 Industry bodies have been conducting several studies on this parallel economy and just before
the advent of the pandemic had predicted India’s gig economy to grow at a compounded annual
growth rate of 17 per cent to touch $455 billion in the next three years.
 India at present has around 15 million freelance workers engaged in projects in sectors like IT,
HR, and designing. In comparison, there are almost 53 million independent workers in the US.
 The present Covid-19 scenario would push more of the conventional workforces towards the gig
economy in India.
 India’s workforce is adding almost four million people every year, this would have a big impact
on the gig economy in the near future.

 Even in India, firms are shrinking in size, giving rise to a large number of start-ups specialized in
taking up non-core activities on contractual basis.
 The recent Periodic Labour Force Survey from the Ministry of Statistics and Programme
Implementation shows unemployment rate at a 45-year high, at 6.1%; the highest levels of
joblessness is among urban youth.
 Other reports show that over the past two years’ domestic consumption has reduced, industrial
growth has flatlined, private investments are lower, and market volatility has hit drivers of
employment.
 And so, not surprisingly, many, including undergraduates and diploma holders, now look at the
gig economy as a stop-gap solution until the market turns.
 Human resources firm Team Lease estimates that 13 lakh Indians joined the gig economy in the
last half of 2018-19, registering a 30% growth compared to the first half of the fiscal year.
 Better Place, a digital platform that does background verification and skill development in the
informal sector, estimates that of the 21 lakh jobs that will be created in the metros in 2019-20,
14 lakhs will be in the gig economy.
 Food and e-commerce delivery will account for 8 lakh positions and drivers will account for
nearly 6 lakh positions, says the report, based on 11 lakh profiles in over 1,000 companies.
 Delhi, Bengaluru and other metros are expected to be the biggest drivers of this sector. And two-
thirds of this workforce will be under the age of 40.
Key Challenges
 This workforce has limited employment rights like minimum wages, health benefits, sick leaves
or even retirement benefits to fall back on.
 Also, the payment is assured only on the completion of the project giving a sense of financial
insecurity.
 The lack of any kind of protection was also deterring several talented workers against
participating in the economy
 The Central government recently passed the social security code which could cover gig worker as
well.
 One of the key proposals includes the creation of a social security fund which is around 1 per
cent of the aggregators’ annual turnover.
 This fund would be used primarily for the welfare of the unorganized and the gig workforce
Way Forward
 The government needs to come out with some more regulations to protect the workforce of the
gig economy.
 Also, at present, there is no mechanism to address the issue of redress of disputes.
 It could also mean countries coming together to set up a platform to extend their labour
protection to the workforce who are working part-time in their country.

 Companies employing the workforce on a temporary basis should also be made responsible to
contribute to their insurance and social obligation other than just their tax commitment.
 Constant upskilling and reskilling is required for such talents to stay industry relevant and market
ready.
 The government needs to come out with some more regulations to protect the workforce of the
gig economy.
 Countries must come together to set up a platform to extend their labour protection to the
workforce who are working part-time in their country.
 Companies employing the workforce on a temporary basis should also be made responsible to
contribute to their insurance and social obligation other than just their tax commitment.
 Basic labour protection like minimum wages, paid leave provisions and maternity benefits
should be available to gig workers as well.
 The government needs to come out with a comprehensive legislation to empower and motivate
many to take this path.
Conclusion
The scope of the gig economy in a country like India is enormous. The government needs to come
out with a comprehensive legislation to empower and motivate many to take this path. The gig
economy and its workforce cannot be overlooked when we talk about the future of employment.
Can the complete privatization of state-owned banks be the panacea to all the
aliments that affect the public sector banks (PSBs)? Critically analyse. (250 words)
Why the question:
A clamour for complete privatization of state-owned banks seems to have arisen in policy corridors
once again. This is not a new demand; discussions about the government liquidating its entire
shareholding in public sector banks (PSBs) have taken place many times in the past, without any
specific policy objectives spelt out.
To write about pros and cons of the complete privatisation of public sector banks (PSBs).
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by stating objectives of privatisation.
Body:
First, write about the positive role played by public banks in the Indian economy.
Next, write about the various issues plaguing the state-owned banks in India. Cite statistics to
substantiate.
Next, write about positives of complete privatisation of state-owned banks.
Next, write about the negatives of complete privatisation of state-owned banks.
Conclusion:
Conclude by writing a balanced opinion for way ahead.
Introduction
The new privatisation policy envisages that in each strategic sector, no more than four state-owned
companies will exist. Currently, after the latest round of consolidation, there are 12 public sector
banks (PSBs). This means having four mega PSBs will either come through further mergers of PSBs or
privatisation. Privatisation is often considered a solution for poor management in public sector
banks.
However, former governor of RBI Raghuram Rajan held that privatisation is not a panacea for the ills
of the banking sector unless accompanied by reforms in banking regulation.
Background:
 Bank nationalisation ushered in a revolution for India’s banking sector.
 Areas that had so far been neglected, including agriculture, employment-generating

productive activities, poverty alleviation plans, rural development, health, education,
exports, infrastructure, women’s empowerment, became priority sectors for these banks.
 The move also helped in promoting more equitable regional growth, and this is evident from
RBI data.
 There were only 1,833 bank branches in rural areas in the country in 1969, which increased
to 33,004 by 1995 and continued to grow over the next decades.
 Banking services also reduced the dependence on moneylenders in rural regions.
 Nationalised banking improved the working conditions of employees in the banking sector,
as the state ensured higher wages, security of services, and other fringe benefits.
Need for privatisation
 Years of capital injections and governance reforms have not been able to improve the
financial position of in public sector banks significantly.
 Many of them have higher levels of stressed assets than private banks, and also lag the
latter on profitability, market capitalisation and dividend payment record.
 Privatisation of two public sector banks will set the ball rolling for a long-term project that
envisages only a handful of state-owned banks, with the rest either consolidated with strong
banks or privatised.
 This will free up the government, the majority owner, from continuing to provide equity
support to the banks year after year.
Critical Analysis: Privatisation may not address the issues faced by PSB’s
 In the context of privatisation and efficiency, it is unfair to blame PSBs alone for the alarming
rise of NPAs. On the contrary, stringent measures are required to recover large corporate
stressed assets, which is a key concern for the entire banking sector.

 This must include strong recovery laws and taking criminal action against wilful defaulters.
 So far, the government has not exhibited a firm willingness to implement these measures.
 Wilful default by large corporate borrowers and subsequent recovery haircuts, imposed
through the ill-conceived Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, has resulted in a heap of write-
offs, putting a big dent on the balance sheets of PSBs.
 This has not only affected the profitability of the banks, but has also become an excuse to
allege inefficiency.
 Unlike the mega-merger exercise among PSBs carried out last year, the privatisation of PSBs
is a politically sensitive move.
 Bank employee trade unions have already raised objections against the proposed
privatisation move.
 Trade unions continue to have a say in the running of these institutions, which will force the
government to convince the trade unions about the merit of the privatisation agenda.
Way forward:
 If the government exhibits strong political will (convincing the influential trade unions) to
proceed with the privatisation agenda, it will have to first implement the bad bank plan to
address the problem of NPAs in PSBs and clean up their balance sheets.
 If the books are healthy, there could be potential takers for these banks among NBFCs and
business houses for these banks.
 The government, along with the RBI, will have to then work out reasonable terms for the
privatisation of these banks.
 Buyers will be more interested in taking over healthier, well-run banks rather than taking
up the burden of weak, poorly governed banks. PSB privatisation has been a long-pending
promise.
 The PJ Nayak panel had recommended this way back in 2014 and government must scrutiny
it once more.
Effects of liberalization on the economy, changes in industrial policy and their

effects on industrial growth.
India is a significant player in the global medicines industry. In addition, the country
holds a large number of scientists and engineers that can propel the sector forward to
even greater heights. Analyse. (250 words)
Reference: ibef.org
Why the question:
To write about the strengths and weaknesses in the pharmaceutical industry and to suggest
adequate measures to address the issues.

Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by highlighting the extent of pharmaceutical industry in India.
Body:
First, mention the potential of pharma industry – India is the largest provider of generic drugs
globally. Indian pharmaceutical sector supplies over 50% of global demand for various vaccines, 40%
of generic demand in the US and 25% of all medicine in the UK. Globally, India ranks 3rd in terms of
pharmaceutical production by volume and 14th by value.
Next, write about the limitations.
Next, give a point by point analysis of major areas of reforms needed such as revising the age old The
New Drugs, Cosmetics and Medical Devices Act, need to bring in a regulatory structure in the context
of e pharmacy and teleconsultations, better clarity in the issue of Licenses as per Drugs and
Cosmetics Act (DCA) of 1940 etc.
Conclusion:
Conclude by saying that India should focus on a comprehensive, clear and concise regulatory
structure meeting the needs of the new age pharmaceutical industry.
Introduction
The Indian pharmaceutical industry is one of the major contributors to the Indian economy and it is
the world’s third-largest industry by volume. The Indian pharmaceutical industry’s success can be
credited to its world-class capabilities in formulation development, entrepreneurial abilities of its
people, and the vision of its business leaders to establish India’s footprint in the United States and
other large international markets.
Body
Strengths of Indian Pharmaceutical Sector
 According to the Economic Survey of 2020-21, the Indian pharmaceuticals sector is expected
to expand multifold and become a $ 130 billion industry by 2030, while medicine spending is
projected to grow rapidly too, leading India to become one of the top 10 countries in terms
of such expenditure.
 Potential of Pharma sector: The Indian pharmaceutical industry, valued at $41 billion, is
expected to grow to $65 billion by 2024 and $120-130 billion by 2030, noted the new
Economic survey.
 Rise in exports: Indian pharma exports have registered a growth of 103 percent since 2013-
14. This happens to be Pharma Sector’ best export performance ever till 2021-22.
 Positive growth: Drug formulations, biologicals have consistently registered positive

growth and the highest increase in absolute terms in recent months.
o This led to a rise in its share to 7.1 percent in April-November 2020 from 5 percent in
April-November 2019, making it the second-largest exported commodity among the
top 10 export commodities.
o This shows that India has the potential to be the ‘pharmacy of the world’”, the
survey said.

 In 1969, Indian pharmaceuticals had a 5 per cent share of the market in India, and global
pharma had a 95 per cent share. By 2020, it was the reverse, with Indian pharma having an
almost 85 per cent share and global, 15 per cent.
 Significant advantage: The availability of a significant raw material base and skilled
workforce have enabled India to emerge as an international manufacturing hub for generic
medicines.
 Further, India is the only country with the largest number of USFDA compliant pharma
plants (more than 262 including APIs) outside of the US.
 Capacity: The COVID-19 pandemic has shown that India can not only innovate but also
rapidly distribute time-critical drugs to every part of the globe that needs it.
 Global leader: Presently, over 80% of the antiretroviral drugs used globally to combat AIDS
(Acquired Immune Deficiency Syndrome) are supplied by Indian pharmaceutical firms.
Issues facing the Pharma industry:
 Overdependence: Indian pharma industries import about 80% of Active Pharmaceutical

Ingredients(API) from China. The API forms the base of drugs. With trade-wars at global
levels and wavering bilateral relations, there is a looming threat which can stall the Indian
pharma industries. In FY19, Indian pharma companies imported bulk drugs and
intermediates worth $2.4 million from China.
 Compliance issues and good manufacturing practices: Diversifying the global market has
been a problem with countries China and USA imposing Sanitary and Phyto-Sanitary(SPS)
barriers of WTO against generic drugs. The selective targeting by US Food and Drug
Administration and Chinese Drug regulators are a problem still.
 Drug Price Control Order: The companies sight that the reforms of the Government for the
essential medicines has caused them to lower the price of drugs. This has been done by the
Government for the betterment of the public.
 Stronger IP regulations: IP regulation has always been a thorn in the skin for the companies,
especially the foreign companies. The companies strongly feel that the rules have to be
amended and the so-called victim of the lax regulations have been the foreign entrants.
 Because of fewer costs associated with generic medicines, multiple applications for generic
drugs are often approved to market a single product; this creates competition in the
marketplace globally, typically resulting in lower prices. Pharma sector in India is also facing
steep headwinds on account of this.
 There is a lack of proper assessment of the performance of the pharmaceutical industry and
its efficiency and productivity and due to this many plants have not survived.
 Unregulated online pharmacies or e-pharmacies emerging in India have been a major

concern for authorized setups.
 There has been a significant drop in the flow of prescriptions as the Indian pharmaceutical
industry has been witnessing a decline in the overall quality of its medical representatives
(MRs). This is mainly on account of lack of training and support by the industry.

 In countries such as Russia, one requires to be a medical graduate to be a pharma sales

representative. In the European Union, one needs to pass stringent examinations to become
an MR. Once they qualify, they need to renew their certification every three years. But in
India, even non-graduates are performing as MRs without proper guidance.
Measures needed:
 India’s strong innovation capabilities aided partnerships would help in overcoming these
problems.
 Developing our R&D sector to reduce dependency on foreign countries for raw materials
 The introduction of pharmaceutical product patents and the mandatory implementation of

good manufacturing practices is the need of the hour.
 It is necessary for the Indian pharmaceutical industry to become globally competitive

through world-class manufacturing capabilities, with improved quality and a higher
efficiency of production, and there is a need to stress on the up-gradation of R&D
capabilities.
 Training and development of human resources for the pharmaceutical industry and drug
research and development should be done accordingly;
 There is also a need to promote public-private partnership for the development of the
pharmaceuticals industry; promote environmentally sustainable development of the
pharmaceutical industry; and enable the availability, accessibility, and affordability of drugs.
 Improvement in industrial practices to provide better training and support services for
employees to perform their job functions.
 Using multilateral organisation like WTO against the illegal trade practices.
 Funding for the pharma companies might be a way to move forward.
 IPR Think Tank formed by the Government to draft stronger national IP policies.
Conclusion
The affordability of healthcare is an issue of concern even in India, and people here would welcome
some clarity on the principles of fair pricing vis-à-vis medical products. It is important that the
accused companies are given a good hearing. The Government of India has taken up a number of
initiatives to create an ecosystem that fosters manufacturing in pharma industries.
Government Budgeting.
What is twin deficit? Examine as to how India can avoid the twin deficit problem
amidst rising commodity prices and subsidy burden. (250 words)
Reference: Indian Express , business-standard
Why the question:
The finance ministry on Monday cautioned the re-emergence of the twin deficit problem in the
economy, with higher commodity prices and rising subsidy burden leading to an increase in both
fiscal deficit and current account deficit. It’s also the first time the government has explicitly talked
about the possibility of fiscal slippage in the current fiscal year.

To write about twin deficit, concerns associated with it and measures needed to avoid the problem.
Introduction:
Begin by defining twin deficit.
Body:
First, write about the concerns associated with it and how it impacts various macro-economic
parameters.
Next, write about the ways in which it could be avoided – write about various Fiscal, Monetary and
other policy measures that are needed to avoid the twin deficit problem.
Conclusion:
Introduction
A twin deficit, also known as double deficit occurs when a nation has both a current account deficit
and a fiscal deficit. Fiscal deficit means expenditure higher than income, while current account
deficit (CAD) implies shrinking value of a country’s net foreign assets, which means less earnings and
more payments in foreign currency. These two deficits are expressed as a percentage of GDP.
RBI in its ‘Monthly Economic Review’ report highlighted two key areas of concern for the Indian
economy: the fiscal deficit and the current account deficit (or CAD).
Body
Highlights of the report
 Fiscal deficit
o Fiscal deficit may be high due to cuts in excise duties on diesel and petrol.
 Current account deficit
o Higher import bills may increase CAD: Costlier imports such as crude oil and other
commoditieswill not only widen the CAD but also depreciate the rupee.
 A weaker rupee will, in turn, make future imports costlier.

o Pulling out of funds from emerging markets: Rupee can also weaken if, in response
to higher interest rates in the western economies especially the US, foreign portfolio
investors (FPI) continue to pull out money from the Indian markets, which too will
hurt the rupee and further increase CAD.
Strategies to Reduce Fiscal Deficit:
 A deficit is usually financed through borrowing from either the central bank of the country or
raising money from capital markets by issuing different instruments like treasury bills and
bonds.
 A drastic reduction in expenditure on major subsidies. Reduction in expenditure on bonus,
LTC, leaves encashment, etc. Austerity steps to curtail non-plan expenditure.
 Tax base should be broadened and concessions and reduction in taxes should be curtailed.
Tax evasion should be effectively checked. More emphasis on direct taxes to increase
revenue. Restructuring and sale of shares in public sector units.

 Famous economist John Maynard Keynes opined that deficits actually assist nations in
climbing out of economic recessions.
 However, fiscal conservatives believe that deficits should be avoided by the government
which should be inclined towards a balanced budget policy.
Strategies to tackle CAD
 The Current Account Deficit could be reduced by boosting exports and curbing non-essential
imports such as gold, mobiles, and electronics.
 Currency hedging and bringing easier rules for manufacturing entities to raise foreign funds
could also help.
 The government and RBI could also look to review debt investment limits for FPIs, among
other measures.
 The imbalance in trade is now to be resolved by boosting exports.
 The blockage of funds under GST and uncertainties has left little or no working capital at the
disposal of exporters.
 Focussing on manufacturing in the labour-intensive sectors would bring the double benefits
of boosting exports and generating employment.
 Efforts are needed to reduce paperwork and costly over-regulation so as to make exporting
easier.
 Besides, RBI should keep a check on the external commercial borrowings to keep debt under
control.
Way forward
 Trim revenue expenditure(or the money government spends just to meet its daily needs)
 Rationalizing non-Capex (capital) expenditureto avoid fiscal slippages
 Use tight monetary policyto achieve fiscal consolidation
 Import cut of non-essential goodsand make exports of Indian goods competitive
 Reforming the Indian marketto make it attractive for FDI and FIIs.
Major crops cropping patterns in various parts of the country, different types of
irrigation and irrigation systems storage, transport and marketing of agricultural
produce and issues and related constraints; e-technology in the aid of farmers
What is Plasticulture? Do you think its environmental costs outweigh its economic
benefits? Critically comment. (250 words)
Reference: Hindustan Times
Why the question:
According to Food and Agriculture Organization experts, agricultural value chains use 12.5 million
tonnes of plastic products each year. Crop production and livestock combined accounted for 10.2

million tonnes (Mt) per year of plastics, followed by fisheries and aquaculture with 2.1 million tonnes
and forests with 0.2 million tonnes.
To write about Plasticulture, its pros and cons.
Directive word:
opinion thereupon.
Introduction:
Begin by defining plasticulture and its objectives.
Body:
First, write about the various components of plasticulture
Next, write about the benefits of plasticulture in agriculture and substantiate with facts and
examples.
Next, write about the limitations of plasticulture. Also, write about ways to reduce the limitations
associated with it.
Conclusion:
Conclude by commenting a balanced opinion of plasticulture.
Introduction
Plasticulture refers to the use of plastic in agricultural activities. This can include soil fumigation,
irrigation, the packaging of agricultural products, and the protection of harvests from
precipitation. Plastic also appears as a mulch or greenhouse cover.
While plasticulture has been touted as a way for farmers to efficiently grow crops with less water
and fewer fertilizers and pesticides, it has also been called into question for being environmentally
unsustainable. Problems cited include the contamination of soil, water, and food; air pollution; and
large quantities of plastic waste.
Body
Background
 The history of plasticulture started with the mass production of plastics, which began in the
1930s.
 Researchers discovered that one type of plastic, polyethylene, was well-suited to agricultural
use because of its durability, flexibility, and chemical resistance.
 It was first used as a greenhouse construction material in the 1940s as an alternative to

glass.
 The widespread use of plastic as an artificial mulch soon followed.
Benefits of plasticulture
 Mulching: Plastic mulch, which utilizes sheets of plastic that cover the soil with holes
allowing plants to grow through, became commercially available in the 1960s. Since then, it
has become the most widely-used form of plasticulture.
 Silage, Piping, Planters, and Storage: Another application of plasticulture today is as an

airtight cover for silage or other animal feed grains.

o Flexible plastic sheets can be wrapped tightly around harvested grains and straw
bales; this keeps them dry and fresh for months or more at a time.
o Polyvinyl chloride, or PVC, and polyethylene are both commonly used in pipes for
irrigation and hydroponic systems.
o These relatively light plastic tubing materials also resist corrosion, making them an
attractive alternative to metal pipes.
o Petroleum-based nursery pots, crates, and other containers made from durable but
lightweight plastics represent another significant category of plasticulture.
 Artificial ponds: Creation of artificial ponds using plastic to conserve water during the
monsoons. Domestically, Rajasthan and Maharashtra are at the forefront of promoting pond
liners in a big way and are witnessing robust growth prospects.
 Greenhouses: A farming technique wherein the crop is grown in a controlled environment

and is covered through firm nets or plastics through a frame.
Economic benefits outweigh environmental costs
 Plasticulture’s potential environmental benefits are often outweighed by adverse

environmental impacts such as greenhouse gas emissions, contamination of soil, water, air,
and food, and the generation of enormous quantities of plastic waste.
 Un-recycled agricultural plastics constitute an enormous volume of waste that creates

further environmental hazards when it is buried, burned, or dumped in landfills.
o This is a particular concern in developing countries that lack adequate waste

management infrastructure, but an enormous dilemma for developed countries as
well.
 Climate impact: A study of plastic greenhouses in China found that they were associated
with greater climate-altering greenhouse gas emissions such as carbon dioxide and nitrous
oxide, which is also a culprit in air pollution by contributing to particulate matter and ozone.
 Pollution: Conventional plastics are petroleum-based products made from fossil fuels. In
addition to pumping climate-altering greenhouse gases into the atmosphere, the plastics
manufacturing process creates air and water pollution that can affect workers and nearby
communities.
 Microplastic hazard: Another emerging concern involves how much plasticulture may be
contributing to the presence of microplastics in soil and water.
o Thin mulching film, in particular, is prone to deteriorate into tiny pieces of plastic,
which can affect soil quality, impacting microbes and other creatures that live in the
soil.
o The plastic particles are flushed into surface waters and ultimately oceans by rain
and irrigation, and they can also be absorbed by plants, potentially ending up in the
food system.
 While some of the heavy plastic used in greenhouse construction can be recycled or reused,
a significant portion is not. Even less of the lighter plastic used in mulching gets recycled

because it is very thin and often contaminated with pesticides, dirt, and fertilizers, making
reuse or recycling labour-intensive and expensive.
 Scientists are beginning to develop biodegradable alternatives to conventional plastic

mulch
 Biodegradables can be converted to carbon dioxide, water, and other natural substances by
soil microbes.
 Instead of necessitating removal like their conventional polyethylene counterparts, these

can be tilled back into the soil.
 Although using more biodegradable plastics and non-plastic alternatives cannot

completely resolve the environmental problems associated with plasticulture, they help
make a significant dent in combatting the detrimental effects of plastics in agriculture.
 The more growers, consumers, and governments support sustainable alternatives to

agricultural plastics—while amplifying practices like water conservation and reduced
chemical fertilizer and pesticide use—the healthier our communities, food system, and
planet will be.
National Mission on Edible Oils and Oil Palm (NMEO-OP) may be a step towards
“atmanirbharta” in palm oil production but its fraught with economic and ecological
concerns which need to be addressed. Analyse. (250 words)
Why the question:
The “excessive dependence” on imports has raised the pitch for “atmanirbharta” in edible oil. The
Prime Minister launched the National Edible Oil Mission-Oil Palm (NEOM-OP) in 2021.
To write about the potential drawbacks of the National Mission on Edible Oils and Oil Palm (NMEO-
OP) with respect to overzealous push on cultivation of oil palm.
Directive word:
Critically analyse – When asked to analyse, you must examine methodically the structure or nature
Introduction:
Write about National Mission on Edible Oils and Oil Palm (NMEO-OP), its aims and objectives.
Body:
Mention the recent push by the government towards cultivation of palm in India. The areas chosen
for its cultivation.
Next, mention benefits India will accrue from achieving self-reliance in palm oil.
Write about potential pitfalls and negative outcome of this mission with respect to Oil palm.
Deforestation, damaging effects on the environment and human rights violation etc.
Conclusion:
Introduction

India needs 25 million tonnes of edible oils to meet its requirement at current consumption level
of 19 kg per person per year. India is dependent on imported edible oils, with nearly 15 million
tonnes (MT) of edible oils getting imported to meet the country’s annual requirement of about 22
mt. Of the total 15 MT of import, about 9 MT (or nearly 60 per cent) is palm oil and its derivatives.
Aimed at making India self-sufficient in edible oils, National Mission on Edible Oils and Oil Palm
(NMEO-OP) involves an investment of over ₹11,000 crore towards palm oil development.
Body
NMEO – OP will help achieve the much-desired self-reliance in palm oil:
 NMEO covering three Sub-Missions to increase production of oilseeds and edible oils from
o Primary Sources (Annual Crops, Plantation Crops and Edible TBOs),
o Secondary Sources (Rice bran oil and Cotton seed oil) and
o Consumer Awareness for maintaining edible oil consumption constant at 00 kg per

person per annum.
 The proposed mission will aim to increase production from 30.88 to 47.80 million tonnes of
oilseeds which will produce 7.00 to 11.00 million tonnes of edible oils from Primary
Sources by 2024-25.
 Similarly edible oils from secondary sources will be doubled from 3.50 to 7.00 million
tonnes.
 As per the roadmap, the government will work towards shooting up the cultivation of oil
palm to 10 lakh hectares and 16.7 lakh hectares by 2025-26 and 2029-30 respectively.
 It is expected to incentivise production of palm oil to reduce dependence on

imports and help farmers cash in on the huge market.
 The special emphasis of the scheme will be in India’s north-eastern states and the Andaman
and Nicobar Islands due to the conducive weather conditions in the regions.
 Under the scheme, oil palm farmers will be provided financial assistance and will get
remuneration under a price and viability formula.
 Along with promoting the cultivation of oil palm, this mission will also expand the
cultivation of our other traditional oilseed crops.
 The following action points will be initiated for increasing production and productivity of
oilseeds and promotion of Secondary Sources of Edible oils:
o Increasing seed replacement rate and varietal replacement rate
o Promotion of oilseed in rice fallow/ potato areas
o Promotion of oilseeds through intercropping
o Extending oilseed cultivation in non-traditional area
o Targeting 100 low productivity districts
o Crop diversification in different regions

o Promotion of community-based oil extraction unit
o Value addition and promotion of export
o Promotion of rice bran and cotton seed oil
o Consumer awareness for judicious consumption of oils for good health
Concerns which NMEO-OP poses:
Environmental Consequences:
 Studies on agrarian change in Southeast Asia have shown that increasing oil palm
plantations is a major reason for the region’s declining biodiversity. Indonesia has seen a loss
of 1,15,495 hectares of forest cover in 2020, mainly to oil palm plantation.
 From 2002-18, Indonesia lost 91,54,000 hectares of its primary forest cover.
 Along with adversely impacting the country’s biodiversity, it has led to increasing water
pollution.
 The decreasing forest cover has significant implications with respect to increasing carbon
emission levels and contributing to climate change.
 The Northeast is recognised as the home of around 850 bird species.
 The region is home to citrus fruits, it is rich in medicinal plants and harbours rare plants and
herbs.
 Above all, it has 51 types of forests. Studies conducted by the government have also
highlighted the Northeast’s rich biodiversity.
 The palm oil policy could destroy this richness of the region.
 The policy also contradicts the government’s commitments under the National Mission for
Sustainable Agriculture: “Making agriculture more productive, sustainable, remunerative
and climate resilient by promoting location specific integrated/composite farming systems.”
The palm oil mission, instead, aims at achieving complete transformation of the farming
system of Northeast India.
Political Consequences:
 Palm oil plantations have stoked conflict between government policies and customary land
rights.
 Such rights are major livelihood sources for forest-dependent communities.
 Legislation allowing the clearing of tree cover and cutting forests for growing palm trees has
led to increasing land-related tussles between government officials, locals and agro-business
groups in Malaysia and Indonesia.
 The North-eastern states of India are politically sensitive areas, and the oil palm initiative
could breed tension there.
Socio-Economic Consequences:

 Such initiatives are also against the notion of community self-reliance: The initial state
support for such a crop results in a major and quick shift in the existing cropping pattern that
are not always in sync with the agro-ecological conditions and food requirements of the
region.
 Studies have shown that in case of variations in global palm oil prices, households
dependent on palm oil cultivation become vulnerable – they manage to sustain themselves
with help of proactive state intervention.
 A sizable number of small landholders continues to depend upon other sources of income.
 In other words, such an agricultural shift is not self-sustaining and makes local communities
vulnerable and exposes them to external factors.
Way forward:
 Farm-level measures
o Irrigation increases the yield. Example: groundnut oil production swings up and
down on a wide basis with just 20-25 per cent of the crop under irrigation. Soybean
oil, production of which nearly doubled between 2003-04 and 2013-14, has been
able to contribute what it did with just less than 1% of the crop under irrigation
cover (in contrast, rapeseed-mustard crops have 70-75 per cent irrigation cover).
o Targeted focus based on the agro-climatic conditions and incentivisation of farmers

to cultivate the suitable crop of region. Example: oil palm cultivation where India
imports the maximum from South-east Asian countries.
o Large scale adoption of agro-ecological methods like System of Crop

Intensification, Relay Cropping is needed. This will not only increase productivity
but also reduce use of water resources, and reduce cost of cultivation for farmers.
 Institution-level measures
o Better extension systems with downward accountability with the last mile extension
gaps plugged as is happening with many agro-ecology centred programmes,
productivity can be improved. The practising farmers become Community Level
Resource Persons (CRPs).
o Community level planning processes and institutional frameworks have enabled

better utilisation of scarce resources like groundwater for emergency irrigation for
groundnut cultivation in states like Andhra Pradesh. These need to be replicated on
a large scale.
 Policy-level measures
o Higher import duties for imported oil, Remunerative prices, Assured procurement,
Domestic pricing will enthuse farmers by increasing their net returns.
o Policies and missions like NMOOP, ISOPOM to incentivise the very cultivation of
oilseeds on a per hectare basis.
o Provide incentives to private sector participation in processing and value addition in

oilseed crops. Also, constraints for low-capacity utilization should be addressed.

 Research and Development
o There is a need to enlarge the scope of research, technology diffusion and

institutional intervention to re-energize the oil sector.
o This would include increase public research spending in oilseed crops for
development of biotic and abiotic stress tolerant varieties.
Conclusion
India must become self-sufficient in edible oil production and this must become a part of India’s
Aatmanirbharta. Certain WTO compliant incentives must be given to farmers in increasing the
growth of oilseed production in the country to ensure domestic cultivation.
Value addition:
National Mission on Edible Oils – Oil Palm (NMEO – OP):
To increase domestic availability and reduce import dependency, a National Mission on Edible Oils
(NMEO) is proposed for next five years (2020-21 to 2024-25).
Aims and Objectives of the scheme:
 Achieve self-reliance in edible oil.
 Harness domestic edible oil prices that are dictated by expensive palm oil imports.
 To raise the domestic production of palm oil by three times to 11 lakh MT by 2025-26.
Issues related to direct and indirect farm subsidies and minimum support prices;
Public Distribution System- objectives, functioning, limitations, revamping; issues
of buffer stocks and food security; Technology missions; economics of animal-
rearing.
Agriculture is extremely vulnerable to climate change. The accelerating pace of
climate change, combined with global population and income growth, threatens food
security everywhere. Discuss. (250 words)
Why the question:
To write about the impact of climate change on Indian agriculture and suggest steps to adapt to it.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin the answer by context.
Body:

Mention the way in which climate change in impacting agriculture. Reduced yields, encouraging
weed and pest proliferation. Changes in precipitation patterns, crop failures and long-run production
declines etc. Cite statistics to substantiate your points.
Write about the measures that are needed to mitigate its impact.
Conclusion:
Introduction
Climate change generates considerable uncertainty about future water availability in many regions.
It will affect precipitation, runoff and snow/ice melt, with effects on hydrological systems, water
quality and water temperature, as well as on groundwater recharge. In many regions of the world,
increased water scarcity under climate change will present a major challenge for climate
adaptation. Sea-level rise will affect the salinity of surface and groundwater in coastal areas
Body
Climate change and agriculture
 Extreme heat: Crops need suitable soil, water, sunlight, and heat to grow. However, extreme
heat events and reductions in precipitation and water availability have hampered the crop
productivity.
 Changing Rainfall Patterns: Rainfall patterns have already begun shifting across the country,
and such changes are expected to intensify over the coming years.
o This is likely to mean more intense periods of heavy rain and longer dry periods,
even within the same regions.
 Floods: Flooding in many agricultural regions of the country have been witnessed and these
floods have devastated crops and livestock, accelerated soil erosion and have polluted
water.
 Yield: Milk yield in livestock to be impacted during heat waves.
o Changes in breeding season in marine fisheries with shift in seasonal catch 

Significant negative impact on commercial poultry due to heat stress.
 High rainfall leads to greater loss of top soil due to erosion.
 Rise in sea level may lead to loss of farmland by inundation and increasing salinity of
groundwater in coastal areas.
 The major impacts of climate change will be on rain fed or un-irrigated crops, which are
cultivated on nearly 60 percent of cropland.
 Increase in the mean seasonal temperature can reduce the duration of many crops and
hence reduce final yield.
 Climate change has a direct impact on crop evapotranspiration.
Impact on food security
 Climate change has been found to have an impact on food safety, particularly on incidence
and prevalence of food-borne diseases. Increased climate variability, increased frequency
and intensity of extreme events as well as slow ongoing changes will affect the stability
of food supply, access and utilization.
 Impact translates from climate to the environment, to the productive sphere, to economic
and social dimensions, bringing a range of additional risks on availability of food, on
access to food and utilization of food, as well as on the stability of these characteristics, for
both farm and non-farm households.
 At the farm/household level, climate change impacts may reduce income level and
stability, through effects on productivity, production costs or prices.
o Such variations can drive sales of productive capital, such as cattle, which reduces
long-term household productive capacity.
o Exposure to risks lowers incentives to invest in production systems, often

with negative impacts on long-term productivity, returns and sustainability.
o Reductions and risks to agricultural income have also been shown to have effects on
household capacity and willingness to spend on health and education.
o Evidence from recent analyses of the impacts of various types of weather anomalies
on farm income indicates that the impacts are greatest for the poorest farmers.
 At national level, exposure to climate risks can trigger shocks on agricultural
production and food availability, with risks of market disruptions, effects on supply and
storage systems, as well as increases in agricultural commodity prices (food and feed),
impacting accessibility and stability of food supplies for the entire population, particularly in
countries with significant shares of the population spending a large part of their income on
food.
o This triggers macro-economic effects for countries for which agriculture is an

important part of GDP and/ or constitutes an important source of employment.
o Climatic risks can also hinder agricultural development by discouraging investments.
 At global level, climatic shocks impacting areas of global importance for food supplies can
have remote impacts through effects on: (i) supply flows and food price spikes, with
increased market volatility; and (ii) impacts on bilateral contracts and/or import/export
behaviour with disruption of trade patterns.
Conclusion
Food price volatility is likely to be exacerbated by climate change. Trade is expected to play a major
role in adjusting to climate-change-driven shifts in agricultural and food production patterns. Recent
experience indicates that climate change effects on food price volatility are greatly influenced by
domestic policies, with export bans contributing to price fluctuations. Ultimately, global markets will
not be accessible to the poorest countries and the poorest populations without sufficient purchasing
power.
Minimum support prices (MSP) are meant to function as a safety net. Yet, they are
unable to become the means of farmer’s income security as intended. Analyse. (250
words)


Why the question:
The government has announced minimum support prices, MSPs, for 14 summer crops, chief among
which is rice. While the average increase is 6%, the increase for rice is the lowest, at 5.1%.
To write about the current limitations of MSP and changes that are needed in it.
Directive:
Introduction:
Begin the defining the concept of MSP.
Body:
Frist, write about the various objectives behind MSP.
Next, write about the reasons as to why MSP has not achieved its stated objectives – MSP distorts
the basic logic of the supply-demand mechanism, slows down the process of diversification, and is
economically a very expensive and inefficient policy instrument, besides leading to massive leakages
and corruption.
Next, discuss what needs to be done. Highlight the efforts of the government in this direction
Conclusion:
Write a way forward.
Introduction
Minimum Support Price (MSP)is the rate at which the government buys grains from farmers.
Currently, it fixes MSPs for 23 crops grown in both Kharif and Rabi seasons. The Minimum Support
Prices (MSP) for the Khari season 2022-23 were recently approved by the cabinet. The rates for 14
Kharif crops have been increased, the hikes ranging from 4% to 8%.
Body
Yes, MSP helps farmers to an extent
 MSP has been beneficial in transferring incomes to rural areas and to counter farm level
inflation.
 It can also counter the agricultural distress brought on by natural hazards in the country. It
gives farmers hope of earning more in the new sowing season.
 In the last few years, India has become a net importer of pulses. Massive hike in the MSP of
these crops will encourage the farmers to grow nutritional crops. It will help in changing the
cropping pattern which was long due.
 A higher MSP regime will also help in achieving the Government’s target of doubling
farmer’s income by 2022.
 It also acts as an incentive for farmers to produce the crop which is in short supply.
 Higher profits for the farmer will also help them to invest in necessary infrastructure and
equipment.
 The MSP to some extent will protect the farmer by guaranteeing a minimum floor price so
that they can plan in advance for the next season.
However, MSP is fraught with limitations

The trouble with MSP is that while it is touted as an all-important factor for farmers promising an
instant rise in their income and stability, it also has many drawbacks in implementation. This affects
the price realisation of farmers, in reality for several reasons.
 Methodology: MSP covers numerous costs such as the cost of sowing (A2) and labour (FL).
These considerations are controversial with suggestions that it should be based
on comprehensive costs (C2), which also include land rent costs.
 Inflation: Too much of a hike on MSP either paves way for inflationary effects on the
economy, with a rise in prices of food grains and vegetables, or loss to government treasury
if it decides to sell at a lower price as compared to the higher MSP it bought at.
 Diverse factors: MSP is a nationwide single price policy. However, the actual costing for
production varies from place to place, more severely so in areas lacking irrigation facilities
and infrastructure. Thus, not all farmers have equal benefits.
 Procurement at MSP is flawed: First, procurement of wheat and paddy for meeting the
requirement of the public distribution system (PDS) is undertaken largely by state
governments.
o Of the total procurement of wheat and paddy from farmers, the Food Corporation of
India’s (FCI’s) share is less than 10%.
o In the north-east and many other states, procurement operations are almost non-
existent and farmers are forced to sell below MSP.
o As the experiences of these schemes show, the benefit of higher MSPs for kharif
crops or rabi, is unlikely to be available to most farmers as the states lack adequate
storage capacity, working capital and manpower for undertaking large-scale
procurement of all commodities.
o The MSP-based procurement system is also dependent on middlemen, commission

agents and APMC officials, which smaller farmers find difficult to get access to.
 Agri-Infrastructure: Hiking the MSP without investing in infrastructure is just a short-term
play. While it does deliver immediate results, long-term developments to back-it up are also
important.
 Environmental harm: It degrades the soil because of irrespective of the soil condition, some
crops are preferred which have MSP over them which results in exploitation of group water
resources, alkalinity, decrease in the production of the crops in long run and much harm to
environment.
Conclusion
The government should shift its focus from providing only price support to farmers and focus on
building better infrastructure, minimizing the gap between farmers and the market, land reforms,
policy reforms to increase flow of credit to farmers, establishing food-processing industries for
perishable goods, providing better irrigation facilities etc so, that agriculture emerges as a viable
means of sustenance.

Soil Security and Food and Nutrition Security are interconnected. Soil degradation
drives food insecurity and sustainable interventions are urgently needed in this
regard. Analyse. (250 words)
Why the question:
A key element of sustainable food production is healthy soil because nearly 95 per cent of global food
production depends on soil. The current status of soil health is worrisome.
To write role of soil conservation in food security and interventions need to preserve soil health.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by giving context and developing link between Soil Security and Food and Nutrition Security.
Body:
First, elaborate on the link between Soil Security and Food and Nutrition Security in detail. Cite
statistics and examples to substantiate.
Next, write about the various causes of soil degradation and its impact.
Next, write about the various steps that are required to counter it.
Conclusion:
Introduction
Soil plays a central role for economic and social development. It ensures food, fodder and renewable
energy supplies to sustain human, animal and plant life. About one-third of the earth’s soils is
already degraded and alarmingly, about 90 per cent could be degraded by 2050 if no corrective
action is taken. While soil degradation is believed to be occurring in 145 million hectares in India, it is
estimated that 96.40 million hectares — about 30 per cent of the total geographical area — is
affected by land degradation.
Body
Relation b/w Soil health and Food & Nutrition Security
 Nearly 95 per cent of global food production depends on soil.
 Soil degradation on an unprecedented scale is a significant challenge to sustainable food

production.
 Extensive use of fertilisers and pesticides led to the deterioration of soil health and
contamination of water bodies and the food chain, which pose serious health risks to people
and livestock.
Reasons for soil degradation
 Soil erosion
o It is the removal of soil by forces of nature, particularly wind & water, more rapidly
than the soil forming process can replace it
o It affects agricultural productivity and economy of country as whole

 Water Erosion
o It is the detachment and removal of soil material by water
o It manifests in the form of rilling, gullying, sheetwash and rain peeling process
o The rate of erosion depends on soil properties, slope and vegetation cover
 Wind Erosion
o The blowing wind removes the top soil layer, and wind erosion is accentuated when
soil is dry, weakly aggregated and devoid of vegetation cover
 The Human factors of soil erosion include:
o Deforestation, that leaves the soil devoid of binding material
o Overgrazingloosens the soil structure
o Faulty agricultural methods such as ploughing, lack of crop rotation and practice of
shifting cultivation
o Excessive use of fertilizers over a period of time renders the soil infertile.
o The global annual production of industrial chemicals has doubled since the
beginning of the 21st century, to approximately 2.3 billion tonnes, and is projected
to increase by 85 per cent by the end of the decade.
 Desertification
o This is the spread of desert like conditions in arid/semi-arid regions due to man’s
influence or climate change
o This process can be attributed to factors such as:
1. Uncontrolled grazing
2. Reckless felling of trees
3. Population pressures
o It has the potential to result in excessive wind erosion, decreasing productivity and
increasing frequency of droughts
 Waterlogging
o The flat and saucer like depressions make movement of surface water sluggish
leading to accumulation of rain water, thereby resulting in waterlogging
o Also, seepage from unlined channels or canal systems leads to waterlogging in

contiguous arable lands
o Around 12 million hectares of land suffers from waterlogging in India
 Salinity and Alkalinity
o These are the result of over irrigation in irrigated areas

o When farmers indulge in over irrigation, the ground water level rises resulting in salt
deposition, due to capillary action
o Alkalinity implies dominance of sodium salts
 Wasteland and urban development
o Soil toxicity through chemicals is increasing with urbanisation.
o More municipal and industrial wastes are being dumped in the soil with heavy
metals having carcinogenic effects
o Studies indicate the high concentration and accumulation of heavy metals in urban
soils
 Industrialisation affecting Soil
o Industrialisation is progressively taking away considerable areas of land from

agriculture, forestry, grassland and pasture, and unused lands with wild vegetation
o Example: Opencast miningis of particular focus because it disturbs the physical,

chemical, and biological features of the soil and alters the socioeconomic features of
a region.
o Also, Mineral production generates enormous quantities of waste/overburden and

tailings/slimes and hence soil from a huge land area gets degraded
Measures needed
 Adopting innovative policies and agro-ecological practices that create healthy and
sustainable food production systems
 There is an urgent need for action to reduce dependence on pesticides worldwide and to
promote policies advocating healthy and sustainable food systems and agricultural
production.
 Alternatives such as bio fertilisers and organic chemicals to be promoted.
 Human settlement must be encouraged in barren lands to save fertile land for agriculture
 Contour bunding, terrace farming, afforestation etc, must be practised which help in soil
runoff
 More research labs and boost to the initiative of soil health card with awareness campaigns
to educate people about soil health.
 Industrialization should be promoted on barren, unproductive land and away from agri land.
 Making compulsory waste treatment plant for industries
Conclusion
As soil is a fragile and finite resource, sustainable land management practices are essential to ensure
healthy soil. They are critical not only to preventing degradation but also to ensuring food security.
Every effort must also be made to prevent soil erosion as it not only affects fertility but also
increases the risk of floods and landslides.

Food processing and related industries in India- scope and significance, location,
upstream and downstream requirements, supply chain management.
Food processing industry in India is poised for huge growth, increasing its contribution
to world food trade every year. It has emerged as a high-growth and high-profit sector
due to its immense potential for value addition. Elaborate. (250 words)
Reference: Insights on India/
Why the question:
To write about the potential of food processing in driving the economy and linking it with consumer
and industry.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by giving statistic regarding the extend of food processing industry in India is
Body:
First, write about the scope of food processing in India – A well-developed food processing industry is
expected to increase farm gate prices, reduce wastages, ensure value addition, promote crop
diversification, generate employment opportunities as well as export earnings.
Next, write about various bottlenecks faced by the industry and the steps that are needed to ensure
its growth.
Conclusion:
Introduction
Food processing generally includes the basic preparation of foods, the alteration of a food product
(usually raw) into another form (as in making preserves from fruit), and preservation and packaging
techniques. Food processing typically takes harvested crops or animal products and uses these to
produce long shelf-life food products.
Body:
Significance of the food processing industries:
The Food Processing Industry (FPI) is of enormous significance as it provides vital linkages and
synergies that it promotes between the two pillars of the economy, i.e. agriculture and industry.
 Employment Opportunities: Food processing industries can absorb a major share of workers
from the agriculture sector, who face disguised unemployment. It can lead to better
productivity and GDP growth.
 Doubling of farmers’ income: With contract farming, farmers can get better technological
inputs from industries as well. There is income security and proportionate value for produce.
They are also protected against price shocks.
 Crop-diversification: Food processing will require different types of inputs thus creating an
incentive for the farmer to grow and diversify crops.

 Farmer Beneficiaries: The SAMPADA scheme is estimated to benefit about 37 lakh farmers
and generate about 5.6 lakh direct/ indirect employment (ES 2020 data).
 Curbing Distress Migration: Provides employment in rural areas, hence reduces migration
from rural to urban. Resolves issues of urbanization.
 Prevents Wastage: Nearly one-third of the food that is produced each year goes uneaten,
costing the global economy over $940 billion as per report by World Resources Institute
(WRI)
o India is biggest producer of numerous fruits and vegetable. Most of these are
perishable and have very low shelf life. This is the major reason for high percentage
of wastage. Their shelf life can be increased through food processing.
 Value Addition: Products such as tomato sauce, roasted nuts, de-hydrated fruits are in high
demand.
 Reduce malnutrition: Processed foods when fortified with vitamins and minerals can reduce
the nutritional gap in the population.
 Boosts Trade and Earns Foreign exchange: It is an important source of foreign exchange. For
e.g. Indian Basmati rice is in great demand in Middle Eastern countries.
 Make in India: Food processing is one of the six superstar sectors under the GoI’s, Make in
India initiative and has the potential to transform India as a leading food processing
destination of the World.
 Curbing Food Inflation: Processing increases the shelf life of the food thus keeping supplies
in tune with the demand thereby controlling food-inflation.
o For e.g. Frozen peas/ corn are available throughout the year.
o Similarly, canned onions under Operation Greens can achieve price stability.
Challenges facing food processing industry in India
 Demand of processed food is mainly restricted to urban areas of India.
 Major problems are listed below:
o Small and dispersed marketable surplus due to fragmented holdings
o Low farm productivity due to lack of mechanization,
o High seasonality of raw materials
o Perishability and lack of proper intermediation (supply chain) result in lack of

availability of raw material.
o This in turn, impedes food processing and its exports.

 More than 30% of the produce from farm gate is lost due to inadequate cold chain
infrastructure.
 The NITI Aayog cited a study that estimated annual post-harvest losses close to Rs 90,000
crore.

 Lack of all-weather roads and connectivity make supply erratic.
 The food processing industry has a high concentration of unorganised segments,

representing almost 75% across all product categories. Thus, causes the inefficiencies in the
existing production system.
 Further, most processing in India can be classified as primary processing, which has lower
value-addition compared to secondary processing.
 Due to this, despite India being one of the largest producers of agricultural commodities in
the world, agricultural exports as a share of GDP are fairly low in India relative to the rest of
the world.
Solutions to address the challenges
 The Ministry of Food Processing Industries (MoFPI) is implementing PMKSY (Pradhan Mantri
Kisan SAMPADA Yojana). The objective of PMKSY is to supplement agriculture, modernize
processing and decrease agri-waste.
o Mega Food Parks.
o Integrated Cold Chain, Value Addition and Preservation Infrastructure.
o Creation/Expansion of Food Processing/Preservation Capacities.
o Infrastructure for Agro Processing Clusters.
o Scheme for Creation of Backward and Forward Linkages.
 Foreign Direct Investment (FDI) policy: FDI up to 100%, under the automatic route is
allowed in food processing industries.
 Agri Export Zones: To give thrust to export of agro products, new concept of Agri Export
Zones was brought in 2001. APEDA has been nominated as the Nodal Agency to coordinate
the efforts
o cluster approach of identifying the potential products;
o the geographical region in which these products are grown;
o Adopting an end-to-end approach of integrating the entire process right from the
stage of production till it reaches the market (farm to market).
Conclusion
Food processing has a promising future, provided adequate government support is there. Food is the
biggest expense for an urban Indian household. About 35 % of the total consumption expenditure of
households is generally spent on food. As mentioned, food processing has numerous advantages
which are specific to Indian context. It has the capacity to lift millions out of undernutrition.
Government has its work cut out to develop industry in a way which takes care of small scale
industry along with attracting big ticket domestic and foreign investments.

Infrastructure: Energy, Ports, Roads, Airports, Railways etc.

Nuclear energy is proven, scalable and reliable, and its expanded use will be essential
for many countries to achieve their decarbonization goals. Do you think its benefits
outweigh the risks posed by it? Comment. (250 words)
Why the question:
As energy security becomes a growing source of angst, it’s clear that large-scale reliable use of
renewable resources remain a distant reality in many countries. That has given a controversial but
almost perfect alternative a comeback chance: nuclear.
To write about potential and limitations of nuclear energy in India.
Directive word:
Comment– here we must express our knowledge and understanding of the issue and form an overall
opinion thereupon.
Introduction:
Start with prospects of Nuclear energy in general.
Body:
First, write about the potential of nuclear energy in India and India’s progress so far with respect to it
as well its role in energy security of India.
Next, write about risks associated with nuclear energy and highlight with examples why we shouldn’t
depend completely on nuclear. Cite examples to substantiate.
Conclusion:
Conclude by writing a balanced opinion about nuclear energy.
Introduction
Nuclear Energy plays a critical role in achieving sustainable economic and social development.
Modern civilization heavily depends on energy for daily activities. Energy is like a lifeline for the
sustenance and progress of the entire world. Nuclear energy plays a vital role in the world economy
by generating jobs, income and facilitating trade on a massive scale.
Expanded use of nuclear technologies offered immense potential to meet important development
needs. In fact, to satisfy energy demands and to mitigate the threat of climate change — two of the
21st century’s greatest challenges — there are major opportunities for expansion of nuclear energy.
Body
Potential & benefits of nuclear energy as a source of power:
 Thorium and Uranium reserves: India has vast reserves of Thorium that can fuel India’s
nuclear energy provided appropriate technology. India’s thorium deposits, estimated at
360,000 tonnes, and natural uranium deposits at 70,000 tonnes. The country’s thorium
reserves make up 25% of the global reserves.
 Energy poverty: Although India is the 3rdlargest producer of electricity, about 20 % of the
population of the country does not have access to electricity today. The per capita
consumption of electricity is very low at about 1,181 kWh per annum, about half of the
world average and way below that of advanced countries. There exist shortages in energy
and peak power in the range 10-15%.

 Energy demand:Nuclear energy is a critical part for India’s future energy security. As we
know India’s annual energy demand is expected to rise to 800 GW by 2032, it is very
important to consider every source of energy in the optimum energy mix.
 Energy efficiency: Quantities of nuclear fuel needed are considerably less than thermal
power plants. For instance, 10000 MW generation by coal will need 30-35 million tons of
coal, but nuclear fuel needed will be only 300-350 tons.
 Economic growth:Rapid economic growth is also critical to achieve developmental

objectives and poverty alleviation. A sustained economic growth of about 8 to 10% is
needed over the next few decades. As electricity is a key driver for economic growth, it is
necessary that there is a massive augmentation in electricity capacity, apart from
transmissions and distribution systems.
 Decrease in Energy Supply:Energy supply has been negatively affected by changing weather
patterns. As water reservoirs decreases due to lower precipitation and increased
evaporation, capacity for electricity production from hydropower and other water-intensive
generation technologies may decline.
 Climate change:Due to its emission-free nature, nuclear energy can contribute to global
efforts under the Paris Agreement. India’s Nationally Determined Contribution (NDC) to the
United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change (UNFCCC) has outlined goals to
reduce the carbon emissions intensity of its economy by 33-35% by 2030 as well as increase
the clean energy electricity capacity to 40% of the total installed capacity in the same period.
Risks posed by Nuclear Energy:
 India’s domestic Uranium Reserve can support only 10000 MW of energy. So our future
potential depends upon development of third stage of Nuclear Program.
 Otherwise, there will be again overdependence upon imported Uranium as it is case with Oil
currently. Hence, long term strategy will be only determined when third stage is functional.
 Current Nuclear reactors consume significant amount of water. So, most of upcoming plants
will be set up near sea coasts.
 It will put pressure on the coastline as India’s Western coastline is home to fragile ecology of
Western Ghats.
 Further, till now only 21 plants have been operational. There are long gestation periods
which increase costs of the plant significantly. Only a Nuclear Industry revolution in the
future in nuclear energy can make this achievable.
 New safeguard requirements post Fukushima disaster, has pushed per MW costs of nuclear
reactors significantly higher in comparison to Thermal, solar and wind plants.
 Jaitapur plant in Maharashtra (AREVA) is expected to cost 21 crore/ MW in comparison

other sources cost 8-10 crore/ MW. It is to be seen that whether differences of operational/
running costs justify such higher capital expenditure on nuclear plants.
 Some argue that Total costs of a Nuclear Lifecycle which involves Mining of Uranium,
transportation and storage, capital costs of plants, processing/ reprocessing of plants,
possible disasters and then handling of waste generated for hundreds of years is significantly

more that economic value generated during lifetime of the functioning of the plant, which is
generally 40-50 years.
 Nuclear installations will be favorite targets of terrorists (also in case of war) which can
cause irreversible damage to people living in nearby areas.
 In long run if worldwide dependence on nuclear energy increases, it will be most

unavoidable way of nuclear proliferation as interest and attempt to invest in indigenous
industry will increase.
 Otherwise, smaller counties will continue to buy relevant technologies or components from
a few western countries which will serve private interest of few.
 India doesn’t yet have credible waste disposal policy and infrastructure in place.
Conclusion
Nuclear energy, though is critical for India’s energy security but is not panacea for the problem.
People of India have right to have safe and sustainable energy. So future development should
depend upon cost benefit analysis taking into account all the externalities involved in various
components of energy mix. If this is done, it is most likely that policy will get incline strongly in favor
of non-conventional sources of energy that is solar, wind and biomass.
Investment models.
Infrastructure is critically linked to growth and economic performance. Critically
analyse the role of National Monetisation Pipeline (NMP) as a pioneering initiative of
value creation in Infrastructure. (250 words)
Why the question:
Directive word:
Critically analyze –
When asked to analyse, you must examine methodically the structure or nature of the topic by
separating it into component parts and present them in a summary. When ‘critically’ is suffixed or
prefixed to a directive, one needs to look at the good and bad of the topic and give a balanced
judgment on the topic.
Introduction:
Begin by writing about National Monetisation Pipeline (NMP) its aims and objectives.
Body:
In the first part, write about the various features of National Monetisation Pipeline (NMP).
Next, write about the potential benefits that the government will accrue from the NMP – revenue,
improve on efficiency of use of assets, addition of gross savings in the economy etc.
Write about the potential challenges to the newly proposed NMP. Lack of identifiable revenues
streams in various assets, absence of dispute resolution mechanism etc.
Conclusion:
Introduction

Recently, the government of India has launched the National Monetisation Pipeline (NMP), a
roadmap for asset monetisation of various brownfield infrastructure assets across sectors.
NMP will help in evolving a common framework for monetisation of core assets. The NMP estimates
aggregate monetisation potential of Rs 6 lakh crores through core assets of the Central Government,
over a four-year period, from FY 2022 to FY 2025.
Body
National Monetisation Pipeline: Aims and objectives
 Objectives: To unlock the value of investments in brownfield public sector assets by tapping
institutional and long-term capital, which can thereafter be leveraged for public
investments.
o To enable ‘Infrastructure Creation through Monetisation’ wherein the public and

private sector collaborate, each excelling in their core areas of competence, so as to
deliver socio-economic growth.
 The four-year National Monetisation Pipeline (NMP) will unlock value in brownfield
projects by engaging the private sector, transferring to them the rights but not the
ownership in projects.
 Components: Roads, railways and power sector assets will comprise over 66 per cent of the
total estimated value of the assets to be monetised, with the balance coming from sectors
including telecom, mining, aviation, ports, natural gas and petroleum product pipelines,
warehouses and stadiums.
 The NMP will run co-terminus with the Rs 100 lakh crore National Infrastructure
Pipeline (NIP) announced in December 2019.
o The estimated amount to be raised through monetisation is around 14% of the

proposed outlay for the Centre of Rs 43 lakh crore under NIP.
Challenges
 Financial Challenges: Lack of identifiable revenue streams in various infrastructure assets.
o For instance, a significant proportion of National Infrastructure Pipeline is to be

financed by the Private Sector but the mechanisms for revenue transfer have not
be specified.
o Difficulty in attracting investors: Less-than-encouraging bids in the recently

launched PPP initiative in trains indicate that attracting private investors’ interest is
not that easy.
o Leasing of public utilities to private investors could lead to higher prices for
consumers.
 Regulatory Challenges: Lack of independent sectoral regulators who could provide

dedicated domain expertise and simultaneously aid development of the sector.
 Structural problems such as legal uncertainty and the absence of a deep bond market that
hold back private investment in infrastructure.
o This is further compounded by Inefficient Dispute resolution mechanism.

 The allocation of assets owned by governments to private investors is often subject to

political influence, which can lead to corruption.
 Asset-specific Challenges: Low Level of capacity utilisation in gas and petroleum pipeline
networks.
o Regulated tariffs in power sector assets.
o Low interest among investors in national highways below four lanes.
Way forward and conclusion
NMP is a great step forward but successful execution of the plan remains key to its success.
 For this, Contracts must be designed to allow for some flexibility for addressing unforeseen
developments (such as climate-related disasters) and to prevent needless and longwinded
litigation.
 Clear quality benchmarks must be set for the assets that are handed over by the
government and for KPIs expected of the private party for operating and maintaining the
asset.
 There is a need to set up a robust mechanism for dispute resolution relating to PPP
contracts as recommended by the Kelkar Committee on PPPs.
Science and Technology- developments and their applications and effects in

everyday life; Achievements of Indians in science & technology; indigenization of
technology and developing new technology.
What is assistive technology? Discuss its role in lowering barriers faced by People with
disabilities. What steps are required to ensure that this technology is available to the
masses with minimal cost? (250 words)
Why the question:
A billion people globally are currently estimated to be in need of assistive technology (AT); this is
projected to double by 2050. Drawing upon the World Report on Disability 2011, the 71st World
Health Assembly resolved on May 26, 2018 to prepare a global report on effective access to assistive
technology by 2021.
To write about assistive technology, its advantages and ways to make it affordable for the masses.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Start by defining assistive technology with examples.
Body:
First, write about how various assistive technology helps lower the barriers faced by the people with
disabilities.

Next, write about the limitations that hinder use of assistive technology by the masses.
Next, write about the steps that are needed to ensure availability for affordable assistive technology
for the masses.
Conclusion:
Introduction
Assistive technology (AT) is any item, piece of equipment, software programme, or product
system that is used to help people with disabilities increase, maintain, or improve their functional
abilities. Examples: Prosthetics, braces, walkers, customised switches, special-purpose computers,
screen readers, and specialist curricular software.
The 2011 Census puts the national estimate of the number of people with disabilities at 2.21% of the
total population (26.8 million persons), including persons with visual, hearing, speech, locomotor
and mental disabilities with the majority in the 19-59 age group. The country’s disabled population
increased by 22.4% between 2001 and 2011 census periods; the total population increased by
17.6% however.
Body:
Importance of Assistive technology
 It is estimated that approximately one in every 10 children in the world has a disability and
less than 10% of children with disabilities in low-income countries go to school.

 Around the world, an estimated 93 million children under the age of 15 are living with some
kind of disability.
 Besides poverty and prejudice, the lack of access to assistive technology, as well as
inaccessible transport and school environments are major barriers, which restrict children
with disabilities to access education and to participate in the community.
 Assistive technology is a life changer — it opens the door to education for children with
impairments, employment and social interaction for adults living with disabilities, and an
independent life of dignity for older persons
Measures needed to ensure that this technology is available to the masses with minimal cost:
 The Assistance to Disabled persons for purchasing/fitting of aids/appliances (ADIP) scheme is

being implemented by the Ministry of Social Justice & Empowerment.
 It aims to assist the needy disabled persons in procuring durable, sophisticated and
scientifically manufactured, modern, standard aids and appliances that can promote their
physical, social and psychological rehabilitation, by reducing the effects of disabilities and
enhance their economic potential.
 People with disabilities need to be better integrated into society by overcoming stigma
 State-wise strategies on education for children with special needs need to be devised.
 There should be proper teacher training to address the needs of differently-abled children
and facilitate their inclusion in regular schools
 Further there should be more special schools and ensure educational material for
differently-abled children
 Safety measures like road safety, safety in residential areas, public transport system etc,
should be taken up
 Further, it should be made legally binding to make buildings disabled-friendly
 More budgetary allocation for welfare of the disabled. There should be a disability budgeting
on line of gender budget.
 Proper implementation of schemes should be ensured. There should be proper monitoring

mechanisms and accountability of public funds.
What is crypto lending? How does crypto lending further complicate the crypto
currency paradigm? Discuss the measures that are needed to overcome the
complications. (250 words)
Why the question:
Crypto lending is essentially banking – for the crypto world. Just as customers at traditional banks
earn interest on their savings in dollars or pounds, crypto users that deposit their bitcoin or ether at
crypto lenders also earn money, usually in cryptocurrency.

To write about crypto lending, its complications and measures needed to prevent its misuse.
Directive:
Introduction:
Begin the answer by writing about crypto lending.
Body:
In the first part, write about the growth of cryptocurrency and emergence of crypto lending.
Next, write about the complications associated with crypto lending – crypto lenders aren’t overseen
by financial regulators, volatility, security risks etc.
Next, write the measures that are needed to overcome the complications.
Conclusion:
Introduction
Crypto lending is essentially banking – for the crypto world. Just as customers at traditional banks
earn interest on their savings in dollars or pounds, crypto users that deposit their bitcoin or ether at
crypto lenders also earn money, usually in cryptocurrency.
Despite the benefits of crypto lending, these are relatively new lending methods compared to
established and highly regulated lending systems. They, therefore, carry their fair share of risks and
uncertainties.
Body
About crypto-lending
 High returns: While savings at traditional banks offer paltry returns due to historically low
interest rates, crypto lenders offer much higher returns – at the very top end as much as
20%, though rates depend on the tokens being deposited.
 Lending for a fee: Crypto lenders make money by lending – also for a fee, typically between
5%-10% – digital tokens to investors or crypto companies, who might use the tokens for
speculation, hedging or as working capital. The lenders profit from the spread between the
interest they pay on deposits and that charged on loans.
 Crypto lending has boomed over the past two years, along as decentralised finance, or
“DeFi,” platforms. DeFi and crypto lending both tout a vision of financial services where
lenders and borrowers bypass the traditional financial firms that act as gatekeepers for loans
or other products.
 Easy access and no hassles: The sites say they are easier to access than banks, too, with
prospective clients facing less paperwork when lending or borrowing crypto.
 Budding industry: The total value of crypto at DeFi sites soared to a record $110 billion in
November, up five-fold from a year earlier and reflecting record highs for bitcoin, according
to industry site DeFi Pulse.
Issues with crypto-lending
Risk of Platform Insolvency: Unlike traditional regulated banks, crypto lenders aren’t overseen by
financial regulators – so there are few rules on the capital they must hold, or transparency over their
reserves.
That means that customers who hold their crypto at the platforms could lose access to their funds.
Eg: Celsius paused withdrawals.
Crypto lenders also face other risks, from volatility in crypto markets than can hit the value of
savings to tech failures and hacks.
Loan Counterparty Risk: Counterparty risks have to do with external parties that centralized (CeFi)
crypto lending providers lend to. Centralized crypto lending platforms usually disclose what they can
do with crypto deposits in their contracts. Usually, they lend them to hedge funds, cryptocurrency
exchanges, and other institutional investors via over-the-counter (OTC) transactions or online.
However, this exposes lending platforms to the risk of insolvency if the counterparty to these trades
fails to return borrowed cryptocurrencies.
This, in turn, exposes lenders to default risks.
Custody & Security Concerns: Cyber-attacks and security breaches are not new to cryptocurrencies;
crypto lending platforms are not different. Although there have been cyber-attacks on crypto
lending platforms, there hasn’t been a loss of actual cryptos, only private data.
Therefore, at any given time, the risk of default, counterpart bankruptcy, and theft hangs in the
balance for investors.
Smart Contract Technology Failures: Smart contracts are also used to automate crypto lending
processes. They regulate what happens with your cryptocurrencies when certain actions—like
interest payments or collateral liquidations—are taken. Since developers design these software
codes, they may contain security or functionality flaws that seriously cost investors.
Unclear Cryptocurrency Lending Regulations: Cryptocurrency regulations are nowhere as advanced

as the technology itself, resulting in a lack of investors’ confidence in any crypto lending product. If
your assets disappear, you cannot take legal action.
 Regulators in many jurisdictions have started taxing cryptos, and there’s no telling how that
would affect cryptocurrency lending overall. When governments start paying direct
attention to this new market, it’s impossible to predict how positively or negatively laws
would affect investors’ funds.
Conclusion
Crypto lending isn’t something one dabbles into blindly, as risks are involved. While some of these
are hard-wired into the crypto space and cannot be entirely avoided at the moment, others are
more manageable. Both borrowers and investors must conduct exhaustive personal research and
test and try out multiple lending platforms to diversify the risks or conclude on selected trusted
platforms to work with.
Despite significant scientific advances made by Artificial intelligence (AI), there are
concerns associated with it which needs immediate addressing. Analyse. (250 words)
Why the question:
This week, Google sent a researcher on forced leave for suggesting that an AI chatbot he was talking
to had become sentient.
To write about the potential and concerns associated with AI.

Directive word:
Introduction:
Define AI and its contributions in general.
Body:
First, explain that Artificial intelligence (AI) is competent to have a revolutionary impact on
businesses and consumers globally.
Next, list down the advantages of AI in detail. Cite statistics and examples.
Next, Discuss the concerns associated with AI such as – job losses, robot bosses, human errors, high
cost, ethical issues etc.
Conclusion:
Introduction
New technologies like artificial intelligence, machine learning, robotics, big data, and networks are
expected to revolutionize production processes, but they could also have a major impact on
developing economies. The opportunities and potential sources of growth that, for example,
the United States and China enjoyed during their early stages of economic development are
remarkably different from what Cambodia and Tanzania are facing in today’s world.
Body
Significant advances and applications of Artificial intelligence
 It has the potential to overcome the physical limitations of capital and labour and open up
new sources of value and growth.
o It has the potential to drive growth by enabling
o Intelligent automation ability to automate complex physical world tasks.
o Innovation diffusion propelling innovations through the economy.
 Heavy Industries & Space: Through AI an entire manufacturing process can be made totally
automated, controlled & maintained by computer system.
o Example: car manufacturing machine tool production, computer chip production.

Etc.
o They carry out dangerous tasks like handling hazardous radioactive materials.
 Finance: Banks use intelligent software application to screen & analyse financial data.
o Software that can predict trends in stock market have been created which have
been known to beat humans in predictive power.
 Aviation: Air lines use expert system in planes to monitor atmospheric condition & system
status.
 Role in social development and inclusive growth: Access to quality health facilities,
addressing location barriers, providing real-time advisory to farmers and help in increasing
productivity, building smart and efficient cities etc.

o The exponential growth of data is constantly feeding AI improvements.
o AI has varied applications in fields like Healthcare, Education, Smart Cities,

Environment, Agriculture, smart Mobility etc.
 Examples of AI use in India: A Statement of Intent has been signed between NITI Aayog and
IBM to develop Precision Agriculture using Artificial Intelligence (AI) in Aspirational Districts.
o National Payment Corporation of India (NPCI) launched Pai which is an AI based

chatbot, to create awareness around NPCI’s products like FASTag, RuPay, UPI, AePS
on a real time basis.
Concerns associated with Artificial Intelligence
 Ethical concerns: With popularization of a new technology, its virtues are not guaranteed.
For instance, the internet made it possible to connect with anyone and get information from
anywhere, but also easier for misinformation to spread.
o There are real concerns about the potential negative consequences of AI, from deep
fakes to nefarious uses of facial recognition technology.
 Data Management: As there is lack of clarity on data flow and data ownership which might
result into data colonialism (data generated by developing countries yet not benefitting
them).
o Further, data collection for feeding AI algorithms has its associated privacy concerns
e.g. mass surveillance.
o AI could contribute to the forgery of documents, pictures, audio recordings, videos,

and online identities which can and will occur with unprecedented ease.
 Biasedness: The algorithms used in artificial intelligence are discrete and, in most cases,
trade secrets.
o They can be biased, for example, in the process of self-learning, they can absorb and
adopt the stereotypes that exist in society or which are transferred to them by
developers and make decisions based on them.
 Excessive Regulation: Since the AI is still in its preliminary stages, some critics believe that,
excessively strict regulation is neither necessary nor desirable.
 Lack of consensus & Conflict of Interests among the countries over the mechanisms and
tactics in regulation of AI.
 Absence of widespread expertise in Al technologies: This could lead to policy decisions

being taken based on a narrow spectrum of opinions. There are large gaps in data collection,
preparation, and benchmarking capabilities.
Conclusion
Regulation must be continuous and adapt with evolution of technology. There is need to find
country specific data, trained workforce, fine-tuned algorithms and technology suited to local needs.

For India to maximally benefit from the AI revolution, it must adopt a deliberate policy to drive AI
innovation, adaptation, and proliferation in sectors beyond consumer goods and information
technology services.
Awareness in the fields of IT, Space, Computers, robotics, nano-technology, bio-

technology and issues relating to intellectual property rights.
What are the different types of Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs)? Examine the
various issues in administration of IPRs in India and suggest reforms to have a thriving
IPR regime in the country. (250 words)
Why the question:
The Supreme Court of India has passed a far-reaching judgment resolving the question of whether
copyright infringement, which is punishable with imprisonment for a term which may extend up to
three years under the Copyright Act of 1957, is a cognisable offence under the Code of Criminal
Procedure (CrPC), 1973.
To write about the types of IPRs, issues in its administrations and steps to resolve them.
Directive:
Introduction:
Start with the definition of IPR and its objectives.
Body:
First, write about the different types of IPRs.
Next, write about the various issues in IPRs administration – Patent Ever greening Prevention,
Subsidies & IPR Issues, The Product Patents Process, Protecting traditional knowledge, Compulsory
Licensing & Drug Price Control Order etc.
Next, write about the reforms that are needed.
Conclusion:
Introduction
Intellectual property (IP) refers to creations of the mind, such as inventions; literary and artistic
works; designs; and symbols, names and images used in commerce.
India, as a member of the World Trade Organization and signatory to the Agreement on Trade-
Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Rights (TRIPS) is obliged to align its intellectual property
rights laws with the TRIPS agreement.
Body
Different types of Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs)
 Copyright
o Copyright is a legal term used to describe the rights that creators have over their
literary and artistic works.

o Works covered by copyright range from books, music, paintings, sculpture and films,
to computer programs, databases, advertisements, maps and technical drawings.
 Patents
o A patent is an exclusive right granted for an invention.
o Generally speaking, a patent provides the patent owner with the right to decide how
– or whether – the invention can be used by others.
o In exchange for this right, the patent owner makes technical information about the
invention publicly available in the published patent document.
 Trademarks
o A trademark is a sign capable of distinguishing the goods or services of one
enterprise from those of other enterprises.
o Trademarks date back to ancient times when artisans used to put their signature or
“mark” on their products.
 Industrial designs
o An industrial design constitutes the ornamental or aesthetic aspect of an article.
o A design may consist of three-dimensional features, such as the shape or surface of

an article, or of two-dimensional features, such as patterns, lines or color.
 Geographical indications
o Geographical indications and appellations of origin are signs used on goods that
have a specific geographical origin and possess qualities, a reputation or
characteristics that are essentially attributable to that place of origin.
o Most commonly, a geographical indication includes the name of the place of origin
of the goods.
 Trade secrets
o Trade secrets are IP rights on confidential information which may be sold or

licensed.
o The unauthorized acquisition, use or disclosure of such secret information in a

manner contrary to honest commercial practices by others is regarded as an unfair
practice and a violation of the trade secret protection.
Challenges in enforcing IPR in India
 Priority Watch List: Special 301 Report issued by the office of the United States Trade
Representative (USTR) has India on the “priority watch list”.
o The report mentions “Over the past year, India took steps to address intellectual
property (IP) challenges and promote IP protection and enforcement. However,
many of the actions have not yet translated into concrete benefits for innovators
and creators, and long-standing deficiencies persist”.

o India remains one of the world’s most challenging major economies with respect to
protection and enforcement of IP.
 Compulsory licensing:
 Higher level of scrutiny: Apart from the global patentability requirements for inventions to
have novelty, inventive step and industrial applicability, the Indian patent act has specific
provisions, covered under Section 3, that makes the patentability of an invention relating to
subject matter such as
o derivatives of a pharmaceutical drug;
o patentability of stem cells;
o diagnostic methods and kits
As a result, these inventions face a higher threshold of examination and scrutiny.
 Section 3(k) bars patentability of computer programs per se or algorithms. This objection
exists as default for all computer-related inventions.
 Section 3(d) restricts patentability of derivative/s of a pharmaceutical compound. A

derivative has to show significant difference in therapeutic efficacy with respect to the
parent compound for overcoming the barrier of Section 3(d).
 Backlog and time for final decision: The basic challenge in the enforcement of patent rights
is the time it takes for the court to make a final decision. A patent lawsuit ordinarily takes
approximately five to seven years to be finally decided after trial, if contested by the other
party.
 Compulsory licensing: It is problematic for foreign investors who bring technology as they
are concerned about the misuse of CL to replicate their products. It has been impacting
India-EU FTA negotiations.
 Combatting piracy and counterfeit products: India is key exporter of counterfeit fake
products such as foodstuffs, textiles, shoes, electronics etc. Enforcement of the Copyright
act is weak, and piracy of copyrighted materials is widespread.
Measures needed
 Fostering an environment where innovation flourishes and a knowledge economy is built, is

the key idea. Hence, the policy should have a balance.
 It should encourage patenting and at the same time ensure that patentability of a
product/process does not deter further innovation and progress.
 Intellectual Property must not be about patents on paper but dearth of application in reality.
T
 The organisations such as CSIR and others must be encouraged to work upon socially useful
applications of their patents.
 Support for innovation has to be accompanied with instruments that guard local companies
against the misuse of market power, coercive bargaining and aggressive acquisition
strategies.

 India needs to spread awareness on IPR in public and for its traditional industries to enable
fair monetisation of IP Rights.
 It needs to safeguard its patents, copyrights and traditional knowledge by ensuring easy IPR
rules.
Conclusion
Beliefs, attitudes and approaches towards IPRs in India must change for the sake of the ambitions
articulated in this government’s many initiatives—from Make in India to Startup India and Smart
Cities. Indian policymakers do not adequately appreciate the fundamental reality that IP laws and
policies are meant to incentivize innovation by establishing enforceable boundaries to protect new
products, processes, and original works of expression. Adequate safeguards though necessary
should not cripple innovation or new technology that can come to India and benefit the larger
public.
Value addition
Overview of IPR and patents in India

 The issue of IP enforcement has become all the more sensitive considering a bulk of patent
applications in India are filed by foreign companies.
 As an example, the data provided by the Indian IP office in its annual report of 2017-2018
shows the applications filed by foreign applicants were more than double (32,304) compared
to those by Indian residents (15,550).
 The International IP Index 2017 released by the US Chamber of Commerce, compares India’s
intellectual property environment with that of 44 other world economies. The index ranked
India at a dismal 43rd position out of 45 countries.
 This shows that challenges to innovation continue to exist in India and, therefore, the
government needs to build upon the positive rhetoric of its IPR policy with the substantial
legislative reforms that innovators need.
National IPR Policy
A comprehensive National IPR policy was adopted in May 2016, to stimulate innovation and
creativity across sectors, and provide a clear vision regarding IPR issues. Objectives enshrined in the
policy are hereunder:
 IPR Awareness – Outreach and Promotion – To create public awareness about the
economic, social and cultural benefits of IPRs among all sections of society;  Generation of
IPRs – To stimulate the generation of IPRs;
 Legal and Legislative Framework – To have strong and effective IPR laws, which balance the
interests of rights’ owners with larger public interest
 Administration and Management – To modernize and strengthen service-oriented IPR

administration;

 Commercialization of IPRs – Get value for IPRs through commercialization; 6  Enforcement

and Adjudication – To strengthen the enforcement and adjudicatory mechanisms for
combating IPR infringements; and
 Human Capital Development – To strengthen and expand human resources, institutions and
capacities for teaching, training, research and skill building in IPRs.
In what ways can the science, innovation, and research & development (SIRD) be
given an impetus in the country? Discuss the role that ‘petty patents’ can play in this
regard. (250 words)
Why the question:
Innovative activity is the key driver of competitiveness and economic growth. In that context, India’s
rank of 46 in WIPO’s Global Innovation Index (GII) 2021, up from 81 in 2015, is encouraging.
To write about ways to boost R&D in India and role of petty patents in doing so.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by giving a statistic related to R&D in the country.
Body:
First, write about the ways in which science, innovation, and research & development (SIRD) can be
given a impetus in the country – private investment, state of the art infrastructure, preventing brain
drain, monetary incentives etc.
Next, write about petty patents – its definition and how it can boost R&D in the country.
Conclusion:
Introduction
Innovative activity is the key driver of competitiveness and economic growth. In that context, India’s
rank of 46 in WIPO’s Global Innovation Index (GII) 2021, up from 81 in 2015, is encouraging. This
finding corroborates an earlier one by UNCTAD in its Digital Economy Report 2021 where India was
seen as exceeding expectations. While these findings are encouraging, India, which aspires to
emerge as one of the largest economies of the world, needs to move up further in the innovation
rankings, for building self-reliance in technology, especially in the context of the incipient digital
revolution.
Body
Background
 India has much room for enhancing its innovative activity. Among the key indicators, gross
R&D expenditure (GERD) as a percentage of GDP at 0.7% is low.
 It needs to rise to upwards of 2% of GDP, as in the leading innovative nations. Furthermore,

only about 30% of the GERD is spent by business enterprises, despite the generous tax
incentives offered by the government.

 This suggests that Indian enterprises have not got into an R&D culture, not to talk of
innovative rivalry.
 The bulk of innovative activity is conducted by a handful of companies in the pharma and
auto sectors.
Measures to boost and give impetus to innovation and research
 Given the strategic importance of innovative activity, governments in developed countries

spend billions of dollars on R&D subsidies given to national enterprises to shore up their
competitiveness.
 Subsidies up to 50% of project costs have been made non-actionable under the World
Trade Organization rules. In India, R&D activities have been encouraged mainly through
weighted tax deductions.
 Partial funding for specific R&D projects undertaken by business enterprises may be
desirable to develop products or processes, thus strengthening competitiveness.
 Funding support for R&D activity of business enterprises may help to direct it to a desirable
direction or field. For instance, it may be used to promote capability building for new
products, process innovations for local or global markets, focus on enhancing ecological
sustainability, promote industry’s linkage with public-funded research laboratories and
universities, and so on.
 A generous programme is needed to push R&D activities of enterprises through

partial funding for viable R&D proposals of industry to strengthen India’s competitive
edge.
 Besides, products based on indigenously developed technology could be given production

tax concessions (such as those extended to small-scale industry products) and income tax
concessions (such as those enjoyed by export turnover) to encourage innovation.
Role of petty patents
 The number of patents registered by residents is another indicator of innovative activity. The
patent filings by Indian enterprises and other institutions have increased from 8,841 in 2011
to 23,141 in 2020 (WIPO).
o However, patents granted have been only 776 and 4,988 respectively. Although the
ratio of applications to grants has gone up over the years, many patent applications
fail to satisfy the three-pronged test of novelty, inventive step and utility.
 In that context, another policy to promote local innovation could be to protect minor
innovations through the so-called utility models or petty patents, as has been done by
several East Asian countries.
o The patent system fails to encourage minor innovations since the criteria for
inventiveness tend to look at the novelty of the invention.
 The experience of several East Asian countries suggests that petty patents and industrial
design patents could be effective means of encouraging domestic enterprises to undertake
minor adaptive innovations and foster an innovation-based rivalry among them.

 India should consider adopting a petty patents regime that provides limited protection to
minor incremental innovations made, especially those by MSMEs, often called jugaad. T
 he utility models or petty patents typically provide a limited period of protection (5-10
years in contrast to 20 years in case of patents) and have less stringent requirements and
procedures.
 Incentivising minor and incremental innovations through limited protection under utility
models will help to foster the innovation rivalries among firms, particularly MSMEs, paving
the way for more significant innovations by them in the future.
Conclusion
India’s rising rank in the global innovation league suggests its potential, opportunity, and stakes in
boosting the R&D culture among business enterprises to strengthen their competitiveness. R&D
funding and petty patents could foster these.
In order to make Digital India project inclusive, the need of the hour is to unlock the
full potential of India’s optical fibre industry, while achieving atmanirbharta in its 5G
journey. Discuss. (250 words)
Why the question:
5G technology is going to make inroads into the country very soon. Top smartphone manufacturers
in India have already released phones with 5G capability.
To write about making digital India inclusive through optical fibre and 5G networks.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by stating objectives of Digital India mission.
Body:
First, mention the various limitations of digital India with respect to its accessibility and inclusivity.
Next, discuss the role optical fibre can in this regard in enhancing reach of the digital services across
India.
Next, write about role of 5G in this regard and steps that are needed to make itself atmanirbhar in
this regard,
Conclusion:
Introduction
Internet connectivity is critical for making the Digital India project inclusive, and widespread use of
optical fibre in the remotest corners of the country is vital to ensure that no one is left behind in this
endeavour. With over 117 crore telecom users and more than 82 crore internet subscribers, India
is one of the fastest-growing markets for digital consumers. A 2019 Mckinsey study rated India as
the second-fastest digitising economy. Digital infrastructure, which seamlessly integrates with

physical and traditional infrastructure, is critical to India’s growth story and the country’s thrust
towards self-reliance.
Body
Limitations of Digital India
 Digital Divide: The digital divide takes form in rich-poor, male-female, urban-rural etc
segments of the population.
 The gap needs to be narrowed down, then only the benefits of digitization would be
utilized equally.
 There are many roadblocks in the way of its successful implementation like digital illiteracy,
poor infrastructure, low internet speed, lack of coordination among various departments,
issues pertaining to taxation These challenges need to be addressed in order to realize the
full potential of this programme.
 Slow adoption of new technologies. For example, Banking sector most vulnerable to cloning
of magnetic strip debit/credit cards.
 Piracy: Rampant use of unlicensed and pirated software that are easy targets for malware.
E.g.: Saposhi attack leading to Denial of Service.
 Import dependence: Majority of electronic devices from cellphones to equipments used in

power sector, defense and other critical infrastructure puts India into a vulnerable situation.
 Lack of uniform security protocol and standards used across various electronic devices.
Role of optical fibre in success of Digital India
 Networking equipment that relies on optical fibre and other semiconductor-based device
ecosystems are at the heart of building the infrastructure that will be needed when the
country takes the next step in its digital journey.
 The government has taken several measures to build the next generation of digital
infrastructure. But the success of initiatives such as Bharatnet Phase III and the world’s
largest rural broadband project — which aim to provide broadband connectivity to all 2.5
lakh gram panchayats across the country — hinge on the deployment of high-quality fibres.
 A basic requirement of 5G will be data transmission networks. Optical fibre is the backbone
of the digital infrastructure required for this purpose — the data is transmitted by light
pulses travelling through long strands of thin fibre.
 Indian manufacturers have a strong presence across the value chain of this industry. In the
last 10 years, domestic manufacturers invested more than Rs 5,000 crore in this industry,
which has generated direct and indirect employment for around 4 lakh individuals.
 India exported optical fibre worth $138 million to over 132 countries between April 2020
and November 2021. India’s annual optic fibre manufacturing capacity is around 100 million
fibre km (fkm) and the domestic consumption is around 46 million fkm.

 Indian optical fibre cable consumption is predicted to increase to 33 million fkm by 2026
from 17 million fkm in 2021. A little more than 30 per cent of mobile towers have fibre
connectivity; this needs to be scaled up to at least 80 per cent.
Conclusion
India needs to invest in R&D, offer production-linked incentive schemes to support indigenous high-
tech manufacturing and develop intellectual property in critical aspects of digital connectivity. The
digital infrastructure created in the process could serve as a springboard for our growth in the next
20 years. We are at a crossroads now. The need of the hour is to unlock the full potential of India’s
optical fibre industry and enable India to emerge as a major manufacturing and technology hub
while achieving atmanirbharta in its 5G journey.
Conservation, environmental pollution and degradation, environmental impact

assessment
The sequestration of atmospheric carbon dioxide as organic carbon in the soil attracts
attention as an alternate way to help stem the rate of greenhouse gas growth and
associated changes in our climate. Elaborate. (250 words)
Why the question:
India’s forests and soil can potentially store an additional 7 billion tonnes of carbon, a new study has
estimated. This puts India among the top 10 countries with additional carbon storage capacity, the
analysis published in the Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences revealed.
To write about the potential of soil as storage of carbon in the fight against climate change.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by defining Soil carbon sequestration.
Body:
First, write about Soil carbon sequestration is a process in which CO2 is removed from the
atmosphere and stored in the soil carbon pool. This process is primarily mediated by plants through
photosynthesis, with carbon stored in the form of SOC.
Next, write about the benefits associated with above and steps that are needed to ensure it utilised
to its full potential.
Conclusion:
Introduction
Soil carbon sequestration is a process in which CO2 is removed from the atmosphere and stored in
the soil carbon pool. This process is primarily mediated by plants through photosynthesis, with
carbon stored in the form of SOC.
India’s forests and soil can potentially store an additional 7 billion tonnes of carbon, a new study has
estimated. The world can potentially store 287 billion tonnes of additional carbon. Of this, 78 per
cent is in forests and 22 per cent in soil, the analysis found.
Body
Soil carbon sequestration and its benefits
 Since atmospheric concentrations of carbon dioxide have crossed 410 parts per millionand
oceans are already turning acidic soil is a viable alternative for storing carbon.
 Increasing soil carbon offers a range of co-benefits
 Significant carbon pools on earth are found in the earth’s crust, oceans, atmosphere and
land-based ecosystems. Soils contain roughly 2,344 Giga tonneof organic carbon, making
this the largest terrestrial pool.
 It’s thought that the earth beneath is holding up to three times as much carbon as is found
in the atmosphere.
 Planting more annual crops and reducing tillage are some of the ways that soil can be
encouraged to hang on to more carbon.
Challenges involved
 However still scientists do not know much knowledge about the soil as a carbon sink
 Studies emphasise that a lot more research into soil composition and soil cycles is needed if
world is going to rely on it to counterbalance global warming effects
Measures needed
 Increasing Soil organic carbon through various methods can improve soil health, agricultural
yield, food security, water quality, and reduce the need for chemicals.
 Approaches to increase SOC include reducing soil erosion, no-till-farming, use of cover crops,
nutrient management, applying manure and sludge, water harvesting and conservation, and
agroforestry practices. These are the practices which are needed to revamp agriculture
giving impetus to schemes like Soil health card, Paramparagat Krishi Vikas Yojana and sustain
environment as well.
 An increase of just 1 tonne of soil carbon pool of degraded cropland soils can increase crop
yield by several kilograms per hectare.
 Moreover, carbon sequestration in soils has the potential to offset GHG emissions from
fossil fuels by up to 15% annually so India can keep its climate change commitments as well.
 Many scientists say that regenerative agricultural practices can turn back the carbon clock,
reducing atmospheric CO2 while also boosting soil productivity and increasing resilience to
floods and drought. Such regenerative techniques include planting fields year-round in crops
or other cover, and agroforestry that combines crops, trees, and animal husbandry.
Conclusion
SOC is a vital component of soil with important effects on the functioning of terrestrial ecosystems.
Storage of SOC results from interactions among the dynamic ecological processes of photosynthesis,
decomposition, and soil respiration. Human activities over the course of the last 150 years have led
to changes in these processes and consequently to the depletion of SOC and the exacerbation of
global climate change. But these human activities also now provide an opportunity for sequestering

carbon back into soil. Future warming and elevated CO2, patterns of past land use, and land
management strategies, along with the physical heterogeneity of landscapes are expected to
produce complex patterns of SOC capacity in soil.
Biomass being a product of natural resources viz. land, water, air and sun’s energy,
gives much hope as an alternative, reliable and renewable source of energy. Discuss.
(250 words)
Why the question:
Biomass-based electricity is gaining attention of regulators and policy makers, as the country moves
towards power generation that is not carbon-intensive. A new technology introduced this year that
accommodates all kinds of agricultural residue to be used as fuel can be cost-effective, greener and
help reduce the burden of stubble.
To write about the importance of biomass energy in India’s energy security and clean energy
objectives.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by defining and mentioning various components of biomass energy.
Body:
First, write about the scenario of biomass energy in India and cite statistics.
Next, write about the advantages offered by biomass energy – Biomass is always and widely
available as a renewable source of energy, carbon neutral, reduces the overreliance of fossil fuels and
less expensive than fossil fuels etc.
Next, write about the various steps taken to harness biomass energy and suggest measures that are
further needed in this regard.
Conclusion:
Introduction
Biomass is plant or animal material used as fuel to produce electricity or heat. Examples are wood,
energy crops and waste from forests, yards, or farms. Biomass has always been an important energy
source for the country considering the benefits it offers. The biomass materials used for power
generation include bagasse, rice husk, straw, cotton stalk, coconut shells, soya husk, de-oiled cakes,
coffee waste, jute wastes, groundnut shells, sawdust, etc.
Biomass-based energy is gaining attention of regulators and policy makers, as the country moves
towards power generation that is not carbon-intensive.
Body
Scenario of biomass energy in India
 About 32% of the total primary energy use in the country is still derived from biomass and
more than 70% of the country’s population depends upon it for its energy needs.

 As on 30.06.2021, a total capacity of 10170 MW has been installed in Biomass Power and
Cogeneration Sector.
 India has achieved the target of 10 gigawatts of biomass power before 2022 with the
present installed capacity of 10.17 GW of biomass power.
 However, unlike the solar and wind power targets, the central government has no plans to
scale up the biomass power and cogeneration target for 2030, even as the sector has
potential.
Potential
 As per a recent study sponsored by MNRE, the current availability of biomass in India is
estimated at about 750 million metric tonnes per year.
 The Study indicated estimated surplus biomass availability at about 230 million metric
tonnes per annum covering agricultural residues corresponding to a potential of about 28
GW.
 This apart, about 14 GW additional power could be generated through bagasse based
cogeneration in the country’s 550 Sugar mills, if these sugar mills were to adopt technically
and economically optimal levels of cogeneration for extracting power from the bagasse
produced by them.
Advantages offered by biomass energy
 Meet energy demand: Bioenergy can help to meet the growing demand for energy within
the country, especially in rural areas. Nearly 25% of its primary energy comes from biomass
resources and close to 70% of rural population depend on biomass to meet their daily
energy needs. Biomass can further help in meeting rural energy demands.
 Climate change mitigation: Bioenergy provides important benefits compared to fossil fuels,
in particular regarding GHG emissions. Biomass recycles carbon from the air and spares the
use of fossil fuels, reducing the additional fossil carbon from the ground into the
atmosphere.
 Market growth: The market for renewable energy systems in rural and urban markets in
India is set to grow exponentially. Despite this, bioenergy does not figure in most energy
studies and is classified as ‘non-commercial’ energy. Plants like Jatropha, Neem and other
wild plants are identified as the potential sources for biodiesel production in India.
 Waste to energy: Biofuels can augment waste to wealth creation. Being a derivative of
renewable biomass resources such as plastic, municipal solid waste, forestry residues,
agricultural wastes, surplus food grains etc. it has huge potential to help the country achieve
the renewable energy goal of 175 GW.
 Income generation: Adopting biofuels as an alternative source of energy can significantly

improve farmers’ income, generate employment opportunities etc.
 Reduce imports:India’s energy demands met by imports are about 46.13% of total primary
energy consumption. Bioenergy can help in reducing these imports and boost India’s energy
security and self-reliance.
Various steps taken to harness biomass energy

 10 GW national target: Ministry of New and Renewable Energy (MNRE) has set the national
target is to achieve 10 GW of installed biomass power by 2022.
 National Policy on Biofuels: The policy is aimed at taking forward the indicative target of
achieving 20% blending of biofuels with fossil-based fuels by 2030.
 Policy for biomass and bagasse cogeneration:MNRE has further developed a policy for
biomass and bagasse cogeneration that will help in meeting India’s energy demands. It
includes financial incentives and subsidies, both for biomass projects and sugar mills that use
this technology.
 Fiscal Incentives: Government gives 10 years Income tax holidays. Concessional customs and
excise duty exemption for machinery and components for initial setting up of Biomass
power projects. General sales tax exemption is available in certain States.
 Waste to energy projects: Waste to energy projects are also being set up for generation of
energy from urban, industrial and agricultural waste such as vegetable and other market
wastes, slaughterhouse waste, agricultural residues and industrial wastes & effluents.
 National Biomass Repository:MNRE also plans on creating a ‘National Biomass Repository’

through a nation-wide appraisal program which will help ensure availability of biofuels
produced from domestic feedstock
Way forward
 Utilising wastelands: There are about 63 million ha waste land in the country, out of which
about 40 million ha area can be developed by undertaking plantations of Jatropha.
 Reducing capital costs: Efforts must be made for reduction in the capital cost of biogas
plants, development of materials and techniques.
 Institutional support:Establishing institutional support for programme formulation and

implementation is important to utilise established energy mechanisms.
 Development of second-generation bi-fuels:Government must support and promote
development of second-generation bio-fuels and related applications.
 Establishing standards:It is important to lay down standards for various bio-energy

components, products and systems.
Conclusion
Biomass in Indian energy matrix is very important for remote villages. Even with decades of
experience in managing biomass power, still there exists lots of gaps in the supply chain. The main
scope for interventions are in collection, improving design and engineering aspects, conducting
feasibility studies and focused research and development.
As the human activities increased and development took place on a large scale, the
wildlife and the ecosystems were affected by it. Analyse. Do you think that
environmental objectives should be secondary to developmental objectives? (250
words)

Why the question:

A special enclosure for cheetahs has been readied at the Kuno-Palpur National Park in Madhya
Pradesh and would soon be home to at least six cheetahs from South Africa by August
To write about the threats faced by the wildlife and ecosystems due to development and need to
balance both.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by mentioning the contradiction between development and ecological conservation.
Body:
First, write about the threats to wildlife sand ecosystems from the developmental activities –
Road/Railway lines inside protected areas, Uncontrolled passage of heavy vehicles during night-time,
Man-animal conflicts, Threat from invasive species
Next, write about balancing both developmental as well environmental objectives. Give reasons for
the same.
Next, discuss the potential solutions to issues.
Conclusion:
Introduction
Rapid industrialisation and urbanisation are inevitable to bring in desired levels of economic
development. This is also believed to be essential to substantially increase the per capita income.
However, these income-generating activities are sure to have negative environmental

consequences such as pollution. Noticeably, environmental quality is being compromised for the
goals of mass employment generation and poverty reduction.
It is believed that with gradual increase in income levels along with growth in financial and
technological capabilities, environmental quality could be restored.
But the reality is that the continued growth generating activities only increasingly deteriorates the
environmental quality.
Body
Increased development and challenges to environment
 The current GDP estimates do not account for the gains/losses in natural capital.
 Identifying and quantifying the ecosystem services for the purpose of damage
assessment is a difficult task in the absence of relevant data.
 Water scarcity, high levels of pollution, extreme weather phenomena and the regular
occurrence of floods and droughts could strain an economy fighting to grow.
 Health challenges, increase in income inequality, increased pollution and a depletion of

natural resources are offshoot of degrading environment due to rapid urbanization and
industrialisation.
o Large economic growth adversely affects the environmental quality and economic
welfare of individuals and households.
 Development policies give more priority to income and employment

generation, implementation of pollution control policies is very poor.
 At present, the price of a commodity covers only the private cost of production, not the
damage cost to environment and their effects thereof.
o This makes the commodity relatively cheaper leading to more demand and output,
and more pollution and environmental damage cost.
 India has more environmental conflicts than any other country, according to Environmental
Justice Atlas, an international database.
 Researchers have found that environmental governance in India is poor not because of
laws but their pathetic implementation.
o Multiplicity of authorities for environmental management and poor coordination

among them.
Development vs Environment
 Development and environment are two sides of the same coin.
 On one hand people are concerned about the environment in which they live. On the other
hand, to eradicate poverty and increase growth in the economy, development is mandatory.
 Major issues like global warming, greenhouse effect, air and water pollution are increasing
each day. Without economic development a nation cannot come out of the vicious circle of
poverty. The key is sustainable development which has been the conversation for many
years now.
 As our population grows, finding a balance between economic advancement and

consumption of natural resources is a vital question that India should address.
Development without environment is meaningless.
 We need to save our resources for our future generations so that they can live in a healthy
environment.
 Development remains the greatest pursuit as well as a challenge, faced by humanity.

However, despite the unprecedented economic and social progress that has been made
over the last century, poverty, famine and environmental degradation still persist on a
global scale.
 Moreover, environmental deterioration and climate change have started to show

irrevocable damages to the developmental progress made so far.
 Thus, development goals must be pursued without breaching environment regulations.
Evaluate India’s response to the climate change crisis. Has India has prioritised
economic growth over environmental sustainability? (250 words)

Reference: Financial Express

Why the question:
The latest Environmental Performance Index (EPI), brought out by Yale University and Columbia
University, has sought to paint India as a climate villain. India is now ranked last in a list of 180
countries compared to 168th in 2020, having prioritised, per the report, “economic growth over
environmental sustainability”.
To write about India’s response to climate crisis and to form an opinion on the nature of response.
Introduction:
Begin by defining climate change.
Body:
Write about the various impacts of climate change on various regions – water cycle, rainfall patterns,
Coastal areas, extreme sea level events, melting of glaciers and ice sheets, Changes to the ocean,
marine heatwaves, ocean acidification, and reduced oxygen levels etc. Cite statistic to substantiate
your points.
Next, write about the steps taken by India to combat climate change. Evaluate its successes and
limitations.
Next, write about the how India is trying to balance economic growth as well as environmental
sustainability.
Conclusion:
Conclude with a balanced opinion.
Introduction
The latest Environmental Performance Index (EPI), brought out by Yale University and Columbia
University, has sought to paint India as a climate villain. India is now ranked last in a list
of 180 countries compared to 168th in 2020, having prioritised, per the report, “economic growth
over environmental sustainability”. It has been ranked poorly across 40 indicators divided into 11
categories—climate change mitigation, air quality, waste management, water and sanitation, heavy
metals, biodiversity and habitat, ecosystem services, fisheries, agriculture, acid rain, and water
resources.
Body
India’s performance in Nationally Determined Contributions
 At the fifth anniversary of the Paris Agreement on Climate Change (December 2020), India
was the only G20 nation compliant with the agreement.
 India has been ranked within the top 10 for two years consecutively in the Climate Change
Performance Index.
 The Unnat Jyoti by Affordable LEDs for All (UJALA) scheme is the world’s largest zero-subsidy
LED bulb programme for domestic consumers.
 India provided leadership for setting up the International Solar Alliance, a coalition of solar-
resource-rich countries, and the Coalition for Disaster Resilient Infrastructure.
Evaluation of India’s response to climate change

 Exceeding the NDC commitment: India is on track (as reports/documents show) to meet and
exceed the NDC commitment to achieve 40% electric power installed capacity from non-
fossil fuel-based sources by 2030.
 Reduction in emission intensity of GDP: Against the voluntary declaration for reducing the
emission intensity of GDP by 20%-25% by 2020, India has reduced it by 24% between 2005-
2016.
 More importantly, we achieved these targets with around 2% out of the S.$100 billion
committed to developing nations in Copenhagen (2009), realised by 2015.
 Renewable energy expansion: India is implementing one of the most extensive renewable
energy expansion programmes to achieve 175 GW of renewable energy capacity by 2022
and 450 GW by 2030.
 Investment in green measures: As part of the fiscal stimulus after the pandemic, the
government announced several green measures, including:
o a $26.5-billion investment in biogas and cleaner fuels,

o $3.5 billion in incentives for producing efficient solar photovoltaic (PV) and
advanced chemistry cell battery, and $780 million towards an afforestation
programme.
 India’s contribution to global emissions is well below its equitable share of the worldwide
carbon budget by any equity criterion.
India’s action for Climate Change
 National Action Plan on Climate Change (NAPCC): outlines existing and future policies and
programs addressing climate mitigation and adaptation. The Action Plan identifies eight core
“national missions” running through to 2017: Solar Energy; Enhanced Energy Efficiency;
Sustainable Habitat; Water; Sustaining the Himalayan Ecosystem; Green India; Sustainable
Agriculture; and Strategic Knowledge for Climate Change. Most of these missions have
strong adaptation imperatives.
 National Clean Energy Fund: The Government of India created the National Clean Energy
Fund (NCEF) in 2010 for financing and promoting clean energy initiatives and funding
research in the area of clean energy in the country. The corpus of the fund is built by levying
a cess of INR 50 (subsequently increased to INR 100 in 2014) per tonne of coal produced
domestically or imported.
 Paris Agreement: Under the Paris Agreement, India has made three commitments. India’s
greenhouse gas emission intensity of its GDP will be reduced by 33-35% below 2005 levels
by 2030. Alongside, 40% of India’s power capacity would be based on non-fossil fuel sources.
At the same time, India will create an additional ‘carbon sink’ of 2.5 to 3 billion tonnes of
Co2 equivalent through additional forest and tree cover by 2030.
 International Solar Alliance: ISA was launched at the United Nations Climate Change
Conference in Paris on 30 November 2015 by India and France, in the presence of Mr. Ban Ki
Moon, former Secretary-General of the United Nations.

 Bharat Stage (BS) Emission Norms: Emissions from vehicles are one of the top contributors
to air pollution, which led the government at the time to introduce the BS 2000 (Bharat
Stage 1) vehicle emission norms from April 2000, followed by BS-II in 2005. BS-III was
implemented nationwide in 2010. However, in 2016, the government decided to meet the
global best practices and leapfrog to BS-VI norms by skipping BS V altogether.
 Any self-sacrificial declaration of carbon neutrality today in the current international

scenario would be a wasted gesture reducing the burden of the developed world and
transferring it to the backs of the Indian people.
 India’s twin burden of low-carbon development and adaptation to climate impacts, is
onerous and no doubt requires serious, concerted action.
 India’s approach to eventual net-zero emissions is contingent on deep first world emissions
reductions and an adequate and unambiguous global carbon budget.
 Meanwhile, India must reject any attempt to restrict its options and be led into a low-
development trap, based on pseudo-scientific narratives.
How is air pollution measured and tracked in India? What are the recent changes
introduced to air pollution measurement? (250 words)
Reference: Down to Earth , India Times ,Insights on India
Why the question:
Worsening air pollution is robbing a decade of the life expectancy of those living in Delhi, the world’s
most polluted city and India’s capital, according to a new analysis by the University of Chicago.
Indians, on average, are losing about five years.
To write about air pollution measurement and recent changes introduced in India in itss
measurement.
Introduction:
Begin by giving statistic regarding the alarming rate of air pollution in the country.
Body:
Frist, discuss the various ways that air pollutions is measured and tracked in India – AQI, NAAQS,
SAFAR etc.
Next, write about the major changes brought to air pollution measurement recently and its impact.
Conclusion:
Conclude with a way forward to address air pollution in India.
Introduction
Air pollution is the presence of substances in the atmosphere that are harmful to the health of
humans and other living beings, or cause damage to the climate or to materials. There are 22 of the
30 most polluted cities in the world are in India according to the World Air Quality Report, 2020.
Worsening air pollution is robbing a decade of the life expectancy of those living in Delhi, the world’s
most polluted city and India’s capital, according to a new analysis by the University of Chicago.
Indians, on average, are losing about five years.
Body
Measurement and tracking of Air pollution in India

 Tracking
o Pollution trackers, clubbed with air purifiers are the quintessential tools to healthy
living in a modern Indian city.
o National Air Quality Monitoring Programme (NAMP) based dashboard,built on

data from the Central Pollution Control Board’s National Ambient Air Quality
Monitoring (NAAQM) Network which was started in 1984-85 and covers 344
cities/towns in 29 states and 6 UTs.
o SAFAR (System of Air Quality and Weather Forecasting and

Research) portal, for greater metropolitan cities of Indiato provide location specific
information on air quality in near real time. It was introduced by the Ministry of
Earth Science.
o Air Quality Index (AQI), which is calculated by figuring out the average
concentration of pollutants in air over a standard time interval – mostly 24 hours,
but 8 hours for carbon monoxide and ozone.
o Air Quality Index (AQI) is a tool for effective communication of air quality status to
peoplein terms, which are easy to understand. There are six AQI categories, namely
Good, Satisfactory, Moderately polluted, Poor, Very Poor, and Severe.
o AQ sub-index has been evolved for eight pollutants(PM10, PM2.5, NO2, SO2, CO, O3,
NH3, and Pb) for which short-term (upto 24-hours) National Ambient Air Quality
Standards are prescribed..
o Graded Response Action Plan for Delhi and NCRhas been prepared for
implementation under different AQI categories.
o In 2019 the government launched the National Clean Air Programme (NCAP) which
set a non-binding goal to reduce particulate pollution by 20 to 30 per cent as
compared to the 2017 levels, by 2024. If these targets are met, health can improve
remarkably.
o Delhi got its first giant smog tower in August 2021, which is equipped with 40 fans
that use 5,000 filters to clean air.
o Touted as India’s first large-scale air cleaning facility, the tower can clean 1,000 cubic
metres of air each second and works for a kilometre of range.
 Measurement
o Different methods are used to measure different kinds of pollutants in the air.
o According to Care4Air.org, the most common contemporary method is through a

device called a diffusion tube.
o To measure different concentrations of PM particles, the most common method is

through a device called TEOM (Tapered Element Oscillating Microbalance) wherein
a designated head (based on particles to be filtered) sucks in air. It can provide
readings every 15 minutes.
o In India, the AQI was launched in 2015 to measure pollution levels.

Recent changes introduced in measurement and tracking of Air pollution in India
 New Commission for Air Quality Management:
o It is made for better coordination, research, identification, and resolution of

problems related to air quality in the National Capital Region (NCR) and adjoining
areas.
 Use of satellite data for air pollution monitoring. It helps to monitor pollution even in areas
where ground-based network does not exist.
Way forward
 The need of the hour is providing an enabling ecosystem for innovations to address context-
specific air pollution challenges.
 There needs to be significant government support for enterprises to come up with scalable
pollution abatement technologies.
 Resources need to be allocated to support testing, certifying and scaling of innovative

solutions and also to extend support for intellectual property rights protection.
 It is equally important to mobilize private sector participation.
 Businesses and enterprises need to innovate their operations and functioning, building in
emission and pollution controls and reducing institutional carbon footprint to the lowest
possible levels.
 The private sector has strong potential to develop commercially viable products to combat
air pollution and boost the innovation ecosystem.
 Also, if one quantifies the impact of interventions that reduce air pollution with healthcare
cost, disability-adjusted life years, or economic cost, it could lead to diversification of
funding sources for that intervention.
Conclusion
Citizen participation and the media are vital for sharing the message on pollution and health, using
data such as those from the Central Pollution Control Board. It is a matter of prioritizing people’s
health and a brighter future
What are microplastics? What are the threats posed by it? Discuss the steps that are
needed to overcome these treats. (250 words)
Why the question:
For the first time, microplastics have been found in freshly fallen snow in Antarctica. The pollutant,
scientists argue, poses a growing threat to the region’s ecosystem and could increase the melting of
ice and snow.
To write threats posed by microplastics and steps needed to overcome it.
Directive word:

Introduction:
Begin by defining microplastics
Body:
First, write about the threats posed by microplastics – threat to aquatic life, migrate through the
intestinal wall and travel to lymph nodes, carcinogenic, potential for both bioaccumulation and
biomagnification etc.
Next, write about that are needed to combat threats posed by microplastics.
Conclusion:
Introduction
Microplastics are small plastic particles in the environment that are generally smaller than 1mm
down to the micrometer range. The researchers found huge amounts of them in the Arctic snow;
their study claims to be the first that contains data on contamination of snow by microplastics.
For the first time, microplastics have been found in freshly fallen snow in Antarctica. The pollutant,
scientists argue, poses a growing threat to the region’s ecosystem and could increase the melting of
ice and snow.
Body
Microfibres from washing of textiles, microbeads used in cosmetics and even paint from land run-
offs can dump microplastics in the ocean. Plastic bottles, bags, fishing nets, and food packaging are
some examples of the larger pieces that break down into microplastics, eventually finding their way
into the soil, water and the air we breathe. According to a 2017 International Union for
Conservation of Nature (IUCN) report, microplastics are estimated to constitute up to 30% of
marine litter polluting the oceans.
Threats posed by Microplastics:
 Microplastics escape the filtration and treatment processes for waste water and end up in
sites of nature.
 This is resulting in significant global impacts on wildlife from marine environment pollution.
 Microplastics are killing the fish before they reach reproductive age, stunted growth and
altering the behaviour in some fishes.
 Microplastics are found in the viscera of dead sea birds, reptiles like turtles, whales etc.
 World’s coastal countries currently do not have the concerned recycling policies or the
technical capabilities, and so large quantities of plastic are not recycled and enter landfill.
 The durable properties of plastics make them persistent and slow to degrade in the
environment entering the food chains.
 It holds the potential for both bioaccumulation and biomagnification.

 Once the microplastics enter foodchain, they carry synthetic chemical compounds such as
PCBs and PAHs, which are carcinogenic.

 Unlike POPs (Persistent Organic Pollutants) or chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs), Plastic pollution

has received little attention in terms of international agreements.
 Microplastics make up 94 percent of an estimated 1.8 trillion pieces of plastic in the patch.
But that only amounts to eight percent of the total tonnage
Measures needed:
 Local actions are required for mitigating plastic pollution, using mechanisms such as bans on
plastic bags, maximum daily limits for emissions into watersheds, and incentives for fishing
gear retrieval.
 Microbeads in cosmetics, daily use items must be banned globally.
 Countries should come together to establish measurable reduction targets for plastic waste.
A meaningful international agreement—one with clearly defined waste reduction targets is
the need of the hour.
 Effective policies must take into account all stages of the lifecycle of plastic—connecting
producers to users and ultimately to waste managers.
 Nonprofits like 5 Gyres are now pushing an agenda toward public awareness, corporate
responsibility and the idea of a circular economy — an economy that focuses on keeping
waste to a minimum while maximizing materials’ use.
 Fossil fuel subsidies incentivise the plastic market. Hence, Countries should end fossil fuel
subsidies. Annually, 4–8% of oil is used to produce raw plastic.
 India has a major problem dealing with plastics, particularly single-use shopping bags that
reach dumping sites, rivers and wetlands along with other waste.
 The most efficient way to deal with the pollution is to control the production and
distribution of plastics.
 Banning single-use bags and making consumers pay a significant amount for the more
durable ones is a feasible solution.
 Enforcing segregation of waste will retrieve materials and greatly reduce the burden on the
environment.
 Waste separation can be achieved in partnership with the community, and presents a major
employment opportunity.
 Eco-friendly substitutes (cloth/paper/jute bags, leaves/areca leaf plates, paper straws)

should be developed. For this, scientific and financial support (soft loans and subsidies) is
required.
Conclusion
Marine plastic pollution is a “planetary crisis,” and we should hope for a “Paris-style” global treaty
aimed at tackling it. We cannot transform our world into a ‘plastic planet’. What is needed is
collective public effort to stop plastic pollution and safeguard our ecosystem/biodiversity.

What is single-use plastic and what are the concerns associated with it? How can it be
successfully phased out in the country? (250 words)
Why the question:
The Centre has banned the use of ‘single-use plastic’ from July 1. The Ministry for Environment,
Forest and Climate Change had issued a gazette notification last year announcing the ban, and has
now defined a list of items that will be banned from next month.
To write about concerns associated single use plastic and ways to successfully phase it out.
Introduction:
Begin by defining single use plastic and give statistic related to plastic waste generation in India.
Body:
First, write about the concerns associated with single use plastic – usually goes into a landfill where it
is buried or it gets into the water and finds its way into the ocean, releases toxic chemicals, affects
Endocrine system which can cause cancer, infertility, birth defects, impaired immunity and many
other ailments etc
Next, write about the ways in which singe use plastic can be phased out in the country and ensure its
successful ban.
Conclusion:
Introduction
Single Use plastic is a form of plastic that is disposable, which is only used once and then has to be
thrown away or recycled. The single-use plastic items include plastic bags, water bottles, soda
bottles, straws, plastic plates, cups, most food packaging and coffee stirrers. The single-use plastic
products also prevent the spread of infection. Instruments such as syringes, applicators, drug tests,
bandages and wraps are often made to be disposable. Also, single-use plastic products have been
enlisted in the fight against food waste, keeping food and water fresher for longer and reducing the
potential for contamination.
The Centre has defined a list of single-use plastic items that will be banned from July 1, 2022. The
manufacture, import, stocking, distribution, sale and use of following single-use plastic, including
polystyrene and expanded polystyrene, commodities shall be prohibited with effect from the 1st
July, 2022.
Body
Govt. of India has laid great emphasis on eradicating single use plastic which has become one of the
biggest sources of pollution. During his Independence Day Speech this year Prime Minister had
urged the people to take a pledge on Mahatma Gandhi’s 150th Anniversary on 2nd October to make
the country free of single use plastic
Challenges posed:
 Petroleum-based plastic is not biodegradable and usually goes into a landfill where it is
buried or it gets into the water and finds its way into the ocean.
 Plastic in oceans and forests are choking flora and fauna. In fact, plastic trash is expected to
exceed the fish population in 2050.

 Microplastics have ability to enter food chain with the highest concentration of the
pollutants.
 The PWM Rules Amendment, 2018, omitted explicit pricing of plastic bags that had been a
feature of the 2016 Rules.
 Waste plastic from packaging of everything from food, cosmetics and groceries to goods
delivered by online platforms remains unaddressed.
 The fast moving consumer goods sector that uses large volumes of packaging, posing a
higher order challenge.
 Lack of adequate infrastructure for segregation and collection is the key reason for
inefficient plastic waste disposal.
 Small producers of plastics are facing the ban, while more organised entities covered by the
Extended Producer Responsibility clause continue with business as usual.
 Lack of consultation with stakeholders such as manufacturers of plastics, eateries and citizen
groups: This leads to implementation issues and inconvenience to the consumers.
 Exemptions for certain products such as milk pouches and plastic packaging for food items
severely weaken the impact of the ban.
 No investment in finding out alternative materials to plug the plastic vacuum: Until people
are able to shift to a material which is as light-weight and cheap as plastic, banning plastic
will remain a mere customary practice.
 Lack of widespread awareness among citizens about the magnitude of harm caused by
single-use plastic: Without citizens ‘buying in’ to a cause, bans only result in creating
unregulated underground markets.
 No strategy to offset the massive economic impact: Sweeping bans like the one in
Maharashtra are likely to cause massive loss of jobs and disruption of a large part of the
economy dependent on the production and use of plastic.
Measures needed
 Target the most problematic single-use plastics by conducting a baseline assessment to

identify the most problematic single use plastics, as well as the current causes, extent and
impacts of their mismanagement.
 Consider the best actions to tackle the problem (e.g. through regulatory, economic,
awareness, voluntary actions), given the country’s socio-economic standing and considering
their appropriateness in addressing the specific problems identified.
 Assess the potential social, economic and environmental impacts (positive and negative) of
the preferred short-listed instruments/actions. How will the poor be affected? What impact
will the preferred course of action have on different sectors and industries?
 Identify and engage key stakeholder groups – retailers, consumers, industry representatives,
local government, manufacturers, civil society, environmental groups, tourism associations –
to ensure broad buy-in. Evidence-based studies are also necessary to defeat opposition from
the plastics industry.

 Raise public awareness about the harm caused by single-used plastics. Clearly explain the
decision and any punitive measures that will follow.
Way forward
 Promote alternatives like cotton, khadi bags and bio-degradable plastics.
 Provide economic incentives to encourage the uptake of eco-friendly and fit-for-purpose

alternatives that do not cause more harm. Support can include tax rebates, research and
development funds, technology incubation, public-private partnerships, and support to
projects that recycle single-use items and turn waste into a resource that can be used again.
 Reduce or abolish taxes on the import of materials used to make alternatives.
 Provide incentives to industry by introducing tax rebates or other conditions to support its
transition. Governments will face resistance from the plastics industry, including importers
and distributors of plastic packaging. Give them time to adapt.
 Use revenues collected from taxes or levies on single-use plastics to maximize the public
good. Support environmental projects or boost local recycling with the funds. Create jobs in
the plastic recycling sector with seed funding.
 Enforce the measure chosen effectively, by making sure that there is clear allocation of roles
and responsibilities.
 Monitor and adjust the chosen measure if necessary and update the public on progress.
 International examples:
o The success of imposing a plastic bag fee has also been established in cities like
Chicago and Washington, showing that such interventions could be effective in
shaping behaviour change.
o The European Union is mulling new laws to ban some everyday single-use plastic
products including straws, cutlery and plates citing plastic litter in oceans as the
concern prompting the action.
o Countries such as the U.S., Canada and the Netherlands have already put in place
regulations to stop the use of microbeads in personal-care products. The sooner
India adopts such regulations, the better
 Encouraging plogging: Picking up litter while jogging or strolling was kick-started on a small
scale in a small part of Stockholm about an year ago, it has spread across the globe and India
can adopt this as well.
Wetlands perform a wide range of biodiversity functions especially with respect to

naturally protecting surrounding areas from flooding. Elucidate. (250 words)
Why the question:
The Experts in Bangladesh have cautioned against solely blaming climate change for the ongoing
floods in the country’s north-eastern Sylhet division. They say the destruction of Sylhet’s traditional
wetlands, known as ‘haors’ are also part of the reason.

To write about the importance of wetland ecosystem and its role in flood mitigation.
Elucidate –
Give a detailed account as to how and why it occurred, or what is the context. You must be defining
key terms wherever appropriate and substantiate with relevant associated facts.
Introduction:
Begin by defining a wetland and its types.
Body:
Write about the various functions performed by a wetland- water-related ecosystem services,
productive areas for plant life and animals, major habitat for most of the world’s waterbirds and key
habitat for migratory species, important source of food and high recreational, historical, scientific,
and cultural values.
Conclusion:
Conclude by summarising their importance.
Introduction
Wetlands are ecotones between terrestrial and aquatic ecosystems. They get periodically get
inundated with water. They support a flourishing community of aquatic organisms including frogs
and other amphibians. Swamps, marshes and mangroves are examples of wetlands. Wetlands are
indispensable for the countless benefits or “ecosystem services” that they provide humanity, ranging
from freshwater supply, food and building materials, and biodiversity, to flood control, groundwater
recharge, and climate change mitigation.
The total number of Ramsar sites in India are 46 in the country. Wetlands declared as Ramsar sites
are protected under strict guidelines.
Body
Critical role played by Wetlands in the Ecological conservation of Earth:
 Carbon Sequestration: Swamps, mangroves, peat lands, mires and marshes play an
important role in carbon cycle. Wetland soils may contain as much as 200 times more
carbon than its vegetation.
o g.: In India, coastal wetlands are playing a major role in carbon sequestration. The
total extent of coastal ecosystems (including mangroves) in India is around 43000
km. Overall, mangroves are able to sequester about 1.5 metric tonne of carbon per
hectare per year and the upper layers of mangrove sediments have high carbon
content, with conservative estimates indicating the levels of 10 percent.
 Flood attenuation: Wetlands function as natural sponges that trap and slowly release
surface water, rain, snowmelt, groundwater and flood waters. Many water-stressed regions
in South Africa are subject to high intensity rainfall over very short periods, often resulting in
flash floods. Wetlands are effective in spreading out and slowing down floodwaters, thereby
reducing the severity of floods downstream.
o g.: A large network of lakes and ponds in major cities like Srinagar, Bhopal,
Bengaluru, Chennai and Hyderabad were constructed with the objective of flood
control
 Regulation of stream flow & groundwater recharge: wetlands are often compared to
sponges, in their ability to absorb water in wet periods, and release it during dry periods.
The absorption thus helps in groundwater recharging too.
o g.: floodplains of rivers like Ganga and Brahmaputra
 Nutrient assimilation & recycling: removal by the wetland of phosphates and nitrates
carried by runoff water. This takes place through the presence of wetland vegetation and
the action of anaerobic bacteria (which would otherwise not exist in fast-flowing, energized
streams or rivers). Thus, they help in nutrients recycling and they carry out water
purification by filtration of sediments and nutrients from surface water.
 Erosion control: wetlands can limit the extent of erosion, predominantly through the
protection provided by vegetation, and through their ability to reduce stream flow velocity.
Buffer (act as a riparian buffer) shorelines against erosion and pollutants.
o g.: the mangroves along the sea shores, especially on the western coast in West
Bengal and Odisha have been playing a major role in protecting the coastal
environment from the destruction of cyclones that frequently emanate in the Bay of
Bengal.
 Microclimate regulation: Wetland ecosystems play an important role in regulating local and
regional climates through evaporative cooling effects that affect the exchange of energy
and water with atmosphere.
o g.: For every land cover type in wetlands, vegetation has a better stabilizing effect
on temperature, whereas a water body has a better stabilizing effect on wind speed
and humidity. Dal lake in Kashmir has a cooling effect on surroundings.
 Promotes Biodiversity: Wetlands are important in supporting species diversity. Because

wetlands provide an environment where photosynthesis can occur and where the recycling
of nutrients can take place, they play a significant role in the support of food chains.
o g.: In India lakes, rivers and other freshwater bodies support a large diversity of
biota representing almost all taxonomic groups. For example, freshwater
ecosystems of Western Ghats alone have 290 species of fish. Similarly, Loktak Lake is
famous for being the only refuge of the endangered Sangai (Manipur brow-antlered
deer).
 Productive Ecosystem: Wetlands are among the most productive ecosystems in the world,
comparable to rain forests and coral reefs. An immense variety of species of microbes,
plants, insects, amphibians, reptiles, birds, fish and mammals can be part of a wetland
ecosystem.
o g.: In many such wetland areas of India, like Bharatpur wild life sanctuary in
Rajasthan, and little Rann of Kutch and coastal areas of Saurashtra in Gujarat, many
migratory species of birds, including siberian crane, from western and European
countries come during winter.
 Promotes Genetic diversity: They act as a genetic reservoir for various species of plants,
especially rice.
 Tourism: Wet-lands such as coral reefs, beaches, reservoirs, lakes and rivers are considered
to be a significant part of the tourism experience in the country.
o For instance, as per an estimate, every year, around seven million tourist visit
Kerala’s backwaters, beaches and wildlife sanctuaries, 3 million visit Uttarakhand’s

lakes and other natural wetlands and one million visit Dal lake in Jammu and
Kashmir.
 Cultural Significance: Wetlands especially lakes and ponds are intrinsically linked to the local
culture. They are revered by the masses in recognition of the fact that they are the means of
sustenance of their livelihood.
o g. Pushkar lake in Rajasthan and Ramappa lake in Telangana
Measures needed
 Protection: The primary necessity today is to protect the existing wetlands. Of the many
wetlands in India only around 68 wetlands are protected. But there are thousands of other
wetlands that are biologically and economically important but have no legal status.
 Planning, managing and monitoring: Wetlands that come under the Protected area network
have management plans but others do not. It is important for various stakeholders along
with the local community and corporate sector to come together for an effective
management plan. Active monitoring of these wetland systems over a period of time is
essential.
 Comprehensive inventory: There has been no comprehensive inventory of all the Indian
wetlands despite the efforts by the Ministry of Environment and Forests, Asian Wetland
Bureau and World Wide Fund for Nature. The inventory should involve the flora, fauna, and
biodiversity along with values. It should take into account the various stakeholders in the
community too.
 Legislation: Although several laws protect wetlands there is no special legislation pertaining
specially to these ecosystems. Environment Impact Assessment needed for major
development projects highlighting threats to wetlands need to be formulated.
 Coordinated approach: Since wetlands are common property with multi-purpose utility,
their protection and management also need to be a common responsibility.
 Research: There is a necessity for research in the formulation of national strategy to
understand the dynamics of these ecosystems. This could be useful for the planners to
formulate strategies for the mitigation of pollution.
 Building awareness: For achieving any sustainable success in the protection of these
wetlands, awareness among the general public, educational and corporate institutions must
be created.
Conclusion
Communities engage with wetlands in various ways – from seeking livelihoods to spiritual fulfilment.
The values community hold for wetlands are expressed in diverse ways. It is important to integrate
community linkages in wetlands management planning, and incentivize community stewardship.
This is crucial as over 85% of wetlands in India are in the form of village ponds and tanks.
The process of burning farm residue is one of the major causes of air pollution in parts
of north India, deteriorating the air quality. Moreover, the inability to convert stubble
as fodder leads to economic losses as well. Examine. (250 words)


Why the question:
A strange paradox emerged in the primary economic sector in India recently: A section of farmers,
especially in Punjab, burnt the residue after harvesting their wheat even as fodder prices shot up.
To write about the issues related to stubble burning and discuss the role bio-decomposers can play in
tackling it.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Explain what is stubble burning and the reasons why it is undertaken.
Body:
First, wite about the effects of the stubble burning on air quality in north India and it impact on
health and ecosystem.
Next, write as to how the inability to use stubble as fodder is an economic loss.
Next, policy measures that have been takin this regard so far and examine the effectiveness in
addressing the problem. explain bio-decomposers, their functioning and efficacy in addressing the
issue of stubble burning.
Conclusion:
Conclude with a way forward to tackling stubble burning holistically.
Introduction
Stubble Burning is a common practice followed by farmers to prepare fields for sowing of wheat in
November as there is little time left between the harvesting of paddy and sowing of wheat. With
wheat harvesting over in Punjab, the State has witnessed a spike in incidents of stubble burning
against the last two years as several farmers continue to defy the ban on burning the crop residue.
The ban and action against the people burning the crop residue is regulated under the Air
(Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981.
Body
Background
 A section of farmers, especially in Punjab, burnt the residue after harvesting their wheat
even as fodder prices shot up.
 Several farmers told Down To Earththat they took to burning stubble as they were in a hurry
— the state had set June 10 as the date to sow paddy.
Effects of Stubble Burning:
 Pollution: Open stubble burning emits large amounts of toxic pollutants in the atmosphere
which contain harmful gases like methane (CH4), Carbon Monoxide (CO), Volatile organic
compound (VOC) and carcinogenic polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons. They may eventually
cause smog.
 Soil Fertility:Burning husk on ground destroys the nutrients in the soil, making it less fertile.
 Heat Penetration:Heat generated by stubble burning penetrates into the soil, leading to the
loss of moisture and useful microbes.

Alternative solutions that can avoid Stubble Burning:
 Promote paddy straw-based power plants.It will also create employment opportunities.
 Incorporation of crop residues in the soil can improve soil moisture and help activate the
growth of soil microorganisms for better plant growth.
 Convert the removed residues into enriched organic manure through composting.
 New opportunities for industrial use such as extraction of yeast protein can be explored
through scientific research.
Supreme Court’s observations
 Incentivescould be provided to those who are not burning the stubble and disincentives for
those who continue the practice.
 The existing Minimum Support Price (MSP) Scheme must be so interpreted as to enable the
States concerned to wholly or partly deny the benefit of MSP to those who continue to burn
the crop residue.
 Chhattisgarh Model:
o An innovative experiment has been undertaken by the Chhattisgarh government by

setting up gauthans.
o A gauthanis a dedicated five-acre plot, held in common by each village, where all the
unused stubble is collected through parali daan (people’s donations) and is
converted into organic fertiliser by mixing with cow dung and few natural enzymes.
o The scheme also generates employment among rural youth.
o The government supports the transportation of parali from the farm to the nearest
gauthan.
o The state has successfully developed 2,000 gauthans.
Government’s initiatives:
 Union Government: Under a 100% centrally-funded scheme, machines that help farmers in
in-situ management—by tilling the stubble back into the soil—were to be provided to
individual farmers at 50% subsidy and to custom hiring centres (CHCs) at 80% subsidy.
 While Haryana has set up 2,879 CHCs so far and has provided nearly 16,000 straw-
management machines, it has to set up 1,500 more and has to cover nearly as many
panchayats it has reached so far.
 Similarly, Punjab, which has provided 50,815 machines so far, will need to set up 5,000 more
CHCs—against 7,378 set up already—and reach 41% of its panchayats by October 2020.
Way forward:
 Short term Solution:Giving farmers easy and affordable access to the machines which allow
them to do smart straw management is the short term solution to the problem
 Dual Strategy: Both in-situ (in the field) and ex-situ (elsewhere) solutions need to be
considered, apart from tackling the fundamental factors prompting the practice.
 Affordability of Government Measures:A key factor will be ensuring affordability of service

for those hiring the machines; Haryana has reserved 70% of the machines at panchayats-run
CHCs for small and marginal farmers, while Punjab has prioritised service to them.
 Utilizing Crop Stubble: Insteadof burning of the stubble, it can be used in different ways like
cattle feed, compost manure, roofing in rural areas, biomass energy, mushroom cultivation,
packing materials, fuel, paper, bio-ethanol and industrial production, etc.
 The long-term solutionhas to be crop diversification, away from paddy
What are Payments for Ecosystem Services (PES)? Evaluate the feasibility of PES
projects in India for conserving and sustainable use of bio-diversity. (250 words)
Why the question:
Incentives for biodiversity protection and sustainable use include biodiversity-relevant taxes, fees,
levies, tradeable permits, and Payments for Ecosystem Services (PES).
To write about PES, its role in conserving biodiversity and its feasibility in India.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by defining PES.
Body:
First, write about the various components of PES which ensures conservation of biodiversity.
Next, write about the feasibility of PES in India – its pros and cons with respect to India socio-political
set up.
Conclusion:
Introduction
The term “ecosystem services” refers to the diverse benefits that are derived from the natural
environment. Examples include the supply of food, water and timber (provisioning services); the
regulation of air quality, climate and flood risk (regulating services); opportunities for recreation,
tourism and education (cultural services); and essential underlying functions such as soil formation
and nutrient cycling (supporting services).
Payments for ecosystem services (PES) occur when the beneficiaries or users of an ecosystem service
make payments to the providers of that service. In practice, this may take the form of a series of
payments in return for receiving a flow of benefits or ecosystem services.
Body
About Payments for ecosystem services (PES)
 PES is one way to conserve and increase ecosystem services. It works through the
establishment of performance contracts.
 People who can help provide the desired ecosystem service are rewarded based on their
actions, or the quantity and quality of the services themselves.
 PES presents a unique scope for incentivising local land stewards to manage threatened
ecosystems. It has the potential to achieve the dual goals of conservation and poverty
alleviation towards the achievement of Sustainable Development Goals.
 This places PES as one of the pivotal economic instruments for conservation.
Feasibility of Payments for ecosystem services (PES)
 PES has not achieved much attention either in the research or policy mandate in the Indian
subcontinent.
 A local monitoring mechanism is the key to successfully implementing a PES programme. A

study (Sardana 2019) conducted in the Kodagu district of Karnataka to restore native trees
that grow in the understory of coffee plantations shows a successfully designed local
institutional mechanism for PES implementation.
 However, the PES mechanism is yet to be implemented or even tested for efficacy.
 The results of such studies offer support for potential research funding in restoration
financing. Impact evaluation studies that evaluate financial instruments’
performance in attaining biodiversity are also important.
 Incentives for biodiversity protection and sustainable use include biodiversity-relevant taxes,
fees, levies, tradeable permits, and Payments for Ecosystem Services (PES).
 Through these economic instruments, governments can affect both public and
private financing flows for biodiversity.
 India must work in this regard.
 Mobilisation of biodiversity finance through pesticide levies, admission fees to natural

parks, hunting and fishing permit fees, and the trade-in energy-saving certificates has
gained governmental support and political will, but the mobilisation of private and public
finance for PES has lacked lustre.
Conclusion
Additionally, a strong policy thrust, such as the TEEB India Initiative highlighting the economic
consequences of the loss of biological diversity, would help prioritise ecosystem restoration
financing through a direct approach. A global initiative such as the United Nations Environment
Programme Finance Initiative to mobilise private sector finance to benefit people and the
environment would help maintain the funds.
Security challenges and their management in border areas – linkages of

organized crime with terrorism.
What are the various measures taken by government to fight drug menace in the
country? How can the country’s fight against illicit drugs be made more effective?
(250 words)
Difficulty level: Moderate.
Why the question:

Over the past few years, several countries have been turning away from prohibitionist drug strategies
and are introducing alternative policies instead.
To write the various measures to fight illicit drugs and steps needed to make it more effective.
Introduction:
Begin by giving statisitics related drug crime in India.
Body:
First, mention the various steps taken against drug menace in India – Narcotic Drugs and
Psychotropic Substances (NDPS) Act of 1985, National Action Plan for Drug Demand Reduction, Ngo
works etc.
Next, write about the limitations of the above measures.
Next, suggest changes which are needed to the above to make the nations fight against drugs more
robust and effective.
Conclusion:
Introduction
India is wedged between the world’s two largest areas of illicit opium production, the Golden
Crescent and the Golden Triangle. This proximity has traditionally been viewed as a source of
vulnerability, since it has made India both a destination and a transit route for opiates produced in
these regions. the lockdown restrictions during Covid-19 have accelerated drug trafficking using the
Internet. The drug trafficking scenario in India is largely attributed to various external and internal
factors.
Body
Measures taken by the government to tackle drug menace in India
Government of India has devised a well laid out strategy to ensure inter agency coordination and
revamp the prosecution mechanism to end the menace of drug trafficking.
 There is zero tolerance policy followed by Government of India against narcotic drugs and
psychotropic substances trade.
 Strong Legislation: Accordingly, the Narcotics Drugs and Psychotropic Substances Act
(NDPS) was enacted in 1985.
o Under this act, cultivation, manufacturing, transportation, export and import of all
narcotics drugs and psychotropic substances is prohibited except for medicinal and
scientific purposes and as authorised by the government.
o The Act provides for rigorous punishment for any person violating this act and if a
person is caught peddling drugs for the second time, death penalty could be
awarded to the offender.
o In addition, the government of India has also enacted the Prevention of Illicit Traffic
in Narcotic Drugs and Psychotropic Substances Act in 1988, which allows detention
of persons suspected to be involved in illicit trafficking of drugs.
 The Government has taken several policy and other initiatives to deal with drug trafficking
problem.

 It constituted Narco-Coordination Centre (NCORD) in November, 2016 and revived the

scheme of “Financial Assistance to States for Narcotics Control”.
 In 2017, the government approved new Reward Guidelines with increased quantum of
reward for interdiction or seizure of different illicit drugs.
 Global Cooperation: For effective coordination with foreign countries, India has signed 37
Bilateral Agreements/Memoranda of Understanding.
 Narcotics Control Bureau has been provided funds for developing a new software i.e.
Seizure Information Management System (SIMS) which will create a complete online
database of drug offences and offenders.
 The government has constituted a fund called “National Fund for Control of Drug Abuse” to
meet the expenditure incurred in connection with combating illicit traffic in Narcotic Drugs;
rehabilitating addicts, and educating public against drug abuse, etc.
 The government is also conducting National Drug Abuse Survey to measure trends of drug
abuse in India through Ministry of Social Justice & Empowerment with the help of National
Drug Dependence Treatment Centre of AIIMS.
 Pro-active border patrol: For instances, in 2009, the BSF seized 23 kg of heroin along with 12
pistols and several rounds of ammunition in Punjab. In the same year, consignments of 58 kg
of heroin, 10 kg of hashish as well as pistols and RDX were seized by the BSF along Rajasthan
border.
 Cooperation with neighbours: India is a signatory to the SAARC Convention on Narcotics

Drugs and Psychotropic substances, 1993.
o India is also a party to the Pentalateral Cooperation on Drug Control, which focuses
on the prevention of illicit trade of precursor and other chemicals used for the
manufacture of heroin.
Ways to make drug fight menace more effective:
 Combating misinformation on the impact of the use of cannabis products is crucial.
 Awareness-raising and communication efforts that disseminate scientific information

without stigmatizing people.
 Increasing the capacity of law enforcement agencies to address drug trafficking over the
darknet remains a priority.
 Joint responses by Governments and the private sector can involve controlling and removing
advertisements and listings of illegal drugs on the Internet.
 Continuously update scientific standards to keep abreast of the acceleration of Internet-

based services.
 Prevention and solid support are the ways in which drug abuse can be dealt with.
 Prevention programmes involving families, schools and the immediate communities are
important in this regard.
 Government must notify minimum standards for running de-addiction centres.

 Fast track courts.
 Integrating drug de-addiction centre’s with rehabilitation centres.
 Unlicensed centres and those committing human rights violations must be liable to closure.
 A chapter on the impact of drug abuse should be included in school curriculum so that
children understand how addiction destroys lives of people.
 Focused sensitisation programmes on drug abuse in schools and a substance abuse policy
could go a long way in curbing the menace.
 Parents must consult specialists in case there is change in behaviour of their children as it
could be signs of drug abuse.
Conclusion
Prevention of drug trafficking has to be accorded greater priority. At present it forms part of the
larger mandate of the border guarding forces to ‘prevent smuggling and any other illegal activity’.
Special measures need to be formulated to check trafficking of drugs through the borders. Various
domestic laws enacted for the control of drug trafficking should be implemented stringently and
severe punishments should be accorded to drug stockists.


Various Security forces and agencies and their mandate.

Military exercises establish India’s military capabilities and is also a great way of
securing allies, which will help in times of need. Analyse. (250 words)
Reference: The Week
Why the question:
Days after the Quad meeting in Tokyo, India has decided to participate in the world’s biggest
maritime exercise ‘Rim of the Pacific’ or RIMPAC, hosted by the US. Leaders of India, Japan, Austalia
and the US met last month to keep China on check as the Chinese military is expanding its footprints
in the Indo-pacific region.
To understand the role of military exercises.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by describing India’s geographic location and the corresponding potential and the need for
military exercises.
Body:
First give a few instances of few military exercises with friendly nations in the recent past such as
Malabar exercise, Yudh Abhyas etc.
Next, stress on the potential outcomes of such exercises such as for Naval exercises, it would improve
the operational turnaround and improve logistics of the armed forces in the region and also improve
Maritime Domain Awareness.
Next mention that the benefit ranges from inter-operability to demonstration of capabilities,
developing trust, comradery and familiarity between militaries.
Conclusion:
Conclude by mentioning that such exercises are a key to confidence building measure (CBM) and an
indication of the faith reposed by India on another nation or a group of member nations.
Introduction
A military exercise or war game is a measure to test the performance of the armed forces without
engaging in the battlefield. It facilitates better coordination between the militaries, observation of
enemy’s tactics, and familiarisation with new technologies, enabling on-the-job training of each
other’s crews. These are useful in case of joint military operations be it in war or in operations other
than war such as disaster relief, and humanitarian aid. According to a 2021 study, joint military
exercises between allies deter adversaries.
Body
Importance of Military exercises for India
 India has realised the potential of joint military exercises as part of military diplomacy. In the
last decade or so, India has undertaken army joint exercises with 18 countries, naval
exercises with 14 countries and air force exercises with eight countries.
 The objectives for joint military exercises are different, it ranges from inter-operability to
demonstration of capabilities, developing trust, comradery and familiarity between
militaries.

 The location of exercises in itself is an indication of deep engagement and trust with the
partners. The naval exercises between India, Japan and the US in the Sea of Japan obviously
is a signal directed to China.
 These exercises also act as a platform to assess weapons, equipment and a display of
technology that can be made available to allies.
 Such exercises are also seen as an assurance that a critical supply of spares and accessories
will be guaranteed during a possible conflict.
 Perhaps, the most important advantage of joint military exercises is ‘strategic signalling’.
 A joint exercise with one or more nations serves the purpose of signalling to a third country
of the influence we have in the region and a demonstration of our resolve to further our
diplomatic objectives.
 On the intangible side, military exercises promote brotherhood and camaraderie between
soldiers and militaries.
 Besides goodwill, it is a tool for projection of a nation’s soft power.
Criticisms against Military Exercises
 However, there is also a criticism against holding war games with one expert stating that
they are of a simple basic variety which doesn’t provide any value addition to the Indian
force.
 Moreover, the joint exercises are periodical in nature while the crew and the platforms that
participate are rarely the same.
 This brings in the aspect of continuity and its benefits. With a new crew every time, the
earlier lessons have often got to be re-learnt from scratch.
 There is still plenty of room for improvement for India in this area.
 The defence diplomacy of India is still not in complete sync with its foreign policy. It has not
been used as a tool to fulfil our foreign policy objectives.
Conclusion
India needs to understand as once said by John F Kennedy, “Diplomacy and defence are not
substitutes for one another, either alone would fail”. India needs to understand this philosophy as
the present age of smart power. To be the major player in the world India will have to combine its
hard power and soft power into effective strategies to achieve the best results. Such activities are
ideal tools of defence diplomacy and strategic communication which can further our national
security interests and provide the necessary backing for India to adopt a firmer approach while
dealing with adversaries.
Value addition
Some of the famous exercises that the Indian armed forces participate in:

Yudh Abhyas with the US
• Maitree Exercise with Thailand

• Shakti with France

• INDRA with Russia
• KAZIND with Kazakhstan
• DUSTLIK with Uzbekistan
• Malabar with Australia, India, Japan and US
• RIMPAC with Australia, Brunei, Canada, Chile, China, Colombia, Denmark, France,
Germany, Indonesia, Italy, Japan, Malaysia, Mexico, Netherlands, New Zealand, Norway,
Peru, Philippines, South Korea Singapore, Thailand, Tonga, the UK and US
• COBRA-GOLD with Asia-Pacific countries
 the Malabar Naval games have gained significant media attention owing to the rise of Quad
collective.
Describe the features of Agnipath scheme for recruiting soldiers. Evaluate the various
benefits and risks associated with the scheme. (250 words)
Reference: Indian Express , Indian Express
Why the question:
The government on Tuesday unveiled its new Agnipath scheme for recruiting soldiers across the three
services. The new defence recruitment reform, which has been cleared by the Cabinet Committee on
Security, will come into effect immediately, and the soldiers recruited under the scheme will be called
Agniveers.
To write about Agnipath scheme, its benefits and risks.
Directive:
Introduction:
Begin the writing about aims and objectives of Agnipath scheme for recruiting soldiers
Body:
Frist, discuss the key features of the scheme – recruitment, salary, duration and post tenure etc.
Next, write about the major benefits from the scheme.
Next, write about various concerns associated with the scheme in the short term and long term.
Conclusion:
Conclude with a way forward to address these shortcomings.
Introduction
Agnipath Defence Policy Reform is a government scheme launched to recruit young men and
women in the Indian Armed forces. The Agnipath scheme was announced by the defence Minister
Rajnath Singh on June 14th 2022.
Body
About the Agnipath scheme
 Agnipath is a new defence recruitment model that would allow “patriotic and
motivated” youth to serve in the armed forces for a period of four years.
 The process of recruitment will commence in 90 days.

 The plan is to recruit about 45,000-50,000 personnel below officer rank in the three
services every year through a biannual exercise with a six-month gap.
 As per the Agnipath scheme, this year there will be a planned intake of about 46,000 young
men and women.
 Soldier recruited through Agnipath scheme will be known as ‘Agniveers’.
 This scheme will be the only form of recruitment of soldiers into the three defence services
Armed Force, Indian Navy and Air Forces, hereon.
 Enrolment of Agniveers to all three services will be through a centralized online system,
with special rallies and campus interviews at recognised technical institutes such as the
Industrial Training Institutes, and the National Skills Qualifications Framework. The Model is
based on an all-India merit-based selection process.
Objectives
 It aims at providing an opportunity to the patriotic and motivated youth with the ‘Josh’ and
‘Jazba’ to join the Armed Forces.
 It is expected to bring down the average age profile of the Indian Armed Forces by about 4
to 5 years.
 The scheme envisions that, the average age in the forces is 32 years today, which will go
down to 26 in six to seven years.
Various benefits to Youth
 Upon the completion of the 4-years of service, a one-time ‘Seva Nidhi’ package of Rs 11.71
lakhs will be paid to the Agniveers that will include their accrued interest thereon.
 They will also get a Rs 48 lakh life insurance cover for the four years.
 In case of death, the payout will be over Rs 1 crore, including pay for the unserved tenure.
 The government will help rehabilitate soldiers who leave the services after four years. They
will be provided with skill certificates and bridge courses.
 Furure Ready Soldiers: It will create “future-ready” soldiers.
 More Employment Opportunities: It will increase employment opportunities and because of

the skills and experience acquired during the four-year service such soldiers will get
employment in various fields.
 Higher Skilled Workforce: This will also lead to availability of a higher-skilled workforce to
the economy which will be helpful in productivity gain and overall GDP (Gross Domestic
Product) growth.
Issues related to the scheme
 Difficult to Find Another Job:The ‘Agnipath’ scheme opens the way for recruitment of about
45,000 soldiers into Army, Navy and Air Force in the first year but on a short-term contract

of four years. After the completion of the contract, 25% of them will be retained and the rest
will leave the forces.
o The four years of service will mean other jobs will be out of reach after that, and
they will be left behind their peers.
 No Pension Benefit: Those hired under the ‘Agnipath’ scheme will be given a one-time
lumpsum of a little more than Rs 11 lakh when they end their four-year tenure.
o However, they do not receive any pension benefits. For most, seeking a second job
is essential to support themselves and their families.
 Training May Remain Unutilized: Forces will lose experienced soldiers.
o The jawans joining the Army, Navy and Air Force will be given technical training so
that they are able to support the ongoing operations. But these men and women
will leave after four years, which could create a void.
Conclusion
Despite the reservations, there is potential for future employment to these youth as the defence
industry is ready to take off in a huge manner in India. Once this happens, the industry will have
readily skilled youth for the jobs and hence there is also future to these youths. At the same time,
national security is ensured.
Challenges to internal security through communication networks, role of media

and social networking sites in internal security challenges, basics of cyber
security; money-laundering and its prevention.
What is ‘critical information infrastructure’? There is a need for a more integrated and
strategic approach to securing critical information infrastructure, as they are so crucial
to the economic, social and political wellbeing of the country. Examine. (250 words)
Why the question:
The Union Ministry of Electronics and IT (MeitY) has declared IT resources of ICICI Bank, HDFC Bank
and UPI managing entity NPCI as ‘critical information infrastructure’.
To write about critical information infrastructure and need for new approach to protect it.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by defining critical information infrastructure.
Body:

First, write about the various components of critical information infrastructure and its importance to
economic, social and political wellbeing of the country.
Next, write about the measures that are currently put in place for protecting it and their limitations.
Next, write about the new approach that must be taken to protect critical information infrastructure
in the country.
Conclusion:
Introduction
The Information Technology Act, 2000 defines Critical Information Infrastructure (CII) as “those
computer resource, the destruction of which, shall have debilitating impact on national security,
economy, public health or safety”. Communications networks are crucial to the connectivity of other
critical infrastructure, viz. civil aviation, shipping, railways, power, nuclear, oil and gas, finance,
banking, communication, information technology, law enforcement, intelligence agencies, space,
defence, and government networks.
The Union Ministry of Electronics and IT (MeitY) has declared IT resources of ICICI Bank, HDFC Bank
and UPI managing entity NPCI as ‘critical information infrastructure’.
Body
Importance of Critical information Infrastructure
 World over governments have been moving with alacrity to protect their critical information
infrastructure.
 IT resources form the backbone of countless critical operations in a country’s infrastructure,

and given their interconnectedness, disruptions can have a cascading effect across sectors.
 An information technology failure at a power grid can lead to prolonged outages crippling
other sectors like healthcare, banking services.
Various measures undertaken to prevent the threats:
 National Critical Information Infrastructure Protection Centre (NCIIPC)
o The nodal agency created in January 2014, takes all measures to protect the nation’s
critical information infrastructure.
o It is mandated to guard CIIs from “unauthorized access, modification, use,

disclosure, disruption, incapacitation or distraction”.
o NCIIPC monitors and forecasts national-level threats to CII for policy guidance,
expertise sharing and situational awareness for early warning or alerts.
 National Cyber Security Policy, 2013:
o The Government of India took the first formalized step towards cyber security in
2013, vide the Ministry of Communication and Information Technology, Department
of Electronics and Information Technology’s National Cyber Security Policy, 2013.
o The Policy is aimed at building a secure and resilient cyberspace for citizens,
businesses and the Government.

o Its mission is to protect cyberspace information and infrastructure, build capabilities

to prevent and respond to cyber-attacks, and minimize damages through
coordinated efforts of institutional structures, people, processes, and technology.
 Cyber Swachhta Kendra’ (Botnet Cleaning and Malware Analysis Centre)
o To combat cyber security violations and prevent their increase, Government of

India’s Computer Emergency Response Team (CERT-in) in February 2017 launched
‘Cyber Swachhta Kendra’ (Botnet Cleaning and Malware Analysis Centre) a new
desktop and mobile security solution for cyber security in India.
 Collaboration with industry partners:
o Development of Public Private Partnerships is an important strategy under the

National Cyber Security Policy 2013. Pursuant to this aim, under the aforementioned
Cyber Swachhta Kendra initiative, antivirus company Quick Heal is providing a free
bot removal Tool.
 International Cooperation Initiatives:
o Information sharing and cooperation is an explicit strategy under the 2013 Policy.
o Consequently, as and answer to the increasing international nature of cybercrime,

the Indian government has entered into cyber security collaborations with countries
such as the USA, European Union and Malaysia.
o The government is drafting guidelines that will bind companies such as Twitter,
WhatsApp, YouTube and Facebook to respond to complaints over content in a “few
hours” as against the current norm of 36 hours.
Challenges faced
 Instances of cyberattacks by national/state actors targeting critical infrastructureand

nationally important establishments are becoming more common.
 A string of high-profile cyberattacks in recent months has exposed vulnerabilities in the

critical infrastructure of even advanced nations.
 This has reinforced the need for improved defences against cyberattacks across continents.
 Defending civilian targets, and more so critical infrastructure, against cyberattacks such as
ransomware and phishing will stretch the capability and resources of governments across
the globe.
 On October 12, 2020 as India battled the pandemic, the electric grid supply to Mumbai
suddenly snapped hitting the mega city’s hospitals, trains and businesses. Later, a study by a
US firm that looks into the use of the internet by states, claimed that this power outage
could have been a cyber attack, allegedly from a China-linked group, aimed at critical
infrastructure.
Way forward
 A Defence Cyber Agencycould be the first step the government plans to for critical
infrastructure and military networks that are increasingly becoming dependent on the
Internet, thus increasing vulnerabilities.
 Equally important is cyber propaganda. During the Doklam conflict, China tried its best to
unleash cyber propaganda on India and indulged in complex psychological operations (psy-
ops).
 Critical cyber infrastructure needs to be defendedand the establishment of the National

Critical Information Infrastructure Protection Centre (NCIIPC) is a good step in this
direction.
 A robust ecosystem must be built to secure India from acts of state and non-state actors,
including protocol for grievance redressal in international forums.
 A national gold standard should be created, which ensures that Indian hardware and
software companies adhere to the highest safety protocols
 There is a need to clearly articulate a doctrine that holistically captures its approach to cyber
conflict, either for conducting offensive cyber operations or the extent and scope of
countermeasures against cyber attacks.
 Given the mutual distrust and vulnerability of the public and private sector, any solution
involves sharing responsibility through a public-private partnership for critical infrastructure
protection.
 These should focus on building an institutional framework, expanding and deepening

capacity, creating security standards and strict audits and evolving a cybersecurity incident
reporting framework.
Despite multiple efforts to end the menace of black money, it has remained a
‘unsolvable problem’ for India. How does black money impact the country? Discuss
the measures that are needed to put an end to it. (250 words)
Why the question:
The latest report of Indian funds in Swiss banks growing to a 14-year high did not evoke the kind of
anger such news used to at the time of the India against Corruption movement.
To write unending menace of black money, its impact and measures needed to end it.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by giving context of black money in India.
Body:
First, write about the various measures undertaken to tackle black money in India – Black Money
(Undisclosed Foreign Income and Assets) and Imposition of Tax Act, 2015, Double Taxation
Avoidance Agreements (DTAAs), etc. Also, write about the limitations in ending black money
menace.
Next, write about the impact of black money on various facets.
Next, write about the measures that are needed to end black money menace in the country.
Conclusion:
Introduction
There is no official definition of black money in economic theory, with several different terms such
as parallel economy, black money, black incomes, unaccounted economy, illegal economy and
irregular economy all being used more or less synonymously.
The simplest definition of black money could possibly be money that is hidden from tax authorities.
Body
Black money: Unsolvable problem
 Funds parked by Indian individuals and firms in Swiss banks, including through India-based
branches and other financial institutions, jumped to a 14-year-high of 3.83 billion Swiss
francs (over ₹30,500 crore) in 2021 on a sharp surge in holdings via securities and similar
instruments while customer deposits rose as well, revealed a report on annual data from
Switzerland’s central bank.
 The rise in aggregate funds of Indian clients with Swiss banks, from 2.55 billion Swiss francs
(₹20,700 crore) at the end of 2020, marks the second consecutive year of increase.
 Besides, the money held in Indian customers’ savings or deposit accounts rose to a seven-
year high of about ₹4,800 crore, reversing a two-year declining trend.
Impact of black money

 Loss of Revenue: Black money eats up a part of the tax and, thus, the government’s deficit
increases.
o The government has to balance this deficit by increasing taxes, decreasing subsidies
and increasing borrowings.
o Borrowing leads to a further increase in the government’s debt due to interest

burden. If the government is unable to balance the deficit, it has to decrease
spending, which affects development.
 Money Circulation: People generally tend to keep black money in the form of gold,
immovable property and other secret manners.
o Such money does not become part of the main economy and, therefore, remains
generally out of circulation.
o The black money keeps circulating among the wealthy and creates more
opportunities for them.
 Higher Inflation: The infusion of unaccounted black money in the economy leads to higher
inflation, which obviously hits the poor the most.
o It also increases the disparity between the rich and the poor.
Measures needed to curb black money
 Income declaration scheme and Pradhan Mantri Garib Kalyan Yojana: An amnesty Scheme
to encourage voluntary disclosure of black money and avoid prosecution after paying a fine

of 50% on the undisclosed income. An additional 25% of the undisclosed income is invested
in the scheme which can be refunded after four years, without any interest.
 Amendment to Benami properties transaction act: To provide with a wider definition to

Benami properties and to provide with robust structural mechanism to deal with black
money.
 Promoting Cashless Economy: So as to ensure better control over money flow in the
economy and prevent the creation of black money.
 Special Investigation team under Justice Shah: To unearth the black money stacked in the
country.
 Demonetisation: To bring out the black money or flush it out of the economy by making it
redundant.
 Transparency in political funding: By limiting the anonymous cash donations to Rs 2000 and
introduction electoral bonds to prevent entry of black money in politics.
 Legislation: Enactment of the Black Money (Undisclosed Foreign Income and Assets) and
Imposition of Tax Act, 2015 to more effectively tackle the cases involving black money
stashed abroad.
 International Cooperation: India joined a group of 48 countries as early adopters to new
global standards for automatically exchanging information from 2017. India-Mauritius and
India-Singapore tax treaties amended to adopt source-based taxation of capital gains with a
view to help curb tax evasion and tax avoidance.
 Project Insight: To curb the circulation of black money.
 Appropriate legislative framework related to: Public Procurement, Prevention of Bribery of

foreign officials, citizens grievance redressal, whistle-blower protection, UID Aadhar.
 Setting up and strengthening institutions dealing with illicit money: Directorate of Criminal
Investigation Cell for Exchange of Information, Income Tax Overseas Units- ITOUs at
Mauritius and Singapore have been very useful, Strengthening the Foreign TAX, Tax
Research and Investigation Division of the CBDT.
 Electoral Reforms: Elections are one of the biggest channels to utilize the black money.
Appropriate reforms to reduce money power in elections.
 Imparting skills to personnel for effective action: Both domestic and international training
pertaining to the concerned area. For instance, the Financial Intelligence Unit-India makes
proactive efforts to regularly upgrade the skills of its employees by providing them
opportunities for training on anti-money laundering, terrorist financing, and related
economic issues.
What is a spyware? What are the problems caused by spywares? Suggest various
precautions that are needed to prevent malicious attacks by spywares. (250 words)


Why the question:
Hermit, a sophisticated spyware, is believed to have targeted iPhone and Android devices in Italy and
Kazakhstan.
To write about spywares, issues created by it and measures to tackle it.
Introduction:
Begin by defining spywares and cite examples.
Body:
First, write about the threats and problems posed by spywares – Data theft, Identity fraud, Device
damage etc.
Next, write about the various precautions which can be taken various levels in order to prevent
various attacks from spywares.
Conclusion:
Introduction
Spyware is defined as malicious software designed to enter your computer device, gather data
about you, and forward it to a third-party without your consent. Spyware can also refer to
legitimate software that monitors your data for commercial purposes like advertising. However,
malicious spyware is explicitly used to profit from stolen data.
Whether legitimate or based in fraud, spyware’s surveillance activity leaves unsuspecting victims
open to data breaches and misuse of your private data. Spyware also affects network and device
performance, slowing down daily user activities.
Body
Problems caused by spywares
 Data theft: Malicious spyware is installed without your informed consent. Step-by-step,
spyware will take the following actions on your computer or mobile device:
 Infiltrate via an app install package, malicious website, or file attachment.
 Monitor and capture data via keystrokes, screen captures, and other tracking codes.
 Send stolen data to the spyware author, to be used directly or sold to other parties.
 Breach of privacy: In short, spyware communicates personal, confidential information about

you to an attacker. Eg: Pegasus spyware giving whatsapp message info of users to third
party.
 Identity Fraud: Spyware can steal personal information that can be used for identity theft.
 If malicious software has access to every piece of information on your computer, it

can harvest more than enough information to imitate your identity.
 Information used for this purpose includes browsing history, email accounts, and
saved passwords for online banking, shopping, and social networks.
 Also, if you've visited online banking sites, spyware can siphon your bank account
information or credit card accounts and sell it to third parties — or use them
directly.
 Computer Damages: Spyware can be poorly designed, leading to system-draining

performance. The lack of performance optimization can take up an enormous amount of
your computer's memory, processing power, and internet bandwidth.
 As a result, infected devices may run slowly and lag in between applications or while
online. Worse cases include frequent system crashing or overheating your
computer, causing permanent damage. Some spyware can even disable your
internet security programs.
 Disruptions to Your Browsing Experience: Spyware can also manipulate search engine
results and deliver unwanted websites in your browser, which can lead to potentially
harmful websites or fraudulent ones. It can also cause your home page to change and can
even alter some of your computer's settings.
 Pop-up advertisements are an equally frustrating issue that accompanies some types
of spyware.
 Advertisements may appear even when offline, leading to inescapable annoyances.
Precautions to address these issues
 At user-level
 Basic Security Hygiene : Not visiting untrusted websites, installing untrusted third
party applications or certificates, keeping device and application software updated is
needed.
 Using licensed software: Users must ensure pirated software are not used and also
update latest security patches to their devices.
 Non-disclosure of sensitive information: Awareness to ensure people are not deceived

by unsrcupulous actors regarding confidential information. Eg: Bank Login, OTP,
debit/credit card details.
 Using trusted software: Users must not give unbridled access to phone’s content to
suspicious apps.
 Two-layer authentication: Strong passwords with OTP login can help secure devices,
apps from unauthorized access.
 At Government level: Initiatives
 CERT-IN is the national nodal agency to respond in crisis situation.
 CERT-fin has also been launched exclusively for financial sector.
 CERT-in is also operating Cyber Swachhata Kendra, a Botnet Cleaning and Malware
Analysis Centre
 National Critical Information Infrastructure Protection Centre (NCIIPC) to battle cyber

security threats in strategic areas such as air control, nuclear and space.
 Cyber Surakshit Bharat Initiative to strengthen Cybersecurity ecosystem in India. It is

first public private partnership of its kind and will leverage the expertise of the IT
industry in cybersecurity.

 National cyber coordination centre (NCCC) to scan internet traffic coming into the
country and provide real time situational awareness and alert various security
agencies.
 Cyber Forensic Lab set up in Bangalore, Pune, Kolkata in collaboration with NASSCOM.
Conclusion
India must develop core skills in data integrity and data security fields, to ensure protection of user
data as well as security of critical infrastructure. Expertise of the private sector must be leveraged to
build capabilities. Meanwhile user awareness is equally necessary to prevent them from becoming
victims of cybercrime.
New foundation for a global law on cybersecurity must be laid. It will help in guiding national
legislation or policy against cybercrimes. Cyber-Deterrence must be ingrained in the policy on
cybersecurity with both defensive and offensive approach.
Rapid capacity building and Skill development in cyber space is required considering the fact that
India’s IT segment accounts for 51 percent share of the IT-BPM sector (2018-19).
Value addition
Types of spyware
Spyware is generally classified into four main categories:
 Trojan spyware enters devices via Trojan malware, which delivers the spyware program.
 Adware may monitor you to sell data to advertisers or serve deceptive malicious ads.
 Tracking cookie files can be implanted by a website to follow you across the internet.
System monitors track any activity on a computer, capturing sensitive data such as keystrokes, sites
visited, emails, and more. Keyloggers typically fall into this group.



INSIGHTSIAS

GS- IV
JUNE 2022
are NOT synopsis too if we go by definition of the term. What we are providing
is content that both meets demand of the question and at the same time gives you
Table of Contents
Ethics and Human Interface: Essence, determinants and consequences of Ethics in human actions;
dimensions of ethics; ethics in private and public relationships. ........................................................ 6
What does this quote means to you? (150 words) “It is under the greatest adversity that there
exists the greatest potential for doing good, both for oneself and others.” ― Dalai Lama .............. 6
What does this quote means to you? (150 words) “There’s a world of difference between truth
and facts. Facts can obscure the truth.” – Maya Angelou ............................................................... 7
What does this quote means to you? (150 words) “Each person is to have an equal right to the
most extensive basic liberty compatible with a similar liberty for others.” ― John Rawls ............... 8
What does this quote means to you? (150 words) “Moral indignation is jealousy with a halo.” ―
H.G. Wells...................................................................................................................................... 9
What does this quote means to you? (150 words) “Many people lose the small joys in the hope for
the big happiness.” ― Pearl S. Buck ............................................................................................. 10
What does this quote means to you? (150 words) “We have to dare to be ourselves, however
frightening or strange that self may prove to be.” ― May Sarton ................................................ 11
According to you, which are the five traits/vices that must not be present in a civil servant as they
hamper ones ethical and professional competence. How can one avoid or eliminate them? (250
words) ......................................................................................................................................... 13

Human Values – lessons from the lives and teachings of great leaders, reformers and administrators;
role of family, society and educational institutions in inculcating values. ......................................... 15
Education that does not produce good character is pointless. Discuss. ........................................ 15
Attitude: content, structure, function; its influence and relation with thought and behaviour; moral
and political attitudes; social influence and persuasion ................................................................... 16
What are the ways to deal with cognitive dissonance? (150 Words) ............................................ 16
‘Majoritarian views and popular morality cannot dictate constitutional rights’. Discuss. (150
words) ......................................................................................................................................... 18
In the era of competition and commercialisation, it is a herculean task to sustain as a leader who
stays true to their ethics. Analyse. (150 words) ............................................................................ 19
Aptitude and foundational values for Civil Service , integrity, impartiality and non-partisanship,
objectivity, dedication to public service, empathy, tolerance and compassion towards the weaker
sections. .......................................................................................................................................... 21
What do you think are the cardinal ethical attributes in a Civil Servant? How can these be
inculcated? (150 Words) .............................................................................................................. 21
What is objectivity? Discuss its importance in public service as well as in private life. (150 words)
.................................................................................................................................................... 22
Contributions of moral thinkers and philosophers from India and world. ......................................... 24
What is moral absolutism? Explain with examples. (250 words) ................................................... 24
The Categorical Imperative is supposed to provide a way for us to evaluate moral actions and to
make moral judgments. Discuss. (150 Words) .............................................................................. 26
Public/Civil service values and Ethics in Public administration: Status and problems; ethical concerns
and dilemmas in government and private institutions; laws, rules, regulations and conscience as
sources of ethical guidance; accountability and ethical governance; strengthening of ethical and
moral values in governance; ethical issues in international relations and funding; ........................... 28
With the continuing decline in people’s trust in public authorities, the fight against nepotism and
the need to ensure impartial recruitment procedures have never been so important. Discuss. (150
words) ......................................................................................................................................... 28
A person’s moral decision of what is right and wrong is not the sheer application of a
mathematical principle. Many variables come into play when examining how to conduct a
person’s life. Discuss. (150 words) ............................................................................................... 30
What is international morality? Do you think it is more of theoretical concept rather than being a
practical norm? Critically examine. (150 words) ........................................................................... 31
India should take the approach of treating drug addiction as moral and a medical hazard rather
than a criminal challenge. Analyse. (150 words) ........................................................................... 34
By placing a moral compass, we create a clear vision of the mental processes that point us in an
ethical direction. Elaborate. (150 words) ..................................................................................... 35
Government organisations suffer from opacity and inherent lack of information. What are ways to
ensure transparency and accountability in government organisations? (150 words) ................... 37
Case Studies on above issues. .......................................................................................................... 41

You are the S.P of a district. The C.M of your state is against the VIP culture followed by some
politicians. He passes orders to do away with VIP culture. Consequently, the DGP issues order to
withdraw police security provided to over 100 people in the state. According to the order, police
security was a part of VIP culture which was causing drain on resources as well as unnecessary
hassle to common man. ............................................................................................................... 41
You are the Sarpanch of a Panchayat. There is a primary school run by the government in your
area. Midday meals are provided to children attending the school. The headmaster has now
appointed a new cook in the school to prepare the meals. However, when it is found that cook is
from Dalit community, almost half of the children belonging to higher castes are not allowed to
take meals by their parents. Consequently the attendance in the schools falls sharply. This could
result in the possibility of discontinuation of midday meal scheme, thereafter of teaching staff and
subsequent closing down the school. (250 Words) (UPSC 2015) .................................................. 43
You are the S.P of a district. There was a peaceful protest organised in your district against
unemployment and demand for jobs. But suddenly, the protest took a violent turn and some
miscreants indulged in arson, vandalising government property like trains, buses and pelting
stones on policemen in which 2 constables were severely injured. .............................................. 45
You are Vice Principal of a degree college in one of the middle-class towns. The principal has
recently retired and management is looking for his replacement. There are also feelers that the
management may promote you as Principal. In the meantime, during the annual examination, the
flying squad which came from the university caught two students red-handed involving in unfair
means. A senior lecturer of the college was personally helping these students in this act. This
senior lecturer also happens to be close to the management. One of the students was the son of a
local politician who was responsible for getting college affiliated to the present reputed university.
The second student was the son of a local businessman who has donated maximum funds for
running the college. You immediately informed the management regarding this unfortunate
incident. The management told you to resolve the issue with the flying squad at any cost. They
further said that such an incident will not only tarnish the image of the college but also the
politician and the businessman are very important personalities for the functioning of the college.
You were also given hint that your further promotion to Principal depends on your capability in
resolving this issue with the flying squad. In the meantime, you were intimidated by your
administrative officer that certain members of the student union are protesting outside the
college gate against the senior lecturer and the students involved in this incident are demanding
strict action against defaulters. .................................................................................................... 47


Ethics and Human Interface: Essence, determinants and consequences of Ethics

in human actions; dimensions of ethics; ethics in private and public relationships.
What does this quote means to you? (150 words) “It is under the greatest adversity
that there exists the greatest potential for doing good, both for oneself and others.” ―
Dalai Lama
Why the question:
The question is part of the static syllabus of General studies paper – 4 and part of ‘Quotes
Wednesdays’ in Mission-2022 Secure.
Introduction:
Begin by explaining the literal meaning of the quote and highlighting its core meaning about
selflessness in adversity.
Body:
Write about adversity can be overcome for oneself and others being selfless – lack of greed, being
compassionate, for the greater good. Cite examples to substantiate your points.
Conclusion:
Summarise by highlighting the importance of the quote in the present day.
Introduction
Adversity is a Better Teacher Than Good Fortune. Under the greatest adversity, there exists the
greatest potential for doing good – both for oneself and others. Adversities often push us into new
direction. The greatest advantage of adversity is that it shakes us out of our complacency. It brings
before us greater challenges and teaches how to deal with them. It gives a ‘wake-up call’. So, every
adversity is an opportunity and not a curse or punishment. Adversity is like a strong wind. It tears
away from us all, but the things that cannot be torn, that we see ourselves as we really are.
Body
Great people see adversity as an opportunity, and they know there is something they can learn. They
pursue the difficulty and work endlessly to fix it. They do not give up and they generate the greatest
potential in tough times for their self and others.
During India’s freedom struggle, Gandhiji lead by example. He braved arrest and went on hunger
fast several times, just to ensure that morale of people does not come down and they are kept
motivated even when British were ruthlessly suppressing the dissent and protesting people. This was
the key to success of Salt Satyagraha and Quit India Movement. He not only faced the
adversity, but his actions in this time were defining moments of India’s struggle. The freedom we
enjoy today can be attributed to his actions in the face of adversity.
Great people see adversity as an opportunity, and they know there is something they can learn. They
pursue the difficulty and work endlessly to fix it. They do not give up and they generate the greatest
potential in tough times for their self and others.
Conclusion
No one goes through life without facing adversity; it is an integral part of life. Let the adversity be a
teacher to us. It will build the character and will test our determination. But, in the end, it will
make one stronger. We must ensure to take time to learn from the difficulties that life is sure to

send our way. Otherwise, the failure will define us instead of us moving forward and using it to
propel us to higher dimensions. Seize it as an opportunity rather than cause for fear and self-doubt.
What does this quote means to you? (150 words) “There’s a world of difference
between truth and facts. Facts can obscure the truth.” – Maya Angelou
Why the question:
Introduction:
Begin by explaining the literal meaning of the quote and highlighting its core meaning about
importance of truth.
Body:
Write about facts can be manipulated and manufactures to suits the narrative. Give examples of
justify your points. Mention that despite facts may point to different things generally the truth is only
one.
Conclusion:
Introduction
Firstly, truths are not necessarily facts and facts are not necessarily true however this does not
mean that they cannot coexist. A great example of oppression where the truths and facts are worlds
apart is when opposition parties use facts for their propaganda. For instance, at one point in time,
50% Indians were vaccinated with one dose while 20% were given two doses. The opposition party
stated that only 20% were fully vaccinated while the government said that 50% of Indians were
vaccinated. Both are facts, but the truth is based on how the facts were perceived.
Body
A fact is something that’s indisputable, based on empirical research and quantifiable measures.
Facts go beyond theories. They’re proven through calculation and experience, or they’re something
that definitively occurred in the past.
Truth is entirely different; it may include fact, but it can also include belief. Oftentimes, people will
accept things as true because they fall closer to their comfort zones, are assimilated easily into their
comfort zones, or reflect their preconceived notions of reality.
The difference between fact and truth is that fact is something that exists in real form, while Truth is
the true state of a particular thing or a matter like a person, place, animal or thing. Well, facts are
things that can be seen visually and can be verified properly. Fact is indisputable while truth is
acceptable. To call something a fact is, presumably, to make a claim that it is true. This isn’t a
problem for many things, although defending such a claim can be harder than you think.
Truth used to be an absolute. In today’s world, it feels less so. While facts have always been cherry-
picked to make an argument stand, the ability to see and understand the context of those facts used
to be more of a constant.
In this post-truth era, perception is real, truth is not. Here, one chooses the narrative first and the
facts will follow. And the data will meekly fit into the groove because, like water, it takes the shape
of the container in which the narrative is served. Once you have picked your own narrative, you have
chosen your own truth, a truth untainted by objective reality.
Conclusion
From an endless stream of political misinformation to inescapable lies on social media, the signs that
we are living in a post-truth world are hard to ignore. Thus, there must be earnest efforts to ensure
that truth is upheld despite many facts.
What does this quote means to you? (150 words) “Each person is to have an equal right
to the most extensive basic liberty compatible with a similar liberty for others.” ― John
Rawls
Why the question:
Introduction:
Begin by explaining the literal meaning of the quote.
Body:
Write about importance of liberty and equal liberties for everyone. Give instances across the world
where liberty has been curtailed across the world, its impact and talk about the need for their
liberation.
Conclusion:
Introduction
John Rawls (1921-2002) was a contemporary philosopher who studied theories surrounding justice.
He gave a theory of Justice as Fairness, giving a deontological theory on Justice. He was in influenced
by Immanuel Kant who believed in human dignity and hence he gives utmost priority to liberty.
Body
From the very beginning both man and the state have been making efforts for the security of their
freedom. Freedom is a very precious condition without which neither the state nor the individuals
can make any progress. We remember very well how cruelly the absolute monarchs ignored the
claims of liberty in England in ancient and medieval ages. Today liberty is severely curtailed in
nations like North Korea, Afghanistan with Taliban takeover especially for women, in Saudi Arabia
etc.
When people feel that they can freely express their frustrations and feel that they petition the
government regarding their grievances, they don’t feel ‘pushed’ to take matters into their own
hands. Instead of taking up arms, heading for the hills, and waging guerrilla war against the central
government, disaffected people can take to the airwaves. They can take out ads, and they can
participate in the political discourse. When governments give a proper forum for dissenting
voices, the society as a whole is more stable because people and dissenting groups don’t feel so
disaffected, marginalized, or suppressed that their only option in bringing about change is through
violent revolution or regime change brought about by military means.
Societies that focus on individual liberties, free societies, often produce economic freedom. This
leads to better economies. When there are more choices in a market, there is a tendency for lower
prices at higher quality levels for products and services. When individual liberties against
government control, monopolization, and standardization are protected, individuals are encouraged
to experiment and offer different products and services which can benefit society as a whole since

there are more choices available. The more choices people have, the better for the economy. By
protecting individual businesses from arbitrary government action, the economy benefits since there
are more solutions and more economic diversity.
Conclusion
From increasing economic choices which can lift countries out of poverty to increasing opportunities
for cultural expression and artistic excellence, political liberties lay important seeds that lift societies
on many levels. The biggest benefit of liberty, however, is truly personal. With the right political,
cultural, economic, and social framework rooted in liberty, societies can lay the groundwork for
people truly exploring and pursuing the highest levels of personal, spiritual, and philosophical
transcendence.
What does this quote means to you? (150 words) “Moral indignation is jealousy with a
halo.” ― H.G. Wells
Why the question:
Introduction:
Body:
First, explain moral indignation and substantiate with examples.
Next, write about the correlation of moral indignation with that of Jealousy with halo. Substantiate
with examples.
Conclusion:
Introduction
“Those who can’t, will make sure that those who can, don’t” captures the essence of the quote.
Indignation is anger aroused by something unjust, unworthy, or mean. Moral indignation is typically
a reactive emotion of anger over perceived mistreatment, insult, or malice of another. It is akin to
what is called the sense of injustice.
Body
Moral indignation introduces an ethical element to this emotion. To be righteous is to position

yourself as morally ‘correct’. Another term for this concept is therefore righteous anger.
In other words, a state of moral indignation effectively says, ‘I am right to be angry about this
situation’. However, morality is not reality. People vary in their beliefs and attitudes about life’s
rights and wrongs. Therefore, moral indignation is typically murky territory as people assert their
opinions.
Eg: The teacher became indignant when fired from their job for misconduct.
Righteous indignation is not self-righteousness in which people feel proud of themselves and think
that they are always right and no one is better than them.
Moral outrage is external-directed energy. It is a form of reactive emotion regarding Anger that
emerges when faced with a situation concerning offensive attitudes, mistreatment, or injustice.

Sometimes someone in your life does things that don’t meet your standards and expectations, or
someone does such an unjust act against the laws of society and the laws of nature. Anger can occur
when negative feelings are sparked and wrongful actions and behaviors come to blame. Under
such circumstances, one gets filled with rage.
But this may also be purely out of jealousy that we show such behaviour against others. We may
feel inadequate in front of others and inflict such judgement upon them by taking a false moral
high ground.
Moral indignation is considered a positive thing when someone with this type of anger is on the
right side. Or when someone feels an adrenaline rush when thinking about a situation that is not
morally fair or right. It must not be confused with self-righteousness.
If something is happening against the laws of nature, acts of society, and laws of humanity. And
you are getting mad at it; then your Anger is righteous indignation. Suppose you want to change
that unfair treatment. Or you may be hurt because other people are not considering the unjust
situations dangerous. But you wish to spread justice and righteousness; then your Anger is a
positive thing.
Here is the example of Mahatma Gandhi. He used his reactive emotion of Anger for a productive
purpose and used it wisely. India was under British rule for over 250 years. He used the positive
power of righteous indignation to compel the British to leave India. It shows that righteous Anger is
a good thing if we use it as a positive power.
Conclusion
It has both aspects to it and depends on the perception of the person who is thinking about
righteousness. Therefore, one must be careful about moral beliefs and ethics before using it as a
yard stick to judge others or take any action. An honest impartial inquiry of thought and action is
required before we react to any person or a situation.
What does this quote means to you? (150 words) “Many people lose the small joys in
the hope for the big happiness.” ― Pearl S. Buck
Why the question:
Introduction:
Body:
Write about need of various interpretation of being happy.
Next, using examples mention how in order to become more happier than others we end up being
unhappy. Cite examples like wealth, power, status, social media fame etc.
Conclusion:
Introduction
“Enjoy the little things in life because one day you’ll look back and realize they were the big
things”. (Kurt Vonnegut)

The little things are essential because they comprise the vast majority of our lives. Significant events
occur sporadically. Small ones happen from moment to moment. When you neglect the little things,
you miss out on enjoying a considerable swath of your life.
Body
Thinking only about the big things without appreciating the little things can even be detrimental.
There’s an outer and inner pressure connected to grand achievements, and being under a lot of
pressure negatively affects your mental and physical health.
Feelings of anxiety, sleep difficulties, a compromised immune system, and unexplained aches and
pains are not uncommon symptoms of being overly stressed. Always wanting more instead of
enjoying the simple things we already have can lead to a very unsatisfying life.
While goals and dreams certainly are beneficial, an insatiable desire to have more can leave you
feeling dissatisfied and resentful. Continually striving to get further ahead removes you from joy
and gratitude in the present moment.
This type of mindset removes the focus from what you have and puts it on thoughts of lack.
However, a grateful heart allows you to see the good in appreciating the little things happening
right now.
The ability to appreciate the small things can upgrade your life in a big way. There is reason to
celebrate the small things and be grateful every day with just a slight shift in perspective.
Conclusion
Just as each day has its joys, each day also has its struggles. When our lives are missing gratitude for
the small things, these struggles can hit us harder. A positive and thankful mindset, however, will
build up our resilience for when we are faced with daily disappointments.
What does this quote means to you? (150 words) “We have to dare to be ourselves,
however frightening or strange that self may prove to be.” ― May Sarton
Why the question:
Introduction:
Body:
Write about the meaning of being ‘ourself’ and the various impediments and restrictions on being
ourself – family, society and lack of belief. Write about the impact of the same and ways in which one
can ‘themselves’. Substantiate with examples.
Conclusion:
Introduction
“Knowing yourself is the beginning of all wisdom”
According to a legend ‘Know Thyself’ was carved into stone at the entrance to Apollo’s temple at
Delphi in Greece and even though the carved stone disappeared long ago, these two words stay in
our minds for thousands of years.

The philosopher Socrates famously declared that the unexamined life was not worth living and he
would sum up all the philosophical commandments to: “Know yourself.” And only by Knowing
ourselves, we can dare to be ourselves.
Body
To dare to be ourselves
One of these facets to be ourselves involves acknowledging your limitations. Only when we have
learnt our personality, our behaviour and our shortcomings, we can truly try to be genuine and
authentic. We will stop pretending the day we learn what we can do and accept it. One should not
try to fit in to the world by being superficial. We must be our real self, only then we can be truly
content and find purpose and meaning to life.
Self-awareness is something that everyone can always improve. It is emotional intelligence,

perceptiveness, and critical thinking. It means, knowing our weaknesses, but it also means knowing
our strengths and what motivates us.
The experience of self-discovery is undoubtedly challenging. Most knowledge comes gradually

without immediate impact, but some moments of true realization can offer a surprising release from
years of self-doubt
Once this happens, we should remove any façade or mask that we were and try to be true to our
beliefs and principles. Only then will the world see us for who we truly are. It also leads to to right
paths and ultimately to right destinations.
Take for instance Gandhiji, he did not bow down to anyone for his causes and what he believed in.
He wore indigenous clothes even when people made fun of him. This was because he dared to be
himself and became an icon and inspiring figure for generations to come.
Conclusion
Living well is not easy, but if we really want to live our lives, we must fight to make it happen.
Because if we are not living our lives, we are not living. We are just existing. And to live truly is to
be ourselves in any context and situation and not put on an act to please someone else.
What does this quote means to you? (150 words) “The soul becomes dyed with the colour of its
thoughts.” ― Marcus Aurelius

Why the question:
Introduction:
Body:
Write about the various manifestation of thoughts – how thought transform in to actions, actions to
personality and personality to character. Substantiate with examples.
Conclusion:
Introduction
The mind is everything. What you think you become - Buddha

It's how you think and act that determine the life you lead and the way you see the world. If one is
optimistic, then he is hopeful and will have the right drive to do something productive and be happy.
Similarly, if one is a pessimist and sees negative aspects of life without seeing the glass half full, he
will be a miserable soul who will always be unhappy.
Body
Every day we have 60,000 thoughts and most of them are the same as the day before, most of them
are negative. We choose to spend our life worrying about what the future might bring, to complain
about our present circumstances and about what’s missing in our lives.
Our whole being, our personality and our self-worth is all because of our mind and the thoughts
that consume us. Majority of the time is spent thinking and we are surrounded not by people but by
our own thoughts. Hence, they play an important role in shaping our personality and determine our
state of mind.
Thoughts are so powerful, even war and peace are result of thoughts of mankind or of one person.
Worry clogs the brain and paralyzes the thought. A troubled brain cannot think clearly, vigorously,
locally. If we want to change our experiences, our life, we have to change the frequency of our
thoughts. We have to pay closer attention to our thoughts because they are the ones that shape the
life we want to lead.
Conclusion
It’s our own resolution to accomplish something which makes a difference. Put all the heart and
mind in the smallest task we do, do it consciously. Develop the right mindset, have the courage to
accept your failure, learn from it and improve yourself and keep moving forward.
All that we are is the result of what we have thought: it is founded on our thoughts, it is made up of
our thoughts. If a man speaks or acts with a pure thought, happiness follows him, like a shadow that
never leaves him.
According to you, which are the five traits/vices that must not be present in a civil
servant as they hamper ones ethical and professional competence. How can one avoid
or eliminate them? (250 words)
Why the question:
The question is part of the static syllabus of General studies paper – 4 and part of ‘Abstract
Thursdays’ in Mission-2023 Secure.
Introduction:
Begin by mentioning how negative traits and vices can hamper ethical and professional competence.
Body:
First, write which five negative traits and vices should not be present in a civil servant and how they
hamper ethical and professional competence of civil servants.
Next, write about the ways to avoid or eliminate them.
Conclusion:
Summarise by highlighting the importance of having positive values.
Introduction

Today there is a need for moral resurgence of civil services in the country to improve the delivery of
services to the common man and to ensure the fruits of development reach the people. An ideal
officer should ensure zero pendency of issues in his purview, must display the highest qualities of
probity and integrity in office, be proactive in taking the measures of the government to the people,
and above all be sympathetic to the cause of marginalised sections.
Body
Vices that must not be present in a civil servant
 Abuse of authority: Power must be used for welfare of people and not for ulterior motives.
The abuse of power leads to chaos in governance with zero benefit to the public.
 Corrupt mentality and greed: There must be zero tolerance towards corruption and
ensuring total transparency and accountability at all levels of governance should become
priority.
o Corruption eats into the heart of the democracy, and there is a need for stringent
and timely action under the Prevention of Corruption Act (PCA) against erring civil
servants and public representatives. T
o There must be fast-tracking the high pendency of cases related to corruption

involving public servants on priority.
 Disrespect of rules and procedure: Such behaviour will lead to use of discretion and
bypassing of norms to get work done. This also leads to systemic corruption. Each and every
action taken by a civil servant must be as per established rules and regulations only.
 Opaqueness: Non-transparent working can lead to bad governance system. This will lead to
loss of faith of people in bureaucracy and government.
 Dishonesty: This is another trait where in there will be no conscience or moral compass for
an officer. Once again this may lead to corruption in the government.
Avoiding and eliminating vices

Celebrating the achievements of honest civil servants and recognizing their contributions should also
be done. This will not only be an incentive for younger officials to push for excellence, but such
publicity will also encourage the replication of innovative efforts by others.
Value-based training must be given to all civil servants to ensure probity in public life. Professional
ethics should be an integral component in all the training courses and called for a comprehensive
Code of Ethics for civil servants, based on the recommendations of the 2nd Administrative Reforms
Commission (ARC).
Due attention must be given to ensure that civil servants taking bona fide proactive actions are not
discouraged or harassed. The amendment to PCA in 2018, with changes to the definition of ‘criminal
misconduct’, ensures this to some extent. While the corrupt civil servants must be strictly dealt
with, we must not dissuade officials from taking bold decisions in the larger public interest.
There is also a need to re-engineer our institutions and streamline the processes to cut down
delays and ensure timely delivery of the services. People must be at the centre of a just and effective
governance system. Some of the governance practices that helped in delivering results are single-

window interfaces, e-governance, m-governance, third party appraisals, direct benefit transfer and
participatory governance
Conclusion
Indian civil servants should strive to make India’s civil services the best in the world. They need to
come out with innovative ideas and solutions to deliver public services to the satisfaction of every
citizen. At the same time, the right ecosystem should be created to ensure that they have a
meaningful career and are able to fulfill their responsibilities without fear or favour.
Human Values – lessons from the lives and teachings of great leaders, reformers
and administrators; role of family, society and educational institutions in
inculcating values.
Education that does not produce good character is pointless. Discuss.
Why the question:
Introduction:
Begin by explaining the various objectives of education.
Body:
Write about how the primary aim of education should be producing good character and it will impact
the society along with providing livelihood. Also, mention education devoid of good character can be
a menace to the society. Substantiate with examples.
Conclusion:
Summarise by highlighting the importance of education in character building.
Introduction
“A bad character is like a flat tire; you can’t go anywhere until you change it” — Zig Ziglar
Education promotes the metamorphosis of a child to become a full-fledged adult. Mere learning
without promotion and development of values even discards the definition of education. Education
of values and principles shapes and moulds a soul
Body
Achieving academic excellence for all students is at the very core of any school’s purpose, and will
inform much of what they do. Character education is not a new thing, extending as it does back to
the work of Aristotle. Yet it could be argued that the pursuit of success in schools in more recent
years has sought to put the cart before the horse. In driving students to think of success solely in
terms of exam grades and university places, pressure is created that can often be counter intuitive to
student wellbeing and academic progress.
It does not matter how educated or wealthy one is, if the inherent character or personality lacks
morals. In fact, such personalities can be threat to a peaceful society. E.g.: Mussolini, Hitler are all
examples of education devoid of morality leading mankind to their destruction.
In contemporary times it is equally relevant. For instance, An educated man taking dowry will be a
death spell for gender equality and gender justice. The seven sins of Gandhiji will materialise when
we are educated without morality like Science without humanity as is the case with nuclear weapons
today.
Thus, Education without values as useful as it seems makes a man, a clever devil.
Conclusion
Education without morals is like a ship without a compass, merely wandering nowhere. It is not
enough to have the power of concentration, but we must have worthy objectives upon which to
concentrate. It is not enough to know truth, but we must love truth and sacrifice for it.
Attitude: content, structure, function; its influence and relation with thought and
behaviour; moral and political attitudes; social influence and persuasion
What are the ways to deal with cognitive dissonance? (150 Words)
Difficulty Level: Moderate
Why the question:
The question is part of the static syllabus of General studies paper – 4 and part of ‘Conceptual
Tuesdays’ in Mission-2022 Secure.
To write about cognitive dissonance and ways to deal with it.
Introduction:
Begin by defining cognitive dissonance.
Body:
Next, mention the various reasons why cognitive dissonance occurs and the potential implications of
it. Cite examples of substantiate.
Next, mention the ways to deal and adapt for cognitive dissonance.
Conclusion:
Conclude by stressing on the way to manage cognitive dissonance.
Introduction
Cognitive dissonance is a phenomenon in which a person experiences psychological distress due to

conflicting thoughts or beliefs. It is the mental stress or uneasiness experienced by an individual who
holds two or more contradictory views, ideas, or values at the same time, or is confronted by new
information that conflicts with existing beliefs, ideas, or values. It means people prefer their attitude
and behaviour to be aligned in the same direction.
In order to reduce this tension, people may change their attitudes to reflect their other beliefs or
actual behaviours.
Body
Festinger’s (1957) cognitive dissonance theory suggests that we have an inner drive to hold all our
attitudes and behavior in harmony and avoid disharmony (or dissonance). This is known as
the principle of cognitive consistency. When there is an inconsistency between attitudes or
behaviors (dissonance), something must change to eliminate the dissonance.
Festinger hypothesized three main ways in which a person could reduce dissonance:
1. change one of the dissonant cognitions, such as changing one’s attitude;

2. add consonant cognitions to reduce overall inconsistency, such as seeking information to

explain one’s inconsistent behavior; and
3. diminish the importance of cognition in dissonant situations, such as trivializing the

dissonant behavior or the importance of the attitude.
Ways to eliminate Cognitive Dissonance:
 Denying and rejecting
o Rejection comes easy when a dissonant activity is oft-repeated.
o For instance, each time you eat meat while on a vegan diet creates more or less the
same amount of cognitive dissonance, but the more often you do it, the easier it
gets to handle the conflict
o People frequently reduce cognitive dissonance by discounting and dismissing

information that contradicts their beliefs.
o They may cut off access to new information that refutes their pre-existing ideas and
only remain open to data that support their beliefs. This is called “confirmation
bias.”
 Convincing Self Or Others
o The easiest way for a person to reduce their cognitive dissonance is to convince
oneself that there is no conflict.
o A person suffering from cognitive dissonance may reach out to and find support
from other people who hold similar opinions or matching ideologies, and join their
group.
o They may try persuading others that all fresh information is agenda-driven and
fallacious.
 Rationalizing The Behaviour

o Rationalizing is the process of applying logic to a situation. To reduce cognitive
dissonance, a person may rationalize their actions by inventing implausible (and
sometimes ridiculous) excuses.
o Despite knowing that smoking causes cancer, a smoker may rationalize the habit by
claiming they only smoke once or twice a day and only when they are stressed at
work.
 Reconciling The Differences
o This involves resolving the differences causing mental discomfort. The person may
accept the validity of pre-existing beliefs and change their behavior consistent with
their views.
o Long-term goals to eliminate dissonance are more likely to necessitate the use of
elaborate strategies like transcendence and attitude change.
o Alternatively, it could lead them to abandon their established beliefs and form new
ones.
Conclusion
A civil servant should always follow the constitutional moral values, code of conduct of services and
act within ethical framework of public service in any case of cognitive dissonance.
‘Majoritarian views and popular morality cannot dictate constitutional rights’. Discuss.
(150 words)
Why the question:
Directive word:
Introduction:
Start by elaborating on the concept of popular morality.
Body:
Write about aspects such as what is accepted within the realms of popular morality, is it static and
based on cultural notions and dictums. Cite examples
Influence of popular morality on constitutional rights – both positive and negative impact –
substantiate with examples.
Conclusion:
Conclude by stating that popular morality must be in consonance with constitutional rights.
Introduction
Popular morality refers to norms and values that are acceptable by majority of the populace in a
particular place or region. There may be a significant number of people who may have different
practices, yet the societal practice would be that of the majority. Eg: Wearing hijab by minority
community leading to clashes in Karnataka.
On the other hand, Majoritarian views are those where the needs and wishes of a minority
community is completely disregarded by the majority community and the majority community
believes it should be able to rule the country as per its wishes in any manner..
Body
Majoritarian views & Popular morality affecting Constitutional Rights

Sometimes popular morality may overshadow individual rights and even Constitutional rights. For
instance, entry into Sabarimala temple was upheld for women of all ages, but yet those women
who tried to enter were assaulted and needed police protection. This Supreme Court judgement was
not acceptable by the people.
The very purpose of fundamental rights in the Indian Constitution is to place the subject of an
individual’s liberty and dignity beyond the reach of majoritarian governments. This is so that
constitutional morality can assure the rights, among others, of “discrete and insular” minorities.
Popular morality sometimes aims to mainstream the majority culture. For example, the ban on
LGBTQ and criminalisation of their relations for many hundred years is a case in point. No
government would legalize such courtships as they lack gumption and fear losing vote banks. Hence
Courts had to step up to protect rights of LGBTQ.
Even today the Dalit community is being segregated and discriminated against. This goes
against Article 17 and Article 14 that stands for equality. Cases of Dalit groom not allowed to ride a
horse for baraat, Dalit women being raped shows the atrocities of majority over Dalits. Sometimes
popular morality can lead to violence.
Conclusion
The government in power must balance the competing needs of legal development and the
satisfaction of popular justice concerns. In a conservative society like that of India, behaviour nudge
can lead to acceptance of minority norms and value. Live and Let Live must become a practice. As a
society we must embrace popular morality while giving space for dissonance, so that we become a
generally tolerant society.
In the era of competition and commercialisation, it is a herculean task to sustain as a

leader who stays true to their ethics. Analyse. (150 words)
Reference: Ethics, Integrity and Aptitude by Lexicon Publications.
Why the question:
To understand the various roles and responsibilities of a leader and the importance of ethics in their
work domain
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by defining what is leadership along with few traits of a good leader.
Body:
Highlight the need for an ethical leader in the present context of rising scams and blind race against
mere monetary gains of businesses. Give few examples highlighting cases of leadership with and
without ethics and its impact on the organisation as well as the society.
Conclusion:
Conclude by summarising the above points highlighting the need for ethical leadership
Introduction
Ethical Leadership is about Moral principles that govern a person's behaviour or the conducting of an
activity. Ethical leadership means acting according to your moral principles in your day-to-day
business life and decision-making. To put it simply, it means doing the right thing. Ethical Leadership
is very important for supporting good governance in today’s global economy and is one of the
central constructs to protect business and organizational ethics.
Body
Why is it a herculean task for leader to be ethical?
 The global retreat of democracies, relegation of the ethical imperative to an obsessive pursuit of
raw power as an end in itself, a crisis of institutional legitimacy, and the challenge of forging a
political consensus needed for hard but necessary decisions interrogate the proclaimed
assumptions of democratic resilience.

 The rise of ‘jingoistic nationalism’ in confrontation with an international cooperative endeavor to

face common challenges, a skewed balance between demands of security and sanctity of civil
rights, the sordid saga of fake news and misinformation, an unprecedented global financial crisis
that has weakened our collective capacity to rescue national economies, loss of millions of jobs
with an estimated $3.4 trillion lost in labour revenue and the resultant social distress,
heightened geopolitical rivalries, racism, xenophobia, and woeful absence of a united global
response to the challenge of climate change collectively present a potent cocktail of societal
instability and political disruption.
 Increasing encroachment of the private sphere by a ‘surveillance state’ through the abuse of
digital technologies and Artificial Intelligence systems raise discomforting questions about the
flawed dominance of efficiency over ethics and power over principle.
 Notwithstanding the wholly welcome technological empowerment of vast swathes of humanity,

digital inequality, the omnipresence of algorithm-driven platforms and commercial harvesting of
personal data raise disquieting questions about an unhindered infraction of privacy rights and
human dignity.
 Issues concerning accountability for autonomous systems, the absence of enforceable global
norms on cybersecurity given the expanding reach of cyber bullies, and communal polarization
and violence facilitated by social media raise questions about the future of liberty and dignity in
an age of rights.
 Digital ‘code wars’ are seen as the new ideological confrontation with a potential to divide the
world.
 The diminished authority of the state to regulate the impact of technology on our social and
political life questions the original premises of the social compact.
Traits necessary for a leader in today’s era
 In a reshaped world, formal authority is less potent. Only moral authority can build trust, inspire
colleagues, create meaning and help people imagine a better future.
 Leadership in today’s world should consist of an approach which is open and transparent.
 Leaderships goals and visions should be communicated fast and effectively.
 Everyone then has time to think about how they fit into the changes which are going to be
made.
 Leaders today must also listen to and hear everyone’s input and solutions, including our youth.
Conclusion
Integrity, consistency, empathy, relentless determination, self-effacing humility, a binding moral
compass and the ability to motivate masses within the inviolate ethical and ideological framework of
politics are leadership attributes more relevant today than ever. A largeness of heart willing and able
to rise above the petty and personal, together with intellectual depth necessary to lead the battle of
ideas for the establishment of a dignitarian global society, best define the qualities of leadership in
these troubled times.

Aptitude and foundational values for Civil Service , integrity, impartiality and non-
partisanship, objectivity, dedication to public service, empathy, tolerance and
compassion towards the weaker sections.
What do you think are the cardinal ethical attributes in a Civil Servant? How can these
be inculcated? (150 Words)
Why the question:
Directive word:
Key Demand of the question: To write about most important ethical attributes of civil servants and
ways to inculcate them.
Introduction:
Begin by mentioning the role of cardinal ethical values of civil servants as per you.
Body:
First, list down the ethical values of civil servants and justification behind their need.
Next, write about how these ethical values be inculcate among the civil servants so that they remain
ethical and efficient.
Conclusion:
Introduction
For a civil servant, acting ethically is of utmost importance. A civil servant is supposed to possess the
virtues of objectivity and impartiality. The cardinal ethical traits – Integrity, Compassion,
Accountability, Objectivity, and commitment to public service– form the ethical foundation of a
civil servant and other values like non-partisanship, tolerance, responsiveness can emanate from
them.
Body
Cardinal ethical attributes of civil servant
 Integrity and Honesty: Integrity is putting the obligations of public service above your own
personal interests. Civil servants should be guided solely by public interest in their official
decision making and not by any financial or other consideration either in respect of
themselves, their families or their friends.
 Objectivity, Impartiality and Political Neutrality: Civil servants in carrying out their official
work, including functions like procurement, recruitment, delivery of services etc. should take
decisions based on merit and free from any partisan/political consideration.
 Commitment to Public Service: Civil servants should deliver services in a fair, effective,
impartial and courteous manner to serve the larger public interest. The dedication to the
public welfare cause is crucial.
 Accountability: They must be held responsible for every action and thus there should be no
place for corruption or nefarious activity. They must leave no shadow of doubt whenever
they take certain action and it must be transparently done.
Inculcation of ethical traits

 By being motivated and looking back at the reasons why we became civil servants in the
first place.
 Reading about great personalities like Gandhiji, Sardar Patel and taking que from their lives
to have a commitment for the public. This can lead to renewed motivation to do greater
good for the society.
 Moral turpitude is a slippery slope. Hence even for once, a civil servant must not be
tempted to be dishonest or immoral. This can lead to firm principles being set in stone.
 To put oneself in the shoes of others to understand their sufferings. For instance, Gandhiji
when he came to South Africa could not go back seeing the plight of Indians and pledged to
fight for their cause. This is how one can develop empathy and compassion.
 To be proactive while making decisions and disclosing information to the public through
websites and RTI.
Conclusion
Civil service involves decision-making in the public sphere. They have to deal with many matters that
are anonymous and discrete. Due to this, Integrity is an eminent desirable quality in civil servants.
A civil servant needs fortitude to stand up for their principles and withstand immoral or illegal
pressures. Temperance or moderation is especially important for public servants. While taking
decisions or responding to situations, civil servants have to be moderate. They should not swing to
extremes, but act judiciously in a balanced manner.
What is objectivity? Discuss its importance in public service as well as in private life.
(150 words)
Why the question:
To write about the importance of objectivity in public service and priave life.
Directive:
Introduction:
Start by defining objectivity.
Body:
Write about how Objectivity helps in taking decisions based upon established facts and figures, helps
avoid personal opinion and bias and arrive at fair decision.
Cite suitable examples to substantiate your points in public service and private life.
Conclusion:
Complete the answer by stressing on its significance.
Introduction
Objectivity is a central philosophical concept, related to reality and truth, which has been variously
defined by sources. Generally, objectivity means the state or quality of being true even outside of a
subject‘s individual biases, interpretations, feelings, and imaginings. A proposition is generally
considered objectively true when its truth conditions are met without biases caused by feelings,
ideas, and opinions (mind-independent).
Body
Importance of Objectivity:
 Critical thinking: By thinking both pros and cons and then taking a decision.
 Right to review decisions: within judicial / administrative procedure, there should be

mechanism for appellate board e.g. in taxation, land acquisition etc.
 Right to be heard: often officers don’t hear the complaint or opinion of people properly and just
do the things that are in their mind. Hence new schemes should have ‘social audit / public
hearing’ components.
 Information management: if you don’t have hardcore information /statistics, you can’t take
objective decisions. E.g. sustainable development goals (SDG) have 17 goals and 169 targets.
Previously in Millennium development goals (MDG), we had 18 indicators, yet we lacked proper
statistical databases to compare performance. Lack of data, prevents us from finding the faults
and fixing them.
 Transparency: e.g. right to information act. Bureaucrat will think twice before taking
subjective/discretionary decisions, fearing that he’ll have to answer it if someone files an RTI
Relevance of Objectivity in Public Services:
 Being non-partisan
 Objectivity will help civil servants to be non-partisan, impartial and more service
oriented.
 For example District collector in making appointments needs to give priority to merit
rather than other factors like the caste or background of the caste.
 Critical thinking and taking rational decisions
 By thinking both pros and cons and then taking a decision.
 It also contributes in rational merit based decision makings in day to day work of them.
Ex. Team work, solving emergency issues like riotous situation.
 within judicial / administrative procedure, there should be mechanism for appellate

board e.g. in taxation, land acquisition etc.
 It also plays a big role in reducing menace of corruption from the system.
 Right to be heard:
 often officers don’t hear the complaint or opinion of people properly and just do the
things that are in their mind. Hence new schemes should have ‘social audit / public
hearing’ components.
 Information management:
 if you don’t have hardcore information /statistics, you can’t take objective decisions.

 E.g. sustainable development goals (SDG) have 17 goals and 169 targets. Previously in
Millennium development goals (MDG), we had 18 indicators, yet we lacked proper
statistical databases to compare performance. Lack of data, prevents us from finding the
faults and fixing them.
 Transparency:
 Being objective ensures that work of civil servant becomes fair, transparent and
visionary above all narrow considerations of kinship, nepotism, favouritism.
 e.g. right to information act. Bureaucrat will think twice before taking
subjective/discretionary decisions, fearing that he’ll have to answer it if someone files an
RTI
Relevance in Private life
 Objectivity is necessary to get an accurate explanation of how things work in the world.
 E.g.: In a country like India, where black magic, superstition is still prevalent, objectivity
becomes very imperative in bursting the myths.
 It helps to tackle prejudices and stereotypes.
 E.g.: The disabled and crippled are seen as a curse, while being unaware of the scientific
reasons behind it.
 The women are always held responsible for birth of a girl child while the actual fact remains
that it is the man and his genes which is responsible for sex of the child.
 Objectivity helps to tackle fake news menace which is growing at rampant rate.
 Objectivity helps to overcome the ethical dilemmas, value judgement & complexities of social
phenomena.
Conclusion
In public life objectivity as a value must strive for in all interaction but at many times being objective
become difficult. Fairness as a value closest to objectivity can be practiced which progressively leads
to objectivity.
Contributions of moral thinkers and philosophers from India and world.

What is moral absolutism? Explain with examples. (250 words)
Why the question:
The question is part of the static syllabus of General studies paper – 4 and part of ‘Philosophical
Mondays’ in Mission-2022 Secure.
Introduction:
Begin by defining moral absolutism.
Body:
In detail, explain the moral absolutism and use examples to substantiate you points.
Next, write a critique of moral absolutism.

Conclusion:
Conclude the answer by summarizing.
Introduction
Moral absolutism is an ethical view that particular actions are intrinsically right or wrong. Stealing,
for instance, might be considered to be always immoral, even if done for the well-being of others
(e.g., stealing food to feed a starving family), and even if it does in the end promote such a good.
Body
Moral absolutism stands in contrast to other categories of normative ethical theories such
as consequentialism.
For example, someone who believes absolutely in non-violence considers it wrong to use violence
even in self-defence.
Absolutism takes a universal view of humanity that there is one set of rules for everyone – which
enables the drafting of universal rules – such as the Declaration of Human Rights. Religious views of
ethics tend to be absolutist.
It is a form of deontology. The challenge with moral absolutism, however, is that there will always be
strong disagreements about which moral principles are correct and which are incorrect. For
example, most people around the world probably accept the idea that we should treat others as we
wish to be treated ourselves. But beyond that, people from different countries likely hold varying
views about everything from the morality of abortion and capital punishment to nepotism and
bribery.
Moral absolutism contrasts with moral relativism, which denies that there are absolute moral
values. It also differs from moral pluralism, which urges tolerance of others’ moral principles
without concluding that all views are equally valid. So, while moral absolutism declares a universal
set of moral values, in reality, moral principles vary greatly among nations, cultures, and religions.
Moral absolutism was popular amongst ancient Greek philosophers such as Plato and Aristotle. It
also largely shaped historical societies through the “divine right of kings.” The divine right of kings
gave royalty political and religious right to rule as they were under the mandate of God. It also made
the setting up and upholding of laws easier as rulers were subject only to the will of God, and not to
the people over which they served. This has carried over into the creation of laws and justice
systems across the world, where the law must be upheld with no exceptions
Conclusion
A primary criticism of moral absolutism regards how we come to know what the “absolute” morals
are. The authorities that are quoted as sources of absolute morality are all subject to human
interpretation, and multiple views abound on them. For morals to be truly absolute, they would
have to have a universally unquestioned source, interpretation and authority. Therefore, so critics
say, there is no conceivable source of such morals, and none can be called “absolute”. So even if
there are absolute morals, there will never be universal agreement on just what those morals are,
making them by definition unknowable.

The Categorical Imperative is supposed to provide a way for us to evaluate moral

actions and to make moral judgments. Discuss. (150 Words)
Reference: plato.stanford.edu
Why the question:
To write about the evaluative aspect of Kantian Categorical Imperative.
Introduction:
Begin by defining Categorical Imperative of Emmanuel Kant.
Body:
Begin the body by explaining in detail about your understanding of Categorical Imperative with
examples. You can use simple but effective examples to put forward your ideas regarding Universal
Moral Law etc.
Next, mention how it provides a framework of judging moral right actions from the wrong ones.
Conclusion:
Give a concise summation of your views to conclude the answer.
Introduction
Immanuel Kant (1724–1804) argued that the supreme principle of morality is a standard of
rationality that he dubbed the “Categorical Imperative” (CI). Kant characterized the CI as
an objective, rationally necessary and unconditional principle that we must always follow despite
any natural desires or inclinations we may have to the contrary.
Body:
The CI states that it is immoral to use another person merely as a means to an end and that people
must under all circumstances be treated as ends in themselves. This is in contrast to some
interpretations of the utilitarian view, which allow for use of individuals as means to benefit the
many.
Kantian ethics refers to a deontological ethical theory ascribed to the German philosopher
Immanuel Kant. The theory, developed as a result of Enlightenment rationalism, is based on the
view that the only intrinsically good thing is a good will; an action can only be good if its maxim – the
principle behind it – is duty to the moral law.
CI provide a way for us to evaluate moral actions and to make moral judgments
 Act only according to that maxim whereby you can at the same time will that it should
become a universal law.
o It states that one should choose our ‘codes of conduct’ only if they serve perfect /
imperfect duty and are good for all.
o Perfect duties are blameworthy if not met and are the basic requirements for a
human being.
o An example of perfect duty is the avoidance of suicide.

 Act in such a way that you treat humanity, whether in your own person or in the person of
any other, always at the same time as an end and never merely as a means to an end.

o This states that we should not use humanity of ourselves or others as a means to an
end.
o An example would be that of slavery or prostitution.
 For Kant to treat people with dignity was to treat them morally. This idea became a rallying
point for those struggling against social hierarchies and for human rights. It represent what
is called the moral conception of rights.
 Taking the example of forced labour and jajmani system where human beings are treated as
“means” for achieving the “ends” that is profit motive. Human intrinsic worth i.e. dignity is
not respected and they are exploited for petty gains. This led to inequality in society where
one section of people exploiting other section for self-motive.
 Every rational being must so act as if he were through his maxim always a legislating
member in the universal kingdom of ends.
o This states that we should consider ourselves to be members in the universal realm
of ends.
o We should consider our actions to be of consequence to everyone else in that our
actions affect not only ourselves but that of others.
 g.: Eviction of tribes from forest land for construction of a dam and rendering them
homeless.
Conclusion
Kant’s philosophy of human individuals as end in itself endorses the golden rule of “treating others
as one’s self would wish to be treated”. As no one would wish to be used simply as a means,
therefore one should not also use other human beings as means to achieve their ends. This
philosophy can be of great help in resolving the ethical dilemmas where there is debate between
relative importance of means and ends.
Value addition
Kant’s Categorical Imperative:
 Kant believed that there was a supreme principle of morality, and he referred to it as The
Categorical Imperative.
 The CI determines what our moral duties are. Kant thought that all acts should be judged
according to a rule he called the Categorical Imperative.
 A categorical imperative denotes an absolute, unconditional requirement that exerts its

authority in all circumstances, both required and justified as an end in itself.
 He gives the highest honor for the categorical imperative because it became universal law
that can be applied to any and every one.
 Kant is saying that simply willing that our moral rule become a universal law produces a
logical contradiction.
 His categorical imperative ensures that we aren’t doing these acts in mimic of others but
rather in line with one universal law.

Public/Civil service values and Ethics in Public administration: Status and

problems; ethical concerns and dilemmas in government and private institutions;
laws, rules, regulations and conscience as sources of ethical guidance;
accountability and ethical governance; strengthening of ethical and moral values
in governance; ethical issues in international relations and funding;
With the continuing decline in people’s trust in public authorities, the fight against
nepotism and the need to ensure impartial recruitment procedures have never been so
important. Discuss. (150 words)
Why the question:
Directive word:
Introduction:
Start by defining nepotism.
Body:
First, mention the various way in nepotism affects public administration – conflict in the work place,
low staff morale, loss of competent employees, use of the job to carry out unethical acts etc.
Next, mention how nepotism can be avoided in administration. Cite examples to substantiate.
Conclusion:
Introduction
Nepotism and favouritism at local and regional level can hinder the effectiveness and efficiency of
local public service delivery, diminish public trust and damage the perception that local and
regional public authorities are serving the interests of their constituents.
As public trust levels in public institutions are often linked to the quality and performance of their
staff, sound human resources management practices need to be put in place, to ensure that local
and regional administrations hire the people who are best suited, qualified and motivated.
Body
Background
 Since the days of Plato and Aristotle, the distinctive feature that differentiates good from
bad governance has been the prevalence of public over the private interests.
 Corruption related activities, such as favouritism, nepotism and abuse of power, can affect
virtually all human resource activities, with recruitment, promotion, training and transfer of
staff being among the most vulnerable ones.
 The risks of buying and selling positions, appointing and promoting friends, relatives and
party affiliates, are particularly high when the positions are considered lucrative, or provide

opportunities for illicit enrichment and/or when unemployment rates are high and public
service positions can bring stability of income and a range of other benefits.
 In such situations, the existence of high discretionary powers, combined with lack of strong
accountability systems, checks and balances and weak transparency mechanisms serve as
enablers that facilitate corrupt practices.
Fight against nepotism and ensuring impartial recruitment
The establishment of merit-based recruitment and promotion policies, merit-based appraisal

systems and performance management, transparent and attractive pay and an efficient system of
internal controls come to play a vital role in preventing corruption. Steps needed in this regard are
as follows:
 The elaboration of job profiles/descriptions, clearly indicating the requirements and

qualifications needed from the job holder;
 Transparency in advertising open positions;
 Clear and transparent procedures for selection;
 Clear and transparent appointment/selection criteria;
 The provision of evidences, confirming the qualifications of the successful candidates;
 The inclusion of unambiguous terms and conditions of service in the job

contracts/appointments;
 Establishing a remuneration that corresponds to the duties and responsibilities of the post;
 Establishing a system for annual performance appraisals for determination of effectiveness,

training needs, career progression and promotion
 Preventing conflict of interest:
o Public officials should not be involved in any recruitment and selection procedures
that question their impartiality;
o Family members cannot be in a situation where one is the direct supervisor of the
other;
o Any conflict of interests of a candidate for the position of public official should be
resolved before the appointment.
Conclusion
Given that public confidence levels and corruption perceptions are determined by the quality and
the performance of the employees working in each particular institution, the establishment of
sound human resources management practices, ensuring that local and regional administrations hire
the people who are best suited, qualified and motivated, is of utmost importance for underpinning
public trust and fighting corruption. Such practices serve ‘as a steward of democracy’

A person’s moral decision of what is right and wrong is not the sheer application of a
mathematical principle. Many variables come into play when examining how to conduct
a person’s life. Discuss. (150 words)
Why the question:
To write about the ways to strengthen moral character among civil servants.
Directive word:
Introduction:
Begin by mentioning about moral relativism.
Body:
Write about the various determinants that are involved in deciding whether an action is moral right
or wrong. Write about the variation or relativity of moral actions across time and space. Substantiate
wit examples.
Conclusion:
Introduction
Moral decisions are made in dilemmas where the well-being of both self and others are at stake, and
are guided by their ethics, principles, and convictions. A person experiences reality inside their head
and we premise our personal version of reality upon the accumulation of knowledge. Decision-
making entails the identification and application of personal knowledge in a just and virtuous
manner. The only measure of personal integrity is whether a person derives their own judgment in a
rational manner and then determinedly implements the moral judgment regardless of the possibility
of encountering the derision and scorn of other people
Body
While making a decision, there are several factors that come into play. They may be a person’s own
beliefs influenced by family, friends and religion. Decisions may be influenced by the context that
may change once the context is changed.
Over the years, philosophers have recognized five different frameworks for approaching moral
issues. These approaches developed over many years, ranging from Ancient Greek times to the 19th
century. Each of them is designed to deliver the most virtuous and just resolution to a moral
dilemma. The five approaches are:
 The Utilitarian Approach: The Utilitarian Approach addresses a decision by determining

what is the most beneficial or causes the least amount of harm. The ethical action in this
approach is the one that causes the most amount of good for the largest amount of people.
 The Rights Approach: This approach stipulates that the best ethical action is that which
protects the ethical rights of those who are affected by the action. It emphasizes the belief
that all humans have a right to dignity. This is based on a formulation of Kant’s categorical
imperative that says: “Act in such a way that you treat humanity, whether in your own

person or in the person of another, always at the same time as an end and never simply as
a means to an end.”
 The Fairness Approach: The most influential version of this approach today is found in the
work of American philosopher John Rawls, who argued, along Kantian lines, that just ethical
principles are those that would be chosen by free and rational people in an initial situation
of equality. This hypothetical contract is considered fair or just because it provides a
procedure for what counts as a fair action, and does not concern itself with the
consequences of those actions.
 The Common-Good Approach: This approach to ethics underscores the networked aspects
of society and emphasizes respect and compassion for others, especially those who are
more vulnerable.
 The Virtue Approach: One long-standing ethical principle argues that ethical actions should
be consistent with ideal human virtues. Aristotle, for example, argued that ethics should be
concerned with the whole of a person’s life, not with the individual discrete actions a person
may perform in any given situation.
Making good ethical decisions requires a trained sensitivity to ethical issues and a practiced
method for exploring the ethical aspects of a decision and weighing the considerations that should
impact our choice of a course of action. Having a method for ethical decision making is essential.
When practiced regularly, the method becomes so familiar that we work through it automatically
without consulting the specific steps. This is one reason why we can sometimes say that we have a
“moral intuition” about a certain situation, even when we have not consciously thought through the
issue. We are practiced at making ethical judgments, just as we can be practiced at playing the
piano, and can sit and play well “without thinking.” Nevertheless, it is not always advisable to follow
our immediate intuitions, especially in particularly complicated or unfamiliar situations.
One of the most important things to do at the beginning of ethical deliberation is to locate, to the
extent possible, the specifically ethical aspects of the issue at hand. Sometimes what appears to be
an ethical dispute is really a dispute about facts or concepts.
For example, some Utilitarians might argue that the death penalty is ethical because it deters crime
and thus produces the greatest amount of good with the least harm. Other Utilitarians, however,
might argue that the death penalty does not deter crime, and thus produces more harm than good.
The argument here is over which facts argue for the morality of a particular action, not simply over
the morality of particular principles.
Conclusion
Making ethical decisions requires sensitivity to the ethical implications of problems and situations. It
also requires practice. Having a framework for ethical decision making is essential. Also, in the field
of administration it helps to have a right set of Code of Ethics and conduct to remove dilemmas in
decision making and also to remove discretionary powers to maximum possible extent.
What is international morality? Do you think it is more of theoretical concept rather

than being a practical norm? Critically examine. (150 words)
Why the question:

To write international morality and its nature.
Directive:
Introduction:
Start by defining international morality.
Body:
Start by explaining what is International ethics – moral principles, customary International Law,
Human rights, Cooperation, Non-aggression etc. Cite examples to substantiate your points.
Next, write about if its just theoretical concept or it is applied in practise as well.
Conclusion:
Conclude by giving a balanced opinion on international morality.
Introduction
Ethical questions are central to the study of international relations, as it is a field of study concerned
with war and peace, trade and production, and law and rights. Yet, a persistent conventional wisdom
suggests ethics are marginal to international relations.
Realists believe that International relations is solely based on power and national interest and has no
place for morality. In the words of Thucydides “the strong do what they can and the weak suffer
what they must”.”
Body
Do Ethical considerations have a say in international relations?
To answer this question, realists and idealists have an ongoing debate. But since the second world
war, the debate was settled largely in favour of the realists.
Hans Morgenthau, gave 6 principles of Realism in International Relations
 Politics is governed by Objective Laws which have roots in Human Nature:
o The first principle of political realism holds that “politics, like society in general, is
governed by objective laws that have their roots in human nature.” Humans are
power seeking by nature and so are the states.
 National Interest defined in terms of National Power:
o No considerations of Moral Imperatives when it comes to national interest. For eg:

Even though India espoused Panchsheel principles, China went to war with India in
1962 without as much of a warning.
 National Interest is always dynamic and it keeps changing. Eg: Russia had imposed arms
embargo on Pakistan by being a friend to India, which was lifted recently.
 Abstract Moral Principles cannot be applied to Politics:
o Politics is not ethics and the ruler is not a moralist. The primary function of a state is
to satisfy and protect the demands of national interest by means of national power.

 No universal moral principle in international relations
o Political realism refuses to identify the moral aspirations of a particular nation with
the moral principles that govern the universe. It refuses to accept that the national
interests and policies of any particular nation reflect universally applied moral
principles.
 Autonomy of International Relations: It is neither ethics nor law or economics. It is an

autonomous discipline where national interest reigns supreme
However, it must be noted that, it is without the element of morality that USA decided to use
nuclear bomb on Japan. Only after this plan was executed, the world became aware of the
devastating consequences that had ensued. Below are examples that highlight this norm.
 The alleged just war cause where a country thinks it’s their moral responsibility to save the
world. E.g.: USA and Iraq war.
 Threat to the Rules-based order of the world by side-lining of the Global bodies like UNSC,
WTO such as USA. Pursuing unilateralism and Protectionism goes against the ideal of Rules-
based international world order.
 China’s dominance in the South China Sea and its policy of “Debt-Trap diplomacy”, “Island-
encirclement” and “String of Pearls” show that there is no adherence to morality.
International morality and International Relations
 Rights and Responsibilities: The UNPeackeeping mission is based on the principle of

universal peace. This is the responsibility of the Security Council and all the nations to
maintain universal peace. India believes in this ideology and has been the largest cumulative
troop contributing nation.
 Equality: Ethics aim at “Peaceful World”, “Respect for All” & “Equality” while forming
international organizations, declarations & forums. E.g.: The demand for equality in IMF &
UNO shows the demand of adhering to ethics in a way.
 Resolving Tensions: Ethics helps to avoid the “Ego Clash” & “Ideological Clash” between two
or more nations. For instance, the disruption between India & Pakistan relations can be
avoided if both take a decision based on ethics.
 Solidarity: Natural disasters and refugee crisis situations require a more compassionate view
of the global community. These are not isolated events and rather, the duty of every global
citizen to help in the times of crisis. g.- Aid during natural disasters (Nepal earthquake)
 Human rights: Adherence to human rights is vital after the Decalaration of Human Rights in
the UN Charter. Eg- lack of ethics in the international relation has been the cause of wars &
genocide many times in history (Rawnda and Burundi) and also like the first world war.
Conclusion
International ethic is not just an ethic of some leading country, it is not simply an ethic of a powerful
country having obligations towards others, because of the power they have over others.
International ethics may be elaborated as, that which enables one to participate more actively in

shaping and building good international community. The vision of international community that
every country has and reality of an international community provides us with food for thought, on
what ought to be the nature and purpose of investing in international relations to build an
international community.
India should take the approach of treating drug addiction as moral and a medical hazard
rather than a criminal challenge. Analyse. (150 words)
Why the question:
To write about taking an empathetic approach towards helping drug addicts recover from drug
addiction.
Directive:
Introduction:
Begin by stating that concept of retribution and deterrence approach to counter drug menace has
not been fruitful and has only led to the drug networks remaining underground.
Body:
First mention that the harsh approach has created a lot of stigma and lack of intent to approach
medical institutions people addicted to drugs. Many a times being unaware and unguided, leads to
overdoses and death.
Next, state the need for a humane and persuasive approach to deaddiction on lines of Portugal
model. This would lead to a number of people voluntarily accessing the public health care facilities
for drug related concerns.
Conclusion:
Conclude by stating that human rights and public health must be centre of the discourse rather than
punishing the victims of drug addiction.
Introduction
Substance abuse disorder, or drug addiction, can be defined as a progressive disease that causes
people to lose control of the use of some substance despite worsening consequences of that use.
Substance use disorder can be life-threatening.
Body
Issues with treating drug addict as a criminal
 The idea of treating drug users as criminals came from the fact they use or are in possession
of drugs, which by law are declared illegal.
 According to legal logic, anybody who uses or is in possession of illegal things, be they drugs,
guns or counterfeit money, is deemed a law offender.
 It dissuades the other drug addicts to get themselves absolved of the addiction.
 The stigma attached to drug addicts will further catapult.
Drug addicts should be treated as a victim

 Addiction should not be seen as a character flaw, but as an ailment that any other person
could be struggling with. Therefore, the stigma associated with drug taking needs to be
reduced. Society needs to understand that drug-addicts are victims and not criminals.
 Drug addiction is also considered a form of social disease, like prostitution. Not so long ago
HIV was also regarded a social disease.
 All the available evidence shows, beyond any doubt, that punitive measures alone, no
matter how harsh, do not achieve the goal of reducing drug consumption.
 Worse, in many cases prohibition and punishment have disastrous consequences.
 That is why Laws on narcotics and addictive drugs provides treatment and rehabilitation for
drug addicts, but not for drug traffickers or dealers
 The stigmatization of drug users, the fear of police repression and the risk of criminal
prosecution make access to treatment much more difficult.
 Instead of insisting on repressive measures that are, at best ineffective, at worst

counterproductive, it chose a bold approach that favours more humane and efficient
policies.
Portugal Model of Drug Policy
 Portugal’s national drug policy represents a desirable paradigm shift in global drug policy.
 Under the new strategy, the purchase, possession, and consumption of illicit drugs have
been downgraded from criminal to administrative offenses.
 A key concept underlying Portugal’s drug policy is prevention
 Portugal is wisely investing in harm reduction and in forms of social regulation to reduce
drug consumption. That is why it puts so much emphasis on dissuasion and prevention.
 Portugal proves that decriminalization does not increase drug use. To the contrary, it has
demonstrated that humanitarian and pragmatic strategies can, in fact, reduce drug
consumption, addiction, recidivism, and HIV infection.
 Preventive measures may only be effective when they are systematic and not onetime
actions
Conclusion
Recognition of the need to respect human dignity, understand the life choices and social
circumstances of others, and uphold the constitutional right to health lay behind the change of
approach toward drug consumption.
By placing a moral compass, we create a clear vision of the mental processes that point
us in an ethical direction. Elaborate. (150 words)
Why the question:

Using the metaphor of the moral compass to describe conscience, our inner sense of right and wrong
offers a framework to guide our actions.
Directive:
Elaborate – Give a detailed account as to how and why it occurred, or what is the particular context.
You must be defining key terms where ever appropriate, and substantiate with relevant associated
facts.
Introduction:
Start by describing what you understand by moral compass (conscience) which governs the actions
you take in day to day life.
Body:
Elaborate on how the moral compass aids in deciding what right from is wrong. Use examples to
substantiate your points.
One way is to treat others the way you want to be treated.
Next way, to use Rights Theory that obligates us to respect the rights of others and live up to our
obligations towards them.
Another way is to utilitarian perspective to do maximum good for maximum people.
Conclusion:
Completed the answer by bring out how the moral compass prevents us acting purely from self-
interest and helps us live a life of integrity.
Introduction
Moral compass is a term used to describe our inner sense of right and wrong offers a framework to
guide our actions. Conscience is inner moral sense of a person which guides him/her to regulate
his behaviour. Voice of conscience corresponds to an inner voice that judges your behaviour. Voice
of conscience is the source of ethical decision making for many.
Body
Conscience can be defined as something within each of us that tells us what is right and what is
wrong. Therefore, if one uses his/her conscience when making decisions it would be guided by what
is the right thing to do and what is wrong.
The traditional test is to apply ethical decision-making methods such as Rights Theory that obligates
us to respect the rights of others and live up to our obligations towards them. Another approach is
to evaluate the possible benefits and harms of alternative courses of action on stakeholders who
may be affected by our possible actions and choose the one that maximizes net benefits.
 Our conscience is our inner guide and it helps you figure out how to make good choices. As
we grow up, we learn right from wrong. Our conscience is the thought and feeling we have
that tells us whether something is a right or wrong thing to do or say. Thus voice of
Conscience is a consistent guide to ethical decision making.
 A person can prepare himself/herself to heed to the voice of conscience by:
 Pausing and thinking about the dimensions of issue.
 Practicing the power of silence.
 Meditating and prayer.
 Freeing oneself from external influences and selfish interests.

 A human being always comes across ethical dilemmas in the decision making the process.
Voice of Conscience acts as the guide for taking correct decisions when we have to choose
between competing sets of principles in a given, usually undesirable or perplexing, situation.
Example: Helping accident victim on your way to an interview.
 The voice of conscience of an individual help in analysing the situation from different
perspectives and help in taking the right decision.
 Voice of Conscience helps in avoiding Conflicts of interest for better decision making. It can
help in deciding between personal gains and public welfare.
 Voice of Conscience is our ability to make a practical decision in light of ethical values and
principles.
 Voice of Conscience is a person’s moral compass of right and wrong as well as the
consciousness of one’s actions. Expressions such as ‘gut feeling’ and ‘guilt’ are often applied
in conjunction with a conscience.
 The voice of conscience might suggest different principles and different behaviours to
different situations. But it for a moment help individual from not doing wrong based on
universal values.
Conclusion
Acting purely from self-interest, at best, keeps us parallel to the original position and can turn our
compass south if our actions do harm to others. We avoid going in that direction by living a life of
integrity. We also need to understand and appreciate why we should consider the needs of others
before acting. We could simply go back to The Golden Rule: Treat others the way you want to be
treated. None of us, presumably, wants to be disrespected so we should treat others respectfully.
Government organisations suffer from opacity and inherent lack of information. What
are ways to ensure transparency and accountability in government organisations? (150
words)
Why the question:
To write about ways to build and maintain a culture of accountability in government organisations
Introduction:
Start by defining transparency and accountability.
Body:
First. Write about how it transparency and accountability are not prioritised in government offices.
Next, with relevant examples elaborate on how an culture of accountability can be instilled – citizen
charters, RTI, Reward & Recognition, Autonomy & Trust, Feedback & Coaching, communication etc.
Conclusion:
Complete the answer writing about the link between accountability and efficiency.
Introduction
The idea of good governance is as old as Indian civilization. ‘Raj Dharma’ was the supreme code of
conduct or the rule of law that governed all the actions of the ruler. This description of good

governance is found in ancient Indian scriptures such as the Mahabharata, Shukracharyas’s Nitisar,
Panini’s Ashtadhyayi, Valmiki’s Ramayana and especially in Kautilya’s Arthashastra. Two main
aspects of good governance are transparency and accountability.
Body
Transparency involves the release of information and requires an open attitude about actions and
decisions, indicated by the degree to which the principal (on whose behalf the agent is supposed to
act) can monitor and evaluate the actions of the agent (who does the action)
Transparency, in governance context, is honesty and openness. Transparency is about information. It

is about the ability of the receiver to have full access to the information he wants, not just the
information the sender is willing to provide.
Accountability exists in a relationship between two parties where one has expectations of the other,
and the other is obliged to provide information about how they have met these expectations or face
the consequences of failing to do so. There are two components of accountability: Answerability &
Enforcement.
Ways to ensure transparency and accountability
 The Right to Information Act, 2005: This establishes the legal right for a citizen to access the
information that they want. Right to Information law not only require governments to
provide information upon request, but also impose a duty on public bodies to actively
disclose, disseminate and publish, as widely as possible, the information of general public
interest even before it has been requested (as per section 4(1)(b) of the Act).
 Thus, RTI is a tool through which citizens can examine, audit, review and assess the
government works and decisions to ensure that these are consistent with the
principles of public interest, integrity and justice.
 Under the Right to Information Act, public servants can also be questioned on their
conduct Polity & Governance – II 134 and, thus, it makes them accountable.
 Right to information therefore promotes openness, transparency and accountability

in administration by making the government more open to public scrutiny.
 Citizen’s Charter Act: Under the Right of Citizens for Time Bound Delivery of Goods and
Services and Redressed of their Grievances Act, 2011 every public authority is required to
publish a Citizens Charter specifies the category of goods supplied and services rendered
by it, the time frame within which such goods shall be supplied or services be rendered; to
establish information and facilitation centre for efficient and effective delivery of services
and redressal of grievances.
 Social Audit: Social audits refer to a legally mandated process where potential and existing
beneficiaries evaluate the implementation of a programme by comparing official records
with ground realities. These audits were first made statutory in the 2005 Rural Employment
Act. The objectives of social audits include providing accurate identification of
requirements; prioritization of developmental activities as per requirements; proper
utilization of funds; the conformity of the developmental activity with the stated goals
and; quality of service.

 The involvement of people in developmental activities through social audit ensures

that money is spent where it is actually needed along with reduction of wastages
and corruption.
 It promotes integrity and a sense of community among people and leads to

improved standard of governance.
 Ombudsman: Also called the Lokpal and the Lokayukta, it is an anti-corruption authority
constituted at the national and state levels respectively. It investigates allegations of
corruption and mal-administration against public servants and is tasked with speedy
redressal of public grievances. The public can directly approach the Lokayukta with
complaints of corruption, nepotism or any other form of maladministration against any
government official.
 A Lokayukta inquiries into allegations of corruption, misuse of authority and wrong

doings of public functionaries, including the Chief Minister, Ministers and MLAs.
 e-Governance: The National e-Governance Plan aims at electronic delivery of all public
services to citizens through common service delivery outlets. It ensures greater efficiency,
transparency & reliability of such services at affordable costs to realize the basic needs of
the common man.
Conclusion
Governments today operate in a very complex environment with stakeholders consisting of different
interest groups, competing demands on limited resources and complex legal requirements,
therefore a more resilient accountability and transparency mechanism is required that encourages
responsible governance.


Case Studies on above issues.

You are the S.P of a district. The C.M of your state is against the VIP culture followed by
some politicians. He passes orders to do away with VIP culture. Consequently, the DGP
issues order to withdraw police security provided to over 100 people in the state.
According to the order, police security was a part of VIP culture which was causing drain
on resources as well as unnecessary hassle to common man.
There are 5 people in your district from whom security has to be withdrawn within 24 hours of the
order. You do a risk assessment of the 5 people. You come to conclusion that 4 out of 5 people do
not need security cover. However, there is serious threat to the life of the 5th person, Mr X, if his
security cover is withdrawn. Anti-social elements are posing a risk to safety and his life because of
past political rivalry. (250 words)
1. Who are the stake holders in the above case?
2. What are the dilemmas in front of you?
3. What will be your course of action?
4. How can we put an end to VIP culture in India?
Why the question:
The question is part of the static syllabus of General studies paper – 4 and part of ‘Case Study Fridays’
in Mission-2022 Secure.
Introduction:
In brief, mention the facts of the case and the major ethical issues involved along with the
stakeholders.
Body:
Write in detail about the course of action that you will take to address the problem.
Next, write about ways in which VIP culture can be ended.
Conclusion:
Stress on the importance of change to end VIP culture.
Introduction
VIP culture is that of assuming self-importance wherever one can, and treating oneself as ‘superior’
& ‘entitled to special treatment’ when they hold ‘important’ positions in society.
There is a sense of entitlement merely because they come from powerful sections of society. For
those who belong to the elite club it means no standing in queues, preferential treatment in availing
government services and even disregard of the law.
The history of VIP culture in our country goes back to the British era where the masters enjoyed
power and privileges over common citizens.

Body
Stakeholders
 Myself as SP,
 CM as head of the government
 All those whose security cover were withdrawn
 Mr X in particular.
Dilemmas faced
There are strict orders to comply and remove security of people and ban the VIP culture. It is true
that extra security cover is a drain on resources and man-power who can be used productively
elsewhere for the greater welfare of the society.
However, every life is important. Hence if there is perceived and confirmed threat to the life of Mr X,
I must bring it to the attention of the higher authority and try to ensure that Mr X’s safety is assured.
Sometime, for the greater good, injustice to one person also cannot be justified.
But proposing to continue additional security for one person by myself will also attract punitive
measures on me, as it may seem that I’m bypassing higher authority orders.
Course of action
Firstly, I will tip off Mr X about the threat he has from anti-social elements. So that he may beef up
the security through private firms and ensure his safety through other means.
Secondly, I would try to appraise my higher officials regarding the threat and seek guidance on the
next course of action. As officially, I’m bound to maintain law and order of the society I will carry an
investigation to see if there is a larger conspiracy involved. If the investigation yields result, I would
take action as per IPC sections. Post this I would conduct another risk assessment and based on that
I would recommend whether security to Mr X is needed.
How to put an end to VIP culture in India
 The Government banned the use of red and blue beacons equating them to the symbols of
VIP culture.
o The supreme court in Abhay Singh v. Union of India case termed red beacons a
“menace”.
o It said, red lights symbolise power and a stark differentiation between those who
are allowed to use it and those who are not.
o A large number of those using vehicles with red lights have no respect for the laws
of the country and they treat the ordinary citizens with contempt.
 Conscience should guide us. There cannot be rules and regulations to guide every action. In
the absence of any such laws, rules or regulations, conscience should guide a bureaucrat’s
decision both in public and private life.
 We must ban the habitual traffic diversions and road blocks when VIPs are on the move.
 Every urban commuter is familiar with the interminable wait for some minister or the other
to pass by or the security personnel who push traffic to the kerb to make way for a VIP.
 For a country that aspires to a seat at the global high table, India would do well to emulate
the relatively simple style of leaders in western democracies.
 Though the privileges are justifiably considered compensation for public servitude, a little
less overt display of privilege would allay those negative perceptions.
Conclusion
At the heart of VIP culture debate is ‘equality’. And by equality we mean not merely formal equality
(of equality before the law and the equal protection of the laws). There is a moral facet to it as well.
The argument, which has a moral force, is that in a democratic republic like ours, all citizens — rich
or poor — ought to be treated alike, at least in certain respects.
You are the Sarpanch of a Panchayat. There is a primary school run by the government
in your area. Midday meals are provided to children attending the school. The
headmaster has now appointed a new cook in the school to prepare the meals.
However, when it is found that cook is from Dalit community, almost half of the
children belonging to higher castes are not allowed to take meals by their parents.
Consequently the attendance in the schools falls sharply. This could result in the
possibility of discontinuation of midday meal scheme, thereafter of teaching staff and
subsequent closing down the school. (250 Words) (UPSC 2015)
(a) Discuss some feasible strategies to overcome the conflict and to create right ambiance.
(b) What should be the responsibilities of different social segments and agencies to create positive
social ambiance for accepting such changes?

Why the question:
Introduction:
Begin by giving context and enumerate the stakeholders.
Body:
First, write about few strategies you can take as the Sarpanch to overcome this issue and create
harmony.
Next, write about responsibilities of various stakeholders to create social solidarity.
Conclusion:
Introduction
The given case deals with the ethical issue of social (caste) discrimination on one side and issue of
children dropping out of the school on the other. The ethical dilemma for the Sarpanch is keeping
the Dalit cook employed and also encouraging parents to send their kids to school.
Body
Stakeholders of the case
 The Sarpanch
 Headmaster of the school and the cook in the school.
 The kids and their parents belonging to higher castes.
 Dalits in the society.
 Civil societies, NGOs working in social development.
 District administration, State and central governments.
Ethical issues involved in the case
 Caste-based Discrimination: The students are not attending the school after their parents
are against the cook from Dalit community. It is the issue of still prevalent caste based social
discrimination in the society.
o It is against humanity which focuses on the equality of all men.
 Constitutional Morality: Our constitution confers equal rights to all men and discriminating
on the grounds of caste is against the constitutional morality.
o According to the constitution untouchability is a crime and cannot be promoted in

any form.
Some possible strategies to overcome the conflict
 Persuading the Parents: I will hold a series of meetings with the school administration and
the parents of the kids from higher caste communities.
o The parents can be persuaded to send their kids to school for the sake of their kids’
studies and career.
 Cook can be rested for some days: I will also hold meetings with all the communities of the
village and try to build a society based on harmony, empathy and compassion.
o Meanwhile cook from the dalit community can be relieved from the job for a few
days in order to calm down the immediate situation distrust and students would
return to the school.
 Setting an Example: I will ask my family members and like-minded relatives to send their
kids to government school and eat the mid-day meal cooked by the dalit cook.
o This can set an example for other upper caste families to follow the suit.
Responsibilities of different social segments and agencies to create positive social ambience
 School and Education system: Our education system must focus more on propagating social
elements such as equality in society.
o If these values are inculcated in students of today, they can become better citizens
of tomorrow.
 Gram Sabha: Gram sabha has a responsibility to bring a social change in the village. Being a
Sarpanch, I will have this duty to inform all the members of the Gram Sabhas about the evils
of casteism and untouchability and have launched a campaign for the boycott of these evils.

 Reducing conflicts: Efforts are to be made to remove the conflicts between different social
groups that can give rise to fights. If this can be eliminated then it would be a big
achievement in bringing social equality.
 Local Administration and Civil Society: Local administration, police and civil societies have a
responsibility to spread the awareness about the rights of lower caste communities. They
should continuously work towards the integration of the society.
Conclusion
The measures taken for correcting the evil of social discrimination may not show immediate impacts
but the efforts should continue. Tactics of social influence and persuasion will surely help in reducing
caste barriers and achieving an equal society
You are the S.P of a district. There was a peaceful protest organised in your district
against unemployment and demand for jobs. But suddenly, the protest took a violent
turn and some miscreants indulged in arson, vandalising government property like
trains, buses and pelting stones on policemen in which 2 constables were severely
injured.
They very next day some of the miscreants were identified and the higher ups ordered you to raze
some ‘illegal’ constructions belonging to the accused. On reaching one such spot, you ascertained
that few of these said constructions were not illegal but were legitimate having all relevant
documents. On conveying the same to the higher ups, they instructed you carry on with the
demolition nevertheless.
(a) What are the options available in front of you? Evaluate their pros and cons
(b) Which course of action will you take? Justify.
(c) Is this case an example of the administration being the ‘judge, jury and executioner’? Debate

Why the question:
The question is part of the static syllabus of General studies paper – 4 and part of ‘Case Study Fridays’
in Mission-2023 Secure.
Introduction:
Begin by giving context and enumerate the stakeholders.
Body:
First, write about various options available to you and write pros and cons of each.
Next, in detail explain the course of action you will take and justify it ethically.
Next, discuss both sides regarding the nature of above case study and the administration being
‘judge, jury and executioner’
Conclusion:
Introduction
Unemployment is a rising problem in India where the demographic dividend is high while the youth
are not involved in productive work. Protests have been rising in this backdrop and violence is being
done. Both issues need to be addressed and violence cannot be an answer to anything.

Body
Stakeholders
 Myself as SP.
 Youth who are protesting.
 Government and officials at higher-up
 Accused and miscreants
Ethical issues involved
 Peaceful protest as a right
 Violence and impact on society
 Injustice to those who are injured
Options available
 Option 1: To raze the legal houses along with illegal ones of the accused
Pros: Government and higher-ups will not take retributive action against me. Some of
the illegal construction will be razed and it will serve as an example to others.
Cons: Legal households are affected and it is a gross injustice to people of such families.
Criminal justice system will be null and void while Rule of Law gets violated. The rights
of accused is also abrogated and sets a bad example to the other junior officers who will take
Such steps.
 Option 2: To not raze legitimate houses and just carry out demolition of illegal houses. And
punish the accused as per the law.
Pros: This way, there will be natural justice. People who have worked hard all their
lifeto make a home will be saved by government’s ruthless orders. Law of the land
will remain intact and take its course.
Cons: Action may be taken against me for not following higher-up orders and I may have to face
punishment postings or targeted inquiries.
Course of Action
Option 2 is a better choice, as there will be justice and no violation of rights of people. The district
will not become lawless and people will repose faith in the Police and the criminal justice system.
Along with these measures I would ensure that there will be no gatherings of more than 4 in
backdrop of violent protests and ensure peace in the district by strict patrolling. In future, these
protests will be monitored thoroughly with permission to protest in a particular place only.
Is this example of administration being judge jury and executioner?

Yes. There is a dangerous tendency to slip from retributive justice to an emphasis on revenge.
Vengeance is a matter of retaliation, of getting even with those who have hurt us
It can also serve to teach wrongdoers how it feels to be treated in certain ways. Like retribution,
revenge is a response to wrongs committed against innocent victims and reflects the proportionality
of the scales of justice.
It is not surprising that revenge seldom brings the relief that victims seek. The victim simply gets
caught up in feelings of hatred. Vengeful motives lead individuals to exact more than necessary,
causing even further harm and setting in motion a downward spiral of violence.
Police should not act as judge, jury and executioner. This can lead to grave implications of
fundamental rights abuses and abuse of state power.
Conclusion
The pathways of justice are not linear nor without obstacles. But we have, as a people, chosen the
route of democracy and the Constitution, so we really have no option but to school ourselves in
constitutional morality. For as Dr. B.R. Ambedkar cautioned in anticipation, constitutional morality
must replace public morality. It is not easy, because it is not a natural sentiment. But it is non-
negotiable.
You are Vice Principal of a degree college in one of the middle-class towns. The principal
has recently retired and management is looking for his replacement. There are also
feelers that the management may promote you as Principal. In the meantime, during
the annual examination, the flying squad which came from the university caught two
students red-handed involving in unfair means. A senior lecturer of the college was
personally helping these students in this act. This senior lecturer also happens to be
close to the management. One of the students was the son of a local politician who was
responsible for getting college affiliated to the present reputed university. The second
student was the son of a local businessman who has donated maximum funds for
running the college. You immediately informed the management regarding this
unfortunate incident. The management told you to resolve the issue with the flying
squad at any cost. They further said that such an incident will not only tarnish the image
of the college but also the politician and the businessman are very important
personalities for the functioning of the college. You were also given hint that your
further promotion to Principal depends on your capability in resolving this issue with
the flying squad. In the meantime, you were intimidated by your administrative officer
that certain members of the student union are protesting outside the college gate
against the senior lecturer and the students involved in this incident are demanding
strict action against defaulters.
a) Discuss the ethical issue involved in the case.
b) Critically examine the options available with you as Vice Principal. What option will you adopt
and why? (250 words) (UPSC 2021)

Introduction:
In brief, mention the facts of the case
Body:
Give the major ethical issues involved along with the stakeholders.
Write the various alternatives which you can take as the course of action. Evaluate their pros and
cons.
Select the best alternative which solves the issue and is ethically justified. Give solutions for any cons
that arise from the possible solution.
Conclusion:
Stress on the importance of fortitude in such cases.
Introduction
The glaring issues in the college where blatant misuse of power is being done sets a bad examples to
the students and to the society. This case highlights issue of injustice, immorality and abuse of
power by the wealthy. An education institution that is expected to set a good example is violating
the principles of ethics.
Body
Stakeholders
 Myself as an aspiring Principal
 Students who were caught and their future
 Other students protesting outside
 Management and senior lecture of degree-college
Ethical issues involved
 Integrity: The foremost ethical issue in this case is that of professional integrity. While the
senior lecturer has compromised his professional integrity, the situation is also a test of my
own integrity, as it creates a conflict between my values/duty and personal interest.
 Test of moral strength (morality): The present situation is also a test of my moral strength,
as one hand it is the lucrative opportunity to become the principal of the college and on the
other hand it is the duty to do the right thing.
 Impartiality: The present situation involves the issue of impartiality, as the

examination procedure has to be fair for all, any leniency for a few students will make
the process partial for other students.
 Professional ethics: The situation involves a test of my professional ethics. As it remains to

be seen, if I can carry out my duty without any considerations of fear or favour.
Options available
 Option 1: To listen to the advice of the school management and try to resolve the issue, at
any cost, without taking any actions against the students.
o Merits: This option will save the reputation of the college, in short term. The college
will continue to gain, political and financial patronage from the politician and the It
might make the possibility of my elevation as principal more certain.
o Demerits: It will compromise the sanctity of procedures. It will be impartial for the
other students. It will tarnish the credibility of the college. It will set a bad precedent
for the future. It will compromise my own professional ethics/morality and integrity.
It will aggravate the student protests.
 Option 2: To let the flying squad/concerned authorities take strict action against the senior
lecturer, and the two students, according to the procedure, in a fair way.
o Merits: It will enforce the sanctity of procedures. It will enhance the credibility of
the college. It will set a right precedent for the future. It will ensure check against
corruption/malpractices by teachers. It will calm the protests by other students.
o Demerits: It might jeopardise future of the two children It might have financial
implications for the college. It might lead to a bad publicity for the college. It
will/might tarnish the reputation of the families of the concerned students. My
chances of elevation will be diminished.
 Option 3: To convince the flying squad not to take any action, and thereafter, punishing the
boys and the lecturer after conducting an internal enquiry.
o Merits: It will save the reputation of the college in the short term and its patrons. It
will save the career of the two students and the lecturer. It will show my capability
for crisis management.
o Demerits: It will aggravate the protests. It might encourage more such incidents in
the future. It will compromise the sanctity of fair procedures.
I will adopt the second option. Even though, it might bring a bad name to the college and
may sabotage my promotion, it is the right course of action because:
 College is a place for students to learn righteous values. This option will teach the
students importance of ethics and morality.
 Also, involvement of a senior lecturer in the incident, highlights that the situation requires
strict action.
 As gaining promotion by unfair ways, will defy the sanctity of means, violating the principle
of purity of means and ends.
 This option will be fair towards all the students who were honestly writing their exams.
 This option will aid in pacifying the protests by the students.
 This option will uphold the credibility of the college as a fair and impartial institution.
Conclusion
Even if one is ambitious, only right means leads to right destinations and not through obliging to
unjust measures. Gandhiji said that if we sow the seeds of babool, one cannot expect or reap rose
flowers.




Secure June

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Secure June

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

INSIGHTSIAS

IA SIMPLIFYING IAS EXAM PREPARATION

INSTA SECURE SYNOPSIS

Telegram: https://t.me/insightsIAStips Page 2

Telegram: https://t.me/insightsIAStips Page 3

Telegram: https://t.me/insightsIAStips Page 4

Telegram: https://t.me/insightsIAStips Page 5

Telegram: https://t.me/insightsIAStips Page 6

Telegram: https://t.me/insightsIAStips Page 7

Heritage monument and their importance: Threats faced

Role of heritage impact assessment

 HIA is an assessment tool to identify and analyse human-induced impacts on cultural

Telegram: https://t.me/insightsIAStips Page 8

 Indirect impacts occur as a secondary consequence of construction or operation of the

Mughal architecture represents the pluralistic architectural traditions employed by

Features of Mughal architecture

 Typical features include huge, onion-shaped domes crowning commemorative monuments,

 Kalyanasundara Murti is a 9th century art where marriage is represented by 2 separate

Chola bronze sculptures:

Telegram: https://t.me/insightsIAStips Page 11

 Beautiful independent figurines of Parvati have also been modelled, standing in

What is the importance of studying pre-history? What information do we have on the

Telegram: https://t.me/insightsIAStips Page 12

About the pre-historic age and importance of studying it

o The history of human settlements in India goes back to prehistoric times.

Aspects of stone age in India

o Therefore, these people are called as hunter-gatherers.

Telegram: https://t.me/insightsIAStips Page 13

o Mesolithic remains are found in Langhanj in Gujarat, Adamgarh in Madhya Pradesh

o Stone tools were now polished.

Comparison between Harappan and Vedic period

Telegram: https://t.me/insightsIAStips Page 15

o The Harappans worshipped Pashupati, mother goddess, animals, snake and

 Agriculture and trade are still major elements in the economy.

Telegram: https://t.me/insightsIAStips Page 16

Telegram: https://t.me/insightsIAStips Page 17

Similarities between Buddhism and Jainism

 Ahimsa: Both religions espouse non-violence as the foundation of living.

 Equality: Both men and women were accepted in the sanghas.

Differences between Buddhism and Jainism

Telegram: https://t.me/insightsIAStips Page 18

Cultural impact of Iranian invasion

Cultural impact of Macedonian invasion

 The system of small independent states came to an end.

Telegram: https://t.me/insightsIAStips Page 20

Factors for rise of feudalism in India

Impact on Indian socio-political set-up

 Hereditary administrative positions: Weak enforcement of power led to the resumption of

Telegram: https://t.me/insightsIAStips Page 22

Telegram: https://t.me/insightsIAStips Page 23

 Ownership of at least one fourth veli of land.

 Above thirty years and below seventy years of age.

 Those who had failed to submit accounts as committee members.

 Those who had committed sins.

 Those who had stolen the property of others.

Telegram: https://t.me/insightsIAStips Page 24

 Some rebellions against the rulers can thus be easily traced.

 All the three powers became weak and then declined.

The dire situation after COVID-19

 The post-Covid world faces several dilemmas.

Role of Yoga in furthering humanity in the post-Covid world

Telegram: https://t.me/insightsIAStips Page 28

Extra information: History of Yoga:

Telegram: https://t.me/insightsIAStips Page 29